Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual: Flsmidth® 125M TXXT Thickener Traction Drive

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLSMIDTH® 125M TXXT THICKENER TRACTION
DRIVE
Serial No.: CSP0000750-01A thru C
For
Organic Growth Project 1
Atacama Desert, 170 km Southeast of Antofagasta, Chile
Minera Escondida Ltda.
Purchase Order No.: ICPO #127352 / 127496 / 127724
SELLER DOCUMENT REVIEW

Permission to proceed does not constitute acceptance or approval of design detail, calculations,
analysis, test methods, or materials developed or selected by SELLER, and does not relieve SELLER from full compliance with contractual obligation.
FLSmidth Salt Lake City, Inc. Order No.: CSP0000750-01
4
1
Document Status:

Work may proceed 4 Review not required. Work may

proceed
Revise & Resubmit. Work may proceed

2
subject to incorporation of changes
5 Cancelled / Superseded
3 Revise & Resubmit. Work may NOT proceed
Reviewer Name: Zenteno_Lucero_Sergio Date: 05/20/2014
Discipline: EM - Mechanical Document Number: 25713-220-V1A-MLGT-00116
1350-TM-014,1350-TM-015,1350-TM-016 003
Equipment No: Submittal Number:
Facility Code: 1350 1350-NTT-001

System Nbr:

Confidential and Proprietary Property of
FLSmidth Salt Lake City Inc.
For Confidential Use Only
Not For Circulation, Distribution Or Reproduction
Without Prior Permission In Writing
© FLSmidth A/S
All Rights Reserved
Rev. 2
01-CA3
7-2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CSP0000750-01
MCN2013-0210
1
GENERAL PAGE NO.
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 1
2. Pre-erection assistance ............................................................................. 2
3. Special instructions to equipment erectors............................................... 3
4. Receiving and inspection ......................................................................... 6
5. Storage and precautions ........................................................................... 7
6. Warnings................................................................................................... 13
7. Lifting precautions ................................................................................... 16
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the tank and install circular rail ................................................... 19
2. Install column, trough scraper and cage placement ................................. 21
3. Install and level the center bearing assembly........................................... 24
4. Install the slip ring assembly .................................................................... 27
5. Install the cage .......................................................................................... 28
6. Install the superstructure .......................................................................... 29
7. Install the feedwell ................................................................................... 30
8. Install mix trough, feed pipe and E-Duc nozzle ...................................... 33
9. Install the long arm and traction drive carriage assembly ....................... 34
10. Electrical wiring ....................................................................................... 36
11. Traction drive carriage assembly traction wheel alignment .................... 37
12. Adjust the cage guide blocks and guide ring and grout guide ring ......... 40
13. Check the arms for final level .................................................................. 42
14. Mechanical check ..................................................................................... 43
15. Grout the center column ........................................................................... 44
16. Install the launder ..................................................................................... 45
17. Final mechanical check by FLSmidth service personnel ........................ 46
For confidential use only, not for circulation, distribution or reproduction without prior
permission in writing by FLSmidth. All Rights Reserved.
Rev. 2
01-CA3
7-2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CSP0000750-01
MCN2013-0210
2
LUBRICATION PAGE NO.
1. Center bearing assembly lubrication ........................................................ 47
2. Lubrication equivalents list ...................................................................... 51
MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance and operation WARNING................................................. 54
2. Mechanical pre-start check....................................................................... 56
3. Maintenance Summary............................................................................. 57
4. Center bearing assembly, disassembly and reassembly .......................... 60
5. Drive carriage disassembly and reassembly ............................................ 64
6. Maintenance and start-up services ........................................................... 75
OPERATION
1. Operating instructions .............................................................................. 76
2. Process performance conditions ............................................................... 88
3. Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 89
4. Offices ...................................................................................................... 90
PARTS LIST
1. CSP0000750-01 FLSmidth Current Bill of Material
2. CSP0000750-01 FLS Recommended Spare Parts List
CERTIFIED DRAWINGS
CSP0000750-01 (rev 4) Top Level
643050 (rev 5) Foundation Layout
665215 (rev 3) General Erection Assembly
643049 (rev 9) General Arrangement
664671 (rev 3) Submerged Steel Assembly
665205 (rev 3) Superstructure Assembly
654092 (rev 1) Rail System Assembly
665211 (rev 1) Camber Diagram
665688 (rev 1) Feed Pipe Erection Assembly
668357 (rev 1) Feedwell and Feedwell Walkway Erection Assembly
664688 (rev 2) Lower Column Assembly
670585 (rev 1) Flocculant Piping Erection Assembly
664693 (rev 2) Launder Assembly
653029 (rev 1) Master Level Traction Drive
653021 (rev 1) Drive Complete Traction Drive Assembly
Rev. 2
01-CA3
7-2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CSP0000750-01
MCN2013-0210
3
653023 (rev 1) Tractor Assembly
653022 (rev 1) General Erection Drive Carriage Assembly
680254 (rev 4) Top Level Electrical Controls Assembly
650888 (rev 8) Control Panel, Tractor
650889 (rev 8) Wiring Diagram, Tractor
650890 (rev 8) Control Panel, Bridge
650891 (rev 8) Wiring Diagram, Bridge
650892 (rev 7) Control Panel, Motor Starter
650893 (rev 7) Wiring Diagram, Motor Starter
665203 (rev 3) Connection and Fastener List
114808 (rev 4) Torque Values
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
FINAL MECHANICAL CHECK LIST
Rev. 13

01-AA7
1-2007
INTRODUCTION

MCN2006-0523

1
FOREWORD
To ensure complete warranty coverage of the equipment thoroughly read and familiarize yourself
with the instructions in this manual.
It is FLSmidth’s sincere desire that this equipment will provide dependable, efficient and
economical operation throughout the entire period of service. To achieve this kind of
performance and ensure full warranty coverage, it is important to thoroughly read and understand
the contents of this manual before the unit is installed, adjusted, or operated.
The equipment, including the accessory equipment furnished but not built by FLSmidth, must be
stored, installed, operated and maintained according to these instructions to ensure the warranty
coverage.
The instructions in this manual are based on information available at the time of issue of this
manual; the right is reserved to make subsequent changes to the instructions without obligation to
replace existing copies.
Documents, drawings, technical manuals and all other information contained in this manual,
provided in conjunction with the purchase of FLSmidth products and services, are the property of
FLSmidth and are confidential and may not be made public or copied.
FLSmidth will not furnish editable electronic copies of any data and/or drawings at any time.
FLSmidth accepts no liability whatsoever for unauthorized changes and/or alterations to the data
provided.
English is the governing language. When manuals are provided in both English and any language
other than English, THE NON-ENGLISH TRANSLATION IS PROVIDED ONLY AS A
CONVENIENCE. FLSmidth shall not be liable for damages caused by errors in
translation. The English translation will govern in case of minor discrepancies. In the event of
major discrepancies, notify your FLSmidth representative immediately. Refer to the Offices page
in this manual for applicable address and telephone number.
Copyright  FLSmidth A/S.
Rev. C

02-AX6
12-97
PRE-ERECTION ASSISTANCE

MCN97-1098

2
Before You Erect It Your Way
Let Us Show You Our Way-
Read the Instructions
These instructions are based on years of field experience. The best procedures have been selected
from that experience and have been assembled in this manual in order to provide the best-
suggested methods of erection. Consider them. These instructions will save time and money
during the erection process.
But -
- If you believe you have a better way, call us first anyway.
- If you want assistance or a pre-erection conference before you start, call us.
- If problems should occur, call us at once.
Contact your FLSmidth representative. Refer to the “Office” pages (see Table of Contents) for
contact information.
Rev. 1
01-AA1
SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO
2-2004

EQUIPMENT ERECTORS
MCN2004-0085
3
FLSmidth does not anticipate problems with the erection of this equipment; however, due to the
nature of fabricated steel equipment, the erector may require a certain amount of field fit-up and
adapting work. This fit-up and adapting work is considered a normal part of erection, as well as
the use of such tools as come-a-longs, welding and cutting torches, and drift pins.
In case of problems, the following procedures will apply:
A. AISC “CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE”
The AISC “Code of Standard Practice,” latest edition, specifically states under
“Correction of Errors” that cutting, reaming, and the use of drift pins are a part of
standard erection practice:
“Normal erection operations include the correction of minor misfits by moderate
amounts of reaming, chipping, welding or cutting, and the drawing of elements into
line through the use of drift pins. Errors that cannot be corrected by the foregoing
means or that require major changes in member configuration are reported
immediately to the owner and fabricator by the erector. This is done in order to
enable whoever is responsible either to correct the error or to approve the most
efficient and economic method of correction to be used by others.”
B. FABRICATION OR ENGINEERING PROBLEMS
1. Should a problem develop because of fabrication or engineering errors,
FLSmidth will not accept back charges; unless, they are authorized in
advance and in writing by your FLSmidth Project Manager.
2. Before corrective work is started, the erector must obtain an FLSmidth
Field Work Order that must include a cost limitation.
3. Payment may be refused for corrective work that is done without the above
authorization.
4. Authorized charges will be paid only based on standard direct field labor
hours, material, and variable overhead. Other charges will not be allowed.
C. DRAWINGS AND ERECTION/INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Drawings and erection or installation instructions must be followed.
2. Minor Discrepancies
The drawings will govern in case of minor discrepancies.
3. Major Discrepancies
Rev. 1
01-AA1
2-2004

EQUIPMENT ERECTORS
MCN2004-0085
4
a. In the event of major discrepancies, notify your FLSmidth representative
immediately.
b. Refer to the “Offices” page for contact information (see Table of
Contents).
D. PROTECTIVE COATINGS
1. If a protective coating (paint, rubber, etc.) is to be applied to the mechanism, it
may need to be applied to some parts before they are installed.
2. Parts that must be coated before installation are those that would be inaccessible
after installation.
2 3 3
Figure 1
1- Field welds 2- No paint 3- 3" (76.2 mm)
3. Hold back paint 3" (76.2 mm) from all field welds. See Figure 1.
Rev. 1
01-AA1
2-2004

EQUIPMENT ERECTORS
MCN2004-0085
5
4. Study the Erection Drawings carefully and determine field welded areas in
question before painting.
WARNING:
The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to the
operator’s health.
Some fumes, such as those produced when working with Zinc, Cadmium,
and painted surfaces, can be toxic.
Rev. C

01-AA2
12-97
RECEIVING AND INSPECTION

MCN97-1098

6
Receiving and Inspection
Although all possible precautions are taken to protect the equipment against damage or
losses during shipment, before accepting the shipment check all items against the packing
list for shortages and inspect for evidence of physical damage. In either case,
immediately notify the carrier or note on the delivery ticket "Accepted subject to full
inspection after unpacking". Notify FLSmidth within 7 days (maximum) in case of
shortages or discrepancies in the amounts received according to the packing list. If not
notified, FLSmidth will not be responsible for replacing those items.
Keep a record of all claims and correspondence. Photographs are recommended.
Packing Boxes and Covers
Do not remove protective covers unless there are indications of damage. Boxes opened
for inspection and inventory should be carefully repacked to ensure protection of the
contents or else the parts should be packaged and stored in a safe place. Examine all
packing boxes, wrappings and covers for items attached to them, especially if they are to
be discarded. Refer to the Storage Instructions.
Shipping Braces and Bars
All braces, bars, etc., that are required for shipment, but are not a part of the mechanism,
should not be removed until necessary for installation or removal from the carrier.
Shipping braces are marked "SHIPPING BRACE ONLY" with white painted letters or
they are painted purple.
Storage
When the equipment is not to be installed immediately, refer to the storage instructions.
These are important to ensure warranty protection.
Erection Bolts
Check these against the packing lists to avoid shortages later in assembly.
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
7
A. CORROSION AND DAMAGE
Equipment that is stored or that is out of use more than thirty days must be protected
against corrosion and damage.
B. ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
For storage and maintenance of the equipment that is furnished but is not built by
FLSmidth, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions (see Table of Contents).
C. Drive Equipment
Failure to comply with these storage instructions will void the FLSmidth warranty.
1. Drive(s) Shipped from the Factory
a. A drive that is received in shipment can be stored as long as 2 months;
these 2 months include the time in transit. No special precautions are
required other than those listed below.
b. All drive unit machined surfaces are coated with LPS #3 (or an equivalent
product), which is a rust inhibitive agent good for approximately 2
months of storage.
c. No storage oil is required, and in fact, must not be used, since LPS #3
will dissolve in oil or most other petroleum based products.
d. Do not add oil, etc to the drive unit until it will be operated.
e. If the drive(s) storage time is to exceed 2 months, refer to “Long Term
Storage” on a following page.
f. If the drive(s) storage time is to exceed 24 months, contact FLSmidth for
additional recommendations.
2. Store Drive(s)
a. Store the drive(s) set up in normal operating position.
b. If possible, store the drive(s) indoors in a dry, well-ventilated place with a
relatively constant temperature.
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
8
c. Do not add oil. See section “C.1.Drive Shipped from Factory” in this
instruction.
d. Once each week, open drain plugs to remove accumulated water.
When the drive equipment is not installed, but must be stored outdoors:
a. Use wooden blocks that are arranged for even and firm support to elevate
the drive equipment above ground.
1) Shipping crates or skids will often do.
2) CHECK to make sure that the storage area is not located where
water can collect.
b. If the drive equipment’s protective covers have been removed or
damaged, cover the equipment with canvas or protective tarpaulin.
1) Allow adequate ventilation.
2) Do not use space heaters.
c. Whenever possible, store the drive equipment in a shaded area protected
against the sun and wind. This area should be located away from moving
equipment.
D. LONG TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
1. Non-Operation or Shutdown Period PRECAUTIONS
The following precautions cover non-operation or shutdown periods that exceed
two months. They apply to the FLSmidth drive(s) or accessory mechanical drive
equipment.
a. Keep records and schedules to ensure compliance with these instructions.
b. Failure to comply with these storage instructions will void the
FLSmidth warranty.
c. Because LPS #3 will dissolve in oil and is compatible with oil, it is not
necessary to remove the LPS #3 with solvents before adding oil.
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
9
2. Plan #1: Power Available
a. When power is available, lubricate and operate the equipment about five
minutes each day, or run the equipment through a complete cycle once
each week.
b. Remove accumulated water from the drive(s), each week, at the drain
plugs.
c. Refer to the accessory equipment manufacturer’s instructions for
additional information.
CAUTION:
In climates where snow and ice might accumulate in the tank, do not operate

the drive(s). Follow the instructions in the “D.3.Plan #2: No Power Available”
section of this instruction.
3. Plan #2: No Power Available
a. Fill all gear housings and gear cases with clean oil to the maximum level.
b. CHECK that all greased bearings are well lubricated.
c. Cover seals, screws, chains, and guides with heavy grease and cover
breather caps with tape.
d. Cover all gear housings and gear cases with tarpaulins, but make sure to
allow adequate ventilation.
e. Space heaters or dehumidifiers should operate continuously.
f. Once each week, open drain plugs to remove accumulated water and
return oil to maximum level.
g. Monthly, CHECK all greased items for adequate covering.
h. When the storage period extends into seasonable warm or cold weather,
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
10
1) Drain all gear housings and flush them with oil to remove residual
water after the storage period.
2) Do not flush them with solvents.
3) Refill them with oil up to their normal operating level.
CAUTION:
Before the drive equipment is put into operation after storage:
(1) Drain all oil and lubricate according to instructions.
(2) Re-lubricate all greased bearings and pump out old grease.
(3) CHECK motor windings.
(4) Refer to accessory equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
E. TWO YEAR STORAGE
To store the drives for up to 24 months, proceed as follows:
1. Fill the drive to operating level and run the drive for four hours then stop the
drive and disconnect electrical wiring.
2. Fill all gear housings and gear cases with clean oil to the maximum level (oil
appears at oil seals).
3. CHECK that all greased bearings are well lubricated.
4. Cover seals, screws, chains, and guides with heavy grease and cover breather
caps with tape.
5. Cover all gear housings and gear cases with tarpaulins, but make sure to allow
adequate ventilation.
6. Space heaters or dehumidifiers, if used, should operate continuously.
7. Once each week, open drain plugs to remove accumulated water and return oil to
maximum level.
8. Monthly, CHECK all greased items for adequate covering.
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
11
CAUTION: If the drive storage time exceeds 24 months, contact FLSmidth
for additional recommendations prior to placing the drive into
service.
9.
For storage of equipment (motors, reducers, etc.) supplied but not built by
FLSmidth, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
F. STORAGE PRECAUTIONS: STRUCTURAL
1. Inspect painted surfaces for deterioration of paint and apply finish coats as soon
as possible. When this is not possible, remove rust or corrosion and paint, as
necessary.
2. Shop Primed Steel Equipment
Shop Primer Paint Durability Precautions
a. Shop primer paints are intended to serve only as a bonding coat between
metal surfaces and protective finish or seal coats and to act as a minimal
protective finish.
b. FLSmidth will not be responsible for the condition of primed or finish
painted surfaces after the equipment leaves its shops.
c. Purchasers are invited to inspect the painting in shops for proper
preparation and application prior to shipment.
d. FLSmidth assumes no responsibility for field surface preparation or touch
up of shipping damage to paint.
e. Painting of fasteners and other touch ups as well will be by Purchaser’s
painting contractor after mechanism erection.
3. Identification tags that are removed for painting prior to assembly must be
reattached to the original components for correct identification.
Note: Assistance from FLSmidth will be charged at the normal service rate.
4. Plates, Signs, Nameplates, Etc.
a. Lubrication plates, WARNING and CAUTION signs, and the FLSmidth
nameplate must be masked off prior to field painting.
Rev. 2

02-AX1
4-2014
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS
CSP0000750-01 L
MCN2014-0133
12
b. Do not remove these signs/plates from the drive(s).
c. After field painting is completed, CHECK to make sure that the
Lubrication plates, WARNING and CAUTION signs, and the FLSmidth
nameplate are clearly visible and readable.
DRIVE UNIT VENT CAUTION:
Vent holes in vented pipe plugs (if used) and sight glass (oil gauge) vent

openings must be kept clear of dirt, paint, and other foreign material.
Rev. 1

02-AX4
4-2014
WARNINGS
CSP0000750-01 M
MCN2014-0133

13
Failure to heed these WARNINGS and CAUTIONS will void the drive warranty!
LUBRICATION CAUTION:
The drive unit is shipped from the factory without operating lubricant.
SANDBLASTING CAUTION:
The main drive unit and motor drive must be fully covered or sealed off to

protect against sand and dust when sandblasting in their vicinity.
All external openings, including vents, oil fill plugs, and the space between
the rotating main gear and stationary base on the main drive, should be taped
closed, covered with polyethylene film, or stuffed with oakum or rag waste.
After sandblasting and before start-up, drain a portion of oil from the drive
through nylon stocking to be sure grit has not penetrated the drive. Remove
all covers.
Sand, dust and other foreign material must not enter into the drive
mechanism.
WELDING WARNING:
The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to the
operator’s health.
Some fumes, such as those produced when working with Zinc, Cadmium, and
painted surfaces, can be toxic.
Use the piece being welded as the ground to prevent drive unit damage due to
electrical circuit contact.
DRIVE DIRECTION OF ROTATION:
The drive must rotate in the direction specified on the drawings, unless a

reverse rotation is specifically allowed.
Rev. 1

02-AX4
4-2014
WARNINGS
CSP0000750-01 M
MCN2014-0133

14
DRIVE CONTROL WARNING:
The primary drive control assembly (and secondary drive controls, if
furnished) must be properly installed and checked for operation, as specified in
the “General Drive Maintenance” instructions (see Table of Contents), before
the drive is operated.
Electrical wiring (not by FLSmidth) to the drive control and motor drive
assembly must be installed, as specified on the wiring diagram drawings.
The drive motor must be wired so that an automatic restarting of the motor
cannot occur after a drive control shutdown, following a torque overload.
All interconnecting wiring must meet Local and National Electrical Codes.
A. SAFETY SIGNS
1. Area Safety Signs
a. Safety signs should be installed to alert anyone entering dangerous areas.
b. Several safety signs may be required. These signs should be located so
that they can be seen from any direction the equipment might be
approached.
2. Suggested text for these signs in the appropriate language(s) would be:
WARNING:
EXPOSED MOVING PARTS – KEEP AWAY
Rev. 1

02-AX4
4-2014
WARNINGS
CSP0000750-01 M
MCN2014-0133

15
WARNING:
LOCK OUT POWER
BEFORE
PERFORMING MAINTENANCE
3. If personnel working with this equipment cannot readily read or understand
English, the WARNING signs on the equipment and the procedures that are set
forth in this manual must be translated and must be provided for their benefit in a
language that they can understand.
Note: Multilingual signs may be needed.
4. Sign Location
Location of signs will depend upon the specific design and placement of the
equipment.
a. Signs may be located above catwalks, affixed to walls adjacent to the
equipment, or on the equipment itself.
b. CHECK to make sure that the WARNING signs are visible to the
operator during operation and visible to persons who may be approaching
the area of the machine.
B. EQUIPMENT SAFETY SIGNS (by FLSmidth)
1. Safety and WARNING signs are shop mounted to the equipment.
2. These signs must be kept clean and must not be covered up.
3. If these signs become damaged or if they deteriorate, replace them.
Rev. C
LIFTING PRECAUTIONS
02-AX8
1-97
-STRUCTURAL-

MCN97-0136
AND SHIPPING BRACES
16
WARNING:
Do not pull, drag, push, or dump the structural components off the carrier.
– All structural components should be lifted and handled as covered in this instruction.
– Proper handling is necessary to protect special coatings or coverings and to ensure ease of
assembly during equipment installation.
CAUTION: Do not use chains for lifting components that are painted or
have special coatings or coverings.
–
FLSmidth will not accept charges for repair or replacement of equipment or materials
damaged due to improper handling.
A. LIFTING RECOMMENDATIONS AND CAUTIONS
Observe these PRECAUTIONS when lifting or handling structural components that are
furnished by FLSmidth:
WARNING: Stand clear as the equipment is lifted.
1.
CHECK to make sure that the equipment being lifted and the lifting equipment
cannot come into contact with overhead electrical cables, etc.
2. CHECK to make sure that the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate lifting
capacity.
Note: Weights for major components are listed in the parts list.
3. Experienced personnel should do all rigging and lifting.
4. Before removing the equipment from the carrier, CHECK to make sure that the
blocking, bracing, and banding that are securing it to the carrier have been
removed, and CHECK to make sure that the equipment is ready to be moved.
5. Use multiple-point lifting whenever possible.
Rev. C
LIFTING PRECAUTIONS
02-AX8
1-97
-STRUCTURAL-

MCN97-0136
AND SHIPPING BRACES
17
6. CHECK to make sure that the included angle between slings from a common
hook or eye does not exceed 60°.
7. When lifting structural members of this equipment, such as rake arms, cages,
superstructures, etc, avoid twisting or bending the members.
8. Use spreader beams, as necessary, to fully support the pieces as they are lifted.
9. CHECK to make sure that the shop provided camber is maintained when lifting
the rake arms.
10. CHECK to make sure that the shop provided camber is maintained when lifting
the superstructure.
11. Lift the equipment an inch or two (25 – 51 mm) off the carrier to make sure that it
is free to be moved and that it is balanced correctly. Adjust, as necessary.
12. Do not move the equipment suddenly or in jerks. Do not allow the equipment to
strike the ground, tank, or other equipment.
13. When lifting components, use rubber belting, burlap, or other padding between
the lifting cables and the equipment to prevent damage to the protective
coverings. See Figure 1.
Figure 1
1 – Included angle must be less than 60° (typical) 2 – Typical structural component
Rev. C
LIFTING PRECAUTIONS
02-AX8
1-97
-STRUCTURAL-

MCN97-0136
AND SHIPPING BRACES
18
B. SHIPPING BRACES
1. Shipping braces may be used to protect segmented superstructures, rake arms,
and cages from damage during shipping. This bracing must be removed.
Note: Shipping braces are marked “Shipping Brace Only” in white or purple
painted letters.
Note: Support braces, bars, banding, etc. should not be removed until necessary.
2. Burn the braces from the chords, angle braces, or structural members, as
required.
3. Do not attempt to scarf braces, as this may cause weakening of the structural
members.
Rev. 2

04-TX1
4-2014
TANK INSPECTION AND CIRCULAR RAIL
CSP0000750-01 K
MCN2014-0133
INSTALLATION
19
In order to accommodate the mechanism, the tank must conform to the drawings and
specifications. This is important so the mechanism can be installed with the least difficulty and
without modification.
Any corrective work must be completed by those responsible for the tank. FLSmidth will not
accept charges for equipment modifications if they are required because the tank fails to meet
specifications.
1. The tank wall must be specified diameter, uniformly round and plumb. The top edge of
the wall must be at the proper elevation and level all around.
2. Anchor bolts for the rail base plates must be in pairs radially in line and equally spaced
around the tank. The bolts must be proper size, projection and elevation.
3. The discharge trough must be truly concentric. The tank bottom must be radially uniform
with the specified slope.
4. The anchor bolts for the center column must be equally spaced around a centered bolt
circle. The bolts must be specified size, projection and elevation.
5. Any other embedded items or integral launders, overflow boxes, etc., and must be at
proper elevation and level.
6. Walkway supports outside the tank must be specified elevation, level in the same plane
and proper distance.
Circular Track Installation
1. The anchor bolts for the track base plates are furnished with two nuts each. Remove the
upper nuts.
o
Note: The track should be installed when the ambient temperature is between 85 F and
o
50 F.
2. Set the lower leveling nuts so they are all at the same and proper elevation. Check this
with a surveyor's level at intervals close enough that all nuts will be within ± 1/4 {6.35
mm} inch of specified elevation.
3. Place the rail base plates on the leveling nuts. Mount the upper nuts.
4. Assemble the circular track sections on top on the base plates with the splice bars, as
shown on the reference drawing. Do Not fasten the rails to the base plates. This allows
for contraction and expansion due to temperature changes.
Rev. 2

04-TX1
4-2014
TANK INSPECTION AND CIRCULAR RAIL
CSP0000750-01 K
MCN2014-0133
INSTALLATION
20
5. Check the track for elevation using the surveyor's level. It must not vary in elevation
more than ± 1/4 {6.35 mm} inch all around the tank. Adjust if necessary.
6. Check and adjust the base plates for a snug fit against the rail. Do Not change rail
elevation.
7. Grout the tank wall rim level with the base plates and the bottom of the rails. This is so
the rails will be supported by the grout between the plates. Use a non-shrinking type of
grout. Refer to the drawings.
Rev. 2
LOWER COLUMN
05-CT17
4-2014
INSTALLATION AND TROUGH SCRAPER AND
CSP0000750-01T
MCN2014-0133
CAGE PLACEMENT
21
LOWER COLUMN
1. Clean the top surface of the sole plate and bottom face of the lower column flange to
remove all concrete or other foreign material.
2. Set the column on the sole plate. Install, but do not secure, the anchor bolt nuts and
washers.
Figure 5
1 – Sole plate 3 – Guide ring 5 – Support angle (welded to lower column)
2 – Lower column 4 – Anchor nut with washer 6 – Guide ring adjusting bolts
3. CHECK the column for plumb, referring to Figure 6. Reasonable allowance is 1/8" [3.2
mm] in 10'-0 [3 m] overall, that is (2) minus (3).
Rev. 2
LOWER COLUMN
05-CT17
4-2014
CSP0000750-01T
MCN2014-0133
CAGE PLACEMENT
22
2 5
3
7
Figure 6
1 – Plumb 4 – Sole plate (ref.) 7 – Shim for column plumb
2 – Check for plumb 5 – Lower column
3 – Check for plumb 6 – Guide ring
4. Adjust for plumb by shimming between the lower column flange and the sole plate
(shims not by FLSmidth). Secure the anchor nuts.
3 3
Figure 7
1 – Sole plate 3 – Weld, as specified 5 – Shim to adjust for column plumb
2 – Column Assembly 4 – Guide ring (ref.)
Rev. 2
LOWER COLUMN
05-CT17
4-2014
CSP0000750-01T
MCN2014-0133
CAGE PLACEMENT
23
5. Seal weld the lower column flange to the sole plate, as specified on the General
Foundation Details drawing.
6. Place the guide ring over the lower column and set into position on the support angle
(support angle is shop welded to the lower column). Do not grout or weld the guide ring
at this time.
7. Temporarily remove the guide ring adjusting bolts.
Note: The guide ring adjusting bolts will be reinstalled later. Do not weld or grout the
guide ring at this time.
TROUGH SCRAPERS
1. Place the trough scrapers in the trough prior to setting the cage over the lower column.
Note: The trough scraper can be bolted and welded to the cage, as specified on the
Submerged Steel Erection drawing, prior to setting the cage in place over the
lower column.
CAGE
1. Set the cage over the lower column, supporting it in position with temporary shoring.
Rev. 2

4-2014
INSTALL AND LEVEL THE CENTER BEARING
CSP0000750-01 R
MCN2014-0133
ASSEMBLY
24
WARNING:
Use extreme care when lifting structural components, to
prevent injuries to yourself or others. Also, anyone entering

the area of this equipment must be wearing adequate safety
equipment such as safety glasses, safety shoes, hard hat, etc.
CAUTION:
All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel
who are fully trained in the proper procedures for rigging and

lifting of large structural components.
CAUTION: Make sure the rigging (including lifting eye bolts not furnished
by FlSmidth) and hoist equipment are of adequate capacity.
1.
Mount the removable spool to the center column, using the fasteners specified.
2. Remove the oil drain/gauge assembly (if shop installed) from the center bearing
assembly prior to installation of the center bearing assembly.
3. Install four (4) lifting eye bolts in the top flange of the bearing cover girder, as shown in
Figure 2. The eye bolts must be spaced at approximately 90˚ intervals. Use spreader
beams, as necessary, to provide a vertical lift at all lifting points.
4. Lift the center bearing assembly an inch or two off the carrier to be sure it is free to be
moved and balanced correctly. Keep it level at all times during the lifting. Adjust the
lifting cables, as necessary.
WARNING: STAND CLEAR AS THE EQUIPMENT IS LIFTED!
5.
Set the center bearing assembly in position on the center column, aligning the V-notch in
the bearing housing base flange with the superstructure centerline. Loosely install the
center bearing assembly-to-column fasteners. Do not remove the lifting cables at this
time.
Note: The opening in the center bearing assembly housing for the oil drain/gauge
assembly must be in alignment with the corresponding opening in the center
column.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 R
MCN2014-0133
ASSEMBLY
25
6. CHECK the center bearing assembly for level in two directions (at right angles to each
other) by checking with a machinist's level and straight edge placed on top of the bottom
flange of the bearing cover girder. Refer to Figure 3. The center bearing assembly must
be level within a maximum out-of-level tolerance of .005 inch [0.125 mm] in 12 inches
[300 mm] distance.
1 3
Figure 2
1 – Center bearing assembly with bearing

2 – Cage-bearing yoke mounting holes in
3 – Lifting eye bolts (not by FLSmidth)
cover girder
bearing cover girder
mounted to bearing cover girder
7. Adjust the center bearing assembly for level, lifting it using the lifting cables.
8. Shim for level between the center bearing assembly lower flange and the top of the center
column, using the shims specified on the Center Bearing General Erection drawing.
Refer to Figure 3.
9. Tighten the center bearing-to-column mounting bolts and nuts, turning them equally.
10. Recheck the level of the center bearing assembly. Adjust as necessary until the center
bearing assembly is within specified level. Tighten the center bearing assembly-to-center
column mounting bolts and nuts equally after each adjustment.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 R
MCN2014-0133
ASSEMBLY
26
11. Install the oil drain/gauge assembly, as shown on the Center Bearing Assembly – Shop
Assembly drawing. Use Teflon tape at all pipe connections.
2 5
Figure 3
1 – Center bearing assembly 3 – Center column (ref.) 5 – Check for level on top of bottom flange of
bearing cover girder
2 – Bearing cover girder 4 – Machinist’s level and straight edge 6 – Shim for level
12. Remove the lifting cables and lifting eye bolts (not by FLSmidth).
Rev. 2

4-2014
INSTALL THE SLIP RING ASSEMBLY
CSP0000750-01 S
MCN2014-0133

27
WARNING:

CAUTION:

CAUTION: Make sure the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate
capacity.
CAUTION: Lifting cables or straps must not contact the slip ring guards or
slip rings.
1.
Lift the slip ring assembly and place it in position on the removable spool, aligning the
V-notch in the slip ring column top flange with the centerline for the superstructure. The
V-notch will also be in line with the V-notch in the center bearing assembly bearing
housing bottom flange.
2.
Bolt the slip ring column to the removable spool, using the fasteners specified.
3. Install the slip ring supports, bolting them to the top of the bearing cover girder and to the
slip ring guards. Remove the shipping blocking from under the slip ring guards.
4. Referring to the Slip Ring Assembly drawing, loosen the lip seal worm drive and band
clamps (above and below the slip ring guards) and remove the rubber shipping pads
(painted purple). Retighten the worm drive and band clamps.
5. Check the slip ring guards for ½” clearance with the slip ring column all around. Adjust
the slip ring supports and/or guards, as required. Secure all fasteners.
Rev. 1

4-2014
CAGE INSTALLATION
CSP0000750-01 T
MCN2014-0133

28
1. Block the cage in approximate final position.
2. Mount the bearing pads to the cage-bearing yokes, using the shoulder screws specified.
3. Mount the cage bearing yokes to the cage and to the bearing cover girder, using the
fasteners specified on the Center Bearing Assembly – Shop Assembly drawing. Do not
torque tighten the fasteners at this time.
4. Check the cage for plumb and for concentricity with the center bearing assembly and
adjust, as necessary, using the adjusting bolts. Refer to the Center Bearing Assembly
General Erection drawing.
5. Referring to the Center Bearing Assembly General Erection and Center Bearing
Assembly – Shop Assembly drawings, shim between the cage-bearing yokes and bearing
pads, as necessary, to ensure equal loading to all eight (8) yokes. Secure the shims with
the shoulder screws, as specified on the drawings.
6. Adjust the cage-bearing yoke-to-bearing cover girder mounting nuts for 1/16” clearance
between the nut and the bearing cover girder. Use a second “lock nut” to secure the nuts
in position.
7. Torque tighten the cage-to-cage-bearing yoke fasteners.
8. Remove the cage blocking and shoring.
Rev. 2

4-2014
SUPERSTRUCTURE INSTALLATION
CSP0000750-01 U
MCN2014-0133

29
Superstructure
1. Referring to the part numbers on the Center Bearing Assembly General Erection
drawing, place the Nyloil slide pads in position on the top flange of the slip ring column.
Align the mounting holes in the slide pads with the mounting holes in the top flange of
the slip ring column
Note: The short slide pads are located on the superstructure centerline.
2. Place the stainless steel sliding pad in position on the slide pads. The polished side of the
sliding pad should be facing down, against the Nyloil slide pads. Align the mounting
holes in the sliding pad with the mounting holes in the slide pads and slip ring column
flange.
3. Install the superstructure. Refer to the Steel Erection. The superstructure center section
mounts on top of the sliding pad.
4. Install the superstructure-to-slip ring column mounting bolts and nuts, inserting the bolts
up through the connecting flanges, slide pads and sliding pads. Tighten the nuts hand
tight and then unscrew the nuts to allow an approximate 1/16” clearance between the nut
and the flange. The 1/16" (approximate) clearance between the flange and nuts allows for
contraction and expansion of the superstructure during temperature changes.
5. Secure the nuts in position, using a second (locking) nut, as specified on the Center
Bearing Assembly General Erection drawing.
6. Install the upper ladder, as shown on the Center Bearing Assembly General Erection
drawing, welding the brackets to the inside of the column, as specified.
WELDING WARNING:
Use the piece being welded as the ground to
prevent center bearing assembly damage due
to electrical circuit contact.
Rev. 2

06-CX8
4-2014
FEEDWELL INSTALLATION
CSP0000750-01U
MCN2014-0133
30
1 Referring to the part numbers on the Feedwell Assembly drawing, assemble the feedwell
support frame around the cage.
2. Mount the feedwell support frame to the drive house assembly frame members.
3. Assemble the feedwell around the cage, on shoring above the rake arms. Orient the
pieces as shown on the drawings for attachment to the superstructure and connection to
the E-Duc® feed system. When lifting the feedwell sections, care must be taken to
prevent changing the radius (curve) of the sections. Lift the feedwell sections as follows:
3
4
1/2- 1 / 4+
1 / 4+
Figure 21 Lifting Rigid Sections
1- Lifting Lug (if furnished) 3- Lifting Clamp (not by FLSmidth)
2- Lifting Cables or Chains 4- Feedwell Section
a. If separate lifting lugs are provided, mount them to the predrilled holes located
just below the rim angle at approximately ¼+ the total length of the feedwell
section from each end of the section. Refer to Figure 21. If lifting lugs are not
provided, attach the lifting cables or chains with lifting clamps to the feedwell
section at the rim angle at this same distance (¼+) from each end of the feedwell
section.
Rev. 2

06-CX8
4-2014
CSP0000750-01U
MCN2014-0133
31
CAUTION:
Do not attach the lifting cables or chains to the ends of the
feedwell section. This will cause bending of the rim angle and
feedwell plate, changing the radius and preventing proper fit-up
of the sections
b. When lifting large, less rigid, feedwell sections, a spreader beam (shown in
Figure 22) should be used to provide a vertical lift.
c. Remove the lifting lugs, if used, after the feedwell section is in place. The
mounting holes for the lifting lugs may be closed, if desired, using round headed
bolts and nuts (the bolt heads must be on the outside of the feedwell), or by plug
welding and grinding (not by FLSmidth) for a smooth surface (both sides).
Note: Leaving the holes open will not affect the process performance of this
equipment.
1 /2- 1 / 4 +
1 /4+
Figure 22 Lifting Less Rigid Sections
1- Spreader Beam 3- Lifting Lug (if furnished)
2- Lifting Cables or Chains 4- Feedwell Section
Rev. 2

06-CX8
4-2014
CSP0000750-01U
MCN2014-0133
32
4. Adjust for alignment of the sections and upper rim. Secure all bolts.
WIND CAUTION
If high winds are possible during the course of the erection, or after erection
before the tank is filled with water, the feedwell must be secured with shoring
or bracing to prevent damage.
5. Raise the feedwell evenly into position, using multi-point lifting, and mount it to the
feedwell support frame. Secure the bolts.
6. Check the feedwell for elevation and all around level. Adjust, if necessary, by shimming.
Rev. 2

MIX TROUGH, FEED PIPE AND E-DUC®
4-2014
CSP0000750-01 V
NOZZLE INSTALLATION
MCN2014-0133
33
1. Mount the mix trough support to the superstructure.
2. Mount the mix trough to the feedwell and mix trough support using the fasteners
specified and orienting as shown on the drawings.
3. Referring to the part numbers on the Feed Pipe Erection drawing, mount feed pipe
hangers on the superstructure.
4. Referring to the part numbers on the Feed Pipe erection drawing, assemble the feed pipe
sections, using the fasteners specified.
5. Install the feed pipe assembly with supports, as shown on the Feed Pipe Erection
drawings. Adjust, as necessary, to align the feed pipe with the mix trough.
6. Mount the E-Duc® nozzle to the feed pipe, using the fasteners specified. Mount the E-
Duc® nozzle to the mix trough, using the fasteners specified.
7. Check the E-Duc® nozzle, feed pipe and mix troughs for alignment. Make adjustments,
if necessary.
Note: Inaccurate installation of the nozzle and feed pipe will result in poor operation of
the E-Duc® mixing system.
8. Secure all fasteners.
Install the incoming feed pipe (not by FLSmidth), including all required supports and valves.
Use gaskets (not by FLSmidth) at the flanged connections, if necessary.
Rev. 2

4-2014
INSTALL THE LONG (DRIVE) ARM AND
CSP0000750-01 N
MCN2014-0133
TRACTION DRIVE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY
34
WARNING:

WARNING:
Experience with or understanding of this equipment is
essential for the safe disassembly and reassembly of the
equipment in the field. Therefore, in case of a question on
how to safely proceed, contact FLSmidth immediately.
CAUTION:
capacity.
1.
The long (drive) arm must be assembled on blocking for the specified camber. The long
arm should be approximately ½” (12 mm) away from the cage. This is necessary as when
the blocking is removed the camber will settle out causing the ends of the arm to expand
outward. If the arm is contacting the cage, this expansion will push the cage out of
plumb.
2. Set the traction drive carriage assembly on the track in position to connect it to the Long
(drive) arm, taking care in handling the drive carriage to prevent damage. Block and
brace it, as necessary, to support it in position.
WARNING: The traction drive carriage assembly is not balanced.
Precautions must be taken to ensure that the traction drive
carriage assembly does not tip, slide or fall off the track.
Rev. 2

4-2014
INSTALL THE LONG (DRIVE) ARM AND
CSP0000750-01 N
MCN2014-0133
35
3. Check overall camber of the long (drive) arm with the elevations and dimensions on the
Steel Erection drawings.
4. Check the long (drive) arm for alignment, using a surveyor's instrument. Adjust if
necessary.
5. Place well greased drift pins (not by FLSmidth) in the bottom arm-to-cage connections to
act as guides for hole alignment.
6. Remove the blocking except the blocking at the ends of the arm.
7. Check the arm for camber. At this point, the arm should have a slight camber at the
center of the arm.
8. If the camber is not correct, reblock the arm, and adjust, as necessary. Secure all bolts,
but do not final weld (if required). After all adjustments are completed, remove the
blocking and recheck camber.
9. Move the long arm into position and connect it to the cage, as required.
10. Bolt the long (drive) arm to the traction drive carriage assembly, as required.
11. Mount the traction drive platform to the traction drive carriage assembly, as shown on the
Drive Carriage General Erection drawing.
12. Install the traction drive platform grating, referring to the Drive Carriage Erection
drawing.
INSTALL THE INTERMEDIATE AND SHORT ARMS
Refer to the Erection drawings.
Rev. 2

4-2014
ELECTRICAL WIRING
CSP0000750-01 O
MCN2014-0133

36
The electrical power for the traction drive carriage assembly is transmitted through the center
column assembly and slip ring assembly and out the revolving long arm to the control panels on
the traction drive carriage assembly.
INSTALLATION:
All wiring and controls are to be connected according to the Wiring Diagram drawings. All
wiring is furnished and installed by others. Equipment furnished by FLSmidth will be listed on
the drawings.
Remove the slip ring access housing cover from the slip ring front guard for wiring the slip rings.
For the protection of the slip rings, the access housing cover with door gasket should be removed
only during the wiring connections to the slip rings and conductor bars. The door gasket must be
in place when reinstalling the access housing cover.
It is the responsibility of those doing the wiring to be sure that all wiring meets local electrical
codes.
TORQUE CONTROL
Each reducer assembly on the traction drive carriage assembly is designed to allow the reducer to
rotate slightly under loaded conditions of the drive unit. This change in alignment is sensed by
the load cell, and the signal is sent to the control panel where the signals from both load cells
(one for each motor/reducer assembly) are averaged by the torque monitoring modules and the
torque on the traction drive unit is displayed. At the set points, the alarm should sound and the
drive motors should stop.
SPEED CONTROL
The speed of the traction drive carriage assembly is monitored by the sensing unit at the drive
control wheel. If the speed of the traction drive carriage assembly should drop below the preset
value, indicating that the drive wheels are slipping, the control system will activate the sander
which will apply sand to the rail in front of the front drive wheel assembly to improve traction.
CAUTION:
The sander will continue to apply sand to the rail as long as the
traction drive carriage speed remains below the preset value,
eventually depleting the supply of sand. If the traction wheels

continue to slip, the traction drive carriage could slow down, or
even stop, without activating the torque overload alarm. This
condition could allow settling solids to bed in around the rake
arms and prevent safe restart of the mechanism. Refer to
"Operating Problems And Adjustments" in the Operating
Instructions.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 P
MCN2014-0133
TRACTION WHEEL ALIGNMENT
37
The traction wheels must be aligned radially with the center of the mechanism.
STRAIGHT EDGE
1. Place a two (2) meter straight edge (not by FLSmidth) across the inboard face of a
traction drive wheel. The straight edge must be centered on the vertical center line of the
axle of the traction wheel and must be kept level.
2. Measure from each end of the straight edge to the inside face of the rail. If the
measurements are the same, the traction drive wheel is in proper alignment. Conduct this
same procedure in at least three (3) different places around the tank perimeter.
3. If the measurements are not the same, mark the wheel bearings for the required
adjustment. Refer to “Adjustment” below.
Figure 4
1 – Traction wheel 4 – Distance from trailing end of straight edge to inside face of rail
2 – Rail 5 – Two (2) meter straight edge (not by FlSmidth). Center on vertical
center line of wheel axle
3 – Distance from leading end of straight edge to inside face of rail 6 – Radial line to center of traction wheel axle
LASER (optional procedure)
1. Using a laser sighting device (not by FLSmidth), project a beam from the center of the
upper center column assembly out to the traction drive carriage, directly on the vertical
center line of the axle of a traction wheel.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 P
MCN2014-0133
38
2. Suspend a plumb line in alignment with the laser beam on the back (shadowed) side of
the traction drive carriage. Check the axle for alignment with the laser beam and plumb
line and mark the wheel bearings for the adjustment required.
Note: Conduct this procedure on a windless day.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust the wheels, as required, with the bearing jack screws. (The traction drive carriage
frame bearing bolt holes are slotted.) Make sure all fasteners are tight after adjustment.
Recheck the alignment.
2. The axle must also be level. Shim under the bearing if necessary.
3. Check the other wheel for alignment, referring above.
4. Check the drive control wheel for alignment over the rail. Adjust the drive control frame,
if required. Check the sensor for specified clearance, referring to the Traction Drive
Carriage Assembly drawing, and adjust, if necessary.
5. Make a final check of wheel alignment in a minimum of ten (10) places around the rail
circumference, using the 2 meter straight edge as covered above. Refer to Figures 4 and
5. Distance (3) and distance (4) must be equal. Adjust the wheel(s), if necessary.
Figure 5
1 – Traction wheel 3 – Distance from leading end of straight edge to inside face of rail (this must equal distance
from trailing end of straight edge to inside face of rail)
2 – Rail 4 – Two (2) meter straight edge (not by FLSmidth). Centered on vertical center line of axle
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 P
MCN2014-0133
39
Note: The rail must be concentric with the center of the mechanism for this check to be
effective.
6. Start the traction drive and watch the wheels for smooth, steady operation at least one
revolution of the tank.
Rev. 1
ADJUST THE CAGE GUIDE
08-CT7
4-2014
BLOCKS AND GUIDE RING
CSP0000750-01 W
MCN2014-0133
AND GROUT GUIDE RING
40
After final leveling of the drive unit, the guide ring, located around the base of the column, must
be adjusted for concentricity with the cage when the cage rotates. The guide ring will then be
grouted in place.
1. Mount the guide blocks (6) with hold down plates loosely to the cage, as shown on the
Submerged Steel Erection Drawing.
1 0
1 1
8
9
7
2 5
Figure 24
1- Grout 7- Adjusting Capscrew
2- Column 8- Approx. 3/8" Clearance
3- Bracket 9- Nut
4- Weld 10- Guide Ring
5- Capscrews with Nuts and Washers 11- Guide Block Hold Down Plate
6- Guide Block
2. Reinstall the guide ring adjusting bolts. (Temporarily removed prior to placement of the
cage over the lower column).
Rev. 1
ADJUST THE CAGE GUIDE
08-CT7
4-2014
BLOCKS AND GUIDE RING
CSP0000750-01 W
MCN2014-0133
AND GROUT GUIDE RING
41
3. Rotate the cage and check the clearance (8) between the guide blocks (6) and guide ring
(10). Adjust the guide blocks and guide ring for concentricity, using the adjusting
capscrew (7), guide ring adjusting bolts and capscrews with nuts and washers (5). Ideally,
the guide blocks (6) and guide ring (10) should be adjusted for uniform clearance in a
complete rotation of the cage. But, since the guide ring may not be perfectly round, a
uniform clearance may not be possible. Therefore, the blocks should be adjusted as
uniformly as possible within 3/8" [9.525 mm] of the ring all around. Secure all guide ring
adjusting bolts and capscrews with nuts and washers (5). Note that the guide ring must be
concentric with the cage and not with the column.
CHECK the clearances (8) between the guide blocks and guide ring. Check at both the
lowest and highest lift positions of the cage, as covered above. Make sure the guide
blocks clear the guide ring adjusting bolts.
4. Tack weld the guide ring (10) to the column support bracket. When all adjustments are
satisfactory, weld 2" [50.8 mm] on 12" [304.8 mm] centers. Alternate the welding, to
avoid warpage.
5. Grout (1) inside the guide ring with a non-shrinking type grout (not by FLSmidth).
Rev. 2

4-2014
CHECK THE ARMS FOR FINAL LEVEL
CSP0000750-01 Q
MCN2014-0133

42
The purpose of this adjustment is to ensure that all arms have proper and equal clearance with the
tank bottom, so that each arm shares its load and the machine does not operate with unbalanced
loads.
1. The arm blades should sweep in the same plane at the same general clearance from the
tank bottom specified on the General Arrangement drawing (Note: 6” nominal clearance
required from blade tips to top of concrete). This is checked by means of reference
devices on the tank floor, such as piles of sand.
2. Start with the long drive arm. Note the clearances of the blades.
3. Rotate each intermediate and short arm to the position started with the drive arm. Check
each arm for the same clearance as the drive arm. Adjust, if necessary, to change the
elevation of the arms. When adjusting an arm, block under the opposite arm to ensure
stability. Use a jack to lift the arm to assist in this adjustment. Secure all connections.
Only if necessary should the long drive arm be adjusted for clearance. Then, if it must be
adjusted, block all arm sections for support.
4. Recheck arm level.
5. Weld all rake arm connections and splices, as required. Check all welds to be sure they
meet specifications.
WELDING WARNING:
Use the piece being welded as the ground to
prevent center bearing assembly damage due
to electrical circuit contact.
Rev. A

02-AA3
9-96
MECHANICAL CHECK

MCN96-1026

43
Mechanical Check
At this stage in the erection or installation of the equipment, before the center column is grouted,
a field mechanical check of the equipment by an FLSmidth representative may be advisable. It
could prevent expensive, difficult adjustments later.
Be aware, however, that this may be an additional paid service call, since a final mechanical
check is required to ensure warranty coverage.
Call Your Service Representative
Discuss this with your FLSmidth Service Representative, who is experienced with this particular
equipment and who will help you decide if a check should be made now, as well as later. Call
your FLSmidth representative referring to the Offices page at the back of this manual.
Arrangements for a service call must be made at least two weeks in advance.
Rev. 2

05-CA13
4-2014
GROUT THE CENTER COLUMN
CSP0000750-01 X
MCN2014-0133

44
1. Grout under the column (1) using a non-shrinking type grout (3). Pack the grout by
tamping. Grout is not by FLSmidth.
12
2
1 2
Figure 1
1- Column 2- Grout around column base 3- Grout
2. Grout around the column base, as specified on the drawings (Grout is not by FLSmidth).
Error! Bookmark
04-BC5
not defined.Rev. 2
INSTALLATION OF LAUNDERS,
CSP0000750-01 W
4-2014

45
MCN2014-0133
1. Locate and install the expansion anchor bolts, as specified on the Foundation Layout
drawing.
2. Install the weirs with washers in position on the anchor bolts. Center them in their
mounting holes and snug the nuts. Application of a mastic sealer during the installation is
recommended to prevent leakage between the weirs and the launder.
3 1
7
2
Figure 7
1 – Weir 4 – Expansion anchor bolt 7 – Mastic sealer (not by FLSmidth)
2 – Top of launder 5 – Washer
3 – Joint plate 6 – Approximate ¼: (max.) gap
3. If the weirs are installed during cold weather, a ¼” (maximum) gap should be left
between the weir plates to allow for thermal expansion of the weir material at higher
ambient temperatures. The joint plate will cover the gap and prevent leakage of water
between the plates.
4. The weirs must be level. Check them with a surveyor's level. Adjust for level as
necessary and secure all fasteners. Final level may also be made later with water in the
tank. In that case, set all weirs equal distance from the water level when there is no flow.
Error! Bookmark
04-BC5
not defined.Rev. 2
INSTALLATION OF LAUNDERS,
CSP0000750-01 W
4-2014

46
MCN2014-0133
Rev. A

02-AA7
3-99
MECHANICAL CHECK

MCN99-0209

47
Final Mechanical Check
At the completion of erection or installation of the equipment, a FLSmidth Service
Representative must complete a final field mechanical check of the equipment. Unless accepted
and signed-off by the Service Representative at the completion, the warranty will not be in effect.
Previous inspections will not count towards final acceptance unless a sign-off is obtained, in
writing, from the Service Representative. Also, depending on any previous inspections, this final
check may be an additional paid service call.
Arrangements for Service
The "Final Mechanical Check List", included at the back of this manual, must be completed for
each mechanism furnished before contacting your FLSmidth representative to arrange for the
final field mechanical check.
Arrangements for field mechanical check should be made at least two weeks in advance with
your FLSmidth representative. Refer to the Offices page to contact him.
Do Not Fill the Tank with Water
The mechanical check cannot be done if the tank is filled with water. If the check cannot be
performed, an additional paid service day will be charged.
Error!

11-BC8C
Bookmark not
CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY LUBRICATION
CSP0000750-01 B
defined.Rev. 2

48
4-2014
MCN2014-0133
Lubrication
The drive is a combination of FLSmidth manufactured drive components and accessory
equipment (gearmotors, motors or reducers) purchased from others. These instructions apply
only to the FLSmidth manufactured components. Note: drives are shipped without oil. Fill each
drive housing, initially, to the level indicated on the sight glass, referring to "Oil Fill
Procedure" below. Approximate oil quantities are listed on a following page.
A lubricant plate, shown in Figure 1, is mounted to each drive housing (main gear, worm gear,
secondary gear, as furnished) at the oil fill opening. The "Lubricant No." (No. 1 or No. 2)
indicated on this plate refers to the "Lubricant Number" shown on the lubrication plate (see
Figure 2), mounted on the chain or belt guard.
LUBRICANT No. 1 LUBRICANT No. 2
TO BE USED IN
TO BE USED IN
or
THIS HOUSING THIS HOUSING
SEE EIMCO LUBRICATION PLATE SEE EIMCO LUBRICATION PLATE
FOR LUB. SPEC. & INSTRUCTIONS

FOR LUB. SPEC. & INSTRUCTIONS
Figure 1
Using the "Lubricant Number" specified (1 or 2) determine the type of oil to be used in each
drive housing. This will vary based on the "Ambient Temperature Range" to be expected at the
equipment installation site. For temperatures outside of those ranges shown on the Lubrication
Plate, contact the FLSmidth Engineering Department. Refer to the Offices page at the end of this
manual.
LUBRICATION PLATE
LUBRICANT SELECTION AND INSTRUCTIONS
Ambient
Lubricants
Lubricant
Lubrication
Temperature
AGMA
Number
Method
Mineral Oil Synthetic Oil
Number
Range
-40 F TO 1 10 F Mobil SHC 636

8S
1 Oil Bath 0 F TO 50 F Mobilgear 629

4EP
50 F TO 1 10 F Mobilgear 634 7EP
2 Oil Bath -40 F TO 1 10 F Mobil SHC 636 8S
The above are Mobil Oil Corporation products. For product information, call 1 -800-662-4525
Error!

11-BC8C
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 B
defined.Rev. 2

49
4-2014
MCN2014-0133
Figure 2
Note: Although a Mobil product is specified, any equivalent product can be used. Refer to the
Lubricant Equivalents List in this manual (contact lubricant supplier if desired equivalent
is not listed). When Food Grade oil is required, contact FLSmidth for recommended
lubricant equivalents.
1. Check oil levels weekly.
A general oil level check can be made while the drive is operating, but to be more
accurate, stop the drive a few minutes to allow the oil to settle. Adding oil in excess of the
amount required will cause oil to over flow.
2. Drain condensate once a week.
This will keep the oil free of water and other contaminants. Refill to operating level.
3. Clean the sight glass vent opening.
If the vent opening in the top screw plug is clogged or dirty, a sight glass will not show
the correct oil level and it may not show an oil level at all. Check monthly.
4. Check the condition of the drive oil 500 hours after initial start-up, then every six months
thereafter. Take an oil sample (100 ml, or 4 oz.) from the drain piping of each housing
(worm gear, secondary gear and main gear), using a clean receptacle to collect each
sample (allow the oil to flow from the drain until water and other settled contaminants are
no longer present and the oil consistency is uniform). Refill the drive housings to
operating level.
Send the samples to a commercial lubricant laboratory for analysis. The samples of
Mobil oil must conform to the “Lubricant Used Oil Analysis Specifications” on a
following page.
5. Replace the oil, if required.
If the oil is not tested by qualified oil analysis, then oil change intervals are as follows:
Initial Replacement: All gear housings should be drained and refilled with fresh oil,
referring to "Oil Fill Procedure" below, after the first 500
operating hours.
Error!

11-BC8C
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 B
defined.Rev. 2

50
4-2014
MCN2014-0133
Regular Oil Replacement: Mineral oil should be replaced each year, unless ambient
temperatures dictate otherwise. Synthetic oil should be
replaced every two years.
Oil Fill Procedure: Stop the drive, then drain the housing and refill with fresh oil, as
specified below. At first, until the oil settles, a sight glass will not
show an accurate oil level, due to settling time, trapped air and
other factors. Allow the drive to sit at least 10-15 minutes after
filling to check the oil level, and then recheck the level while
operating [refer to Item 1 above]. Be aware that too much oil
added will overflow.
DRIVE UNIT VENT CAUTION:

Vent holes in vented pipe plugs (if
used) must be kept clear of dirt, paint
or other foreign material.
LUBRICANT USED OIL ANALYSIS SPECIFICATIONS
Mobil SHC636:
Appearance Bright and clear, not cloudy
Kinematic Viscosity at 40° C per ASTM D445 551-784cSt
Total Acid Number (TAN) < 2.0 increase from new
Oxidation by FTIR < 10
Karl Fischer H2O per ASTM D 1744 < 0.1
CU FT-IR < 30 ppm
FE FT-IR < 50 ppm
SN FT-IR < 30 ppm
SI FT-IR < 45 ppm
AL FT-IR < 30 ppm
Mobil Mobilgear 629:
CU FT-IR < 30 ppm
FE FT-IR < 50 ppm
SN FT-IR < 30 ppm
SI FT-IR < 70 ppm
AL FT-IR < 30 ppm
Mobil Mobilgear 634:
CU FT-IR < 30 ppm
FE FT-IR < 50 ppm
SN FT-IR < 30 ppm
SI FT-IR < 70 ppm
Error!

11-BC8C
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 B
defined.Rev. 2

51
4-2014
MCN2014-0133
LUBRICANT USED OIL ANALYSIS SPECIFICATIONS
AL FT-IR < 30 ppm
Possible sources of contamination:
Cu = Copper (bearing cages, bronze worm gears)
Fe = Iron (steel gears & other components, bearings, corrosion)
Sn = Tin (bronze worm gears, bearings)
Si = Silicon (bronze worm gears, casting sand)
Al = Aluminum (bronze worm gears)
Note: The above “lubricant used oil analysis specifications” are not an all inclusive list.
For additional information regarding used oil analysis, contact your local Mobil
distributor, or call Mobil Customer Service at 1-800-662-4525.
Mobil oil that does not meet the above “Lubricant Used Oil Analysis
Specifications” must be replaced.
Note: Although a Mobil product is specified, any equivalent product can be used.
Alternate oil manufacturers will have their own test qualifications and should be
consulted for requirements when testing those brands of oil.
6. Lubrication of other Equipment
Accessory equipment - For equipment (motors, pumps, etc.) supplied but not built by
FLSmidth, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION:
Accessory equipment must be properly lubricated, as specified
in the manufacturer's instructions, to maintain the equipment
warranty. If you have any questions regarding proper
lubrication of accessory equipment provided by FLSmidth
Minerals, contact your FLSmidth Minerals representative
referring to the Offices page at the back of this manual.
Drive chain (if used) - Lubricate monthly with SAE 30 weight oil (or, when required,
an equivalent Food Grade lubricant).
7. Sight Glass Replacement - If the oil level sight glass is replaced, it must be notched to
show the oil level, as shown on the Drive Assembly drawing. Do likewise for drives
shipped without the oil level notched.
Rev. 2

11-AA1
11-2002
LUBRICANT EQUIVALENTS LIST

MCN2002-0517

52
SYNTHETIC OILS 2 SYN - 5 SYN
MANUFACTURER AGMA EQUIVALENT NUMBER/VISCOSITY cSt AT 40 C
2 SYN/ISO 68 4 SYN/ISO 150 5 SYN/ISO 220
MOBIL *SHC 626 *SHC 629 *SHC 630
TRIBOL 800/150 800/220
* Synthesized hydrocarbon
SYNTHETIC OILS 6 SYN - 8 SYN
MANUFACTURER AGMA EQUIVALENT NUMBER/VISCOSITY CST AT 40 C
6 SYN/ISO 320 7 SYN/ISO 460 8 SYN/ISO 680
MOBIL *SHC 632 *SHC 634 *SHC 636
TRIBOL 800/320 800/460 800/680
* Synthesized hydrocarbon
Consult a qualified lubrication engineer or your FLSmidth representative before using a synthetic
bearing and gear oil that is not listed above as an equivalent. Physical characteristics of Mobil
SHC 600 series synthetic oils are listed below:
Mobil
Mobil
Mobil
Mobil
Mobil
Mobil
SHC 626
SHC 629
SHC 630
SHC 632
SHC 634
SHC 636
Product Number 60293-8 60294-6 60295-3 60298-7 60291-2 60299-5
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 150 220 320 460 680
Specific Gravity 0.858 0.866 0.866 0.867 0.867 0.867
Gravity, API 33.16 32.4 331.9 31.7 31.4 31.7
Pour Point, °C (°F) max, ASTM D 97 -54 (-65) -45 (-49) -45 (-49) -42 (-44) -42 (-44) -42 (-44)
Flash Point, °C (°F) min, ASTM D 92 245 (473) 245 (473) 250 (482) 250 (482) 250 (482) 250 (482)
Viscosity, ASTM D445

cSt at 40 ° C
69.9
142.8
217.7
325.8
436.4
663.8
cSt at 100 ° C
10.9
18.3
25.9
38.6
44.9
62.8
Viscosity Index, ASTM D 2270 147 144 152 169 159 165
Copper Corrosion 24 Hrs at

121 ° C, ASTM D130

1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
Rust Protection

ASTM D665A and 665B,

Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Distilled and Synthetic sea water
FZG Scuffing, Fail stage, DIN 51534 11 13 13+ 13+ 13+ 13+
Color, ASTM D1500, Max 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
TOST Life, Hrs., ASTM D943-2 10,000+ 10,000+ 10,000+ 10,000+ 10,000+ 10,000+
Rev. 2

11-AA1
11-2002

MCN2002-0517

53
PETROLEUM BASED OILS 2EP - 5EP
AGMA EQUIVALENT NUMBER/VISCOSITY cSt AT 40 C
o
MANUFACTURER
2EP/ISO 68 4EP/ISO 150 5EP/ISO 220
MOBIL Mobilgear 626 Mobilgear 629 Mobilgear 630
AMOCO Permagear EP #68 Permagear EP #150 Permagear EP #220
EXXON Spartan EP-68 Spartan EP 150 Spartan EP 220
GULF OIL EP Lubricant H.D. 68 EP Lubricant H.D. 150 EP Lubricant H.D. 220
TEXACO Meropa 68 Meropa 150 Meropa 220
PHILLIPS All Purpose Philgear (ISO

All Purpose Philgear (ISO
Grade 68)
Grade 150)
Grade 220)
SHELL Omala 68 Omala 150 Omala 220
STANDARD OF CALIFORNIA
Chevron Gear Compound
CHEVRON USA
NL68
NL150
NL220
SUN OIL Sunep 68 Sunep 150 Sunep 220
KEYSTONE Zeniplex - 2 Keygear 90 Keygear 110
LUBRICATION ENGINEERS Monolec 300 Almasol 604 Almasol 607
PETROLEUM BASED OILS 6EP - 8EP
AGMA EQUIVALENT NUMBER/VISCOSITY cSt AT 40 C
o
MANUFACTURER
6EP/ISO 320 7EP/ISO 460 8EP/ISO 680
MOBIL Mobilgear 632 Mobilgear 634 Mobilgear 636
AMOCO Pearmagear EP #320 Permagear EP #460 Permagear EP #680
EXXON Spartan EP 460 Spartan EP 680
GULF OIL EP Lubricant H.D. 320 EP Lubricant H.D. 460 EP Lubricant H.D. 680
TEXACO Meropa 320 Meropa 460 Meropa 680
PHILLIPS All Purpose Philgear (ISO


Grade 320)
Grade 460)
SHELL Omala 320 Omala 460 Omala 680
STANDARD OF CALIFORNIA
CHEVRON USA
NL320
NL460
NL680
SUN OIL Sunep 320 Sunep 460
KEYSTONE None Keygear 140 None
LUBRICATION ENGINEERS Almasol 605 Almasol 608 Almasol 609
Rev. 2

11-AA1
11-2002

MCN2002-0517

54
MANUFACTURER GREASE MANUFACTURER GREASE
** **
NLGI No. 2 NLGI No. 2
EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT
MOBIL Mobilith AW-2 SHELL Darina EP2
AMOCO Rykon #2 STANDARD OF

RPM Multimotive #2
CALIFORNIA
CHEVRON USA
EXXON Ronnex MP
GULF OIL High Temperature Grease SUN OIL Sunaplex 992 EP
TEXACO Multipak EP2 KEYSTONE 81 EP-2
PHILLIPS PET Philube 2 EP LUBRICATION ENGINEERS Alma-Gard 3752
CAUTION:
Do not mix lubricant types without first verifying product
compatibility. Consult a qualified lubrication engineer or your
FLSmidth representative. When changing to a product that is

not compatible with existing lubricant, the existing lubricant
(oil or grease) must be completely removed before the new
lubricant type is installed.
** NLGI #2 antiwear (EP) lithium complex (high temperature) grease.
Rev. 2
01-AA8
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
4-2014
CSP0000750-01 D
WARNINGS
MCN2014-0133
55
SAFETY STATEMENT
No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent
accidents. Safety features and devices are meant only to supplement proper, careful, and safe
practices on the part of the individual.
WARNING:
If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised
or ignored, severe personal injury or death may occur. Safety
practices accepted by the industry, as well as those dictated by

the responsible regulatory agencies must be followed.
PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS
WARNING:
Use extreme care when working around rotating or other
moving parts, to prevent injuries to yourself or others. Also,
anyone entering the area of this equipment must be wearing

adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses, safety
shoes, hard hat, etc. Loose fitting clothing, uncovered long
hair, or jewelry must not be worn when working around
rotating or moving equipment.
WARNING:
Keep foreign objects, hands, etc. away from moving parts
(chains, sprockets, belts, sheaves, etc.). Do not operate this
equipment if guards have been removed, or are damaged. All

guards and safety devices must be properly installed and
functional before operating this equipment.
WARNING:
Lock-out power from electrical equipment using a manual
breaker or disconnect switch before starting any work or
maintenance on the equipment. Lock and tag disconnect

switch so it cannot be closed.
Rev. 2
01-AA8
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
4-2014
CSP0000750-01 D
WARNINGS
MCN2014-0133
56
WARNING:
Experience with and understanding of this equipment is
essential for the safe disassembly and repair of the
equipment. Therefore, in case of a question on how to safely

proceed, contact FLSmidth immediately.
WARNING:
The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be
injurious to the operator's health. Some fumes, such as those
produced when working with Zinc; Cadmium and painted

surfaces can be toxic.
Before Operation, Maintenance or Repair of this Equipment:
Read and understand the instructions in this manual.
As with any other mechanical equipment, there are safety concerns associated with the operation
and maintenance of FLSmidth supplied equipment. It is absolutely essential, therefore, that
operators, maintenance personnel, and supervisors be instructed in safe working practices
Only personnel who have been trained in safety procedures for this equipment should be allowed
around or in the area of the FLSmidth equipment or its auxiliaries. Training can be done by your
own safety personnel or it can be conducted by an FLSmidth representative at your request.
Contact: FLSmidth, Midvale, Utah. Refer to the Offices page listed on the Table of Contents.
Rev. 2

12-TA1
4-2014
PRE-START-UP CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE
CSP0000750-01 E
MCN2014-0133

57
Check Points Before Start-Up
1. Remove any foreign matter from the tank or pipelines.
2. CHECK lubrication of the center mechanism drive tractor and the motor drives with the
instructions contained in this manual.
3. Operate the unit for at least 4 or 5 revolutions after machine has been leveled. Be sure the
drive tractor rotates the arms in a clockwise direction. Normal rotation is clockwise.
Observe the rotation and clearance of the arms. Check for contact with the tank bottom.
Observe from outside the tank for safety.
4. Do Not try to restart the unit when it has stopped due to extreme overload. Correct the
cause of the problem first.
5. Bypass the flow to the unit in case of power failure.
Upkeep and Maintenance
1. CHECK the tractor drive motors, pumps, bearings and electrical wiring yearly, referring
to the respective Manufacturer's Instructions.
2. As required:
a. Clean the tank and associated parts such as launders, etc.
b. Whenever the tank is drained, inspect all underwater parts for adjustment and
deterioration. Remove rust spots and paint.
3. Refer to the Lubrication Instructions for proper lubrication of the center assembly and
tractor drive.
Rev. 2

4-2014
MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
CSP0000750-01 F
MCN2014-0133

58
MAINTENANCE
FREQUENCY LUBRICANT (If applicable) COMMENTS/REFERENCES
OPERATION
CENTER BEARING

ASSEMBLY:

Check oil level in center bearing

Weekly
Refer to the lubrication plate
Add oil as necessary. Refer to
housing

mounted on the slip ring
the Lubrication instructions

assembly

Drain condensate Weekly Refer to the lubrication plate

Refill with oil as necessary.
mounted on the slip ring

Refer to the Lubrication
assembly
instructions
Make sure vent holes in vented

Monthly NA Vent holes in vented pipe plugs
pipe plugs and sight glass vent

and sight glass vent openings
openings are clear

must be kept clear of dirt, paint or
other foreign material.
Have samples of center bearing

After first 500 operating hours,
Refer to the lubrication plates on
Refer to the Center Bearing
assembly checked for condition

then every 6 months thereafter
the slip ring assembly
Assembly Lubrication
Instructions for “Used Oil
Cleanliness Specifications”
Change center bearing assembly

When indicated by a qualified oil
Refer to the lubrication plates on
Replace oil as necessary; it must
oil
analysis, or annually/bi-annually
the slip ring assembly
be kept clean. Refer to the Center
if oil analysis is not used

Bearing Assembly lubrication
Instructions
Inspect main bearing for wear.

Yearly NA Refer to the upper center column
Replace internal oil seals, if

Maintenance Instructions
necessary
SLIP RING ASSEMBLY:
Check collectors for contact with

slip rings and adjust, if necessary
Monthly NA Refer to the Slip Ring Assembly
drawing
THICKENER MECHANISM:

NA
Keep rotating platform &

Weekly
Clean up oil spill immediately
walkway clean of oil debris &
tools. Make sure all guards are in
place
Clean flocculant piping Monthly NA As necessary to remove
accumulations
Check for loose bolts & nuts &

Yearly NA
for broken welds
Check connections between the

Yearly NA
cage and center bearing assembly
cage-bearing yokes
Check traction drive carriage rail

Yearly NA Refer to the Erection and
for level and adjust, if necessary

Installation Instructions
Check traction drive carriage rail

Yearly NA Refer to the Erection and
for condition and repair as

necessary
Drain tank & remove algae, rust

Yearly NA Should be part of plant shutdown
or badly corroded steel members.
Paint as necessary
Rev. 2

4-2014
MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
CSP0000750-01 F
MCN2014-0133

59
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
Check guide blocks for condition

Yearly NA
and clearance with column guide
ring. Adjust or replace, as
necessary
Check rake blade tips for wear

Yearly NA
and replace, if necessary
Check connection between the

Yearly NA
long drive arm and traction drive
carriage assembly is secure
Check connections between the

Yearly NA
rake arms & cage are secure
TRACTION DRIVE

CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY:

Keep access platform clean of oil,

Weekly
NA
Clean up oil spills immediately
debris and tools. Make sure all
guards are in place
Check sander sand hopper for

Weekly, or as required based on
NA Refer to the manufacturer's
adequate supply of sand and

operator experience
instructions
refill, as necessary
Check sander for proper

Monthly NA Refer to the manufacturer's
operation
instructions
Lubricate sander drive chain Monthly SAE 30 weight oil Refer to the Traction Drive
Carriage Assembly Lubrication
Instructions
Check sander drive chain for

Monthly NA Refer to the manufacturer's
tension
instructions
Check for loose bolts & nuts &

Yearly NA Refer to the Erection drawings
for broken welds
Lubricate traction wheel bearings 1000 to 1500 operating hours Shell Darina EP2 grease Refer to the Traction Drive
Instructions
Purge old grease from traction

6 months Shell Darina EP2 grease Refer to the Traction Drive
wheel bearings
Instructions
Check traction wheel alignment Yearly NA Refer to the Erection and
Check traction wheels for wear Yearly NA Refer to the Maintenance
Instructions
TRACTION DRIVE

MOTORS:

Refer to the Manufacturer's

Lubricate and maintain motors

instructions
instructions
instructions
TRACTION DRIVE

REDUCERS:


Lubricate and maintain reducers

instructions
instructions
instructions
Rev. 2

4-2014
MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
CSP0000750-01 F
MCN2014-0133

60
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
SANDER:

Maintain sander
instructions
instructions
instructions
SANDER MOTOR:

Lubricate and maintain motor

Refer to the Manufacturers'
instructions
instructions
instructions
Rev. 2

4-2014
CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY
CSP0000750-01 H
MCN2014-0133
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
61
Reference Drawings: General Arrangement, Foundation Layout, Slip Ring Assembly, Center
Bearing Assembly General Erection, Center Bearing Assembly-Shop
Assembly and Bearing Removal Illustration drawings.
A. PREPARATION FOR CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:

CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel
capacity.
1. Disconnect all electrical power at its source. Flag or tag all breakers as a
precaution. Disconnect wiring and conduit, as required, from the slip ring
assembly to allow the superstructure to be lifted for bearing removal.
2. Disconnect the flocculant feed piping from the mix troughs, feedwell, etc.
3. Remove the E-duc feed pipes, pump duc/E-duc box with pumps, and mix trough.
Support the feedwell in position with shoring from the tank bottom and
disconnect it from the superstructure. Disconnect the feed supply piping from the
feed launder at the tank end of the superstructure.
4. Drain all oil from the center bearing assembly.
5. Remove the platform, handrails and floor plates from around the center bearing
assembly and slip ring assembly.
6. Block the rake arms and cage in position.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 H
MCN2014-0133
62
7. Disconnect the cage from the center bearing assembly cage-bearing yokes.
8. Disconnect the slip ring assembly lower flange from the removable column spool
(do not reuse High Strength Bolts and Nuts). Remove the superstructure
mounting bolts at the tank wall end of the superstructure.
9. Support the slip ring guards with conductor bars in position using temporary
blocking from the slip ring assembly lower flange. Remove the slip ring supports.
10. Raise the superstructure (with slip ring assembly) high enough to allow removal
of the removable spool and bearing. Refer to the Bearing Removal Illustration
drawing. Use shoring, as required, to support the superstructure and feed launder.
11. Match-mark the cage-bearing yokes to the bearing cover girder so that the yokes
can be reinstalled in their original positions. Unbolt and remove the cage-bearing
yokes from the bearing cover girder. Remove the bearing pads.
B. BEARING REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
The bearing housing will not be removed from the center column.
1. Remove the socket head capscrews with washers, and lift the bearing cover girder
from the bearing by raising it up toward the slip ring column.
2. Unbolt and remove the removable spool from the column and remove it from
between the lifted bearing cover girder and the center bearing housing.
3. Remove the bearing cover girder from between the slip ring assembly and center
bearing housing.
4. Remove the bearing-to-bearing housing socket head capscrews.
5. Remove the bearing from the bearing housing.
6. Remove the band and worm drive clamps and lip seals from the bearing housing.
C. INSPECTION
1. Clean the bearing and housing with solvent or kerosene and blow dry. Coat the
bearing, if it will be reused, with light oil.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 H
MCN2014-0133
63
2. Inspect the bearing by rotating the top bearing race by hand. Check for smooth,
noiseless operation, and for excessive race wear. Depending on the smoothness,
the bearing may, or may not, need to be replaced. If the bearing will not rotate
freely, or if it is rough in rotation, or wobbles excessively, it must be replaced.
(Bearing must be lubricated with light oil.)
D. INSTALLATION OF THE MAIN BEARING
1. Make sure all parts are clean, including the housing, before installing the bearing.
NOTES:
a. Prevent dirt or foreign matter from getting into the bearing assembly.
b. The bearing housing must be cleaned with a solvent and blown dry or
wiped clean. The bearing must be clean and covered with a light oil.
c. Seals should be replaced whenever the unit is disassembled.
d. Refer to the lifting “Warnings” and “Cautions” above.
2. Set the bearing in place in the bearing housing. Refer to the Center Bearing-Shop
Assembly drawing.
3. Install the socket head capscrews with washers hand tight.
4. Secure the socket head capscrews in two stages and in a cross-diameter sequence
to avoid bearing warpage. The final torque on all bearing mounting capscrews
must be 350 ft. lbs. (±5 ft. lbs.) lubricated. Rotate the bearing and check for
smooth, noiseless operation.
5. Install the bearing housing lip seals with band and worm drive clamps, as shown
on the Center Bearing-Shop Assembly drawing. The seals must be oriented, as
shown on the Assembly drawing.
6. Place the bearing cover girder in position. Then raise it up toward the slip ring
assembly to allow installation of the removable spool.
7. Reinstall the removable spool on the center column.
Note: Do not re-use High Strength Bolts.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 H
MCN2014-0133
64
8. Lower the bearing cover girder into position on the bearing, aligning the
capscrew mounting holes. Install the socket head capscrews with washers hand
tight.
9. Secure the socket head capscrews with washers in two stages and in a cross-
diameter sequence to avoid bearing warpage. The final torque on all bearing
cover girder-to-bearing capscrews must be 350 ft. lbs. (±5 ft. lbs.) lubricated.
Rotate the bearing cover girder and bearing and check for smooth, noiseless
operation.
10. Lubricate the center bearing assembly referring to the lubrication instructions.
11. Lower the superstructure with slip ring assembly into position and mount the slip
ring lower flange to the removable spool. Reinstall the superstructure mounting
bolts at the tank wall end of the superstructure.
12. Reinstall the slip ring supports. Adjust the conductor bars for contact with the slip
rings.
13. Reinstall the bearing pads on the cage-bearing yokes, using the shoulder screws
specified.
14. Referring to the Center Bearing-Shop Assembly drawing and cage installation
instructions, reinstall the cage-bearing yokes on the cage and bearing cover
girder, referring to the match-marking. Adjust the cage for plumb and for
concentricity with the center column. Secure all fasteners.
15. Reinstall the feedwell.
16. Connect the electrical wiring and check for proper rotation of the mechanism.
17. Reinstall the E-duc feed pipes, pump duc/E-duc box with pumps, and mix trough.
Reinstall the feed supply piping to the feed launder at the tank end of the
superstructure.
18. Reinstall the flocculant feed piping.
Rev. 2

4-2014
DRIVE CARRIAGE DISASSEMBLY AND
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
65
TRACTION DRIVE WHEEL SHAFT AND WHEEL REMOVAL
1. Lock out all electrical wiring to the traction drive carriage.
2. Disconnect electrical wiring to the traction drive motors.
WARNING:

3. Referring to the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing, remove the drive
rotation sensor and bracket (front traction wheel assembly only).
WARNING:

4. Remove the sander nozzle.
5. Mark the bearing locations of the main shaft bearings to ease wheel shaft
realignment during reinstallation (typical for both drive wheel assemblies).
6. Loosen the shrink disk connecting the reducer to the drive shaft.
CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel
capacity.
7. Connect lifting equipment to each motor/reducer assembly.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
66
CAUTION:
As individual components or assemblies are removed, they
must be handled properly to prevent damage to those
components or other equipment. As components are removed,

they must be placed on temporary shoring or blocking, as
required for temporary storage, until they are reinstalled.
8. Disconnect the torque arm-to-frame connection.
9. Using the lifting equipment, remove the motor, reducer and torque arm assembly.
Refer to the lifting cautions and warnings above.
10. Disconnect the grease lines from the bearings.
11. Loosen the rear side bearing positioning screws only. Leave the front bearing
positioning screws tight.
12. Referring to Figures 9 and 10, place the rail support saddles over the rails.
3
5
Figure 9
1 – Traction drive carriage assembly 3 – Hydraulic jack 5 – Rail
2 – Lifting pad 4 – Rail support saddle
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
67
13. Place (3) hydraulic jacks under the traction drive carriage assembly lifting pads
and on the support saddles, as shown in Figures 9 and 10.
1 2
5 4 3 4 3 4 2
Figure 10
1 – Traction drive carriage assembly 3 – Hydraulic jack 5 – Rail
2 – Lifting pad 4 – Rail support saddle
14. Using all three hydraulic jacks, lift the traction drive carriage assembly until both
traction drive wheels just clear the rail (the hydraulic jack has a 7” maximum lift),
then place support blocks under the wheel and shaft assemblies (or use a forklift).
15. Remove the bearing pillow block capscrews.
16. Using all three hydraulic jacks, lift the traction drive carriage assembly, as required
(minimum 5”), to allow clearance for shaft and drive wheel removal (typical for
removal of both wheel assemblies). Place additional shoring (not by FLSmidth)
under the drive carriage assembly, as required to support the drive carriage in this
raised position. Refer to the lifting warnings and cautions above.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
68
Note: When the traction drive carriage assembly is lifted, the outer end of the
drive arm will also lift.
17. Using a forklift (suggested), or other mechanical means, remove the shaft, wheel
and bearing assembly from the traction drive carriage assembly.
18. Move the wheel, shaft and bearing assembly to a shop area for disassembly.
5
4
Figure 11
1 – Taper lock bearings and seals 3 – Front and rear split collars 5 – Key setscrews
2 – Traction drive wheel 4 – Key 6 – Shaft
19. Remove the taper lock bearings and seals from the shaft.
20. Inspect the bearings and seals for wear or damage and replace, if necessary.
21. Remove the front and rear wheel split collars.
22. Loosen the key setscrews on the sides of the traction wheels, then remove the drive
wheels from the shafts.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
69
23. Inspect the shafts and wheels for damage or excessive wear and replace, if
necessary.
TRACTION DRIVE WHEEL SHAFT AND WHEEL INSTALLATION
Refer to the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing.
1. Install and center the wheel with key on the shaft. Tighten the key setscrews.
2. Install the split collars on each side of the wheel.
3. Place the bearings and seals on the shaft.
4. Move the wheel and shaft assembly back to the traction drive carriage assembly.
WARNING:

WARNING:

capacity.
CAUTION:
5. Place the wheel, shaft and bearing assembly in position under the traction drive
carriage assembly.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
70
6. Attach the bearings to the drive carriage assembly, referring to the bearing location
marks made prior to bearing removal, and loosely tighten the capscrews. Slide the
bearings to contact the front positioning screws.
7. Remove temporary shoring and, using the hydraulic jacks, lower the drive carriage
assembly until the wheels are sitting on the rail. Remove the rail support saddles
and hydraulic jacks.
8. Tighten the rear bearing positioning screws.
9. Install the reducer, motor and torque arm, referring to the Traction Drive Carriage
Assembly drawing and the motor and reducer manufacturer’s instructions.
10. Reconnect the torque arm to the frame.
11. Remove the lifting supports from the motor and reducer.
12. Tighten the shrink disk connecting the reducer to the drive shaft.
13. Install the sander nozzle.
14. Install the drive rotation sensor and bracket (front wheel assembly only), as shown
on the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing.
15. Connect the grease lines and lubricate the bearings, referring to the Lubrication
instructions.
16. Connect electrical wiring to the motors.
17. Check the traction wheels for alignment, referring to the Erection and Installation
instructions, then secure the bearing capscrews.
18. Check the drive rake arm for alignment and for specified clearance with the tank
bottom and adjust, if necessary. Refer to the Erection and Installation instructions.
DRIVE CONTROL WHEEL REMOVAL
Refer to the lifting warnings and cautions listed above.
1. Lock out all electrical power to the traction drive carriage drive motors.
2. Referring to the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing, remove the drive
rotation sensor and bracket.
3. Disconnect the grease lines from the bearings and frame pivot.
4. Using a forklift (suggested), or other mechanical means, support the drive control
wheel and frame assembly in position.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
71
5. Mark the frame pivot location on the traction drive carriage. Unbolt the frame
pivot from the traction drive carriage assembly and remove the drive control
frame, drive control wheel and frame pivot assembly from the traction drive
carriage assembly.
5 7
1 7
Figure 12
1 – Frame pivot 4 – Pivot pin setscrews 7 – Flanged bearing
2 – Drive control frame 5 – Pivot pin
3 – Drive control wheel 6 – Drive control axle
6. Move the drive control wheel and frame assembly to a shop area for disassembly.
7. Loosen the frame pivot pin setscrews and pull the pivot pin from the frame pivot.
Remove the frame pivot from the end of the drive control frame.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
72
8. Loosen the flanged bearing setscrews, unbolt the flanged bearings from the drive
control frame and remove the bearings from the ends of the drive control axle.
9. Remove the drive control axle with key from the drive control wheel, then remove
the wheel from the drive control frame.
10. Inspect the pivot pin, bearings, axle, wheel and drive control frame for wear or
damage, and replace, if necessary.
DRIVE CONTROL WHEEL INSTALLATION
Refer to the lifting warnings and cautions listed above.
1. Lock out all electrical power to the traction drive carriage drive motors.
2. Place the drive control wheel in position in the drive control frame.
3. Install the drive control axle with key in the drive control wheel.
4. Place the flanged bearings over the ends of the drive control axle and mount them
to the drive control frame, using the fasteners specified on the Traction Drive
Carriage Assembly drawing.
5. Center the drive control wheel with axle in the drive control frame, then secure the
bearing set screws.
6. Mount the frame pivot to the end of the drive control frame using the pivot pin.
Secure the pivot pin set screws.
7. Using the lifting equipment, place the drive control wheel and frame assembly in
position under the traction drive carriage assembly. Refer to the lifting warnings
and cautions above.
8. Mount the frame pivot to the traction drive carriage assembly, using the fasteners
specified on the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing.
9. Adjust the drive control wheel for alignment with the rail, using the slotted
mounting holes. Secure the fasteners.
10. Connect the grease lines to the bearings and frame pivot and lubricate the bearings,
referring to the Lubrication instructions.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
73
11. Install the drive rotation sensor and bracket, as shown on the Traction Drive
Carriage Assembly drawing.
12. Reconnect electrical wiring, as required.
SANDER DISASSEMBLY
Note: Refer to the lifting warnings and cautions listed above.
5 6
4 1
3 2
Figure 13
1 – Flanged ball bearing 4 – Filler plate 6 – Sand screw
2 – Felt ring 5 – Sand hopper 7 – Sand spreader (ref.)
3 – Felt retainer plate (slot in plate must be vertical) 8 – Capscrew with washer (typ.)
1. Lock out all electrical power to the sander motor and traction drive carriage drive
motors. Disconnect electrical wiring to the sander motor.
2. Remove the sand hopper cover. Remove the sand from the hopper.
3. Remove the chain guard cover.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
74
4. Reduce drive chain tension, as required to remove the drive chain, then remove the
chain connecting link and remove the chain from the sprockets.
5. Remove the sander drive motor and reducer, if necessary. Remove the drive sprocket
from the reducer shaft, if necessary.
6. Remove the driven sprocket and key from the end of the sand screw.
7. Remove the chain guard
8. Unbolt and remove the outboard flanged bearing, felt retainer plate, felt ring and filler
plate from the outboard end of the sand screw.
9. Unbolt and remove the inboard flanged bearing and filler plate.
10. Remove the sand screw from the sand hopper.
11. Inspect all sander components for wear or damage and replace, if necessary.
SANDER REASSEMBLY
Note: Refer to the lifting warnings and cautions listed above.
1. Place the sand screw in the sand hopper (note that the end with the key slot is the
outboard end).
2. Place the inboard filler plate and flanged bearing over the inboard end of the sand
screw and mount them to the sand hopper using the capscrews and washers specified
on the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing. Do not secure the bearing setscrew
at this time.
3. Place the outboard filler plate, felt ring, felt retainer plate (slot in plate must be on top
and vertical) and flanged bearing over the outboard end of the sand screw (in that
order) and mount them to the sand hopper using the capscrews and washers specified
on the Traction Drive Carriage Assembly drawing. Do not secure the bearing setscrew
at this time.
4. Adjust the sand screw for position in the sand hopper, then secure the bearing
setscrews.
5. Install the chain guard.
6. Mount the driven sprocket with key to the outboard end of the sand screw.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 G
MCN2014-0133
REASSEMBLY
75
7. Mount the sander drive motor and reducer in position on the sander, if removed.
8. Install the drive sprocket on the reducer shaft, if removed.
9. Install the drive chain and adjust for proper chain tension. Chains should be installed
with only a small amount of slack
CAUTION:
Proper chain tension is essential for maximum reducer, bearing
and chain life, as well as for smooth and quiet operation of the
drive. Chains that are too tight can damage the reducer or sand

screw bearings, or cause broken chains. Loose chains will
clatter and can come off the sprockets.
10. Lubricate the flanged bearings, chain, reducer and motor, referring to the Lubrication
instructions.
11. Install the chain guard cover and secure the fasteners.
12. Connect electrical wiring to the sander drive motor and check the sander for proper
rotation and smooth operation.
13. Fill the sand hopper with sand and install the sand hopper cover.
14. Reconnect electrical wiring to the traction drive carriage drive motors.
Rev. 2
01-AA3e
MAINTENANCE AND START-UP
11-2003

SERVICES, PARTS AND REPAIR ORDERS
MCN2003-0552
76
Maintenance and Start-Up Services
Experienced FLSmidth engineers and service personnel are available to assist in the start-up and
maintenance of the equipment. They offer the benefits of their technical know-how and firsthand
knowledge of the equipment, plus the backing of FLSmidth’s entire engineering and research
facilities.
They can instruct on proper operating and maintenance procedures advise on troubleshooting
and, if necessary, supervise the entire start-up, depending on requirements.
If such assistance is wanted, arrangements should be made at the earliest possible date, outlining
the services required, giving the approximate duration of such services. Charges for the services
will be arranged at that time.
Contact an FLSmidth representative, referring to the Offices page in this manual.
Parts and Repair Orders
To make sure the right replacement parts are received and to avoid undue delay, it is important to
give the following information with each order:
1. Size and Type of Unit: These are found on the cover page of this manual and on the Parts
List pages.
2. Serial Number: This is found on the unit nameplate, on the Top Level drawing, and on
the Parts List. In case the S/N is omitted on the Parts List, use the Order number since it
and the S/N are similar.
3. Part Number and Descriptions: Listed on Parts List.
4. Special Field Modifications: This is important if the original material or design has been
changed. Include drawings and/or other descriptive information.
Please contact FLSmidth, referring to the Offices page in this manual, for parts, repair orders,
and/or equipment service.
Rev. 2

4-2014
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

77
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
As feed slurry enters the thickener feedwell the solid particles begin to settle due to gravity. The
rate at which the particles settle is dependent on the weight and size of the particle. The smaller
the particle, the slower it will settle. Since the feed slurry normally contains a wide range of
particle sizes (usually from 0.25 of a millimeter to as small as a couple of micrometers), there is a
large difference in the rate at which the particles will settle.
The “upflow rate” is the rate at which the thickener would fill when initially filling at design feed
rates. If the settling rate of an individual particle is less than this upflow rate, the particle will rise
and report to the overflow, producing dirty effluent.
To increase the settling rate of the particles, a chemical referred to as flocculant, is added to the
thickener feed slurry. This chemical changes the surface tension of the individual particles and
causes them to agglomerate producing much larger particles made up of the coarse and fine
materials. These newly formed, larger particles, will settle more quickly and produce a clear
effluent at higher production rates.
In addition to increasing the settling rates, the addition of flocculant helps to increase the
underflow solids concentration that can be produced. By agglomerating the fine and coarse
particles, a more homogeneous bed of solids is created. This homogeneous bed will compact
with time from pressure exerted on it from the weight of solids above. These factors allow the
free water which is released by the flocculation, to rise through the bed and further compact the
solids.
Flocculation is most efficient when added to dilute slurries. The reason that the flocculation is
more efficient at lower concentrations is because there is better contact of the flocculant with the
individual solids particles.
The concentrated feed slurry entering the thickener must be diluted prior to flocculation. Diluting
the slurry with water from outside sources, or even with thickener effluent, would create an extra
load on the thickener and thus reduce the capacity. Dilution water localized and internal to the
thickener, is used so that this additional hydraulic load is not put to the thickener. The internal
dilution is achieved with the E-DUC® self diluting feed system.
The traction thickener has rake arms with blades attached that rotate in a clockwise direction. The
rakes travel at a speed of 0.04 rpm. In total there are four rake arms. The drive rake arm extends
the full radius of the thickener. The intermediate rake arm is approximately 36 m long and finally
there are two small rake arms that are approximately 18 m long. The blades on each arm are
spaced so the bottom of the thickener will be plowed four times per revolution. The rakes have a
couple of functions. First, they plow the thickened slurry to the center of the thickener so that it
can be withdrawn through the underflow troughs. The rakes are not, however, designed to
transfer 100 % of the underflow slurry. The rakes only transfer about 20 to 50 % of the slurry
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

78
with the remainder transferred by the natural flowability of the slurry. The rake blades input
enough energy to the thickened material to allow it to flow. The second function of the rakes is to
move the underflow slurry and while doing this release any water that is trapped in the thickened
bed. This raking action helps to increase the underflow concentration that can be achieved in the
thickener.
The thickener cage and rake arms are supported by the center bearing assembly bearing which is
mounted on the center column. The drive rake arm extends the complete radius of the tank and is
connected to the traction drive carriage assembly. The traction drive carriage assembly is
mounted on a rail which encircles the tank. As the traction drive carriage assembly travels around
the tank, it turns the rake arms and cage to address the sludge, thereby directing the heavier solids
toward the center of the tank.
The traction drive carriage assembly is electrically powered by two motor/reducer assemblies
which independently turn the front and rear wheels. A drive control wheel monitors traction drive
carriage assembly speed and automatically actuates a sanding device if a decrease in speed
caused by drive wheel slippage or excessive loading on the rake arms occurs. If loading becomes
too great, an alarm sounds and at a preset maximum torque the drive motors automatically shut
off, causing the traction drive carriage assembly to stop.
CAUTION:
The sand spreader will continue to apply sand to the rail as long
as the traction drive carriage speed remains below the preset
value, eventually depleting the supply of sand. If the traction

wheels continue to slip, the traction drive carriage could slow
down, or even stop, without activating the torque overload
alarm. This condition could allow settling solids to bed in
around the rake arms and prevent safe restart of the mechanism.
Refer to "Operating Problems And Adjustments" on a
following page.
Power to the traction drive carriage assembly is provided by wiring running the length of the
superstructure to the slip ring assembly, and then along the drive rake arm to the traction drive
carriage assembly.
CAUTION:
If the mechanism becomes overloaded and the torque control
stops the traction drives, do not, under any circumstances,
attempt to start the thickener by pushing, towing or jogging the

traction drive carriage assembly. This could cause serious
damage and will void the warranty. Locate the cause of the
problem, solve the problem, and start the unit electrically.
OPERATING PHILOSOPHY
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

79
There are a number of factors that should be considered in developing an operating philosophy
for the thickener. The thickener should be operated to achieve the following:
1. Stable operation.
2. Produce as thick as possible underflow concentration while maintaining stable operation.
3. Minimize the use of flocculant while still maintaining a thick underflow and a clear
effluent.
Stable Operation
Operating under stable conditions refers to a mode of operation in which the thickener is in a safe
region relative to torque, and the input of solids is equal to the output of solids (equilibrium). The
key to operating in this mode is proper flocculation and consistent underflow removal. Under
proper flocculation, coarse particles are bound together with the fines and segregation is
minimized. If flocculation is not consistent or there is insufficient flocculant, the coarse particles
will separate from the fines and settle out quickly in the inner perimeter of the thickener. The
fines will settle more slowly and migrate to the mid and outer regions of the thickener. This can
create several problems in the thickener. Firstly there could be an accumulation of coarse
material that does not flow freely to the discharge trench. Because of the weight and high
compaction of these coarse particles, a very high torque is required to move the material.
Eventually this mass of material can form into the shape of a doughnut or an island. A doughnut
is a circular mass of solids that does not flow to the thickener discharge. This ring forms a barrier
for solids to move from the outer perimeter of the thickener to the discharge. This effectively
reduces the area available for thickening which results in a more dilute underflow. An island
formation refers to a large non-flowing mass that is pushed along in front of the rake. The weight
of this mass causes the drive torque to increase significantly.
Over flocculation can also cause operating problems. With a very excessive flocculant dosage,
the underflow that results can become very gelatinous and viscous. This viscous slurry does not
have good flow characteristics which again can result in the formation of islands or doughnuts.
This viscous material may also be very difficult to remove from the discharge trench. This can
result in a “rat-holing” effect where thin dilute slurry will be preferentially removed.
Produce Thick Underflow While Maintaining Stable Operation
In addition to flocculant dosage there are other operating techniques that can be used to
maximize the underflow density. By consistently pulling underflow from the thickener at a rate
equal to the input, a stable operation will result. Stability is a key to producing the maximum
possible underflow concentration. By sporadically removing underflow, there will be periods
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

80
where underflow is less concentrated than it could be if it were drawn off consistently from the
thickener.
Another method to obtain the maximum underflow density is to monitor and control the
inventory of solids in the thickener. The degree of thickening that can be achieved is dependent,
in part, on the retention time in the thickener. Generally, the longer that the solids are in the
thickener, the thicker the underflow will be. The inventory of solids in the thickener should be
gradually increased until the underflow is at a high consistency that still can be removed from the
thickener. The torque reading of the thickener should also be monitored during this period to
ensure that it is not getting too high.
Minimize Flocculant Dosage
Good flocculation is also important in producing the maximum possible underflow
concentration. Increasing the flocculant dosage increases the settling rate and effectively reduces
the required unit area to generate a certain consistency underflow. However, there is a monetary
cost associated with using more flocculant, plus it is possible to over flocculate, adversely
affecting the operation of the thickener. There must be a balance between the flocculant used and
the underflow concentration that can be achieved.
Flocculant dosage can be reduced provided the following conditions are maintained:
1. A sample collected from the feed well exhibits a distinct, strong, and stable flocculant
structure. If a sample does not exhibit these properties there could be particle segregation
and the associated problems as discussed previously.
2. The slimes level in the thickener is well below the overflow. The slimes level should be
measured and monitored at the perimeter of the thickener. A cloudy interface that has
risen quickly, or that is quite deep, may be an indication that there is insufficient
flocculant.
3. The underflow density has been maintained at a satisfactory level over a long period of
time. If the desired underflow concentration can not be achieved, it is possible that the
flocculant dosage is insufficient. It should be noted that with several hours of residence
time in the thickener, it would take this period of time to see the consequences of poor
flocculation or any adjustments in flocculant dosage.
OPERATION OF E-DUC FEED SYSTEM
The purpose of the E-DUC feed system is to dilute the feed slurry to a concentration that will
most efficiently flocculate. The E-DUC feed system also provides mixing of the flocculant with
the feed slurry. There are several flocculant injection points in the E-DUC feed system. The first
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

81
injection point is at the mix trough bell. This is the point where the clear effluent is drawn into
the feed slurry for dilution. There are injection points in the mix troughs. Flocculant can also be
added in the feedwell. There are valves to control the amount of flow to each point. Since all feed
slurrys flocculate differently, the amount of polymer injected at each injection point varies from
installation to installation. The position of the valves must be adjusted until the best flocculation
can be achieved. Observing the feed slurry in the feed well can identify the best flocculation. A
well flocculated feed has distinct floccules. Also the better the feed slurry is flocculated the more
quickly it will settle. Therefore, clear liquid appearing at the surface of the feed well indicates
that much of the feed slurry has settled and indicates good flocculation.
Alarms And Settings
The alarms that occur with the thickener relate to the torque reading and the drive tractor
movement. Following is a description of these alarms.
High Torque Alarm - When the thickener torque, as measured by the load cells, reaches the
high torque alarm setpoint, the high torque light will illuminate and the alarm will sound. At this
time the operator must begin actions that will begin to lower thickener torque. The actions
required will depend on conditions in the thickener. The torque requirements are proportional to
the yield stress of the underflow slurry and the yield stress increases as the underflow
concentration increases. Therefore to lower the torque loading it may require that the underflow
density be reduced. To do this the underflow must be removed form the thickener at an increased
rate. Over a period of time, increasing the discharge rate of the underflow will lower the
underflow concentration since underflow concentration achieved is a function of the retention
time in the thickener and also the dependent on the depth of the bed in the thickener.
Another source of high torque may be the formation of islands or donuts. Islands are a large mass
of underflow that has compacted or solidified to the extent that it no longer flows. This may be
caused by over flocculation. The process by which the island is formed is discussed in
equipment/system description section of this manual. In the case of an island or donut, the
presence of high torque may not correspond to a high underflow density. This is because the high
torque is a result of the rakes having to push a large mass of solids directly in front of them even
though the surrounding slurry may be quit dilute.
In the case of an Island or donut formation, at least two actions are required to reduce the
problem and help lower the torque. First the cause of the formation must be identified. The
problem could be a result of over or under flocculation. Samples should be taken from the feed
well to verify that the feed slurry is properly flocculated. Refer to the section on flocculation to
determine if the feed is properly flocculated. The second action required is to again increase the
underflow discharge from the thickener. Increasing the underflow rate may help to scour away
the build-ups that have formed in and around the rake arms.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

82
High Torque Alarm –If the torque reading reaches the high torque alarm setpoint, the alarms will
sound, high torque light will illuminate, and the thickener drive will shut down. This interlock is
required to prevent damage to the drive or the thickener rake structure. If the warning of the first
high torque alarm was heeded, and corrective action was taken at that time, the high torque
situation should not occur. The torque reading trend should be monitored daily to determine if
the torque is consistently increasing, and corrective action should be taken before a problem
arises. It is very rare that high torque values will appear without ample warning. If the thickener
shuts off the drive it will be required to drain the thickener and locate the source of the problem.
Slip Detection- Sensors will detect a difference in speed of the tractor wheels. A difference in the
speed of the drive and driven wheel indicates that the tractor is slipping. When slippage is
detected the alarm horn will sound and the high torque alarm will illuminate. Also this slippage
will initiate the start of the sander. The sander will apply sand to the rails to increase the traction
of the tractor.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

83
General Pre-Operation
1. If you have not had previous contact with the job, determine the following:
a. The process in which the thickener is installed and its general duty.
b. Dilution or solids concentration of feed.
c. Expected underflow dilution or solids concentration.
d. Screen analysis of feed.
e. Expected tonnage (dry solids) through the thickener.
f. Chemical properties of the feed, i.e., alkaline, acid, etc.
g. Square foot/ton/24 hours used for design and any other pertinent settling
properties. (An indication of loadings only).
h. Expected overflow clarity.
2. Be familiar with the plant piping layout and controls, including the following:
a. The control of feed to the thickener tank and its dilution.
b. Method of discharging the overflow from the thickener tank.
c. Method of discharging the underflow solids and their concentration.
d. The method for back flushing through the bottom of the tank, as required for
recirculation during the shutdown period (if applicable).
e. Procedure for recirculating the overflow, if it is provided, for use with the feed or
with the backwash.
f. Operation of the traction drive carriage assembly and the drive torque control
device.
g. The operation of the underflow, backwash, feed, and recirculation pumps, as
furnished and used.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

84
3. Check the following before start-up:
a. Check lubrication of the traction drive carriage assembly, upper center column
assembly and lubrication of auxiliary pumps, motor drives, etc.
b. The mechanism should be run with the tank empty for 4 or 5 revolutions and any
problems or malfunctions noted and corrected. Refer to the Maintenance
instructions.
c. The effluent weir should be adjusted for the same elevation all around. Any
irregularity will cause a convergence of flow at certain points causing greater than
normal velocity that will carry the line solids with the effluent.
d. Refer to the maintenance instructions before start-up.
These instructions cover the start-up of the mechanism after a complete shutdown as well as the
initial start-up of a new mechanism.
START-UP
Normal
1. Since there is an E-Duc® self diluting feed system installed, the tank must be full in order
for this system to function properly from the start.
2. Start the mechanism and the underflow pumps. If designed to do so, recirculate the
underflow to the feed.
3. Adjust the flocculant isolation valves on the E-DUC feed system to allow flow to all
points. Note the valve positions will be adjusted later to optimize the flocculation.
4. Start the feed to the thickener. If the thickener has been filled completely with water, feed
may be increased to design capacity almost immediately. If the water level is below the
E-DUC mix tube, the feed should not exceed 50 % of design. Note: it is recommended,
although not mandatory that the thickener be filled with water prior to starting the feed
slurry.
5. It may be desirable to bleed in some water at the trough to insure fluidity of the solids
during start-up. Minimize recirculation of the underflow if the feed contains more than
30% +200 mesh particles. If the torque rises above 20%, stop recirculation and, instead,
advance the underflow to the following process step.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

85
6. Check the flocculation in the feed by taking a sample from the feed well using an
appropriate sampler or a plastic, open top, bottle with rope attached. View the floc
structure of the sample and if desired carefully pour sample to a one or two liter
graduated cylinder and record the initial settling rate. The absolute rate of settling is less
important than a relative rate compared to samples taken under different flocculation
conditions. Also observe the surface of the feed well for a well defined floc structure. If
the feed slurry is flocculated well, there should be visible floc structures, and perhaps
even patches of clear effluent dispersed amongst the feed slurry.
7. If the flocculant structure is not desirable or if it can be improved upon, adjust the
flocculant dosage or the flocculant injection points. See the operating philosophy for
more details on determining the flocculant dosage in which to operate.
The total volume of the recirculated underflow plus the feed should not exceed the design
volume of the feed. When the tank is full, the overflow rate will then equal the solution
volume rate of the feed. This operation should be maintained until the solids or slurry
accumulation results in an underflow mixture of coarse and fines that approaches a
"balanced" condition. Should the slimes reach the surface, the feed must be reduced or
shut off and recirculation continued until the objective is achieved (recirculation must be
at a reduced rate under these conditions).
8. Continue with the operation of the thickener, referring to the thickener "OPERATING
PHILOSOPHY" on a previous page. Remember, the only way the thickener will operate
properly is to withdraw solids at the same rate they are fed to the tank. Accumulation of
solids can cause the torque to rise and therefore must be monitored.
After Emergency Shutdown
If the mechanism has been down for several hours, or more, it is vital and critical that it be
determined if the rakes are trapped in the mud. If they are trapped, then they must be freed up by
washing with high pressure hoses. Once the arms are freed, then normal startup procedures will
apply.
After Power Failure
1. Verify that electrical power is available at the proper voltage and amperage to prevent
damage to the electrical components of the drive.
2. If the mechanism has been down for several hours, or more, it is vital and critical that it
be determined if the rakes are trapped in the mud. If they are trapped, then they must be
freed up by washing with high pressure hoses. Once the arms are freed, then normal
startup procedures will apply.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

86
SHUT DOWN
Normal
The following describes the steps to be taken to initiate a long-term shutdowm.
1. Stop the feed slurry to the E-DUC feed system.
2. Stop the flocculant flow to the E-DUC feed system. If there is post dilution water added
to the flocculant lines, continue this flow in order to flush the flocculant lines. Partially
close all flocculant injection valves to provide enough back pressure so that there is flow
to all injection lines.
3. Flush the feed lines and launders with water to remove any solids that might have
accumulated.
4. Continue discharge underflow from the thickener and continue to operate the thickener
rakes. When the underflow density begins to fall, the underflow discharge can be reduced
to try and increase the density but must not be stopped. If there is significant solids
remaining in the thickener, these could set up and cause torque problems.
5. Continue operating the rakes until the thickener is completely drained.
Emergency
Same procedures as “Normal” shut down, if at all possible. The key is to get the solids out of the
tank and to avoid “mudding in” the rakes.
CAUTION: It is critical that the flocculant flow is shut off.
Power Failure
1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the drive carriage to prevent accidental start-
up of the mechanism once power has been restored.
2. Same procedures as “Normal” shut down, if at all possible. The key is to get the solids
out of the tank and to avoid “mudding in” the rakes.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

87
CAUTION: It is critical that the flocculant flow is shut off.
OPERATION PROBLEMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Underflow line becomes plugged
If the solids become too thick, they may plug the discharge line. Sometimes foreign
material may cause the plugging. To correct this, open the backflush line. If that doesn't
clean the line, turn high pressure water back through the underflow line until the line is
cleared.
If this still does not clear the line, mechanical means must be used to open the line and a
complete shutdown required.
2. Overload Alarm Actuates
If solids should accumulate in the tank due to improper withdrawal procedure, the
overload alarm will sound and at a preset maximum torque the drive motors
automatically shut off, causing the traction drive carriage assembly to stop. If the traction
drives stop, DO NOT attempt to restart the mechanism by pushing, towing or jogging the
traction drive carriage assembly. Locate the cause of the problem. In most cases the tank
must be drained, to check for an excessive buildup of solids.
3. Traction Wheel Slippage
If weather or other conditions (solids accumulated in the tank) should cause slippage of
the drive wheels, the speed of the traction drive carriage assembly will drop below the
preset value and the control system will activate the sand spreader. The sand spreader
will apply sand to the rail in front of the front drive wheel assembly to improve traction.
The sand spreader will continue to apply sand to the rail as long as the wheels slip and the
traction drive carriage speed remains below the preset value, eventually depleting the
supply of sand. The traction drive carriage could continue to operate below the required
speed, or even stop, without activating the torque overload alarm. This condition could
allow settling solids to bed in around the rake arms and prevent safe restart of the
mechanism.
The traction drive wheels must not be allowed to slip for any extended period of time.
When consistent wheel slippage is observed, determine and correct the problem
immediately. DO NOT attempt to increase traction drive speed by pushing or towing the
traction drive carriage assembly.
Rev. 2

4-2014
CSP0000750-01 I
MCN2014-0133

88
If the traction drive carriage stops without activating the torque overload alarm (traction
wheels slipping), DO NOT attempt to restart the mechanism by pushing, towing or
jogging the traction drive carriage assembly. This may cause damage and will void the
warranty. Locate the cause of the problem. In most cases the tank must be drained, to
check for an excessive buildup of solids.
Rev. B

01-AA5
12-97
PROCESS PERFORMANCE

MCN97-1098

89
The process performance of the equipment referred to in these instructions is dependent upon
many factors, including influent or feed quality and quantity, additives required, time,
temperature, rates of change, sizing criteria used, operating conditions, etc. Therefore, unless a
written Process Performance Warranty has been included, FLSmidth cannot assume any liability
or responsibility for performance results that the user of the equipment is expecting or has
predicted.
Should assistance be required in the operation of the equipment, due to unexpected conditions, or
should accessory or add on components or changes be required to meet your performance needs,
FLSmidth can, at additional cost, provide the service of experts to assist you in determining what
actions must be taken.
Rev. 1

16-TA2
7-2013
TROUBLESHOOTING
CSP0000750-01 J
MCN2013-0210

90

POSSIBLE CORRECTIVE

PROBLEM CAUSE ACTION
1. Overload alarm sound-or, traction

a. Torque build up on traction drive
(1) Stop feed to thickener and check for operating
drive operates at high torque for a

carriage assembly and mechanism
problem. Refer to operating Instructions
prolonged period
(2) Check for foreign object in tank.
(3) Check rake arms for level
b. Heavy build up of solids in tank, or

(1) Agitate sludge in front of arms with
island formation
pressurized water stream or air
(2) Shutdown thickener and drain tank
2. Traction drive carriage slows, but

a. Wheels slipping (1) See problem #1 above
continues to operate
(2) Check sander for operation
(3) Check for adequate supply of sand in sander
hopper
(4) Check for debris/foreign material on rail
b. Torque build up on traction drive

(1) See problem #1 above
carriage assembly and mechanism
3. Traction drive carriage stops a. Loss of electrical power (1) Check power source
(2) Check control fuse
b. Torque control cutout (1) Check bed level and, if necessary, drain tank
to locate problem. Do not by-pass torque
control. Do not pull or tow traction drive
carriage
c. Motor drive(s) cutout (1) Check for overheating. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions
4. Sludge too thin (lower solids

a. Sludge withdrawal rate too high (1) Decrease removal of thickened sludge (slow
content than desired)

down pump).
(2) Increase sludge detention time
b. Inadequate flocculation (1) Increase chemical feed rate
(2) Check chemical feed manufacturer's
instructions
c. Flow through tank is short circuiting

(1) Slow down discharge pump
(rat holing)
5. Solids in overflow effluent a. Overloading of Thickener (1) Check flow rate and feed solids content. Refer
to Operating instructions
(2) Check sludge withdrawal rate
(3) Check solids bed level. Adjust discharge rate,
as required. See Operating instructions
b. Inadequate flocculation (1) Increase flocculant chemicals. See Operating
instructions
(2) Check chemical feed manufacturer's
instructions
(3) Check chemical feed lines/flow
c. Froth carryover (1) Water spray bars (not by FLSmidth) may be
required
6. Excessive solids accumulation on

a. Accumulation of solids due to poor
(1) Wash down weirs with pressurized water
weirs
flocculation
stream, or clean manually
(2) Increase frequency of cleaning
b. Froth carryover (1) Water spray bars (not by FLSmidth) may be
required
Rev. 34
01-AA17
1-2013
OFFICES

MCN2013-0015
1
FLSmidth
7158 South FLSmidth Drive
Midvale, Utah 84047-5559
Telephone: 801-871-7000
Toll Free: 1-800-826-6461
Facsimile: 801-871-7001
After completion of the contract, all service and spare parts will be supported by the Region Headquarters.
North American Region Headquarters:

Europe, Africa, Mid-East Region Headquarters:
FLSmidth
FLSmidth (UK) Ltd.

11 Mitchell Court
7158 South FLSmidth Drive

Castle Mound Way
Midvale, Utah 84047-5559, U.S.A.

Central Park
Telephone: 1 + 801-871-7000
Rugby, Warwickshire
Toll Free: 1 + 800-826-6461

CV23 0UY
Facsimile: 1 + 801-871-7001
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1788 555777
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1788 560738
FLSmidth S.A. de C.V

FLSmidth (Pty.) Ltd.
San Alberto 406

Cnr Constantia Boulevard & Albert Schweitzer Streets
Col. Residencial Santa Barbara

Constantia Kloof, Roodepoort, 1709, Gauteng, South Africa
San Pedro Garza Garcia · N.L, 66266 · Mexico

Telephone: +27 (0)10-210-4000
Telephone: +52 81 1001-9500

Facsimile: +27 (0)10-210-4050
Facsimile: +52 81 1001-9545
Latin American Region Headquarters:

Asia-Pacific Region Headquarters:
FLSmidth S.A.
FLSmidth Pty. Ltd.
Nueva de Lyon 072 – Office 1102

5 Comserv Close
Providencia, Santiago – 751-0078 Chile

West Gosford. NSW 2250, Australia
Telephone: 56 + 2-290-0000
Telephone: + 61(0) 2-4320-4700
Facsimile: 56 + 2-334-3949
Facsimile: + 61(0) 2-4320-4777
FLSmidth Ltda.
FLSmidth Beijing Ltd.
Divisão Minerals
7F, Tower A, Ping An International Financial Center
Rua Dolles. 264- 2º Andar

No. 1-3 Xinyuan South Road
CEP-18.116-710-Jardim Clarice II- Votorantim - São Paulo- Brasil

Chaoyang District
Telephone: 55+15-3416-7400
100004 Beijing
Facsimile: 55+15-3416-7599
Peoples Republic Of China
Telephone: 86+10-8468-9100
Facsimile: 86+10-8468-9299
Canada Region Headquarters:

FLSmidth Ltd.
174 West Street South
Orillia, Ontario L3V 6L4 Canada
Telephone: (705) 325-6181
Facsimile: (705) 325-3363
Note: All telephone/facsimile numbers are preceded by a country code (e.g. Mexico 52 +).
FLSmidth Current Bill of Material
BOM NUMBER: CSP0000750-01

DESCRIPTION: 125M TXXT Thickener Eng & Components DRAWING NUM: CSP0000750-01
TOP PARENT: CSP0000750-01
Lvl Item Description / Material Base Qty Total Qty U/M Weight Bubl Drawing Rev Seq
1 CSP0000750-01 125M TXXT Thickener Eng &

1.0 1.0 LOT 0.00 KG CSP0000750-01 5 1
Components
2 DRAWINGS ASSEMBLY & REFERENCE 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 0 N/A - 2
JOBMATL NOTES:
643049 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
643050 FOUNDATION LAYOUT
643051 125m DIAMETER TAILINGS THICKENER PIPING AND INSTRUMENT DIAGRAM
650888 TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR CONTROL PANEL ARRANGEMENT
650889 TRACTION THICKENER BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM
650890 TRACTION THICKENER BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL ARRANGEMENT
650891 TRACTION THICKENER BRIDGE CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM
650892 TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR MOTOR STARTER PANEL ARRANGEMENT
650893 TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR DRIVE MOTOR WIRING
650898 RAIL HEATER WIRING DIAGRAM
ES0001 FLS WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
665216 MECH PAINT
665676 RUBBER LINING FABRICATION & LINING SPECIFCATION
676723 INSTRUCTIONS, TAGGING
676724 INSTRUCTiONS, SHOP ASSEMBLY
2 665215 ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION 3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 300 665215 3 3
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 665203, 643049
2 653029 ASSY, MASTER LEVEL,

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 301 653029 1 220
TRACTION DRIVE TXXT
THICKENER
2 680254 ASSY, ELECTRICAL, TOP

1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 302 680254 4 400
LEVEL, TRACTION
THICKENER
2 665203 LIST, CONNECTION &

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 400 665203 3 416
FASTENER, Ø125M "TXXT'
THICKENER
Print Date: 22-April-2014 3:42 pm Total Weight: 0.00 Page 1 Of 50
BOM NUMBER: CSP0000750-01

DESCRIPTION: 125M TXXT Thickener Eng & Components DRAWING NUM: CSP0000750-01
2 88439A TAG, IDENTIFICATION 900.0 900.0 EA 0.00 KG 401 88439 7 417
MYLAR
2 REVISION ENGINEERING CHANGES 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 999 N/A - 418
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 54866 (REV 1) - INITIAL RELEASE
ECN 57250 (REV 2) - REMOVED NOTE 2 ON TOP LEVEL. ITEM 202 ADDED.
(REF DRAWING) PRE RELEASE ITEMS 2 & 3 ADDED.
ECN 57494 (REV 3) - PRE RELEASE ITEMS 4, 5 & 6 ADDED.
ECN 58844 (REV 4) - ITEMS 300 & 400 ADDED. REMOVED PRE RELEASE SHEET 2.
ECN 62282 (REV 5) - ITEMS 110, 111, 203 THRU 206, 301, 302 & 401 ADDED.
BOM NUMBER: 665215

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION DRAWING NUM: 665215
3 654092 ASSY, RAIL SYSTEM Ø125m X

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 654092 1 4
3.0m S.W.D., TYPE "TXXT"
THICKENER
3 664671 ASSY, SUBMERGED STEEL,

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 664671 3 10
Ø125M X 3.0M S.W.D. TYPE
"TXXT" THICKENER
ITEM NOTES:
3 665205 ASSY, SUPERSTRUCTURE,

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 665205 3 79
Ø125M "TXXT" THICKENER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 665203, 643049, 643050, 665211
3 665688 ASSY, FEED PIPE ERECTION,

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 665688 1 120
Ø125M X 3M S.W.D., TYPE
"TXXT" THICKENER
ITEM NOTES:
3 668357 ASSY, FEEDWELL, AND

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 668357 1 135
FEEDWELL WALKWAY
ERECTION Ø12M X 3.M S.D.
TYPE "TXX" THICKENER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS ES0001, 665203
3 670585 ASSY, FLOCCULANT PIPING

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 670585 1 184
ERECTION, Ø125M X 3. S.D.
TYPE "TXXT" THICKENER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS ES0001, 665203
3 603883 LADDER - UPPER 1.0 3.0 EA 128.00 KG 07 603883 1 207
A36 STL
BOM NUMBER: 665215

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION DRAWING NUM: 665215
3 664693 ASSY, LAUNDER 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 664693 2 208
ITEM NOTES:
3 1074676-01 PLATE, WASHER, 3" x 3" 2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 1074676 1 218
A36 STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 59091 (REV 2) - ITEMS 2 & 3 WEIGHT CHANGED.
ECN 61943 (REV 3) - WEIGHT UPDATED IN ITEM 8 & TOTAL WEIGHT UPDATED.
BOM NUMBER: 654092

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, RAIL SYSTEM DRAWING NUM: 654092
4 654093 RAIL Ø125m X 3.0m S.W.D.,

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 654093 1 5
171 CR
4 603872 RAIL ANCHOR, SOLE PLATE

2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 603872 6
DETAIL
4 603873 RAIL EXPANSION JOINT, SOLE

2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 603873 1 7
PLATE DETAIL
4 654094 PLATE, SOLE Ø125m X 3.0m

655.0 1,965.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 654094 1 8
S.W.D., TYPE "TXXT"
THICKENER
A36 STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 54866 (REV 1) - INITIAL RELEASE
BOM NUMBER: 664671

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, SUBMERGED STEEL, DRAWING NUM: 664671
4 664688-01 ASSY, COLUMN, LOWER 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 664688 2 11
4 664672 TRENCH, LINER SEGMENT 3.0 9.0 EA 811.50 KG 02 664672 1 19
A42-27ES
4 664673 CAGE 1.0 3.0 EA 47,058.50 03 664673 1 20
STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 664698
4 664674 LONG ARM, INNER 1.0 3.0 EA 27,952.00 04 664674 3 21
STL
ITEM NOTES:
4 664675 LONG ARM, INNER MID 1.0 3.0 EA 14,422.00 05 664675 2 22
STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 664698
4 664676 LONG ARM, OUTER MID 1.0 3.0 EA 12,761.00 06 664676 1 23
STL
ITEM NOTES:
4 664677 LONG ARM, OUTER 1.0 3.0 EA 8,429.00 K 07 664677 2 24
STL
ITEM NOTES:
4 664678 TRACTOR CONNECTION,

1.0 3.0 EA 11,150.00 08 664678 3 25
LONG ARM
STL
ITEM NOTES:
4 664679 RAKE ARM, INTERMEDIATE 1.0 3.0 EA 27,983.00 09 664679 3 26
STL
Print Date: 22-April-2014 3:42 pm Total Weight: 150,567.00 Page 6 Of 50
BOM NUMBER: 664671

ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 664680
4 664680 RAKE ARM, INTERMEDIATE 1.0 3.0 EA 14,942.00 10 664680 1 27
STL
4 664681 RAKE ARM, SHORT 2.0 6.0 EA 14,965.50 11 664681 4 28
STL
4 664682-01 SCRAPER, TROUGH 4.0 12.0 EA 395.50 KG 12 664682 1 29
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
4 664683 SPLICE BLADE, RAKE ARM 4.0 12.0 EA 204.00 KG 18 664683 1 35
A42-27ES
4 664684 SPLICE BLADE, RAKE ARM 1.0 3.0 EA 207.00 KG 19 664684 1 36
A42-27ES
4 664685-01 BLADE TIPS, RAKE ARM 4.0 12.0 EA 19.00 KG 20 664685 1 37
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
BOM NUMBER: 664671

A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
A514 GRB STL
4 664687-01 BLADE TIPS, TROUGH

8.0 24.0 EA 5.00 KG 32 664687 1 49
SCRAPER
A514 GRB STL

8.0 24.0 EA 3.00 KG 33 664687 1 50
SCRAPER
A514 GRB STL

8.0 24.0 EA 3.00 KG 34 664687 1 51
SCRAPER
A514 GRB STL
4 664699-01 SHIM PACK, LONG AND

1.0 3.0 EA 118.00 KG 35 664699 1 52
INTERMEDIATE ARM/CAGE
BOM NUMBER: 664671

A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 58.00 KG 36 664699 1 53
INTERMEDIATE ARM/CAGE
A42-27ES
4 664708-01 SHIM PACK, TOP, SHORT,

1.0 3.0 EA 54.00 KG 37 664708 1 54
ARM/ CAGE
A42-27ES
4 664708-02 SHIM PACK, TOP, SHORT,

1.0 3.0 EA 48.00 KG 38 664708 1 55
ARM/ CAGE
A42-27ES
4 664701-01 SHIM PACK, BOTTOM, SHORT,

1.0 3.0 EA 44.00 KG 39 664701 1 56
ARM/ CAGE
A42-27ES
4 664701-02 SHIM PACK, BOTTOM, SHORT,

1.0 3.0 EA 38.00 KG 40 664701 1 57
ARM/ CAGE
A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 162.00 KG 41 664702 1 58
INTERMEDIATE ARM
A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 106.00 KG 42 664702 1 59
INTERMEDIATE ARM
A42-27ES
4 664703-01 SHIM PACK, LONG

1.0 3.0 EA 38.00 KG 43 664703 1 60
ARM/TRACTOR
A42-27ES
4 664703-02 SHIM PACK, LONG

1.0 3.0 EA 22.00 KG 44 664703 1 61
ARM/TRACTOR
A42-27ES
4 664704 SHIM PACK, TRACTOR 1.0 3.0 EA 672.00 KG 45 664704 1 62
A42-27ES
BOM NUMBER: 664671

4 88202A PLATE, HOLD DOWN 4.0 12.0 EA 6.00 LBS 46 88202 - 63
STL
4 616416 GUIDE BLOCK 4.0 12.0 EA 0.00 KG 47 616416 1 64
UHMW-PE
4 664688-02 COLUMN, LOWER 1.0 3.0 EA 1,001.00 K 48 664688 2 65
A42-27ES
4 607525 SOLE PLATE, W/SHEAR LUGS 1.0 3.0 EA 1,573.00 K 49 607575 1 66
A36 STL
4 665199 FASTENER, GRATING (KIT) 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 50 665199 1 67
HDG/ SS
ITEM NOTES:
1 EA KIT CONSISTS OF 1 PKG OF 100 DISKS AND 1 PKG OF 100 STUDS.
4 664705-01 NOZZLES, UNDERFLOW

4.0 12.0 EA 504.50 KG 52 664705 1 68
EMBEDDED
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 76180A109
4 664705-02 NOZZLES, UNDERFLOW

4.0 12.0 EA 501.00 KG 53 664705 1 69
EMBEDDED
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 76180A109
4 1065491-01 CAUTION, SIGN 1.0 3.0 EA 0.08 KG 54 1065491 1 70
SS/22 G.A.
4 664707 LADDER, CAGED 1.0 3.0 EA 195.60 KG 55 664707 1 71
A42-27ES
4 664690-01 FRAME, GRATING 2.0 6.0 EA 14.50 KG 56 664690 1 72
A42-27ES
4 664709 GRATING, COLUMN 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 57 664709 1 73
BOM NUMBER: 664671

A569/HDG
4 504787 VALVE, BALL, MANUAL,

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 58 504787 3 74
3-INCH
CARBON STL
4 662096 GASKET, 3" 2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 59 662096 1 75
NEOPRENE
4 664698 CONDUIT SUPPORT, LONG

1.0 3.0 EA 71.50 KG 60 664698 1 76
RAKE ARM & CAGE
STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 664673, 664674, 667675, 664676, 664677, 664678
4 664690-02 FRAME, GRATING 1.0 3.0 EA 67.50 KG 61 664690 1 77
STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 59091 (REV 2) - WEIGHTS UPDATED ON ITEMS 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 & 11.
WELD DETAIL ADDED IN SECTION A-A & DETAIL B.
ECN 61419 (REV 3) - WEIGHTS UPDATED ON ITEMS 4, 8, 9 & 11.
VIEW W-W & SECTION X-X ADDED.
BOM NUMBER: 664688-01

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, COLUMN, LOWER DRAWING NUM: 664688
5 43369C FLANGE, FF PL,

1.0 3.0 EA 5.00 LB 24 43369 H 12
3"PIPEx7-1/2x1/2
A36 STL
5 664689-01 GRATING, COLUMN

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 664689 1 13
PLATFORM, AS SHOWN
A569 STL
5 664691 LADDER, TUNNEL 1.0 3.0 EA 228.80 KG 26 664691 1 14
A42-27ES
5 664692 LADDER, TUNNEL 1.0 3.0 EA 228.80 KG 27 664692 1 15
A42-27ES
5 664689-02 GRATING, COLUMN

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 29 664689 1 16
PLATFORM, OPPOSITE HAND
A569 STL
5 NOTES SPECIFICATIONS &

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 998 N/A - 17
INSTRUCTIONS
JOBMATL NOTES:
ITEMS 1 THRU 23 ON DRAWING 664688 ARE RAW MATERIAL
TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE FABRICATOR.
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 62589 (REV 2) - CHANGE ONLY ON -02, NOT FOR -01.
BOM NUMBER: 665205

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, SUPERSTRUCTURE, DRAWING NUM: 665205
4 654097 SUPERSTRUCTURE, OUTER 1.0 3.0 EA 11,633.00 01 654097 3 80
A572-GR50/A53GRB/A36 STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665211
4 654098 SUPERSTRUCTURE, OUTER

1.0 3.0 EA 15,589.00 02 654098 3 81
MIDDLE
A572-GR50/A53GRB/A36 STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665211
4 654099 SUPERSTRUCTURE, MIDDLE 1.0 3.0 EA 14,425.00 03 654099 2 82
A572-GR50/A42-27ES/A53GRB STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665211
4 654106 SUPERSTRUCTURE, INNER

1.0 3.0 EA 15,065.00 04 654106 2 83
MIDDLE
A575-GR50/A42-27ES
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665211
4 654107 SUPERSTRUCTURE, INNER 1.0 3.0 EA 26,177.00 05 654107 3 84
A53GRB/A572-GR50/A36 STL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665211
4 654108-01 BRACE, TOP & BOTTOM 2.0 6.0 EA 75.00 KG 06 654108 2 85
STL
STL
STL
4 654109-01 BRACE, DIAGONAL 2.0 6.0 EA 200.00 KG 09 654109 1 88
A42-27ES
BOM NUMBER: 665205

A42-27ES
4 654110-01 SUPPORT, END 2.0 6.0 EA 148.00 KG 11 654110 1 90
A42-27ES
4 654110-02 SUPPORT, END 1.0 3.0 EA 660.00 KG 12 654110 1 91
A42-27ES
4 654111 SUPPORT, FEEDWELL 3.0 9.0 EA 2,826.00 K 13 654111 2 92
STL
4 654112 GRATING, WALKWAY 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 654112 1 93
A569 STL/HDG
4 665191 GRATING, PLATFORM 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 665191 1 94
A569/HDG
4 665192-01 PLATE, SHIM 8.0 24.0 EA 6.00 KG 16 665192 1 95
A42-27ES
4 665192-02 PLATE, SHIM 4.0 12.0 EA 4.00 KG 17 665192 1 96
A42-27ES
4 665192-03 PLATE, SHIM 16.0 48.0 EA 2.00 KG 18 665192 1 97
A42-27ES
4 665192-04 PLATE, SHIM 8.0 24.0 EA 1.00 KG 19 665192 1 98
A42-27ES
4 665192-05 PLATE, SHIM 16.0 48.0 EA 1.00 KG 20 665192 1 99
A42-27ES
4 665192-06 PLATE, SHIM 4.0 12.0 EA 1.00 KG 21 665192 1 100
A42-27ES
4 1048896-01 PLATE, SPLICE 16.0 48.0 EA 0.00 KG 22 1048896 1 101
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
BOM NUMBER: 665205

A42-27ES
A42-27ES
4 1064544-01 SPLICE PLATE, WALKWAY 8.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 1064544 1 105
STL
4 665198-01 PLATE, SPLICE MONORAIL 4.0 12.0 EA 1.00 KG 27 665198 1 106
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
4 20799A NAMEPLATE, FLSMIDTH

1.0 3.0 EA 0.28 KG 30 20799 19 109
MINERALS
302 SS 22 GA
HDG/ SS
ITEM NOTES:
4 665200 LADDER 1.0 3.0 EA 116.00 KG 32 665200 1 111
STL
4 665201 GATE, SAFETY 2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 33 665201 1 112
GALV
4 665202 GATE, SAFETY 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 34 665202 1 113
GALV
A42-27ES
4 665212 BRACE, BOTTOM 1.0 3.0 EA 181.00 KG 36 665212 1 115
A42-27ES
BOM NUMBER: 665205

4 665213 STRUT, FRAME 2.0 6.0 EA 66.00 KG 37 665213 1 116
A42-27ES
4 665214 STRUT, FRAME 2.0 6.0 EA 37.00 KG 38 665214 1 117
A42-27ES
4 664710 WASHER, PLATE 8.0 24.0 EA 1.00 KG 39 664710 1 118
A36 STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 59091 (REV 2) - ITEMS 1, 2 & 5 WEIGHT UPDATED.
ITEM 7 QTY WAS 4. ITEM 39 ADDED.
ECN 62589 (REV 3) - HANDRAIL END TERMINATION CHANGED TO CURVED END.
BOM NUMBER: 665688

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FEED PIPE ERECTION, Ø125M X 3M DRAWING NUM: 665688
4 665677 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 2,380.00 K 01 665677 1 121
S.D. TYPE "TXXT" THICKENER
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665678 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 2,367.00 K 02 665678 1 122
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665679 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 2,356.00 K 03 665679 1 123
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665680 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 2,343.00 K 04 665680 1 124
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665681 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 1,991.00 K 05 665681 1 125
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665682 PIPE, FEED, Ø48", Ø125M X 3M

1.0 3.0 EA 1,049.00 K 06 665682 1 126
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
BOM NUMBER: 665688

4 662256 SPLITTER, FEED, Ø125M,

1.0 3.0 EA 2,487.20 K 07 662256 1 127
"TXXT" THICKENER
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 662257 NOZZLE, E-DUC, 36", Ø125M, 2.0 6.0 EA 1,307.10 K 08 662257 1 128
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 665683 SUPPORT, FEED PIPE, Ø48"

1.0 3.0 EA 447.00 KG 09 665683 1 129
Ø125M X 3M S.D., TYPE
"TXXT" THICKENER
STL
4 665684 SUPPORT, FEED PIPE, Ø48"

1.0 3.0 EA 448.00 KG 10 665684 1 130
"TXXT" THICKENER
STL
4 665686 SUPPORT, SPLITTER FEED

1.0 3.0 EA 364.00 KG 11 665686 1 131
PIPE Ø125M X 3M S.D., TYPE
"TXXT" THICKENER
STL
4 665685 SUPPORT, SPLITTER FEED

1.0 3.0 EA 393.00 KG 12 665685 1 132
PIPE Ø125M X 3M S.D., TYPE
"TXXT" THICKENER
STL
4 665687 HANGER, SPLITTER FEED PIPE

4.0 12.0 EA 35.00 KG 13 665687 1 133
"TXXT" THICKENER
A36 STL
BOM NUMBER: 665688

JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 668357

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FEEDWELL, AND FEEDWELL WALKWAY DRAWING NUM: 668357
4 668338 MIX TROUGH 1.0 3.0 EA 4,173.00 K 01 668338 1 136
A42-27ES/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 668339 MIX TROUGH 1.0 3.0 EA 4,165.00 K 02 668339 1 137
A42-27ES/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676
4 668336 FEEDWELL, SECTION, Ø125M

1.0 3.0 EA 2,142.00 K 03 668336 1 138
X 3M S.D. TYPE "TXXT"
THICKENER
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676

1.0 3.0 EA 2,161.00 K 04 668337 1 139
THICKENER
STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 665676

1.0 3.0 EA 2,154.00 K 05 668334 1 140
THICKENER
STL
4 665691 FEEDWELL, SECTION, Ø125 M.

1.0 3.0 EA 2,211.00 K 06 665691 1 141
X 3 M. S.D. TYPE "TXXT"
THICKENER
STL

1.0 3.0 EA 2,211.00 K 07 665692 1 142
THICKENER
STL
BOM NUMBER: 668357


1.0 3.0 EA 2,211.00 K 08 668332 1 143
THICKENER
STL

1.0 3.0 EA 2,172.00 K 09 668335 1 144
THICKENER
STL
4 668333 FEEDWELL, SECTION, Ø125 M.

1.0 3.0 EA 1,717.00 K 10 668333 1 145
X 3 M. S.D. TYPE "TXXT"
THICKENER
STL
4 668355-01 FEEDWELL, DIVERTER, Ø125M

1.0 3.0 EA 1,081.00 K 11 668355 1 146
THICKENER
A42-27ES
4 668355-02 FEEDWELL, DIVERTER, Ø125M

1.0 3.0 EA 1,081.00 K 12 668355 1 147
THICKENER
A42-27ES
4 668340-01 HANDRAIL, FEEDWELL

3.0 9.0 EA 276.00 KG 13 668340 2 148
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

3.0 9.0 EA 251.00 KG 14 668341 2 149
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
4 668342 HANDRAIL, FEEDWELL

1.0 3.0 EA 696.00 KG 15 668342 2 150
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
4 668343 HANDRAIL, FEEDWELL

1.0 3.0 EA 696.00 KG 16 668343 2 151
WALKWAY
BOM NUMBER: 668357

A53 GRB/A42-27ES
4 668344 LADDER, FEEDWELL 2.0 6.0 EA 44.00 KG 17 668344 1 152
A615 GR40/A42-27ES
4 668352 SUPPORT, MIX TROUGH,

1.0 3.0 EA 423.00 KG 18 668352 1 153
WALKWAY
A992/A42-27ES STL

1.0 3.0 EA 491.00 KG 19 668353 1 154
WALKWAY
A992/A42-27ES STL

1.0 3.0 EA 755.00 KG 20 668354 1 155
WALKWAY
A992/A42-27ES STL
4 668349 SUPPORT, FEEDWELL 1.0 3.0 EA 127.00 KG 21 668349 1 156
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
A572 GR50/A42-27ES
4 668345-01 SUPPORT, FEEDWELL 3.0 9.0 EA 245.00 KG 23 668345 1 158
A572 GR50/A42-27ES
4 668345-02 SUPPORT, FEEDWELL 6.0 18.0 EA 50.00 KG 24 668345 1 159
A42-27ES
4 668348 HANGER, FEEDWELL 2.0 6.0 EA 373.00 KG 25 668348 1 160
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
A53 GRB-A42-27ES
4 668356-01 SPLICE PLATE, FEEDWELL 1.0 3.0 EA 19.00 KG 29 668356 1 164
BOM NUMBER: 668357

A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
4 668359-01 GRATING, FEEDWELL

7.0 21.0 EA 0.00 KG 35 668359 1 170
WALKWAY
A569/HDG

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 36 668359 1 171
WALKWAY
A569/HDG

1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 37 668359 1 172
WALKWAY
A569/HDG
4 1064544-01 SPLICE PLATE, WALKWAY 16.0 48.0 EA 0.00 KG 38 1064544 1 173
STL
4 668360 PLATE, WASHER 4.0 12.0 EA 1.00 KG 39 668360 1 174
A42-27ES
HDG/ SS
ITEM NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 668357


2.0 6.0 EA 276.00 KG 41 668340 2 176
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 276.00 KG 42 668340 2 177
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 276.00 KG 43 668340 2 178
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

2.0 6.0 EA 251.00 KG 44 668341 2 179
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 251.00 KG 45 668341 2 180
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES

1.0 3.0 EA 251.00 KG 46 668341 2 181
WALKWAY
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
4 670604 BRACE, MIX TROUGH 1.0 3.0 EA 38.00 KG 47 670604 1 182
A42-27ES
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 670585

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FLOCCULANT PIPING ERECTION, DRAWING NUM: 670585
4 670591 PIPING, FLOCCULANT 8" DIA.

1.0 3.0 EA 389.00 KG 01 670591 1 185
HEADER
A53 GRB/A36 STL
4 670592 PIPING, FLOCCULANT 8" DIA. 4.0 12.0 EA 401.00 KG 02 670592 1 186
A53 GRB/A36 STL
4 670593 PIPE, 2" SCH 40 x 0'-4 1/2" T.B.E 16.0 48.0 EA 2.81 KG 03 N/A - 187
A53 GRB
4 670594 PIPE, 2" SCH 40 X 20'-0" 26.0 78.0 EA 33.19 KG 04 N/A - 188
A53 GRB
4 670603 COULPING, 2" 3000# THR'D

8.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 N/A - 189
NPT
A105
4 670595 ELL, S/W 2" 90 DEG, 3000# 46.0 138.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 190
4 670596 ELL, S/W 2" 45 DEG, 3000# 12.0 36.0 EA 0.16 KG 07 N/A - 191
A105
4 670597 TEE, S/W 2" 3000# 4.0 12.0 EA 0.50 KG 08 N/A - 192
A105
4 670601-08 VALVE, BALL 8.0 24.0 EA 3.63 KG 09 670601 1 193
316 SS
4 670590 PIPE, FLOCCULANT, SPARGER

4.0 12.0 EA 6.00 KG 10 670590 1 194
2" DIA
A53 GRB/A42-27ES
4 670586 SUPPORT 8" DIA

15.0 45.0 EA 20.00 KG 11 670586 1 195
FLOCCULANT PIPE
A42-27ES
4 670587 BRACE 2" DIA FLOCCULANT

1.0 3.0 EA 24.00 KG 12 670587 1 196
PIPE
A42-27ES

12.0 36.0 EA 6.00 KG 13 670588 1 197
FLOCCULANT PIPE
BOM NUMBER: 670585

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FLOCCULANT PIPING ERECTION, DRAWING NUM: 670585
A42-27ES

4.0 12.0 EA 3.00 KG 14 670589 1 198
FLOCCULANT PIPE
A42-27ES
4 547153S U-BOLT 8 W/ (2) HEX NUTS 15.0 45.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 547153 A 199
A36 STL
4 547153H U-BOLT 2 W/ (2) HEX NUTS 70.0 210.0 EA 0.00 KG 16 547153 A 200
A36 STL
4 86801P FLANGE,FF,B,PL,8"BLINDx13
1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 17 86801 A 201
1/2 x 5/8,A36
4 670599 ANGLE, 3 X 3 X 1/4 X 20"-0" 3.0 9.0 EA 29.60 KG 18 N/A - 202
STL
4 670600 UNION, 2" 3000# THR'D NPT 8.0 24.0 EA 0.50 KG 19 N/A - 203
A105
4 87891J GASKET, FF FLG,

5.0 15.0 EA 0.21 KG 20 87891 G 204
13-1/2x8-5/8x1/8
NEOP
A53/A36 STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 664693

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, LAUNDER DRAWING NUM: 664693
4 664694 LAUNDER 70.0 210.0 EA 868.00 KG 01 664694 1 209
A42-27ES
4 664695 LAUNDER-CLOSURE 1.0 3.0 EA 615.00 KG 02 664695 1 210
A42-27ES
4 664696-01 SUPPORTS, LAUNDER 64.0 192.0 EA 59.00 KG 03 664696 1 211
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
A42-27ES
4 664697 WEIR 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 664697 1 214
FRP
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 643049, 664694, 664695
4 680061 LAUNDER 1.0 3.0 EA 1,153.00 K 07 680061 1 215
A42-27ES STL
4 680062 SUPPORT, LAUNDER 1.0 3.0 EA 50.00 KG 08 680062 1 216
A42-27ES STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 61943 (REV 2) - ITEM 1 & 3 QTY REVISED WAS 71, 65.
ITEM 7 & 8 ADDED. SECTION D-D ADDED. NOTES AND TOTAL
WEIGHT UPDATED.
BOM NUMBER: 653029

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, MASTER LEVEL, TRACTION DRIVE DRAWING NUM: 653029
JOBMATL NOTES:
653037 PAINT SPECIFICATION
3 653021 ASSY, DRIVE COMPLETE,

3.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 653021 1 222
TRACTION DRIVE TXXT
THICKENER
3 540109 ASSY GENERAL ERECTION,

3.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 540109 4 345
CENTER BEARING
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 653021

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, DRIVE COMPLETE, TRACTION DRIVE DRAWING NUM: 653021
JOBMATL NOTES:
114808 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
4 653022 ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 653022 1 224
DRIVE COMPLETE TXXT
THICKENER
4 BAP0099-136 ASSY, GREASE LINE 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 BAP0099-136 1 309
4 49002A NAMEPLATE, (PATENT #) 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 49002 22 315
POLYCARBONATE
4 566867-08 NAMEPLATE, LEGEND

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 566867 7 316
THICKENER
302 SS
4 20799A NAMEPLATE, FLSMIDTH

1.0 9.0 EA 0.28 KG 05 20799 19 317
MINERALS
302 SS 22 GA
4 76295A348A SIGN, WARNING, SPANISH 3.0 27.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 76295A348 - 318
4 84640A PLATE, INSTRUCTION,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 84640 A 319
ARROW
SS
4 M016244 TAPPING SCREW, HX HD, F,

6.0 54.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 320
#10-32 x 1/2
316 SS
4 M023569 TAPPING SCREW, HX HD, F,

16.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 321
1/4-20x1/2,
316 SS
4 628046 ASSY, LEVEL/SWITCH 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 12 628046 1 322
BOM NUMBER: 653021

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, DRIVE COMPLETE, TRACTION DRIVE DRAWING NUM: 653021
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 653022

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION, DRIVE COMPLETE DRAWING NUM: 653022
5 301657 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4-10 x 1.75 16.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 N/A - 225
GR 5
5 308008 NUT, HEX, 3/4-10 16.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 N/A - 226
GR 5
5 308004 NUT, HEX, 3/8-16 36.0 324.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 N/A - 227
GR 5
GR 5
5 653023 ASSY, TRACTOR, TXXT

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 653023 1 229
THICKENER
5 653024 PLATFORM, DRIVE, TYPE

1.0 9.0 EA 1,242.90 K 06 653024 1 301
TXXT THICKENER
STL
5 653025 GRATING, PLATFORM, TYPE

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 653025 1 302
TXXT THICKENER
A569 STL
5 613923 PLATE, WEIGHT, LONG 9.0 81.0 EA 570.90 KG 08 613923 1 303
A36 STL
5 613924 PLATE, WEIGHT, SHORT 18.0 162.0 EA 472.80 KG 09 613924 1 304
A36 STL
5 613925 PLATE, TOP, TRACTOR 1.0 9.0 EA 3,499.90 K 10 613925 1 305
A36 STL
5 307008 WSHR, HRD, AN, 3/4 16.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 306
F436
F436
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 653023

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, TRACTOR, TXXT THICKENER DRAWING NUM: 653023
GR 5
GR 5
6 301337 CAPSCR, HEX, 5/8-11 x 2 4.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 N/A - 232
GR 5
6 301039 CAPSCR, HEX, 1/2-13 x 2 10.0 90.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 233
GR 5
6 301036 CAPSCR, HEX, 1/2-13x1.25 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 N/A - 234
GR 5
6 308005 NUT, HEX, 1/2-13 8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 235
GR 5
6 308004 NUT, HEX, 3/8-16 4.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 N/A - 236
GR 5
6 308007 NUT, HEX, 5/8-11 12.0 108.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 237
GR 5
6 308151 NUT, HEX, M20 48.0 432.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 238
CL 10
6 614598 CAPSCR, HEX, 1-1/4-7 x 4"

8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 239
FULL THRD
GR 5
6 307014 WSHR, HRD, AN, 1-1/2 16.0 144.0 EA 0.10 KG 11 N/A - 240
F436
F436, ZNC
F436
F436
BOM NUMBER: 653023

6 307149 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A 48.0 432.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 N/A - 244
TP200, ISO 7089
GR 5
GR 5
GR 5
GR 5, ZNC
GR 5, ZNC
GR 5
6 301901 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 100 34.0 306.0 EA 0.00 KG 22 N/A - 251
CL 10.9
CL 10.9
6 672606 WELDMENT, FRAME,

1.0 9.0 EA 7,966.00 K 24 672606 3 253
TRACTOR
STL
6 672604 WHEEL, MAIN DRIVE,

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 672604 1 254
FORGED 4350
6 672611 REDUCER, IN-LINE

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 672611 1 255
PLANETARY
6 672607 AXLE, TRACTOR, TYPE

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 672607 2 256
"TXXT" THICKENER
4140 STL
BOM NUMBER: 653023

6 540722 TORQUE ARM 2.0 18.0 EA 330.00 LB 28 540722 A 257
A36 STL
6 672601 MOUNT, BELT GUARD &

2.0 18.0 EA 113.20 KG 30 672601 1 258
MOTOR
A36 STL
6 672600 MOUNT, GUARD, BELT, MAIN

2.0 18.0 EA 5.80 KG 31 672600 1 259
A36 STL
6 593677 PULLEY, TIMING, 4MM

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 32 593677 1 260
SPROCKET W/BUSHING
6 593678 PULLEY, TIMING, 14MM

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 33 593678 1 261
SPROCKET W/BUSHING
6 672598 GUARD, BELT, MAIN DRIVE,

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 34 672598 1 262
A36 STL
6 672597 BELT, SYNCHRONOUS 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 35 672597 1 263
6 672599 COVER, BELT 2.0 18.0 EA 5.20 KG 36 672599 1 264
A36 STL
6 672612 SPREADER, SAND 1.0 9.0 EA 7.40 KG 37 672612 1 265
304 SS
6 672625 SCREW, SAND 1.0 9.0 EA 5.00 KG 38 672625 1 266
304 SS
6 672608 PLATE, SPACER BEARING 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 39 672608 1 267
A36 STL
6 672609 BEARING, FLANGED 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 40 672609 1 268
6 672613 RING, FELT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 41 672613 1 269
6 86144L BSHG, TAPER-LOCK, 1, 1/4 x

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 42 86144 - 270
1/8
6 85914AD SPROCKET, CHAIN

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 43 85914 A 271
TAPER-LOCK TYPE
BOM NUMBER: 653023

6 85914F SPROCKET, TAPER-LOCK, 16T,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 44 85914 A 272
STL
6 85844N BUSHING TAPER-LOCK 1B,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 45 85844 A 273
1/4x1/8KST
6 672621 COVER, SAND HOPPER 1.0 9.0 EA 19.10 KG 47 672621 1 274
A36 STL
6 SM049A49A BEARING, ROD END, 1" DIA,

4.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 48 SM049A49 A 275
1-14 THREAD
STL
6 SM049A68A PIN, TRACTION, DRIVE

4.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 49 SM049A68 A 276
CONTROL
A36 STL
6 672626 FRAME, PIVOT 1.0 9.0 EA 8.40 KG 50 672626 1 277
A36 STL
6 672614 PIVOT PIN, FRAME 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 51 672614 1 278
4140 STL
6 672605 BRACKET, ZERO SPEED 1.0 9.0 EA 78.10 KG 52 672605 1 279
A36 STL
6 672610 BEARING, FLANGED 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 53 672610 1 280
6 SM049B65A AXLE, DRIVE CONTROL 1.0 9.0 EA 9.00 LB 54 SM049B65 A 281
4140 STL
6 672603 WHEEL, ZERO SPEED SENSOR,

1.0 9.0 EA 138.80 KG 55 672603 1 282
A36 STL
6 672615 WHEEL, SPACER 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 56 672615 1 283
DELRIN
6 542366 SENSOR BRACKET, DRIVE

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 57 542366 A 284
SHAFT
6 SM049B43A BRACKET, SENSOR 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 58 SM049B43 A 285
BOM NUMBER: 653023

11 GA, GALV. STL
6 672628 BUSHING, KEYLESS, B-LOC 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 59 672628 1 286
6 86605F LINK, CONNECTING, #50

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 61 86605 - 287
5/8P/SPRNG-LOCK
STL
6 M017567 PIN, COTTER, 1/4x1 1/2 8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 62 N/A - 288
316 SS
6 303221 CAPSCR, HEX, 1-1/2-6 x 5.5 16.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 63 N/A - 289
GR 5
CL 8.8
6 613927 BEARING, SPLIT HSG, 8" BORE 2.0 18.0 EA 625.00 LB 65 613927 1 291
6 613926 BEARING, SPLIT HSG, 8" BORE 2.0 18.0 EA 625.00 LB 66 613926 1 292
6 SM049A48A LOAD CELL, 20K, TRACTION

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 67 SM049A48 A 293
DRIVE
6 M014432 SETSCR, SKT HDLS, CP PT,

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 68 N/A - 294
3/8-16x3/4
304 SS
6 653027 CHAIN GUARD, SANDER,

1.0 9.0 EA 12.10 KG 69 653027 1 295
TXXT
STL
6 653026 REDUCER, RIGHT ANGLE

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 70 653026 2 296
SEW-EURODRIVE K37AM145
6 86603F CHAIN ROLLER #50 RIVETED

1.0 9.0 LNK 3.32 KG 71 86603 B 297
5/8P (192-BX)
6 653028 MOTOR, 1/2HP, 145TC,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 72 653028 1 298
460V/3PH/50HZ
6 653030 MOTOR, 50HP, 460V/3PH/50HZ 2.0 18.0 EA 890.00 LB 73 653030 1 299
BOM NUMBER: 653023

JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: BAP0099-136

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GREASE LINE DRAWING NUM: BAP0099-136
5 88748D FITTING-TUBE, MALE

10.0 90.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 88748 - 310
CONNECTOR, BITE TYPE
5 88748C FITTING-TUBE, MALE

6.0 54.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 88748 - 311
CONNECTOR, BITE TYPE
5 86033C FITTING GREASE STR BH STL

8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 86033 A 312
1/4MPTx5/8HX
5 49039D TUBING, HYDRAULIC, 1/4"OD 36.0 324.0 FT 0.00 KG 36 49039 - 313
STL
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 628046

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, LEVEL/SWITCH DRAWING NUM: 628046
5 356308 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 3/4 x 2,

3.0 54.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 N/A - 323
MPT
304L SS
5 357802 ELL, PIPE, 90°, 150#, 3/4", FPT 2.0 36.0 EA 0.10 KG 02 N/A - 324
304 SS
5 355334 TEE, PIPE, 150#, 3/4", FPT 2.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 N/A - 325
304 SS
5 M012499 CPLG, STD, 1-1/2FPT 1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 326
304 SS
5 628047 SWITCH, OIL TEMPERATURE

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 628047 1 327
AND LEVEL
5 613840 FITTING, 1/2 MPT x 1/2

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 328
COMPRESSION THRU
5 613841 FITTING, 1/4 FPT x 1/2

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 N/A - 329
COMPRESSION
5 M029245 BSHG, HX, 1 1/2MPT x 1/2FPT 1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 330
304 SS
5 613879 TUBE, 1/2 OD x 18 GA WALL x

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 331
6"
304 SS
5 613842 FITTING, 1/2 MPT x 1/2

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 332
COMPRESSION 90
5 355480 TEE, PIPE, RED, 150#, 1-1/2" x

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 333
1-1/2"x 3/4", FPT
304 SS
5 356885 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 1-1/2 x

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 12 N/A - 334
CLOSE, MPT
304L SS
5 360188 UNION, PIPE, 1000#, 3/4", FPT 2.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 13 N/A - 335
BOM NUMBER: 628046

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, LEVEL/SWITCH DRAWING NUM: 628046
304 SS
5 356889 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 1-1/2 x

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 N/A - 336
3-1/2, MPT
304L SS
5 358088 CPLG, PIPE, RED, 150#, 1-1/2"

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 N/A - 337
x3/4", FPT
304 SS
5 356306 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 3/4 x

3.0 54.0 EA 0.00 KG 16 N/A - 338
CLOSE, MPT
304L SS
5 356316 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 3/4 x 6,

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 17 N/A - 339
MPT
304L SS
5 356314 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40, 3/4 x 5,

2.0 36.0 EA 0.20 KG 18 N/A - 340
MPT
304L SS
5 50051B100F VALVE BALL 3/4" 1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 19 50051B100 B 341
BRONZE
5 358793 BSHG, PIPE, HEX, 3/4" x 1/2",

1.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 20 N/A - 342
NPT
304 SS
JOBMATL NOTES:
BOM NUMBER: 540109

DESCRIPTION: ASSY GENERAL ERECTION, CENTER BEARING DRAWING NUM: 540109
4 540113 ASSY, SLIP RING, TXXT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 540113 B 346
4 540093 ASSY, CENTER BEARING, 84" 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 540093 C 363
4 540126 FASTENER LIST

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 540126 A 393
(GEN-ERECTION_TXXT)
4 540104 PAD, SLIDE 4.0 36.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 540104 A 394
NYLOIL-MDX
4 540105 PLATE, SLIDING 1.0 9.0 EA 110.00 LB 10 540105 A 395
304 SS
4 540125 PAD, SLIDE 2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 12 540125 A 396
NYLOIL-MDX
4 540121 SHIM, SLOTTED, 5" x 5" x 1

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 540121 3 397
9/16" SLOT
18-8 SS
JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 29673 (REV A) - INITIAL RELEASE
EN 29997 (REV B) - FIELD WELDING ADDED
FOR LADDER BRACKETS. ITEM 11 REMOVED.
EN 31055 (REV C) - NOTE 11 ADDED.
EN 56178 (REV 4) - ITEM 7 REMOVED. (540098)
BOM NUMBER: 540113

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, SLIP RING, TXXT DRAWING NUM: 540113
5 540115 COLUMN, SLIP RING 1.0 9.0 EA 2,262.00 K 01 540115 B 347
A36 STL
5 540117 GUARD, FRONT/ACCESS

1.0 9.0 EA 40.00 KG 02 540117 A 348
COVER
MS
5 540118 COVER, REAR 1.0 9.0 EA 41.00 KG 03 540118 A 349
MS
5 540116 SUPPORT, SLIP RING 4.0 36.0 EA 10.00 KG 05 540116 A 350
A36 STL
5 540114 COMPONENTS, SLIP RING 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 540114 A 351
5 1076546-01 BAR, MOUNTING 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 1076546 1 352
A36 STL
5 1060536-01 COVER, ACCESS HOUSING 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 1060536 1 353
POLYCARBONATE
5 1060435-01 GASKET, DOOR 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 1060435 1 354
NEOP
5 903130A PLATE, LUBE SPECIFICATION,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.19 KG 10 903130 9 355
INSTRUCTION
SS
ITEM NOTES:
Replaces 48743A.
5 49047A SIGN DANGER MULTIPLE

1.0 9.0 EA 0.05 KG 11 49047 A 356
POWER SUPPLY
S.S. 22 GA
5 566867-08 NAMEPLATE, LEGEND

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 12 566867 7 357
THICKENER
302 SS
5 540102 FASTENER LIST,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 540102 A 358
(SLIP_RING_ASSY)
BOM NUMBER: 540113

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, SLIP RING, TXXT DRAWING NUM: 540113
5 88721C SEAL, LIP 32.0 288.0 FT 0.00 KG 15 88721DV F 359
NEOP/PARAFFIN
5 88556C BANDING, 1/2 x.017x 100', W/O

32.0 288.0 FT 0.10 KG 17 88556 4 360
CLAMP
SS
5 F50245 CLAMP, WORM DRIVE, 3/8 4.0 36.0 EA 0.02 KG 18 N/A - 361
304 SS
ITEM NOTES:
Replaces 88555A & 46713CH.
JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 29673 (REV A) INITIAL RELEASE
BOM NUMBER: 540093

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CENTER BEARING, 84" DRAWING NUM: 540093
5 540094 HOUSING, BEARING, 84" 1.0 9.0 EA 2,282.00 K 01 540094 A 364
A36 STL
5 540096 GIRDER, BEARING COVER 1.0 9.0 EA 2,281.00 K 02 540096 A 365
A36 STL
5 540095 YOKE, CAGE ATTACH 8.0 72.0 EA 405.00 KG 03 540095 A 366
5 540108 ASSY, OIL DRAIN/GAUGE 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 540108 A 367
5 521944 BEARING, BALL, 84" 1.0 9.0 EA 3,900.00 L 05 521944 A 381
5 540097 PAD, BEARING 8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 540097 A 382
304 SS
5 540100 PLATE WASHER 16.0 144.0 EA 1.50 LB 09 540100 A 383
304 SS
NEOP/PARAFFIN
5 88556C BANDING, 1/2 x.017x 100', W/O

27.0 243.0 FT 0.10 KG 17 88556 4 385
CLAMP
SS
NEOP/PARAFFIN
5 88556C BANDING, 1/2 x.017x 100', W/O

20.0 180.0 FT 0.10 KG 19 88556 4 387
CLAMP
SS
5 540099 SHIM SET, (8), LEVELING 8.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 23 540099 A 388
304 SS
5 85471C PLUG, SQ HD, VENTED, 1/2NPT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.03 KG 24 85471 (STELLANT 2 389
(CI/CS/MI)
5 540106 FASTENER LIST,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 540106 3 390
(CENTER_ASSY)
5 F50245 CLAMP, WORM DRIVE, 3/8 2.0 18.0 EA 0.02 KG 29 N/A - 391
BOM NUMBER: 540093

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CENTER BEARING, 84" DRAWING NUM: 540093
304 SS
ITEM NOTES:
Replaces 88555A & 46713CH.
JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 29673 (REV A) - INITIAL RELEASE
BOM NUMBER: 540108

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, OIL DRAIN/GAUGE DRAWING NUM: 540108
6 F10807 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 N/A - 368
1-1/2NPTx2-1/2"
BLK
6 F10633 ELL, 90, STD, 1-1/2 FPT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 N/A - 369
MI
6 RAW MATERIALRAW
1 MATERIAL REQUIRED 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 N/A - 370
JOBMATL NOTES:
PIPE, SCH 40, 1-1/2MPTx18"(TOE), BLK
6 F11166 UNION, PIPE, STD, 1-1/2FPT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 371
MI
6 F10805 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40,

2.0 18.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 N/A - 372
1-1/2MPTx3
BLK
6 F12917 TEE, PIPE, STD, 1-1/2FPT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 373
MI
6 RAW MATERIALRAW
2 MATERIAL REQUIRED 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 374
JOBMATL NOTES:
PIPE, SCH 40, 1-1/2MPTx6-3/4", BLK
6 F10025 CAP, STD, 1-1/2 FPT 1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 375
MI
6 M017770 NIPPLE, PIPE, SCH 40,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 376
1-1/2MPTx7
BLK
6 F11158 TEE, PIPE, STD, 1-1/2x1-1/2x1/2"

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 377
FPT
MI
6 85779K COCK, SQ HD, SCREWED,

1.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 12 85779 B 378
1-1/2x125PSI
BRZ
BOM NUMBER: 540108

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, OIL DRAIN/GAUGE DRAWING NUM: 540108
6 88931J GAUGE, OIL, ELBOW 1.0 9.0 EA 0.13 KG 13 88931 A 379
BRASS
JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 29673 (REV A) INITIAL RELEASE
BOM NUMBER: 680254

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, ELECTRICAL, TOP LEVEL, TRACTION DRAWING NUM: 680254
JOBMATL NOTES:
650888 PANEL, CONTROL, TRACTION THICKENER, TRACTOR
650889 DIAGRAM, WIRING, TRACTION THICKENER,TRACTOR
650890 PANEL, CONTROL, TRACTION THICKENER, BRIDGE
650891 DIAGRAM, WIRING, TRACTION THICKENER, BRIDGE
650892 PANEL, CONTROL, TRACTION THCKENER, MOTOR STARTER
650893 DIAGRAM, WIRING, TRACTION THICKENER, MOTOR STARTER
680249 METER, TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER, 4-20MA HART
680250 METER, PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
680251 METER, TURBIDITY TRANSMITTER WITH SENSOR, 4-20MA HART
680252 METER, TRANSMITTER WITH SENSOR, FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
680263 SENSOR, INDUCTIVE PROXMITY
656928 SPECIFICATION, HEAT TRACE CABLE
3 650888 PANEL, CONTROL, TRACTION

3.0 3.0 EA 281.00 KG 18 650888 8 402
THICKENER TRACTOR
NEMA 4X SS
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 650889
3 650890 PANEL, CONTROL, TRACTION

3.0 3.0 EA 59.00 KG 19 650890 8 403
THICKENER BRIDGE
NEMA 4X (IP66) - SS
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 650891
3 650892 PANEL, STARTER, TRACTION

3.0 3.0 EA 454.00 KG 20 650892 7 404
THICKENER MOTOR STARTER
NEMA 4X -SS
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 650893
3 680249 METER, TEMPERATURE,

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 21 680249 1 405
TRANSMITTER 4-20MA HART,
0-100°C
316 SS
BOM NUMBER: 680254

DESCRIPTION: ASSY, ELECTRICAL, TOP LEVEL, TRACTION DRAWING NUM: 680254
3 680250 METER, PRESSURE

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 22 680250 3 406
TRANSMITTER
3 680251 METER, TURBIDITY

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 23 680251 1 407
TRANSMITTER
3 678585 TRANSMITTER, LEVEL, HACK

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 24 678585 1 408
SLUDGE
ITEM NOTES:
4 PC KIT = PROBE, CONTROLLER, MOUNT & POWER CORD
3 656928B POWER CONNECTOR 160.0 160.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 656928 2 409
3 680263 SENSOR, INDUCTIVE

6.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 680263 1 410
PROXIMITY
3 656928 CABLE, HEAT TRACE,

156.0 156.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 656928 2 411
SPECIFICATION
3 656928C END CONNECTOR 160.0 160.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 656928 2 412
3 656928D HEAT TRACE PANEL 12.0 12.0 EA 0.00 KG 29 656928 2 413
3 684285 TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC

3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 30 684285 1 414
LEVEL
JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 62282 (REV 1) - INITIAL RELEAS
ECN 63022 (REV 2) - ITEMS 21 THRU 24, 26 & 27.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS 7 THRU 10, 12 & 13 ADDED,
ECN 65637 (REV 3) - ADDITIONAL HEAT TRACE COMPONENTS.
ITEM 24 P/N WAS 680252. ITEMS 25, 28 & 29 ADDED.
ECN 66336 (REV 4) - ITEM 30 ADDED. (REVISED PER P&ID)
Table of Contents
ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE
CSP0000750-01
125M TXXT Thickener Eng & Components
1
665215
ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION
3
654092
ASSY, RAIL SYSTEM
5
664671
ASSY, SUBMERGED STEEL,
6
664688-01
ASSY, COLUMN, LOWER
12
665205
ASSY, SUPERSTRUCTURE,
13
665688
ASSY, FEED PIPE ERECTION, Ø125M X 3M
17
668357
ASSY, FEEDWELL, AND FEEDWELL WALKWAY
20
670585
ASSY, FLOCCULANT PIPING ERECTION,
25
664693
ASSY, LAUNDER
27
653029
ASSY, MASTER LEVEL, TRACTION DRIVE
28
653021
ASSY, DRIVE COMPLETE, TRACTION DRIVE
29
653022
ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION, DRIVE COMPLETE
31
653023
ASSY, TRACTOR, TXXT THICKENER
32
BAP0099-136
ASSY, GREASE LINE
38
628046
ASSY, LEVEL/SWITCH
39
540109
ASSY GENERAL ERECTION, CENTER BEARING
41
540113
ASSY, SLIP RING, TXXT
42
540093
ASSY, CENTER BEARING, 84"
44
540108
ASSY, OIL DRAIN/GAUGE
46
680254
ASSY, ELECTRICAL, TOP LEVEL, TRACTION
48
FLSmidth Sales Order: CSP0000750-01
Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL)
RSPL Codes
2 – Recommended Spare Parts – Two (2) Years
Quantities listed on the recommended spare parts list
(RSPL) are the total for one unit. For recommendations
for quantities to be maintained on site, contact FLSmidth
Customer Service, referring to the “Offices” page in this
manual.
FLSmidth Sales Order: CSP0000750-01
Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL)
RSPL Codes
2 – Recommended Spare Parts – Two (2) Years
Quantities listed on the recommended spare parts list
(RSPL) are the total for one unit. For recommendations
for quantities to be maintained on site, contact FLSmidth
Customer Service, referring to the “Offices” page in this
manual.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO. DRAWING NO.
NOTES: REFERENCE DRAWINGS
A A
1 All components to be manufactured in compliance with FLSMIDTH workmanship standard ES0001. 100 " GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 643049
101 " FOUNDATION LAYOUT 643050
2 102 " 125m DIAMETER TAILINGS THICKENER

643051
PIPING AND INSTRUMENT DIAGRAM

103 " TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR CONTROL
650888
PANEL ARRANGEMENT
B TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR CONTROL
B
104 " WIRING DIAGRAM 650889
105 " TRACTION THICKENER BRIDGE CONTROL

650890
PANEL ARRANGEMENT
106 " TRACTION THICKENER BRIDGE CONTROL
650891
WIRING DIAGRAM
TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR MOTOR
107 " STARTER PANEL ARRANGEMENT 650892
C 108 " TRACTION THICKENER TRACTOR DRIVE

650893 C
MOTOR WIRING
109 " RAIL HEATER WIRING DIAGRAM 650898
110
111
D 112 D
113
114
SPECIFICATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
E 1 200 " FLS WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS ES0001 E
ITP FOR STRUCTURAL " FABRICATION "

F82403SLC"
201 " COATINGS (GENERAL PURPOSE) CSP0000750"01
2 202 " MECH PAINT 665216 665216
203
204
F F
205
ASSEMBLIES
4 300 3 ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION 665215 665215
301
G G
302
303
304
305
H H
306
307
308
309
I
I
PARTS
4 400 3 CONNECTION & FASTENER LIST 665203 665203
401
402
J 403 J
404
405
406
K 407 K
408
409
410
L 411 L
412
413
SPARES
500
M M
501
503
N 4 MBR MDA 29"Arp"2013 ECN #58844 " ADDED ITEM 300 & 400
N
3 MBR MDA 18"Mar"2013 ECN #57494 " ADDED PRE"RELEASE ITEMS 4, 5 & 6
2 MBR MDA 08"Mar"2013 ECN #57250 " REMOVED NOTE 2, ADDED ITEM 202, ADDED PRE"
RELEASE ITEMS 2 & 3
1 MBR
MBR MDA
MDA 13"Dec"2012
13"Dec"2012 Initial Release
O Drawn
Drawn Appr.
Appr. Appr. Date
Date Zone/Description
Zone/Description O
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.: " ""
P

P
TOP LEVEL
1 25m DIA X 3.0m S.W.D.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISO"E Based on:

ISO "A
PROJECT NAME: ORGANIC GROWTH PROJECT 1
LOCATION: LAGUNA SECA, ANTOFAGASTA, CHILE

Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing:
Sheet 1 of 1
CUSTOMER:
MINERA ESCONDIDA LTDA
Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q
CUSTOMER PO: 25713"220"POA"MLGT"00001 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
CONSULTING ENGINEER:
BECHTEL
No.: Content
EQUIPMENT:
SERIAL NUMBER:
125m DIA "TXXT" THICKENER
CSP0000750"01A, "01B & "01 C

CSP0000750"01 Rev.:
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
4 2
4 2
2 4
3 2
2
5
8
8 2
8
2
9
8
2
5 6
5 6
7
2 7
4 2
2
2
4 5
3 3
2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ITEM QTY. DESCRIPTION PART NO. DRAWING NO.
NOTES: REFERENCE DRAWINGS
A A
1 All components to be manufactured in compliance with FLSMIDTH workmanship standard ES0001.

1
2 Unless other wise specified (as noted below) paint shall be per FLSMIDTH 653037-01 (Non Submerged)
2
All sub-vendor manufacturer supplied items shall have the manufacturers' standard coating system.
3
This includes, but is not limited to: all pumps, gear reducers, electrical motors, bearings, heaters, valves,
B 4 B
instruments, and control panels. The following surfaces shall not be painted unless specified otherwise:
stainless steel, plastic, ceramic and machined surfaces.

5
SPECIFICATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
C 2 7 Paint Specification 653037 C
DRIVE CONTROL TYPE:

1 8 FLS WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS ES0001
LOAD CELL ITP for Structural - Fabrication - Coatings

F82403SLC-
9
(General Purpose) CSP0000750-01
10
D D
11
12
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
13
E E
PARTS / ASSEMBLIES
14 3 TXXT DRIVE UNIT - COMPLETE 653021 653021
15 3 GENERAL ERECTION, CENTER ASSEMBLY 540109 540109
16
F F
17
18
19
G 20 G
21
22
23
H 24 H
SPARES
25
APPROXIMATE TOTAL WEIGHT: 140,190 KG

I I
J J
1 DSB
DSB MK
MK 08-Oct-12
Initial Release
08-Oct-12
Drawn
Drawn Appr.
Appr.
Appr. Date
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.: ---

L MASTER LEVEL, TRACTION DRIVE

L
CSP0000750-01
TXXT THICKENER
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISO-E Based on: 613929 ISO-A
Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: Sheet 1 of 1
FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
M permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved. M
No.: Content
653029 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Reference Drawings and Information
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL DRAWING NO. WEIGHT
PART NO. (kgs)
Item Description
Parts list or
DWG
1
1
ERECTION, DRIVE CARRIAGE, TYPE TXXT DRIVE UNIT
653022
653022 34,621
A 1 Torque Specifications
114808 2
1
GREASE LINE ASSEMBLY BAP0099136
BAP0099136
1 A
2 FLS Workmanship Standards

ES0001 3
1 NAMEPLATE, PATENT NUMBER 49002A
49002
4
1
NAMEPLATE, LEGEND THICKENER
56686708
566867
5
1
NAMEPLATE, FLSMIDTH
20799A
20799
6
3
SIGN, WARNING, SPANISH 76295A348A 76295A348
7
1
PLATE, INSTRUCTION, SS
84640A 84640
B 10 6
TAPPING SCREW, HX HD, F, #1032X1/2" 316SS M016244
B
11
16 TAPPING SCREW, HX HD, F, 1/420X1/2
316SS M023569
12
2 LEVEL SWITCH/DRAIN ASSEMBLY
628046
628046
C C
D Notes: D
1 Refer to the top level drawing for the FLSmidth "Workmanship Standard".
All components to be manufactured in compliance with this specification.
2 Nameplate serial number: CSP000075001A/01B/01C.
E 3 Coat all machined surfaces with LPS #3. E
4 Protect all seal surfacesas required prior to paint.
5 package as required for safe shipment.
6 At 100% torque load, force on load cell is 6,971 lbs.
1 DSB
DSB MK
MK 08Oct12
08Oct12 Initial Revision
F 7 Drive Data:
F
Drawn
Drawn Appr.
Appr.
Appr. Date
Zone/Description
(2) 50HP (460V, 3PH, 50Hz), VFD rated, .02 .08 RPM
10,000,000 ftlbs torque @ 0.04 RPM

5,000,000 ftlbs torque @ 0.08 RPM
8,500,000 ftlbs cutout torque

Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
G

G
ASSY, DRIVE COMPLETE, TRACTION DRIVE
CSP000075001
TXXT THICKENER
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISOE Based on: 613930 ISOA
H
FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
H
No.: Content
653021 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WT.
(KG)
1 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 5/8/ 11 x 1.5 GR 5 301335 0
A
SECTION A/A SECTION B/B 2 8 CAPSCR, HEX, 5/8/11 x 2.75 GR 5 301340 0 A
41 47 38
SECTION E/E
3 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 5/8/11 x 2 GR 5 301337 0
39 4 10 CAPSCR, HEX, 1/2/13 x 2 GR 5 301039 0
5 1 CAPSCR, HEX, 1/2/13 x 1.25 GR 5 301036 0
40 6 8 NUT, HEX, 1/2/13 GR 5 308005 0
43
42
42
7 4 NUT, HEX, 3/8/16 GR 5 308004 0
B 20 13 8 12 NUT, HEX, 5/8/11 GR 5 308007 0 B
31 43
9 48 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 10 308151 0
25 10 8 CAPSCR, HEX, 1 /1/4/7 X 4", FULL THRD GR5 614598 7.2
64
11 16 WSHR, HRD, AN, 1 /1/2 F436 307014 0
71 71 12 3 WSHR, HRD, AN, 1/2 F436 307005 0
59 64
13 12 WSHR, HRD, AN, 3/8 F436 307003 0
C C
14 12 WSHR, HRD, AN, 5/8 F436 307007 0
30 15 48 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 307149 0
37 16 24 CAPSCR, HEX, 1/4/20 x 0.5 GR 5 300001 0
39
44
17 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8/16 x 2.5 GR 5 300735 0
8 14 2 45 18 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8/16 x 0.5 GR 5 300727 0
40
19 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8/16 x 1.75 GR 5 ZNC 300772 0
D D
19 13 20 4 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8/16 x 1.25 GR 5 ZNC 300770 0
57 4 13 21 8 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8/16 x 0.75 GR 5 300728 0
24 64 22 34 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 100 CL 10.9 301901 3.4
23 14 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 120 CL 10.9 301903 1.4
E
24 1 TRACTOR FRAME WELDMENT A36 STL 672606 672606 7966
E
25 2 WHEEL, MAIN DRIVE STL 672604 672604 1252.8 E
26 2 REDUCER, IN/LINE, PLANETARY, BONFIGLIOLI 672611 672611 941.2
27 2 AXLE, TRACTOR CrMo 672607 672607 641.8
28 2 TORQUE ARM A36 STL 540722 540722 286.4
30 2 MOUNT, BELT GUARD & MOTOR STL 672601 672601 226.4
31 2 MOUNT, GUARD, BELT, MAIN A36 STL 672600 672600 11.4
F A F
A
32 2 PULLEY, TIMING, 14MM, 44T STL 593677 593677 23
33 2 PULLEY, TIMING, 14MM, 48T 593678 593678 33.8
34 2 GUARD, BELT, MAIN DRIVE A36 STL 672598 672598 37.8
35 2 BELT, SYNCHRONOUS, 2100/14M/55 RUBBER 672597 672597 4.6
36 2 COVER, BELT, STL A36 STL 672599 672599 10.4
18
70 37 1 SAND SPREADER STL 672612 672612 7.4
G 38 1 SAND SCREW 304 SS 672625 672625 5
G
28 39 2 PLATE, SPACER, BEARING A36 STL 672608 672608 0.4
E 72
40 2 BEARING, FLANGED, 4/BOLT, DODGE 672609 672609 0.2
22 15 9
41 1 RING, FELT FELT 672613 672613 0
26 B B 42 1 BUSHING, 2012, 1" BORE 86144L 86144 0.7
43 1 SPROCKET, 45T, ASA50 85914AD 85914 2.9
H H
44 1 SPROCKET, 16T, ASA50 85914F 85914 0.3

45 1 BUSHING, 1610, 1" BORE 85844N 85844 0.3
47 1 LID, SAND HOPPER A36 STL 672621 672621 19.2
48 4 ROD END BEARING SM049A49A SM049A49 4
49 48 67 48 49 4 PIN A36 STL SM049A68A SM049A68 2
50 1 PIVOT FRAME A36 STL 672626 672626 10.1
I
49 77 74 I
51 1 FRAME PIVOT PIN 4140 STL 672614 672614 1.3

69
52 1 BRACKET, ZERO SPEED SENSOR A36 STL 672605 672605 78.1
53 2 BEARING,FLANGED, 4/BOLT, DODGE 672610 672610 0.6
54 1 DRIVE CONTROL AXLE 4140 STL SM049B65A SM049B65 3.8
55 1 WHEEL, ZERO SPEED SENSOR

STL 672603 672603 138.8
DERLIN,
J 56 2 SPACER, WHEEL, DRIVE CONTROL WHITE

672615 672615 0 J
57 2 SENSOR BRACKET, DRIVE SHAFT STL 542366 542366 1.2
58 1 SENSOR BRACKET, DRIVE CONTROL STL SM049B43A SM049B43 1
59 2 KEYLESS BUSHING, B/LOC 672628 672628 151.6
21
61 1 CONNECTING LINK, ROLLER CHAIN, ASA50 86605F 86605 0
62 8 COTTER PIN, 1/4 X 1 1/2 316SS M017567 0
K 33 K
13 7 17 63 16 CAPSCR, HEX, 1 1/2/6 x 5.5 GR 5 303221 17.6

64 16 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 110 CL 8.8 301527 0
23 35 65 2 BEARING, SPLIT HSG, 8" BORE, EXP 613927 613927 570
14 8 3 66 2 BEARING, SPLIT HSG, 8" BORE 613926 613926 570
32 67 2 LOAD CELLK, 20K, TRACTION DRIVE SS SM049A48A SM049A48 6
36 34 73
68 2 SETSCREW, SKT HDLS, CP PT, 3/8/16X3/4 304SS M014432 N/A 0
L 16 L
69 1 CHAIN GUARD, SANDER A36 STL 653027 653027 12.1

70 1 REDUCER, RIGHT ANGLE STL 653026 653026 30.5
71 1 CHAIN, ROLLER, ASA50 86603F 86603 0
72 1 MOTOR, 1/2HP, 145TC 653028 653028 20.4
54
73 2 MOTOR, 50HP, 460/3/50, 1500 RPM 653030 653030 568
M 37 Total weight: 14698 kg M
44 12 5 58 53 55 52
45
N N
1 DSB
DSB MK
MK 08/Oct/12
08/Oct/12 Initial Revision
O Drawn
Drawn Appr.
Appr. Appr. Date
Zone/Description O
56

4 6 Language
66 Scale: N/A Rev.: / //
63 11
65

50 1 51 1
NOTES:

CSP0000750/01
P 27 P
10 25
ASSY, TRACTOR
1. PRIOR TO WELDING HEATER FRAME, POSITION FRAME TANGENT TO AND CENTERED ON DRIVE

RAIL TOWARD REAR WHEEL ALLOWING SUFFICIENT CLEARANCE FOR RAKE ARM
TXXT THICKENER
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISO/E Based on: 672622 ISO /A
Q FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
Q
No.: Content
653023 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WT.
(KG)
1 16 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4+10 x 1.75 GR 5 301657 1.6
A 2 16 NUT, HEX, 3/4+10 GR 5 308008 0 A
3 36 NUT, HEX, 3/8+16 GR 5 308004 0
4 36 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/8+16 x 1.25 GR 5 300730 0
5 1 BASIC DRIVE ASSEMBLY, TXXT 653023 653023 14698
6 1 PLATFORM, DRIVE STL 653024 653024 1242.9
7 1 GRATING, PLATFORM STL 653025 653025 1279.1
B 8 9 WEIGHT PLATE, LONG A36 STL 613923 613923 5138.1 B
9 18 WEIGHT PLATE, SHORT A36 STL 613924 613924 8510.4
10 1 TOP PLATE, TRACTOR A36 STL 613925 613925 3499.9
11 16 WSHR, HRD, AN, 3/4 F436 307008 0
12 36 WSHR, HRD, AN, 3/8 F436 307003 0
C Total weight: 34373 kg C
10
5 3 SIDES
12[.50]
4 3 12
D D
HANDRAIL TO PLATFORM
E E
F F
G G
H 1 2 11
H
6
7 PLATFORM TO TRACTOR FRAME
I I
8 9
9
J J
K K
L L
M M
N N
1 DSB
DSB MK
MK 08+Oct+12
08+Oct+12 Initial Revision
O Drawn
Drawn Appr.
Appr. Appr. Date
Zone/Description O
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.: +++
P

CSP0000750+01 P
ASSY, GENERAL ERECTION, DRIVE CARRIAGE
TXXT THICKENER
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISO+E Based on: 672623 ISO+A
Q FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
Q
No.: Content
653022 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
REVISION ECN BY CHECK'D DATE
A1
ORIGINAL S.O. DO NOT SCALE PRINTS
TORQUE VALUES FOR

REF. FROM ---
DATE 1 -8-81
MACHINERY CONNECTIONS FOR
SHEET 1 OF 2
DRAWN GBH REV
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS DWG.
114808
CHCK'D JKM
NO.
A1
REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 2 OF
2 114808 4
FLS Recommended Spare Parts List
(RSPL)
Equipment Number:
csp0000750-01
Description:
125M TXXT Thickener Eng & Components
Revision Number:
4
Drawing Number:
CSP0000750-01
Drawing
RSPL
Quantity
Unit of
Item Description
Number
Code
Per Unit
Measure
670585 ASSY, FLOCCULANT PIPING ERECTION
87891J GASKET, FF FLG, 13-1/2x8-5/8x1/8 87891 2 5.00 EA
Date: 8/8/2013 Page 1 of 1
TAB 1
INDUSTRY PROCESS
AND AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS
Technical Bulletin
Guidelines for selection of planetary gear units of the 300-

INDUSTRIAL series for installation in hazardous areas, classified
byDirective 99/92/EC
300
1.0 - SCOPE OF DOCUMENT 2
2.0 - INTRODUCTION TO THE ATEXDIRECTIVES 2
3.0 - USE, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE 4
4.0 - PECULIARITIES OF 300 SERIES GEAR UNITS COMPLIANT WITH DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC 4
4.0.1 - PRODUCT AVAILABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.0.2 - CONSTRUCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.0.3 - OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.0.4 - SELECTING THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.0 - ORDERING NUMBERS 8
5.0.1 - DESIGNATION OF IN-LINE (300 L) AND RIGHT ANGLE (300 R) GEAR UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.0.2 - DESIGNATION OF COMBINED WORM+PLANETARY (3/V) GEAR UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.0 - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 14
Revisions
Refer to page 14 for the catalogue revision index.
Visit www.bonfiglioli.com to search for catalogues with up-to-date revisions.
1.0 - SCOPE OF DOCUMENT
This Technical Bulletin serves as an aid for the selection of 300 series planetary gear units intended
for installation in explosion risk areas, classified according to Directive 1999/92/EC.
This Technical Bulletin is an integral part of the 300-IND series catalogue, code 1900, and subsequent
revisions, and has the following scope:
• describes the constructional characteristics of gear units conforming to the “ATEX” Directive
94/9/EC, where they differ from those of standard construction gear units - see par. 4.0.2.
• specifies the selection criteria approved by the Manufacturer to ensure that said gear units ope-
rate in compliance with the minimum safety requirements stipulated by Directive 94/9/EC – see
par. 4.0.4.
2.0 - INTRODUCTION TO THE ATEXDIRECTIVES
Under the provisions of Directive 94/9/EC, an explosive atmosphere is defined as a mixture:
a) of flammable substances, whether gas, vapour, mist or dust;
b) with air;
c) in certain atmospheric conditions;
d) in which, following ignition, combustion spreads to the entire unburned mixture (note that in the case of
dust, the entire quantity of dust is not always completely burnt after combustion).
An atmosphere which may potentially be transformed into an explosive atmosphere due to operating and/or
ambient conditions is defined as a potentially explosive atmosphere. The products governed by Directive
94/9/EC are intended for use only in a potentially explosive atmosphere defined in this way.
European harmonised ATEXstandards
The European Union has issued two harmonisation guidelines in the area of health and safety. Directive
94/9/EC stipulates the minimum safety requirements for products intended for use in explosion risk areas
within the member countries of the European Union. The directive also assigns such equipment to catego-
ries, which are defined by the directive itself.
Directive 1999/92/EC defines the minimum health and safety requirements for the workplace, for working
conditions and for the handling of products and materials in explosion risk areas. The directive also divides
the workplace into zones and defines the criteria for the application of product categories in said zones.
The following table describes the zones into which the user of a plant, in which an explosive atmosphere
may occur, is required to divide the equipment application areas.
Zones
Gaseous
Dusty
Formation frequency of a potentially
Type of
atmosphere
atmosphere
explosive atmosphere
danger
G
D
0
20 Present continuously or for long periods Permanent
1 21 Likely to occur in normal operation occasionally Potential
Not likely to occur in normal operation but if it does
2 22 Minimal
occur will persist for short period only
BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI gear units selected in this catalogue are suitable for installation in zones 1,
21, 2 and 22, as highlighted in grey in the above table.
As from 1 July 2003 the ATEX directives came into force throughout the entire European Union, and replace
existing conflicting national and European laws on explosive atmospheres.
The directives apply to mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment.
Levels of protection for the various categories of equipment
The various categories of equipment must be able to operate in conformity with the Manufacturer’s operatio-
nal specifications, at certain defined levels of protection.
Category
Protection
Type of protection Operating conditions
level
Group
Group
I
II
Two independent means of protec-

The equipment remains
powered
tion or safety capable of operating
Very high M1
and operational even in the presen-
even when two independent faults
ce of an explosive atmosphere
occur
Two independent means of protec-

The equipment remains
powered
tion or safety capable of operating
Very high 1
and operational in zones 0, 1, 2 (G)
even when two independent faults
and/or zones 20, 21, 22 (D)
occur
Power to the equipment is shut off
Protection suitable for normal ope-

High M2 in the presence of a potentially ex-
ration and heavy duty conditions
plosive atmosphere
Protection suitable for normal opera- The equipment remains

powered
High 2
tion and frequent faults or equipment
and operational in zones 1, 2 (G)
in which malfunction is normal.

and/or zones 21, 22 (D)
The
equipment remains
powered
Protection suitable for normal ope-

Normal 3 and operational
in zones
2 (G)
ration
and/or 22 (D)
Definition of groups (EN 1127-1)
Group I Applies to equipment intended for use underground in parts of mines and those parts of surface
installations of such mines, liable to be endangered by firedamp and/or combustible dust.
Group II Applies to equipment intended for use in other places liable to be endangered by explosive at-
mospheres.
The areas highlighted in grey indicate the only categories in which BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI products may
be used. BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI products may not therefore be installed in mines, classified in Group I.
To summarise, the classification of equipment into groups, categories and zones is illustrated in the table be-
low, where the availability of BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI products is highlighted in grey.
I II
Group
mines, firedamp other potentially explosive areas (gas, dust)
Category M1 M2 1 2 3
(1)
Atmosphere G D G D G D
Zone 0 20 1 21 2 22
Type of protection
c, k c, k c, k c, k
gear unit(2)
(1)
G = gas
D = dust
(2)
as per EN 13463
3.0 - USE, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
The instructions for safe storage, handling and use of the product are given in the unit’s User,
Installation and Service Manual.
This document must be kept in a suitable place, in the vicinity of the installed gear unit, as a refe-
rence for all persons authorised to work with or on the product throughout its service life.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to modify, supplement or improve the Manual, in the interests of the
User.
4.0 - PECULIARITIES OF 300 SERIES GEAR UNITS COMPLIANT WITH
DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
4.0.1 - PRODUCT AVAILABILITY
Frame sizes : 300 to 321.
3...L 3...R 3/V
st. st. st.
Configurations L 1 - - - - - -
300...321 L 2 300...306 R 2 - - -
300...321 L 3 300...321 R 3 300...307 L 3
300...321 L 4 300...321 R 4 L 4
Agitator
Foot mount Flange mount Shaft mount

(vertical)
Versions
PC PZ MC/HC MZ/HZ FZ FP VK
Inputs
P(IEC) V_
Accessories
P... B0A M0A G0A W0A
4.0.2 - CONSTRUCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
• Only synthetic lubricants are used.
• Only VITON®gaskets are used.
• Oil seals are equipped with dust lips.
• Vent plugs are equipped with valves with anti-intrusion springs, to prevent contamination of the lubricant
by solid particles.
• Oil filler, drain and level plugs are made from steel and equipped with aluminium lock washers.
• No external metal moving parts in contact with other parts.
• No plastic parts prone to accumulating static charges; if present, such parts are shielded.
• Each gear unit is supplied with an installation drawing indicating the following information:
- main technical characteristics
- installation specifications
- location of oil plugs for the specified mounting position
- lubrication instructions
• The units are fitted with an additional nameplate specifying the product category.
For example:
EC-Cert. No.
EX9 04 07 53387 001
Gearbox compliant with
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC-GROUP II
2G CATEGORY - T4 Temperature
2D CATEGORY - 135° C Temperature
4.0.3 - OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
For installation in zones 21 and 22, the Customer must set out and implement a specific cleaning schedule
for the unit’s surfaces and recesses to prevent build ups of dust exceeding 5 mm in depth.
4.0.4 –SELECTING THE PRODUCT
The gear unit and gearmotor selection procedure is identical to that given in the 300-IND Series catalogue,
article code 1900, and any future revisions thereof.
The following chapters contain variations to the procedure given in the catalogue, code 1900, and subse-
quent revisions thereof as regards the selection of products compliant with Directive 94/9/EC, which super-
sede the procedure specified in the catalogue for units intended for installation in areas without risk of
explosion.
These variations primarily affect the following:
• Application of an adjusting factor to the thermal capacity.
• Application of a service factor « fs » with a greater safety margin.
- Thermal capacity « Pt » [kW]
This value represents the power applicable to the gear unit operating in a continuous duty cycle at an am-
bient temperature of 20 °C, generating a surface temperature no greater than 135 °C and with a Dt in any
case no greater than 95 °C relative to the ambient temperature « ta ».
Should the ambient temperature be different to 20 °C or the input speed « n1 » be different to that specified
in the unit’s technical data charts, the value « Pt » must be recalculated using the adjusting factors for the
specific conditions in question, as given in the table below:
ft n1 (min-1 ) fv
Intermittent duty
750 1.5
ta Continuous
Intermittence ratio
950 1.2
(°C)
duty
« I »
1500 1.0
80% 60% 40% 20%
10 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0
20 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7
30 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5
40 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2
50 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
I= ´ 100 tf = operating time under load;
t f +
tr
tr = rest time.
Configuration
Frame size reductions fEx
in line right angle

300...321 L - 2 0.9
300...321 L - 3-4 1.0
300...306 - R 2 0.8
300...321 - R 3-4 0.9
After application of the above, the following condition should be obtained:
Pr1 £ Pt ´ ft ´ fv ´ fEx
- Service factor « fs »
Service factor « fs »
Accumulated operating hours (h)
Duty Starts/hour £ 5000 10000 15000 25000 50000
Daily operating hours (h)
z h <4 4 <h<8 8 < h < 12 12 < h < 16 16 < h < 24
Z < 10 1.10 1.10 1.15 1.30 1.60
Uniform load 10 < Z < 30 1.10 1.15 1.30 1.50 1.80
30 < Z < 100 1.10 1.25 1.45 1.60 2.00
Z < 10 1.10 1.25 1.45 1.60 2.00
Moderate shock load 10 < Z < 30 1.10 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.20
30 < Z < 100 1.20 1.50 1.70 2.00 2.40
Z < 10 1.20 1.50 1.70 2.00 2.40
Heavy shock load 10 < Z < 30 1.30 1.60 1.80 2.10 2.60
30 < Z < 100 1.40 1.75 2.00 2.30 2.80
5.0 - ORDERING NUMBERS
5.0.1 - DESIGNATION OF IN-LINE (300 L) AND RIGHT ANGLE (300 R) GEAR UNITS
3 11 L 2 16.7 HZ
OUTPUT VERSION
MZ: Splined male shaft MC: Solid keyed shaft
HZ: Heavy duty splined

HC: Heavy duty solid
male shaft keyed shaft
PZ: Foot mounted with

PC: Foot mounted with
splined shaft solid keyed shaft
FZ: Hollow splined shaft VK: Reinforced output with
large solid keyed shaft
for stirrers and mixer
FP: Hollow shaft for
shrink disc
GEAR RATIO
Fill in the value of the gear ratio (including point and decimals) as listed in the selection charts
Ex.: 1/44.6 = 44.6 1/131 = 131
REDUCTIONS
2 - 3 - 4
DESIGN
L = In line R = Right angle
GEARBOX FRAME SIZE
00 = 300
06 = 306
11 = 311
17 = 317
01 = 301
07 = 307
13 = 313
18 = 318
03 = 303
09 = 309
15 = 315
19 = 319
05 = 305
10 = 310
16 = 316
21 = 321
SERIES
P180 A W0A EX ...
OPTIONS
INPUT SHAFT PREFERENTIAL DIRECTION OF ROTATION
(applicable to angle gear units only)
RA= counterclockwise
RO = clockwise
CONFIGURATION COMPLIANT WITH ATEX DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
OUTPUT FITTINGS
P... = Pinions B0A = Splined bar M0A= Sleeve coupling G0A= Shrink disc W0A= Flange
MOUNTING POSITION
INPUT
Input keyed shaft
VO1A= Ø 24
VO1B = Ø 38
VO5B = Ø 48
VO6B = Ø 60
VO7B = Ø 80
V11 B = Ø 80
Electric motor connection
P + motor size (80,90,100,132,160,...)
5.0.2 - DESIGNATION OF COMBINED WORM+PLANETARY(3/V) GEAR UNITS
3/V 05 L 3 623 PC
OUTPUT VERSION
MZ: Splined male shaft MC: Solid keyed shaft
HZ: Heavy duty splined

HC: Heavy duty solid
male shaft keyed shaft
PZ: Foot mounted with

PC: Foot mounted with
splined shaft solid keyed shaft
FZ: Hollow splined shaft
FP: Hollow shaft for
shrink disc
GEAR RATIO
Fill in the value of the gear ratio (including point and decimals) as listed in the selection charts
Es.: 1/773 = 773
REDUCTIONS
DESIGN
L = Combined 300 unit, 2 planetary stages + worm gear units
GEARBOX FRAME SIZE
00 = 3/V 00
06 = 3/V 06
01 = 3/V 01
07 = 3/V 07
03 = 3/V 03
05 = 3/V 05
SERIES
Combined 300 gearboxes /Worm gear units
10
P80 B5 AF W0A EX
CONFIGURATION COMPLIANT WITH ATEX DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
OUTPUT FITTINGS
P... = Pinions B0A = Splined bar M0A = Sleeve coupling
G0A= Shrink disc W0A= Flange
MOUNTING POSITION
MOTOR EXECUTION
B5, B14
INPUT
Electric motor connection
P + motor size (80,90,100,132,160,...)
Input keyed shaft
HS
11
6.0 - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The Declaration of Conformity, of which a copy is given in this Bulletin, attests to the conformity of the pro-
duct with the provisions of Directive 94/9/EC.
Conformity is subordinated to observance of the instructions given in the User, Installation and Service Ma-
nual which specifies the safe use of the product throughout its service life.
The ambient condition specifications are of particular importance inasmuch as failure to observe them during
operation renders the certificate null and void.
In case of doubt regarding the validity of the Declaration of Conformity, contact the BONFIGLIOLI
RIDUTTORI Technical Service.
12
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE (according to EC Directive 94/9/CE Annex VIII)
BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI S.p.A.
declares under its own responsibility that the following products:
- 300 INDUSTRIAL series planetary gear units
in category 2G and 2D to which this certificate refers, are in compliance with the requirements of the following
Directive:
94/9/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL of 23 March 1994
Conformity with the provisions of this Directive is proven by complete compliance to the following Standards:
EN 1127-1, EN 13463-1, prEN 13463-5, prEN 13463-8
BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI filed the documents according to 94/9/EC Annex VIII, with the following notified body:
TÜV PRODUCT SERVICE GmbH- Identification number 0123
Forlì, 27/07/2004
Place and date
Ing. G. Zinzani
R&D Manager
MOBILE EQUIPMENT GEARED UNITS
13
INDEX OF REVISIONS (R)
R1
We reserve the right to implement modifications without notice.
This catalogue cannot be reproduced, even partially, without prior consent.
14 COD. 1276 R1
INDUSTRY PROCESS
300
w w w. b o n fi g l i o l i . c o m
Mobile Equipment
and Wind Energy Solutions
300 series Planetary drives
Torque Range: 1000 ... 450.000 N
Transmissible Mechanical Power: up to 450 kW
Gear Ratios: i=3,4 ... 5.000
Gear Unit Versions
In line
Right angle (with a spiral bevel gear set)
Output Configuration
Foot and flange mounted
Output shaft: solid with key, splined, splined hollow,
hollow with shrink disc
Input Configurations
Flanged axial piston hydraulic motors
Hydraulic orbit motors
IEC and Nema motor adaptors
Solid input shaft
Hydraulic Brake
Hydraulically released parking brake on request
Electric Brake
DC and AC type
Range of ratios
Max.
Max.
Max.
Type Design
Torque
power
input speed
Combined with
Nm kW RPM Inline Right angle

worm gear
300
1000
20
3000
3,4 - 2700
7 - 700
400 - 2300
A
301
1750
30
3000
3,4 - 2700
7 - 700
400 - 2300
A
303
2500
40
3000
3,6 - 2800
9 - 800
400 - 2400
A
305
5000
60
3000
3,6 - 2800
9 - 800
400 - 2400
A
306
8500
75
2500
3,6 - 2900
9 - 800
400 - 2600
A
307
12500
100
2500
3,4 - 2400
13 - 700
400 - 2500
A
309
18500
130
2500
3,4 - 2400
13 - 700
400 - 2500
B
310
25000
150
2000
4 - 2500
40 - 900
400 - 5000
B
311
35000
180
2000
4 - 2100
18 - 800
400 - 5000
B
313
50000
200
2000
4 - 2200
18 - 800
400 - 5000
B
315
80000
250
1500
4 - 1800
70 - 900
400 - 5000
B
316
105000
270
1500
4,4 - 1200
50 - 600
400 - 5000
B
317
150000
300
1000
4 - 1900
70 - 900
400 - 5000
B
318
200000
340
1000
4,4 - 1100
200 - 700
400 - 5000
B
319
300000
380
500
4,8 - 1400
300 - 800
2500 - 5000
B
321
450000
450
300
4,4 - 1100
300 - 800
1000 - 5000
B
DESIGN A
DESIGN B
L1 L2
300 - 307 309 - 321 L4
L5 L3
L1 L2
L3 L4
L5
D5
D6
D4
D4
D5
D4
D1
D4
D6
D2
L6
D1
D3
D2
D3
L6
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
VERSIONS HZ
VERSIONS PC
VERSIONS FZ
VERSIONS FP
VERSIONS HZ
VERSIONS PC
VERSIONS FZ
VERSIONS FP
Dimensions
Type L1
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
2 STAGES
300
110
165
185
40x36 DIN 5482
38
42
168
61
14
50
58
100
301
110
165
185
40x36 DIN 5482
50
42
180
61
14
50
82
132
303
150
195
222
58x53 DIN 5482
60
75
200
83
15
85
105
160
305
150
195
222
58x53 DIN 5482
60
75
230
83
15
85
105
160
306
200
250
280
70x64 DIN 5482
80
90
260
130
40
115
130
180
307
230
295
325
80x74 DIN 5482
90
100
300
162
36
120
170
200
309
278
314
348
80x74 DIN 5482
100
120
215
231
82
245
165
225
310
340
370
400
100x94 DIN 5482
110
130
245
290
95
290
210
250
311
358
390
428
100x94 DIN 5482
120
135
250
320
88
190
210
280
313
385
415
445
120x3 DIN 5480
140
145
310
357
81
235
200
280
315
460
503
542
150x5 DIN 5480
160
180
390
429
98
260
240
315
316
580
625
670
170x5 DIN 5480
180
180
430
275
145
265
260
400
317
560
635
695
200x5 DIN 5480
200
260
470
352
152
318
260
415
318
700
750
800
220x5 DIN 5480
250
220
550
340
155
305
330
500
319
800
880
940
260x5 DIN 5480
280
350
570
470
210
440
380
550
321
940
1020
1100
300x8 DIN 5480
340
390
595
500
250
440
540
650
HEADQUARTERS SALES DEPARTMENT
BONFIGLIOLI RIDUTTORI
Via Giovanni XXIII, 7/A

Via Enrico Mattei,12 - Z.l. Villa Selva
40012 Lippo di Calderara di Reno

47100 Forlì (ITALY)
Bologna (ITALY)
Tel. (+39) 0543 789111
Tel. (+39) 051 6473111

Fax (+39) 0543 789242 - 0543 789245
Fax (+39) 051 6473126

trasmital@bonfiglioli.com
www.bonfiglioli.com
7.998.3.0.07.7 S3
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
AND WIND ENERGY SOLUTIONS
INDUSTRY PROCESS
Installation, use and service manual
300
A T E X
INCLUDED
USE, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.0 - GENERAL INFORMATION 2
1.1 - PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 - PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 - GLOSSARY AND TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 - REQUESTING TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 - MANUFACTURER’S LIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.6 - CONSIGNMENT CONDITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.0 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION 5
2.1 - DESCRIPTION OF THE GEAR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 - CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 - OPERATING LIMITS AND CONDITIONS ................................................................................................... 5
3.0 - SAFETY INFORMATION 6
3.1 - SAFETY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.0 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORT 7
4.1 - PACKAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 - HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.1 - Moving the packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2.2 - Moving the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3 - STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.0 - INSTALLATION 15
5.1 - INSTALLING THE GEAR UNIT ............................................................................................................... 15
5.1.1 - Flanged execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1.2 - Foot mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.1.3 - Shaft mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1.4 - Installing accessories on solid input and output shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2 - INSTALLING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3 - INSTALLING THE HYDRAULIC MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.4 - CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.5 - LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.0 - TESTING THE GEAR UNIT 29
7.0 - USING THE EQUIPMENT 29
8.0 - MAINTENANCE 30
8.1 - ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
8.2 - OIL CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8.3 - CHECKING OPERATIONAL EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.4 - CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
9.0 - REPLACING PARTS 34
9.1 - REMOVING THE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9.2 - DECOMMISSIONING THE GEAR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.0 - TROUBLESHOOTING 35
ANNEX1 - CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL ON ATEX-SPECIFIED GEAR UNITS 36
ANNEX2 - LUBRICANT CHARGE QUANTITY 37
Revisions
The catalogue revision list is given on page 40. The most recent versions of the catalogue are available at www.bonfiglioli.com.
1.0 - GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 - PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
This Manufacturer’s manual provides information regarding the safe transport, handling, installation, mainte-
nance, repair, disassembly and dismantling of the gear unit.
All information for users and designers is given in the Sales Catalogue. As well as adhering to esta-
blished engineering practices, the information given in this manual must be read carefully and rigo-
rously applied.
Failure to observe the information provided herein may result in risks to personal health and safety, as well
as economic damages.
This information, provided in the Manufacturer’s original language (Italian), is also available in other langua-
ges to meet legal and commercial requirements.
The documentation must be stored by a person charged to do so in a suitable location so as to be always
available in good condition for consultation.
In case of loss or damage, replacement documentation must be requested directly from the Manufacturer,
quoting the code of this manual.
This manual reflects the state of the art at the time of commercialisation of the gear unit.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to modify, supplement and improve the manual, without the present pu-
blication being for that reason considered inadequate.
Particularly significant sections of the manual and important specifications are highlighted by symbols whose
meanings are explained below.
SYMBOLS:
DANGER - WARNING
This symbol indicates situations of danger, which if ignored, may result in serious injury to
the operator.
CAUTION - ATTENTION
This symbol indicates the need to adopt specific precautions to avoid personal injury and da-
mage, as well as economic damages.
IMPORTANT
This symbol indicates important technical information.
Instructions marked by these symbols and highlighted in yellow, apply exclusively to equipment
complying with “ATEX” Directive 94/9/EC.
The operations identified by these symbols must be executed by professionally qualified opera-
tors specially trained in the safety precautions required for working in potentially explosive atmo-
spheres.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious safety and environmental risks.
1.2 - PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The information identifying the product is shown on its nameplate. Gearmotors are equipped with two name-
plates; one on the gear unit which bears the gear unit data, and one on the motor (electric or hydraulic), bea-
ring the motor data.
The drawing below illustrates the layout of the data.
The gear unit’s identifying code is explained in the Sales Catalogue. If the gear unit is supplied fitted with an
electric motor (gearmotor), all information regarding the motor is supplied in the motor manual.
Nameplate data
TYPE
RATIO 1/ SERIAL N°
DRWG. N° DATE
COD. N° MADE IN ITALY
Manufacturer
Product identification
Bonfiglioli Trasmital product code
Reduction ratio
Serial number
Installation drawing code.
Date of manufacture
Client product code
Supplementary nameplate on ATEX-specified gear units
EC-Cert. No.
EX9 04 07 53387 001
Gearbox compliant with
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC-GROUP II
2G CATEGORY - T4 Temperature
2D CATEGORY - 135° C Temperature
Readability of the nameplate
The nameplate and the information on it must be readable and, consequently must be cleaned from time
to time.
Quote the nameplate data in all communications with the manufacturer, for example, when reque-
sting spare parts, information and assistance.
1.3 - GLOSSARY AND TERMINOLOGY
Some of the frequently occurring terms used in this manual are described below to unequivocally define their
meaning.
Routine maintenance
The set of operations required to preserve the functionality and efficiency of the gear unit. These operations
are usually scheduled by the Manufacturer, who defines the qualifications and tasks involved.
Reactive maintenance
The set of operations required to preserve the functionality and efficiency of the gear unit. These operations
are not scheduled by the Manufacturer and must be carried out by an expert maintenance technician.
Expert maintenance technician
An authorised technician with the qualifications, skills and mechanical and electrical training required to do
repairs and non-routine maintenance work on the gear unit.
Overhaul
An overhaul consists in the replacement of bearings and other mechanical components which have worn to
such an extent as to compromise the operation of the gear unit. An overhaul also includes verification of the
condition of all gear unit components (keys, seals, gaskets, vents, etc). If any such components are dama-
ged they must be replaced and the reason for the damage identified.
1.4 - REQUESTING TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
For any technical service needs, contact the Manufacturer’s sales network quoting the information indicated
on the unit’s nameplate, the approximate hours of service and the type of defect.
1.5 - MANUFACTURER’S LIABILITY
The Manufacturer declines all liability in the event of:
• use of the gear unit in contravention of local safety at work legislation
• incorrect installation, disregard or incorrect application of the instructions provided in this manual
• incorrect or defective electrical/hydraulic power supply (gearmotors)
• modifications or tampering
• work done on the unit by unqualified or unsuitable persons.
The safety of the gear unit also depends on scrupulous observance of the instructions given in this manual,
and in particular:
• always operate the unit within its operating limits
• diligently observe the routine maintenance schedule
• only allow trained operators to inspect and service the unit
• only use original spare parts
• the configurations given in the gear unit catalogue are the only ones permitted
• do not attempt to use the unit in any other way
• the instructions given in this manual do not substitute but rather supplement the provisions of esta-
blished safety legislation.
1.6 - CONSIGNMENT CONDITIONS
Gear units are supplied by BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL in the following conditions:
• Configured for installation in the mounting position specified in the purchase order.
• Not charged with lubricant and with internal components protected by a film of oil compatible with the
recommended lubricant.
• All surfaces and mating parts are treated with rustproofing products.
• Mating surfaces are not painted while the unit’s exterior is treated with a coat of grey water-based
rustproofing primer (RAL 7042/C441). Application of a top coat is the responsibility of the Client.
• Tested to factory standards.
• Packaged suitably for the final destination.
2.0 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION
2.1 - DESCRIPTION OF THE GEAR UNIT
The gear unit, driven by an electric or hydraulic motor, has been designed and constructed for integration
into an assembly of interlocking parts or mechanisms as part of a specific application.
Depending on the requirements of the application, the gear unit can be supplied in a variety of motor execu-
tions and configurations. It is capable of satisfying a range of specific requirements in the mechanical, chemi-
cal, agricultural and food industries, etc.
BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL supplies a range of accessories and optionals to make their products as versatile
as possible. For further technical information and descriptions, refer to the corresponding Sales Catalogue.
The User is responsible for using the products recommended for installation and
maintenance of
BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL gear units in an appropriate manner and in accordance with instructions.
SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS OF GEAR UNITS COMPLYING WITH DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC
• unit selection must be made with a higher safety service factor
• use only synthetic lubricants (oil and grease)
• VITON® seal rings
• vent plugs with spring-loaded anti-intrusion valve
• oil plugs with aluminium washer
• oil seals with dust trap
• no metal moving parts external to the gear unit
• no plastic parts capable of building up an electrostatic charge, or, if present, duly shielded
• for installations in zones 21 and 22 the User must schedule and implement a regular cleaning
programme for all surfaces and recesses to avoid dust build ups of more than 5 mm in depth.
2.2 - CONFORMITY
All gear units or gearmotors (when supplied with electric motor) are designed in compliance with the provi-
sions of applicable Essential Health and Safety Requirements, the “Machinery Directive” 98/37/EC and, if re-
quested, can be supplied with a Manufacturer’s Declaration - Annex IIB as provided by said Directive.
All BONFIGLIOLI gearmotor electric motors conform to the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC and the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC.
Furthermore, if specified for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the gear units are desi-
gned and constructed to conform with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements (EHSR) of
Annex II of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC and conform to the following classification:
• Equipment group: II.
• Category: Gas 2G - Dust 2D.
• Zone: Gas 1 - Dust 21.
• Maximum surface temperature: temperature class T4 for 2G and 130°C for 2D.
2.3 - OPERATING LIMITS AND CONDITIONS
Modification of the motor execution or mounting position is only permitted if previously authorised
by BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL’s Technical Service.
Failure to obtain said authorisation renders the ATEXcertification null and void.
Ambient conditions
• Ambient temperature: min. - 20°C; max. + 40°C.
• Do not use the gear unit, if not explicitly intended for the purpose, in a potentially explosive atmosphere or
where the use of explosion-proof equipment is specified.
The nameplate specifications regarding the maximum surface temperature, refer to readings ta-
ken in normal ambient and installation conditions.
Even minimal variations to said conditions (e.g. smaller mounting cabinet) may have a significant
effect on the unit’s heat output.
• Lighting
If the unit is to be serviced in a poorly lit area, use additional lamps and ensure that the work is done
in compliance with the safety requirements of established legislation.
3.0 - SAFETY INFORMATION
3.1 - SAFETY STANDARDS
• Carefully read the instructions given in this manual and those posted directly on the gear unit, especially
those regarding safety.
• Persons charged with working on the gear unit at any time in its service life must be trained specifically for
the purpose with special abilities and experience in the area as well as being equipped with the appropria-
te tools and individual safety equipment (as per Legislative Decree 626/94). Failure to meet these require-
ments constitutes a risk to personal health and safety.
• The gear unit must only be used for the applications permitted by the Manufacturer. Improper use can re-
sult in risks to personal health and safety and economic damages.
The applications permitted by the Manufacturer are the industrial applications for which the
gear units have been designed.
• Keep the gear unit at its maximum efficiency by following the routine maintenance schedule. Good mainte-
nance ensures the unit’s maximum performance, extended service life and continued compliance with sa-
fety regulations.
• When working on the unit in areas which are difficult to access or hazardous, ensure that adequate safety
precautions have been taken for the operator and others in compliance with established legislation on he-
alth and safety at work.
• All maintenance, inspection and repairs must only be carried out by an expert maintenance technician fully
familiar with the attendant hazards. It is therefore essential to implement operating procedures that ad-
dress potential hazards and their prevention for the entire machine. The expert maintenance technician
must always work with caution in observance of applicable safety standards.
• During operation wear only the apparel and safety equipment indicated in the User Instructions provided
by the Manufacturer or stipulated by legislation on safety at work.
• Replace worn components with original spare parts. Use the lubricants (oil and grease) recommended by
the Manufacturer.
• Do not dump polluting materials into the environment. Dispose of all such materials as stipulated by appli-
cable legislation.
• After replacing lubricants clean the gear unit’s surfaces and the walk-on surfaces around the work area.
If the gear unit is to be serviced in a potentially explosive atmosphere, the operator must first
switch off power to the gear unit and ensure that it is out of service, as well as taking all neces-
sary precautions against it being accidentally switched on again or its parts moving without
warning.
Furthermore, all additional environmental safety precautions must be taken (e.g. elimination of
residual gas or dust, etc).
4.0 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORT
4.1 - PACKAGING
The standard packaging, if supplied and unless otherwise agreed, is not proofed against rainfall and is inten-
ded for shipping by ground and not sea, and for storage in areas which are under cover and not humid. The
material can be stored in suitable conditions for a period of two years under cover at a temperature between
-15 °C and +50 °C at a relative humidity not in excess of 80%. Storage in all other conditions requires speci-
fic packaging.
The most frequent types of packaging are shown in the figures below.
- Packaging on pallet with heat shrink film for ground shipping.
- Packaging in wooden crate for shipping by sea or air.
On receipt of the gear unit, make sure the delivery corresponds to the purchase order and
that it is not damaged or faulty in any way.
Report any nonconformity to your BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL reseller.
Dispose of packaging materials as stipulated by applicable legislation.
4.2 - HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS
Handle packages as per the Manufacturer’s instructions and those marked on the packages themselves.
Since the weight and shape of the packages may make manual handling unfeasible, special equipment must
be used to avoid damage and injury. Persons authorised for this purpose must be trained and experienced in
the work in question to avoid risks to themselves and others.
The person authorised to handle the product must take all necessary precautions to safe-
guard his safety and that of all other persons involved.
4.2.1 - Moving the packages
• Prepare a suitable, delimited area with a level floor or surface for unloading the packages.
• Prepare the equipment required to handle the package. The lifting and handling equipment (e.g. crane or
lift truck) must be of adequate capacity for the weight and size of the load, taking into account its attac-
hment points and centre of gravity. If required, this information is indicated on the package itself. Harness
heavy packages with chains, belts and steel ropes after checking that they are suitable for the weight of
the load, which is always indicated.
• When handling the load keep it level to avoid tipping and instability.
4.2.2 - Moving the equipment
All the following operations must be carried out with care and caution and without sudden
movements.
When lifting, use accessories such as eyebolts, screw clamps, snap hooks, straps, ropes and
hooks etc. which are certified and adequate for the load in question.
The weight of the product to be lifted is given in the Sales Catalogue.
The following pages illustrate in detail the different attachment methods for the various product series, sizes
and configurations described in this Manual.
The most suitable solution for lifting and handling the product in safety is indicated for each.
Symbols:
Type of lifting Manual With mechanical equipment
Symbol M A B
Approximate weight £ 15 Kg > 15 Kg
Recommended method for po- Recommended

method for
Instruction —
sitioning
handling and positioning
Warning — The load may be unstable The load may sway or oscillate
Slide the lifting ring to align it
with the load’s centre of gra-

vity as shown in the diagrams
below
Stabilise the moving load by
Lock the ropes below the ring

hand
Solution —
with a cable clamp or similar

Observe all precautions regar-
device so as to prevent them
ding the handling of loads
sliding, and lift the load
Observe all precautions regar-

ding the handling of loads
The load must not be allowed to sway by more than 15° in any direction when being lifted.
If swaying exceeds this amount, stop and repeat the lifting operation as instructed.
Identify the attachment points for lifting the gear unit. Refer to the diagrams given below.
300 L ... 316 L
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
317 L ... 321 L
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
1 Ring harness Screw clamp

Maximum permissible tilt during
(use with harness) handling: 15°
MAX
5°
2 Rope and hooks Snap hook
5°
1
(use with rope)
3 Open harness
Eyebolt (already fitted
with eyelets
on gear units 317-321)
300 R ... 316 R
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
317 R ... 321 R
3
1 3
1 3
1
2
2
2
3
1 3
1 3
1
2
2
2
3
1 3
1 3
1
2
2
2

Maximum permissible
(use with harness) tilt during handling: 15°
5°
(use with rope)
5°
1
MAX
3 Open harness
with eyelets on gear units 317-321)
10
300 R ... 316 R
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
317 R ... 321 R
3
3
3
2
2
2
1 1 1
3
3
3
2
2
2
1 1 1
3
3
3
2
2
2
1 1 1
5°
MAX
(use with harness)

5°
(use with rope)
3 Open harness
Maximum permissible

tilt during handling: 15°
11
3V 00 ... 3V 16
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
3V 17 ... 3V 21
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
3
3
3
2 1
2 1
2 1

5°
5°
1
(use with rope)

MAX
1
3 Open harness
12
300 L ... 321 L
H F P
3 3
2 3 2
300 R ... 321 R
H F P
3
3
2 1 3
2 1
2 1
3V 00 ... 3V 21
H F P
3 3
2 3 2

MAX
5°
5°
1
(use with rope)

1
3 Open harness
13
• Prepare the gear unit for lifting by attaching straps, hooks and screw clamps etc. to its attachment points.
Alternatively, use a pallet to move the load. If using a crane, first lift the gear unit vertically out of its packa-
ging.
• If using a lift truck or pallet truck, remove the packaging and insert the truck’s forks at the indicated posi-
tions.
• First lift the load very slowly to check that it is stable.
• Move the gear unit to the unloading area and lower it gently into position, taking care not to tip it suddenly
in transit.
If the gear unit is already equipped with an electric motor, do not use the eyebolts on the mo-
tor casing for lifting, unless expressly specified.
4.3 - STORAGE
The following recommendations should be followed when storing the gear unit.
1. Do not store the unit in excessively humid conditions or where it is exposed to the weather (do not store
outdoors).
2. Do not place the gear unit directly on the ground.
3. Place the gear unit on a stable base and make sure that it is not subject to accidental displacement.
4. Store the packaged gear unit (if allowed) in accordance with the instructions on the packaging itself.
If the gear unit is to be stored for more than 6 months, the following additional precautions must be taken:
5. Cover all machined external surfaces with a rustproofing product such as Shell Ensis or other product
with similar properties and application range.
6. Fill the unit with lubricating oil and make sure the vent plug is positioned uppermost. Before putting the
unit into service, the oil used for storage must be drained and replaced with the correct quantity of re-
commended operating lubricant.
PRECAUTIONS to be taken when returning the gear unit to service after storage.
The output shafts and external surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned of all rustproofing product,
contaminants and other impurities (use a standard commercial solvent).
Do this outside the explosion hazard area.
The solvent must not touch the seal rings as this may damage them, causing them to leak
If the oil or protective material used during storage is not compatible with the synthetic oil used
during the machine’s operation, the interior of the unit must be thoroughly cleaned before filling
with the operating oil.
The service life of the bearing grease is reduced if the unit is stored for more than 1 year.
The bearing grease must be synthetic.
14
5.0 - INSTALLATION
5.1 - INSTALLING THE GEAR UNIT
The entire installation process must be planned as early as the general design phase of the ma-
chine. The person authorised to do the work must, if necessary, set out a safety plan to protect
the health and safety of all persons directly involved and apply all applicable legislation.
1. Carefully remove all packaging and protective product residue from the gear unit.
Pay particular attention to the mating surfaces.
2. Check that the data on the nameplate correspond to those specified in the purchase order.
3. Ensure that the structure to which the gear unit is to be mounted is sufficiently robust and rigid to support
its weight and operating stresses.
4. Check that the machine to which the gear unit is to be installed is switched off and cannot be accidentally
switched on again.
5. Make sure all mating surfaces are flat.
6. Make sure the shaft/shaft or shaft/ bore are perfectly aligned for coupling.
7. Fit suitable guards to protect against the gear unit’s external moving parts.
8. If the work environment is corrosive for the gear unit or any of its parts, follow the special precautions re-
quired for aggressive environments. In this case, contact the BONFIGLIOLI TRASMITAL sales service.
9. We recommend applying a protective paste to all gear unit/motor mating surfaces and other parts
(Klüberpaste 46 MR 401 or other product with similar properties and application range) to ensure optimal
coupling and protection against fretting corrosion.
10. In the case of outdoor installations fitted with an electric motor, protect the latter from direct sunlight and
the weather by means of guards or a casing. Also make sure that the assembly is properly ventilated.
5.1.1 - Flanged execution
Machine the coupling counterflange on the machine to which the gear unit is to be installed.
The flanges must be plane and machined with machine tools. Connect the output shaft to the driven compo-
nent as indicated in the drawings below.
DIN 5482 e9
DIN 5482 e9
DIN 5480 H9
DIN 5480 H9
DIN 5480 e8
DIN 5482 H10
DIN 5482 H10

DIN 5480 e8
Recommended tolerances
Loose coupling Coupling with interference
Solid shaft Hollow shaft Solid shaft Hollow shaft
ÆD
Ø d h6 Ø D G7 Ø d h6 Ø D P7
Æd
Ø d k6 Ø D F7 Ø d k6 Ø D M7
Ø d m6 Ø D F7 Ø d m6 Ø D K7
Ø d r6 Ø D E7 Ø d r6 Ø D H7
15
For machining the spigot on the driven machine, refer to the diagrams below:
300...307 gear units - male output shaft motor execution
300...307
0.1 / 1 00 B
B 0.1 5
Ø h6 /F8
Ø j6 /F8
Ø f7 /H8
B 0.1 5
3.2
3.2
309...321 gear units - male output shaft motor execution
These gear units are fitted with two spigots. When machining the coupling flanges, one spigot may be suffi-
cient if the output shaft is not subject to overhung loads or loads are less than 60% of the permissible load.
For heavier loads, the mounting must use both spigots on the gear unit.
If the gear unit is instead required to transmit high torque or is subject to heavy shock loads and inversions in
the direction of rotation, the counterflange must be drilled to accept the spigots.
At the time of installation, move the spigots mounted on the gear unit forward into the counterflange by an
amount equal to their diameter. See diagram below:
309...321
0.1 /100 B
R 0.07 B
B
Æ H8
Æ H8
Æ f7
Æ f7
B 0.15
3.2
3.2
3.2
309, 310, 315
0.20 B
b=d 317, 319
b
0.05 B
0.1 /100 B
R
B
Æ H8
Æ f7
B 0.15
3.2
R ³ 60% Rn
3.2
16
Mounting with hollow splined shaft
Ensure that the gear unit and driven shaft are aligned and that the latter is not subject to flexing during ope-
ration. See diagram below:
300...321
0.1 / 100 B
f7 / H8
Æ
3.2
B 0. 15
3.2
Flanged gear unit mounting bolts
300 301 303 305 306 307 309 310 311 313 315 316 317 318 319 321
Bolt M10 M10 M12 M12 M14 M16 M16 M16 M16 M20 M20 M20 M30 M24 M30 M30
Quantity 8 8 10 10 12 10 12 15 24 30 20 30 24 32 30 36
Class 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8
Tightening
torque (Nm) 50 50 85 85 135 200 200 200 200 400 400 400 1400 700 1400 1400
For maximum transmitted torques greater than or equal to 70% of the torque indicated as M2max, and with fre-
quent inversions of the direction of rotation, use at least class 10.9 bolts.
5.1.2 - Foot mounting
Foot-mounted motor execution
Gear units of this type must be mounted on a suitably rigid base, machined flat with a planarity error margin
of no more than 0.2 mm / 100 mm.
See diagram below:
300...321
C 0. 15
0.2 100 3.2
Foot-mounted gear unit mounting bolts
300 301 303 305 306 307 309 310 311 313 315 316 317 318 319 321
Quantity 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 4 8
Class 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8
Tightening
torque (Nm) 200 200 200 200 400 700 700 700 1400 1400 1400 2500 1400 2500 6000 6000
17
5.1.3 - Shaft mounting
Mount the torque arm with bolts of at least class 8.8 tightened to a torque of 70% of their failure stress. Clean
and degrease both the internal coupling surface of the gear unit shaft and the external coupling surface of
the machine’s driven shaft.
Mount the shrink disk to the gear unit’s shaft after lightly lubricating its entire outer surface. Snug down a
first set of 3 bolts located at the corners of an equilateral triangle (for example: bolts in pos. 1-5-9 of the dia-
gram below). Fit the gear unit to the driven shaft.
Tighten down the bolts (following the triangular pattern) in a circular direction, repeating the operation several
times until all bolts are tightened to the torque specified in chart 2, in accordance with the type of disk/gear
unit.
N.B.: Do not tighten down diametrically opposed bolts in sequence.
300...321
Rt £ 16 µm
3.2
3.2
C + 1
C+1
Æ H7
Æ H6
Æ H7
Æ H6
C
3.2
3.2
R ³ 600 N/mm2
Do not use molybdenum bisulphide or any other grease, which could reduce the friction of
the mating surfaces and affect the performance of the shrink disk.
300...321
1
2 12
3
11
10
6
8
Shrink disk mounting bolts
300 301 303 305 306 307 309 310 311 313 315 316 317 318 319 321
Quantity 8 10 12 12 9 12 8 8 10 10 12 15 18 21 24 21
Class 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9
Tightening
torque (Nm) 12 12 30 30 58 58 250 250 250 250 490 490 490 490 490 840
18
Proceed with the installation as follows:
1. Place the gear unit in the vicinity of the installation area.
2. Mount the gear unit and secure it to the structure at the points provided. The gear unit should be secured
to the structure at all the mounting points (bores) on the mount provided (feet or flange).
3. Tighten down the mounting bolts and check that the service plugs are screwed down to the torques given
in the chart.
Locate the closed oil plug used during shipping and replace it with the vent plug supplied in the
shipment.
5.1.4 - Installing accessories on solid input and output shafts
Do not use hammers or other tools that might damage the gear unit’s shafts or bearings when
mounting external parts. Instead, proceed as illustrated in the diagram below:
Bolt (1) and spacer (2) are not included in the consignment.
To minimise the loads on the shaft bearings, when mounting transmission mechanisms with asymmetrical
hubs use the configuration shown in diagram (A) below:
(A)
Mounting pulleys
Clean all parts before installing them. When installing belt drive pulleys, the shafts must be parallel with their
pulleys aligned.
Do not over tension the drive belt as this can damage the bearings.
19
Shaft end: threads
300...315 316 317
DIN 332
HC-PC HC-PC
4xM1 6
6xM1 6
Ø 200 r6
Ø 110
Ø 140
Ø 1 80 m6
26 30
318 319 321
HC-PC HC-PC HC-PC
1 2xM20
1 2xM20
4xM24
Ø 340 m6
Ø 150
Ø 200
Ø 250
Ø 250 m6
Ø 280 h6
41 40 40
300 301 303 305 306 307 309 310 311 313 315 316 317 318 319 321
MC M1 2 M1

2 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0
– – – – – – – – – –
HC M1 6 M1

6 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4
– – – – –
PC M1 2 M1

6 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0 M2

0 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4
– – – – –
VK – – M2 0 M2

0 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M2

4 M3

0 M3

0
– – – – –
20
Installing accessories on splined shafts
Do not use hammers or other tools that might damage the gear unit’s shafts or bearings when
mounting external parts. Instead, proceed as illustrated in the diagram below:
MZ-HZ
Always use the stop end plate supplied with the gear unit.
5.2 - INSTALLING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR
Further to all the precautions indicated above, when installing a standard IEC 72-1 electric motor, the follo-
wing precautions must also be observed:
• Do not force the coupling and do not use inappropriate tools during assembly. Take care not to damage
the flat/cylindrical coupling surfaces.
• Do not force the rotary coupling mechanisms with heavy overhung or thrust loads.
• To facilitate assembly, use a lubricating synthetic oil paste such as Klüberpaste 46 MR 401 or another pro-
duct with similar properties and application range.
³ 8.8
• Provided all the above checks have been performed and passed and all other instruc-
tions in this manual have been strictly observed, an electric motor with ATEX rating
equal to or greater than that of the gear unit may be installed, thus forming a gearmotor
which itself complies with the provisions of Directive 94/9/EC.
If, instead, the assembly of the motor to the gear unit requires actions other than those
prescribed in this Manual or one or more of the manual’s prescriptions have not been
satisfied, the User shall be responsible for analysing the risks attendant on this particu-
lar motor/gear unit combination. The risk analysis is in any case obligatory if the motor
is powered by an inverter.
Only in this way, and subject to self-certification by the assembler, shall the assembly,
including the gear unit itself, be compliant with the requirements of Directive 94/9/EC.
21
5.3 - INSTALLING THE HYDRAULIC MOTOR
Connecting the hydraulic motor
Remove the protective plug.
Hydraulic motor mountings are available in two versions:
a) Version with O-ring oil gasket between motor flange and gear unit.
In this case, mount the gasket to ensure an oil tight seal between the motor and gear unit, taking care to fit it
correctly in its seat without damaging it.
³ 8.8
b) Version with gasket already mounted to the coupling.
In this case no special intervention is required to ensure an oil tight seal since this is already provided by the
motor coupling. Merely smear the motor shaft with grease.
In both cases, clean the spigot and the coupling where the motor is to be fitted, fit the motor and tighten
down the flange mounting bolts.
Always use bolts rated to at least class 8.8.
³ 8.8
22
5.4 - CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE
On gear units designed for coupling to hydraulic motors and fitted with a brake, connect the brake control fit-
ting to the hydraulic circuit at the time of assembly.
Start-up
The minimum pressure to release the brake (see chart) must be less than 320 bar.
T T
Technical data
Brake 4... 5... 6...
Characteristics A B D F H K L B C E G K B C E G K L
Braking torque Mbs [daNm] 5 10 16 26 33 40 44 40 50 63 80 100 85 110 150 210 260 320
Minimum release
bar 10 20 30 20 25 30 33 20 27 20 25 32 14 19 25 19 24 28
pressure
Max. pressure bar 320
Weight kg 10 18 35
NOTE: The static torque Mbs is the maximum torque the brake can exert.
Under dynamic loads the braking torque is reduced. The actual Mbs values can vary from -5% to +15% of the
rating given in the chart.
23
Installing the gearmotor
If a gearmotor is supplied fully assembled, follow the precautions and instructions given above when moun-
ting to the machine.
For the electrical and hydraulic connection, refer instead to the two sample diagrams below. These are gene-
ric only since each specific installation has its own special requirements, which must be evaluated on a per
case basis by the Manufacturer.
Drive with electric motor.
L3 L2 L1
W1 V1 U1
V2 U2 W2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
L1 L1
U1 W2 U1
L3 L2 L1
U2 W1 U2
W2 V2
L3 L2
W1 V1
V2 V1
L3 L2
W1 V1 U1
V2 U2 W2
24
Drive with TRASMITAL MG orbital hydraulic motor
In addition to the instructions governing installation of the gear unit, the following instructions should also be
observed when installing a hydraulic motor.
a) Connecting to the hydraulic circuit
The motor can be installed on both a closed and open loop circuit.
In the case of an open circuit installation, the solenoid valve or control valve may be of either the closed cen-
tre or open type.
The circuit line corresponding to the hydraulic motor delivery port must always be equipped with a pressure
relief valve calibrated to a pressure no greater than the motor’s pmax. Refer to the hydraulic circuit diagrams
below.
Closed loop circuit Open loop circuit
RV
A
A
A
B
B
B
RV Closed centre control valve
RV A
Open centre control valve
RV = pressure relief valves calibrated to pRV < pmax.
If this is not possible because the circuit must also actuate other equipment at a higher pressure, or the con-
trol valve is of the closed centre type and the motor drives components with high inertia, auxiliary pressure
relief valves must be installed as close as possible to the motor.
RV
RV = pressure relief valves calibrated to pRV < pmax.
25
b) Connecting drain hole T
Standard motors are supplied without a drain hole. In this case the motor is equipped with internal drainage.
This meets the requirements of the majority of applications with intermittent duty and an average drive pres-
sure of less than 50% of the motor’s maximum rated pressure.
When duty is continuous or intermittent with an operating percentage greater than 50% and the average dri-
ve pressure is greater than 50% of the rated maximum pressure, the motor must be ordered with external
drainage and drain hole T must be connected to the tank. Refer to the diagrams below:
Internal drainage External drainage
A A
T T
B B
c) Brake control
Gearmotors equipped with a brake, are available in two motor executions:
B02P or P01S.
Brake control is internal on the B02P version, and is controlled directly by the motor.
The brake control pressure must instead be supplied by an auxiliary line of the brake control circuit on the
P01S version.
Refer to the diagrams below:
Closed loop circuit Open loop circuit
B02P P01S P01S
d) Type of hydraulic fluid
Use hydraulic mineral fluid with viscosity ISO VG 46 (46 Cst at t = 40°C).
During operation, the fluid temperature should remain within the range +30°C to +70°C.
26
e) Filtering
To ensure the motor’s reliable operation and long service life, the hydraulic circuit must be equipped with a
filter capable of guaranteeing the following purity levels:
grade9 NAS 1638
grade6 SAE
grade18/15 SO DIS 4406
Drive with hydraulic motor
All motors must be charged with hydraulic fluid before being operated and during installation.
Position the drain hole so that it is positioned uppermost for charging with fluid.
Make sure the hoses are routed in such a way as to prevent the motor casing from emptying and hence, pre-
vent air pockets from forming which may affect pump suction during operation.
A A
T T
B B
A - B = Supply lines
T = Drainage
27
5.5 - LUBRICATION
Before starting up the gear unit, it must be charged with lubricant to the level corresponding to its specified
mounting position.
The lubricant and its relative viscosity should be selected from the following chart, in accordance with the
type of duty and ambient temperature.
If the gear unit is supplied ready charged with lubricant, replace the closed shipping plug with the
vent plug included in the shipment before installing it.
(A1)
Plug thread Pitch Tightening torque

Plug thread Pitch Tightening torque
[Nm]
[Nm]
M14 1,5 15 - 20
1/8" 28 10 - 15
M16 1,5 15 - 20
1/4" 19 10 - 15
M18 1,5 15 - 20
M20 1,5 20 - 30 3/8" 19 15 - 20
M22 1,5 20 - 30
1/2" 14 20 - 30
M24 1,5 20 - 30
3/4" 14 20 - 30
M30 2 30 - 40
M42 3 40 - 50 1" 11 30 - 40
(A2)
INDUSTRIAL INSTALLATIONS MOBILE MACHINES
ISO standards .. with EP characteristics SAE standards .. with API GL5 characteristics
Ambient
-10°C / +30°C +10°C / +45°C -20°C / +60°C -20°C / +30°C +10°C / +45°C
temperature
ISO VG 150 ISO VG 220 ISO VG 150-220 SAE 80W/90 SAE 85W/140
AGIP BLASIA 150 BLASIA 220 BLASIA S220 ROTRA MP ROTRA MP
ARAL DEGOL BG 150 DEGOL BG 220 DEGOL GS 220 GETRIEBEOL HYP GETRIEBEOL HYP
ENERGOL
ENERGOL
ENERSYN
BP-MACH HYPOGEAR EP HYPOGEAR EP
GR XP 150
GR XP 220
HTX 220
CASTROL ALPHA SP 150 ALPHA SP 220 ALPHASYN PG 150 HYPOY HYPOY
N.L. GEAR
N.L. GEAR
UNIVERSAL GEAR
UNIVERSAL GEAR
CHEVRON
COMPOUND 150
COMPOUND 220
LUBRICANTE
LUBRICANTE
REDUCTELF
REDUCTELF
ELF ORITIS 125 MS
ELF TRANSELF8 TRANSELF8
SP150
SP 220
ELF SYNTHERMA P20
ESSO SPARTAN EP 150 SPARTAN EP 220 GLYCOLUBE 220 GEAR OIL GX GEAR OIL GX
PONTONIC MP PONTONIC MP
FINA GIRAN 150 GIRAN 220
I.P. MELLANA150 MELLANA220 TELESIA OIL 150 PONTIAX HD PONTIAX HD
KLUBEROIL
KLUBEROIL
KLUBERSYNT
KLUBER
GEM1-150
GEM1-320
GH 6-220
Q8 GOYA 150 GOYA 220 EL GRECO 220
MOBIL MOBILGEAR 629 MOBILGEAR 630 SHC 630 MOBILUBE HD MOBILUBE HD
SHELL OMALA EP150 OMALA EP220 TIVELA OIL SA SPIRAXHD SPIRAX HD
TOTAL CARTER EP 150 CARTER EP 220 TRANSMISSION TM TRANSMISSION TM
Synthetic oil.
Brake lubrication
The hydraulic multi-disk brakes are lubricated with the same oil as the gear unit.
Only synthetic lubricants may be used on gear units conforming to European Directive
94/9/EC. Refer to the above chart for the brand and type.
28
6.0 - TESTING THE GEAR UNIT
The gear unit has been factory tested by the Manufacturer. Before start-up, make sure that:
• the machine incorporating the gear unit complies with the provisions of the “Machinery Directive” 98/37/EC
and any other applicable safety legislation
• the gear unit’s mounting position in the installation corresponds to that prescribed and indicated on the na-
meplate
• the electrical power supply is suitable and operational as prescribed in EN 60204-1, and is grounded as
per EN 50014
• the motor’s electric power supply corresponds to that prescribed and is within +/-5% of the rated value
• the hydraulic system is suitable and operational, and the oil in the hydraulic motor’s lubrication circuit con-
forms to ISO VG 46. It must be filtered with a maximum grade of 10 µm and contamination level less than
or equal to class 9 as per NAS 1638 or 18/15 as per ISO/DIS 4406
• there are no signs of lubricant leaks from the plugs or gaskets
• the vent plug is not obstructed by dirt or paint
• the unit does not run noisily or with excessive vibration.
Before starting up the unit, check and make sure that:
• the unit is not assembled in a potentially explosive atmosphere (oil, acid, gas, vapour, radia-
tion) and is free of dust build ups greater than 5 mm in depth
• during operation the gear unit is sufficiently ventilated and is not subject to radiation from exter-
nal heat sources
• during operation the cooling air does not exceed 40 °C
• the oil level check and filler plugs and the vent plugs are all easily accessible
• all accessories mounted to the gear unit are ATEX certified
• gear units with hollow shafts, with or without shrink disk, have been correctly mounted as de-
scribed in this manual
• the gear unit has been thoroughly cleaned after installation
• all guards are installed to prevent accidental contact between operators and the unit’s rotary
moving parts, and seals are oil tight
7.0 - USING THE EQUIPMENT
Before putting the gear unit into service, the User must ensure that the plant in which it is installed complies
with all applicable directives, especially those regarding health and safety at work.
The gear unit may not be used in areas and environments:
• with highly corrosive/abrasive vapours, smoke or dust.
• in direct contact with loose food products.
Danger zones and exposed persons:
The danger zone of the gear unit is the protrusion of the shaft which constitutes a hazard for exposed
persons in direct contact with it (crushing, shearing, trapping). In particular, when the gear unit is
operating in automatic mode in an accessible area, the shaft must be protected by a guard.
29
8.0 - MAINTENANCE
Maintenance and replacement work must be carried out by expert maintenance technicians
trained in the observance of applicable laws on health and safety at work and the special am-
bient problems attendant on the installation.
Before doing any work on the unit, the operator must first switch off power to the gear unit
and ensure that it is out of service, as well as taking all necessary precautions against it be-
ing accidentally switched on again or its parts moving without warning (due to suspended lo-
ads or similar external factors).
Furthermore, all additional environmental safety precautions must be taken (e.g. elimination
of residual gas or dust, etc).
• Before doing any maintenance work, activate all the safety devices provided and, if necessary, inform per-
sons working in the vicinity. Cordon off the area around the unit and prevent access to any equipment
which, if activated, might be the cause of unexpected health and safety hazard.
• Replace worn components with original spare parts.
• Use the lubricants (oil and grease) recommended by the Manufacturer.
• When working on the gear unit always replace all gaskets and seals with original new ones.
• If a bearing requires replacement, it is good practice to also replace the other bearing supporting the same
shaft.
• We recommend replacing the lubricating oil after all maintenance work.
The above instructions are aimed at ensuring efficient and safe operation of the gear unit.
The Manufacturer declines all liability for injury to persons and damage to components due to the use of
non-original spare parts and non-routine work that modifies the safety requirements without the Manufactu-
rer’s express prior authorisation.
Refer to the specific spare parts catalogue when ordering spare parts for the gear unit.
Do not dump polluting liquids, worn parts and maintenance waste into the environment.
Dispose of all such materials as specified by applicable legislation.
• Observe the routine inspection and maintenance schedule to ensure the unit’s correct opera-
tion and the effectiveness of the explosion protection.
• Always apply fresh Loctite 510 or other product with similar properties and application range to
all disassembled threads.
• Before servicing or repairing internal components, allow the gear unit to cool down completely
before opening the casing so as to avoid burns from parts which are still hot.
• On completion of maintenance work, make sure that all safety measures and equipment have
been applied and reset.
• Clean the gear unit thoroughly after maintenance and repair work.
• On completion of maintenance, tighten all vent, filler and level plugs to their specified torques
(chart A1).
• On completion of any maintenance work all seals must be refitted and sealed as prescribed.
• Regardless of the type of gear unit, whenever a seal ring is replaced its lips should be smea-
red with a thin layer of grease (Fluorocarbon gel 880 ITP or other product with similar proper-
ties and application range) before assembly.
• Use only original spare parts for repairs.
30
8.1 - ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Keep the gear unit at its maximum efficiency by following the routine maintenance schedule.
Good maintenance ensures the unit’s maximum performance, extended service life and conti-
nued compliance with safety regulations.
(A3)
Frequency Component Type of check Action
Original consignment
Replace Replace with new lubricant
lubricant
Check that the external

Stop the machine and contact
after 200 hrs Gear unit casing

temperature does not exceed
Bonfiglioli Trasmital’s Technical
70-75 °C
Service
Tighten down to specified
External fasteners Check locking torque

torque
External seals and

Check oil level
Service or replace components
1000 hrs
gaskets
Check for leaks by eye
as required
2500 hrs Lubricant Replace Replace with new lubricant
Gear unit seals and

Inspect carefully for wear/age-
5000 hrs Replace if aged/worn
gaskets
ing of external seals
For installations in zones 21 and 22 the User must schedule and implement a regular clea-
ning programme for all surfaces and recesses to avoid dust build-ups of more than 5 mm
in depth.
Every 1000 hrs. of operation or after 6 months:
• Measure the surface temperature at the coupling between the gear unit and motor, and at the
points which are most shielded from the motor’s cooling fan. The maximum temperature must
not differ from the ambient temperature by more than 75°C, nor may this differential be excee-
ded during operation.
Every 5000 hrs. of operation:
• Change the synthetic oil and bearing grease if the gear unit is not life lubricated.
• Replace all externally accessible seal rings unless this has already been done as a result of
problems occurring before the scheduled maintenance deadline.
Every 5000 hrs. of operation at rated torque
(The prescribed minimum overhaul period maybe revised, even considerably, depending on the
actual conditions of use, as indicated in table (A4)).
31
• Overhaul the gear unit, unless this has already been done as a result of problems occurring
before the specified deadline.
(an overhaul consists in the replacement of bearings and other mechanical components which
have worn to such an extent as to compromise the operation of the gear unit).
(A4) M
n2
Frequency, hours
r2
1.0 5000
1.25 10000
1.5 17000
1.75 27000
2.0 40000
Mn2 = Rated torque at output shaft.
Mr2 = Torque required by the application at the output shaft.
8.2 - OIL CHANGES
1. Place an adequate container under the drain plug.
2. Remove the filler and drain plugs and allow the oil to drain out.
The oil will drain better if it is warm.
3. Wait for a few minutes until all the oil has drained out, then screw the drain plug back on after first chan-
ging the plug seal.
4. Fill with new oil until it reaches the level mark. Do not mix oils of different makes or specifications
and check that the oil is highly resistant to foaming and is EP rated.
5. Tighten down the filler plug after changing its seal.
The gear unit may be supplied with or without lubricant, as requested by the User. The quan-
tity of charge oil required is specified in the Sales Catalogue. This specification is however,
approximate, and reference must always be made to the mark on the level plug, the placement
of which depends on the mounting position specified in the purchase order.
Life lubricated gear units which are not subject to external contamination do not normally require pe-
riodic lubricant changes. If the same type of oil as that already in use is not available, drain the gear unit
casing completely and wash its interior thoroughly with a light solvent before refilling with the new lubricant.
If a leak is found, identify the cause of the fault and repair it before topping up the lubricant
and operating the unit.
Lubricants, solvents and detergents are toxic/harmful to health:
- they may cause irritation in direct contact with the skin
- they may cause intoxication if inhaled
- they may be fatal if swallowed.
Handle them with care using suitable individual safety equipment. Do not dump them into the environment
and dispose of in accordance with applicable legislation.
32
8.3 - CHECKING OPERATIONAL EFFICIENCY
• Remove any dust from the gear unit and motor casings.
• Check that the noise generated at continuous load does not vary. Excessive vibration or noise can indicate
wear of the gear train or failure of a bearing.
• Check the power absorption and voltage against the rated values given on the motor’s nameplate.
• Check the wear of the friction surfaces and braking gasket on the brake motors (if fitted) and, if necessary,
adjust the gap.
• Check for lubricant leaks from the gaskets/seals, plugs and casings.
• Check all bolted couplings for wear, deformation and corrosion and tighten them down fully, but without
over tightening.
8.4 - CLEANING
Remove all dust and process waste from the gear unit. Do not use solvents or other products that are incom-
patible with the unit’s construction material and do not direct high pressure jets of water at the gear unit.
33
9.0 - REPLACING PARTS
• Immediately replace parts and components if they are not able to guarantee safe and reliable ope-
ration.
• Never improvise repairs.
• The use of non-original spare parts not only renders the warranty null and void but can jeopardise
the gear unit’s operation.
9.1 - REMOVING THE MOTOR
If during operation the mobile coupling between the motor and gear unit has not rusted significantly, it should
be possible to remove the motor without applying excessive force.
If instead, it proves difficult to remove the motor, do not use screwdrivers or levers to apply force as this may
damage the flanges and mating surfaces, but proceed as illustrated below.
1. Drill and thread the motor shaft (fan side).
2. Screw an impact extractor tool into the bore.
3. Undo the bolts fixing the motor to the gear unit.
4. Detach the motor by means of the inertial force of the extractor.
9.2 - DECOMMISSIONING THE GEAR UNIT
The unit must only be taken out of service by operators trained in the observance of applicable laws on he-
alth and safety at work.
Do not dump non-biodegradable products, lubricants and non-ferrous materials (rubber, PVC, resins, etc.)
into the environment. Dispose of all such materials as stipulated by established environmental legislation.
Do not re-use parts or components which appear to be in good condition after they have been chec-
ked or replaced by qualified personnel and declared unsuitable for use.
34
10.0 - TROUBLESHOOTING
The following information is intended to serve as an aid in locating and eliminating defects and faults. In
some cases, problems may be caused by the plant or machine to which the gear unit is assembled and hen-
ce, the cause and remedy will be described in the Manufacturer’s technical documentation for the machi-
ne/plant in question.
FAULT CAUSE REMEDY
Oil level too low Top up oil level
Bearing temperature too high Oil spent Replace oil
Defective bearings Contact authorised workshop
Oil level too high Check oil level
Operating temperature too high Oil spent Replace oil
Contaminant in oil Replace oil
Gears damaged Contact authorised workshop
Bearing axial backlash too high Contact authorised workshop
Bearings defective or worn Contact authorised workshop
Abnormal running noise

Correct load to rated values given
Excessive load applied

in Sales Catalogue
Contaminant in oil Replace oil
Mounting bolts loose Tighten bolts to specified torque
Abnormal noise at gear unit
mounting
Mounting bolts worn Replace bolts
Oil leaks Casing/coupling seals inadequate Contact authorised workshop
Gaskets worn Contact authorised workshop
Replace oil (see recommended
Oil viscosity too high

lubricant chart)
Gear unit does not run or runs
with difficulty
Redesign drive for actual load
Excessive load applied

required
Output shaft does not turn with
Gears damaged Contact authorised workshop
motor running
35
ANNEX 1 - CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL ON ATEX-SPECIFIED GEAR UNITS
Gear units are normally fitted with oil level check plugs.
To check the oil level, first identify the level plug.
- Horizontal position:
Remove the plug and insert a bar of the right size in the hole and of the shape shown in the fi-
gure.
- Vertical position:
Use a rod to check that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, then screw the plug
back in.
If the level is more than 3 mm below the spill level, top up and check the reason for the drop in oil
level.
N.B.: MAKE SURE THE ROD IS
POSITIONED FLAT AGAINST THE
EDGE OF THE THREADED HOLE
Gear units conforming to Directive 94/9/EC and designed for a vertical mounting position, are
normally equipped with an oil expansion chamber fitted with service plugs for filling, checking the
oil level and venting internal overpressure.
36
ANNEX 2 - LUBRICANT CHARGE QUANTITY
Type Type
Mounting position Mounting position
A T O
B0 U* P*

L1 0.6
1.0 0.9 R2
1.2 1.7 1.5
L2 0.9 1.3 1.2 R3 1.5 2.0 1.8
300 L3 1.2 1.6 1.5 300 R4 1.8 2.3 2.1
L4 1.5 1.9 1.8
L1 0.8 1.2 1.1 R2 1.6 2.1 1.9
L2 1.1 1.5 1.4 R3 1.9 2.4 2.2
301 L3 1.4 1.8 1.7 301 R4 2.2 2.7 2.5
L4 1.7 2.1 2.0
L1 1.3 2.3 2.0 R2 2.2 2.8 2.6
L2 1.6 2.6 2.3 R3 2.5 3.1 2.9
303 L3 1.9 2.9 2.6 303 R4 2.8 3.4 3.2
L4 2.2 3.2 2.9
L1 1.6 2.6 2.4 R2 2.5 3.1 2.9
L2 2.1 3.1 2.9 R3 3.0 3.6 3.4
305 L3 2.4 3.4 3.2 305 R4 3.3 3.9 3.7
L4 2.7 3.7 3.5
L1 2.5 3.5 3.2 R2 4.0 5.0 4.8
L2 3.3 4.3 4.0 R3 4.8 5.8 5.6
306 L3 3.6 4.6 4.3 306 R4 5.1 6.1 5.9
L4 3.9 4.9 4.6
L1 3.5 5.0 4.5 R2 6.0 8.0 7.0
L2 4.5 6.0 5.5 R3 7.0 9.0 8.0
307 L3 5.0 6.5 6.0 307 R4 7.5 9.5 8.5
L4 5.3 6.8 6.3
L1 4.0 5.5 5.0 R2 6.5 8.5 7.5
L2 5.0 6.5 6.0 R3 7.5 9.5 8.5
309 L3 5.5 7.0 6.5 309 R4 8.0 10 9
L4 5.8 7.3 6.8
L1 5.0 6.5 6.0
L2 6.3 7.8 7.3 R3 11 13 12
310 L3 7.1 8.6 8.1 310 R4 12 14 13
L4 7.4 8.9 8.4
L1 7.0 12 10 R2 14 19 17
L2 9.0 14 12 R3 16 21 19
311 L3 10 15 13 311 R4 17 22 20
L4 10.5 15.5 13.5
L1 9.0 14 12 R2 16 21 19
L2 11.5 16.5 14.5 R3 19 24 22
313 L3 12.5 17.5 15.5 313 R4 20 25 23
L4 13 18 16
L1 15 23 19
L2 19 27 23 R3 27 35 31
315 L3 21 29 25 315 R4 30 38 34
L4 22 30 26
L1 18 26 22
L2 22 30 26 R3 30 38 34
316 L3 24 32 28 316 R4 33 41 37
L4 25 33 29
L1 20 35 30
L2 26 41 36 R3 38 52 48
317 L3 29 44 39 317 R4 42 56 52
L4 30 45 40
L1 25 40 35
L2 35 50 45
318 L3 40 55 50 318 R4 48 63 58
L4 43 58 53
L1 35 55 45
L2 45 65 55
319 L3 50 70 60
L4 53 73 63
L1 35 55 45
L2 50 70 60
321 L3 56 76 66
L4 60 80 70
N.B. The quantities indicated are approximate only. Fill the unit according to the position of the level
plug or level rod supplied with the gear unit.
37
oil [l]
TA - TE - TF - TD
OA - OE - OF- OD
AA - EA - FD AF - EF - FE AE - EE - FF AD - ED - FA
VA - VC - VF -IO
QA - QE - QF- QD
input input input input input input
P(IEC)
P(IEC)
P(IEC)
P(IEC)
P(IEC)
P(IEC) HS
HS
HS
HS
HS
HS
3/V00 L3
0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.3 1.2
0.12
0.12 0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12 0.12
3/V01 L3
1.1 1.1
1.1
1.1 1.5
1.4
3/V03 L3 1.6 0.25 0.25 1.6 0.31 1.6 0.31 1.6 0.38 2.6 0.31 2.3 0.25
3/V05 L3 2.1 0.38 0.38 2.1 0.43 2.1 0.43 2.1 0.52 3.1 0.52 2.9 0.38
3/V06 L3
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 4.3 4
0.64
0.64 0.76
0.76
0.85
0.76 0.76
3/V10 L4
7.1 7.1
7.1
7.1 8.6
8.1
3/V07 L3 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

6
5.5
3/V11 L4 10 2.4 2.8 10 2.6 10 2.6 10 1.7

15 1.9
13 1.9
3/V13 L4 13 13 13 13 18 16
3/V09 L3 5 5 5.0 5 6.5 6
3/V10 L3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 7.8 7.3
4.3 4.5 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.5 3.5
3/V15 L4 21 21 21 21 29 25
3/V16 L4 24 24 24 24 32 28
3/V11 L3
9
9
9
9
14
12
3/V13 L3 12
7.8 9.6 12
6.7 12
6.7 12
5.0
17
5.5
15
5.5
3/V17 L4 29 29 29 29 44 39
3/V15 L3 19 19 19 19 27 23
3/V 16 L3 22 22 22 22 30 26
11 15 8.9 9.4 7.5 9.5 9.5
3/V 18 L4 40 40 40 40 55 50
3/V 19 L4 50 50 50 50 70 60
3/V 17 L3 26 26 26 26 41 36
23 28 16.8 17.5 10.7 17 17
3/V 21 L4 56 56 56 56 76 66
Life lubrication
oil [l]
TA - TE - TF - TD
OA - OE - OF- OD
AA - EA - FD AD - ED - FA AF - EF - FE AE - EE - FF
VA - VC - VF -IO
QA - QE - QF- QD
3/A 00 L2 0.60 1.4 1.0 1.4 0.9 1.4 0.6 1.4 0.6 1.4 0.6 1.4
3/A 01 L2 0.80 2.3 1.2 2.3 1.1 2.3 0.8 2.3 0.8 2.3 0.8 2.3
3/A 03 L2 1.3 3.2 2.3 3.2 2.0 3.2 1.3 3.2 1.3 3.2 1.3 3.2
3/A 05 L2 1.6 4.0 2.6 4.1 2.4 4.1 1.6 4.7 1.6 5.2 1.6 4.4
3/A 06 L2 2.5 4.9 3.5 8.1 3.2 4.7 2.5 8.4 2.5 11 2.5 9.2
3/A 07 L2 3.5 6.8 5.0 8.1 4.5 12 3.5 15 3.5 18 3.5 15
Life lubrication
NOTE: In combined gear units, lubrication of the planetary stage is separate from that of the worm (3/V) or
helical bevel (3/A) stages.
38
39
INDEX OF REVISIONS (R)
R0
We reserve the right to implement modifications without notice.
This catalogue cannot be reproduced, even partially, without prior consent.
40
INDUSTRY PROCESS
Worldwide
Bonfiglioli Worldwide & BEST Partners
AUSTRALIA
HUNGARY
BONFIGLIOLI TRANSMISSION (Aust) Pty Ltd.

AGISYS AGITATORS & TRANSMISSIONS Ltd
48-50 Adderley St. (East) - Auburn (Sydney) N.S.W. 2144

2045 Törökbálint, Tö u.2. Hungary
Tel. (+61) 2 8748 4400 - Fax (+61) 2 9748 8740

Tel. +36 23 50 11 50 - Fax +36 23 50 11 59
P.o. Box 6705 Silverwater NSW 1811

www.agisys.hu - info@agisys.com
www.bonfiglioli.com.au - bta1@bonfiglioli.com.au
INDIA
BONFIGLIOLI TRANSMISSIONS PVT Ltd.
AUSTRIA
PLOT AC7-AC11 Sidco Industrial Estate
MOLL MOTOR GmbH

Thirumudivakkam - Chennai 600 044
Industriestrasse 8 - 2000 Stockerau

Tel. +91(0)44 24781035 / 24781036 / 24781037
Tel. (+43) 2266 63421+DW - Fax (+43) 6342 180

Fax +91(0)44 24780091 / 24781904
Tlx 61 32 22 348 Molla

www.bonfiglioli.co.in - bonfig@vsnl.com
www.mollmotor.at - office@mollmotor.at
NEW ZEALAND
BELGIUM
SAECO BEARINGS TRANSMISSION
N.V. ESCO TRANSMISSION S.A.

36 Hastie Avenue, Mangere
Culliganlaan 3 - 1831 Machelem Diegem

Po Box 22256, Otahuhu - Auckland
Tel. 0032 2 7204880 - Fax 0032 2 7212827 - Tlx 21930 Escopo B

Tel. +64 9 634 7540 - Fax +64 9 634 7552
www.escotrans.be - info@escotrans.be
mark@saeco.co.nz
CANADA
POLAND
BONFIGLIOLI CANADA INC.

POLPACK Sp. z o.o. - Ul. Chrobrego 135/137 - 87100 Torun
2-7941 Jane Street - Concord, ONTARIO L4K 4L6

Tel. 0048.56.6559235 - 6559236 - Fax 0048.56.6559238
Tel. (+1) 905 7384466 - Fax (+1) 905 7389833

www.polpack.com.pl - polpack@polpack.com.pl
www.bonfigliolicanada.com - sales@bonfigliolicanada.com
RUSSIA
CHINA
FAM
BONFIGLIOLI DRIVES (SHANGHAI) CO. LTD.

57, Maly prospekt, V.O. - 199048, St. Petersburg
No. 8 Building, Area C1 - 318, SuHong Road, Qingpu

Tel. +7 812 3319333 - Fax +7 812 3271454
Shanghai 201700
www.fam-drive.ru - fam@nm.ru
Tel. +86 21 59228800 - Fax +86 21 59228811

SPAIN
www.bonfiglioli.cn - linkn@bonfiglioli.com
TECNOTRANS SABRE S.A.
Pol. Ind. Zona Franca sector C, calle F, n°6 08040 Barcelona
FRANCE
Tel. (+34) 93 4478400 - Fax (+34) 93 3360402
BONFIGLIOLI TRANSMISSIONS S.A.

www.tecnotrans.com - tecnotrans@tecnotrans.com
14 Rue Eugène Pottier BP 19
Zone Industrielle de Moimont II - 95670 Marly la Ville

SOUTH AFRICA
Tel. (+33) 1 34474510 - Fax (+33) 1 34688800

BONFIGLIOLI POWER TRANSMISSION Pty Ltd.
www.bonfiglioli.fr - btf@bonfiglioli.fr
55 Galaxy Avenue, Linbro Business Park - Sandton
Tel. (+27) 11 608 2030 OR - Fax (+27) 11 608 2631
GERMANY
www.bonfiglioli.co.za - bonfigsales@bonfiglioli.co.za
BONFIGLIOLI GETRIEBE GmbH

SWEDEN
Hamburger Straße 18 - 41540 Dormagen

BONFIGLIOLI SKANDINAVIEN AB
Tel. (+49) 2133 50260 - Fax (+49) 2133 502610

Kontorsgatan - 234 34 Lomma
www.bonfiglioli.de - bonfiglioli.getriebe@bonfiglioli.de
Tel. (+46) 40 412545 - Fax (+46) 40 414508
www.bonfiglioli.se - info@bonfiglioli.se
VECTRON Elektronik GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A 6 47807 Krefeld

THAILAND
Tel. (+49) 2151 83960 - Fax (+49) 2151 839699

K.P.T MACHINERY (1993) CO.LTD.
www.vectron.net - info@vectron.net
259/83 Soi Phiboonves, Sukhumvit 71 Rd. Phrakanong-nur,
Wattana, Bangkok 10110
GREAT BRITAIN
Tel. 0066.2.3913030/7111998
HEADQUARTERS
BONFIGLIOLI (UK) LIMITED

Fax 0066.2.7112852/3811308/3814905
5 Grosvenor Grange - Woolston - Warrington

www.kpt-group.com - sales@kpt-group.com
Cheshire WA1 4SF

Via Giovanni XXIII, 7/A
USA
Tel. (+44) 1925 852667 - Fax (+44) 1925 852668

40012 Lippo di Calderara di Reno
BONFIGLIOLI USA INC
www.bonfiglioliuk.co.uk - sales@bonfiglioliuk.co.uk
Bologna (ITALY)
1000 Worldwide Boulevard - Hebron, KY 41048
GREECE
Tel.: (+1) 859 334 3333 - Fax: (+1) 859 334 8888
Tel. (+39) 051 6473111
BONFIGLIOLI HELLAS S.A.

www.bonfiglioliusa.com
Fax (+39) 051 6473126
O.T. 48A T.O. 230 - C.P. 570 22, Industrial Area - Thessaloniki
industrialsales@bonfiglioliusa.com
mobilesales@bonfiglioliusa.com
www.bonfiglioli.com
Tel. (+30) 2310 796456 - Fax (+30) 2310 795903

bonfiglioli@bonfiglioli.com
www.bonfiglioli.gr - bonfigr@otenet.gr
VENEZUELA
MAQUINARIA Y ACCESSORIOS IND.-C.A.

SALES DEPARTMENT
HOLLAND
Calle 3B - Edif. Comindu - Planta Baja - Local B
ELSTO AANDRIJFTECHNIEK
La Urbina - Caracas 1070
Loosterweg, 7 - 2215 TL Voorhout

Tel. 0058.212.2413570 / 2425268 / 2418263
Via Enrico Mattei,12 - Z.l.
Tel. (+31) 252 219 123 - Fax (+31) 252 231 660
Fax 0058.212.2424552 - Tlx 24780 Maica V
Villa Selva - 47100 Forlì (ITALY)
www.elsto.nl - imfo@elsto.nl
www.maica-ve.com - maica@telcel.net.ve
Tel. (+39) 0543 789111
Fax (+39) 0543 789242 - 0543 789245
trasmital@bonfiglioli.com
SPARE PARTS BONFIGLIOLI
B.R.T.
Via Castagnini, 2-4
Z.I. Bargellino - 40012
Calderara di Reno - Bologna (ITALY)
Tel. (+39) 051 727844
Fax (+39) 051 727066
www.brtbonfiglioliricambi.it
brt@bonfiglioli.com
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
AND WIND ENERGY SOLUTIONS
INDUSTRY PROCESS
AND A UTOMATION SOLUTIONS
300
w w w. b o n fi g l i o l i . c o m
COD. 7.998.3.3.01.7 R0
TAB 2
TAB 3
SKF Single Row Cylindrical Roller Bearings
The rollers in a single row cylindrical roller bearing ( fig) are always guided
between the integral "open" flanges on one of the rings. These "open" flanges combined with the
specially designed and surface treated roller ends, provide improved lubrication, reduced friction
and consequently lower operating temperature.
The ring with the integral flanges together with the cylindrical roller and cage assembly can be
separated from the other ring. This results in easy mounting and dismounting, particularly where
the load conditions are such that interference fits are required for both rings.
SKF single row cylindrical roller bearings can accommodate heavy radial loads and high speeds.
They are manufactured in several different designs, the main difference being in the configuration
of the flanges. The most popular are the NU, N, NJ and NUP designs.
N U d e sig n
The outer ring of bearings of the NU design ( fig) has two integral flanges and the inner
ring is without flanges. Axial displacement of the shaft with respect to the housing can be
accommodated in both directions within the bearing itself. The bearings are therefore used as non-
locating bearings. For manufacturing and maintenance reasons, the two outer ring flanges of large-
size bearings of the NU design which are identified by a Drawing No. may not be integral but take
the form of loose flange rings.
N d e sig n
The inner ring has two integral flanges and the outer ring is without flanges ( fig). Axial
displacement of the shaft with respect to the housing can be accommodated in both directions
within the bearing itself. The bearings are therefore used as non-locating bearings.
N J d e sig n
The outer ring has two integral flanges and the inner ring one integral flange ( fig).
The bearings are therefore suitable for the axial location of a shaft in one direction, see also under
"Dynamic axial load carrying capacity".
N U P d e sig n
The outer ring has two integral flanges and the inner ring one integral flange and one non-integral
flange in the form of a loose flange ring ( fig). The bearings can be used as locating
bearings, i.e. they can provide axial location for a shaft in both directions, see also under "Dynamic
axial load carrying capacity".
Cylindrical roller bearings, single row, NU design
Principal dimensions Basic load ratings Fatigue Speed ratings Mass Designation Angle ring
dynamic static load Reference Limiting Designation
limit speed speed
d D B C C
0 Pu * - SKF Explorer bearing
mm kN kN r/min kg - -
105 225 49 500 500 57 3200 5600 8,90 NU 321 EC

ML * -
SKF cylindrical roller bearings
- always in the lead
Contents
The SKF brand now stands for more than ever before,
1 Product information ................................................. 3
and means more to you as a valued customer.

Accommodate heavy loads, high speeds and
axial displacements......................................................
3
While SKF maintains its leadership as the hallmark of

SKF single row cylindrical roller bearings –
quality bearings throughout the world, new dimensions

better by design ...........................................................
4
in technical advances, product support and services

SKF standard bearings – benefits ...............................
5
have evolved SKF into a truly solutions-oriented supplier,

Optimized cross section ..............................................
5
creating greater value for customers.

Optimal contact conditions .........................................
5
Interchangeability of bearing components ..................

5
These solutions encompass ways to bring greater

Cages made of three different materials .....................
6
productivity to customers, not only with breakthrough

A wide product range ..................................................
7
application-specific products, but also through leading- SKF Explorer cylindrical roller bearings –
edge design simulation tools and consultancy services,

a new level of performance ......................................... 1 0
plant asset efficiency maintenance programmes, and

Availability .................................................................... 1 3
the industry’s most advanced supply management

Product designation .................................................... 1 3
techniques.
High performance in all applications .......................... 14
The SKF brand still stands for the very best in rolling
2 Recommendations ................................................... 16
bearings, but it now stands for much more.
Selection of bearing size.............................................. 16
SKF – The knowledge engineering company

Bearing life ................................................................... 1 6
Previous and new – a comparison ............................... 1 7
Design of bearing arrangements ................................ 18
Mounting and dismounting .......................................... 20
Mounting ...................................................................... 20
Dismounting ................................................................. 21
Lubrication and handling ............................................. 22
Lubrication ................................................................... 22
Bearing handling .......................................................... 22
Comprehensive support for long-term success........ 23
3 Product data ............................................................. 24
Bearing data – general ................................................. 24
Product table................................................................. 32
Other SKF cylindrical roller bearings.......................... 62
SKF – The knowledge engineering company ............ 64
1 Product information 2 Recommendations 3 Product data
Design features Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
Accommodate heavy loads, high

1
speeds and axial displacements
NU design: The
Cylindrical roller bearings are produced

simplifies installation, particularly if an
outer ring has two
in many designs, ISO Dimension Series

interference fit is required for both
integral flanges while
and sizes. The vast majority are single

rings.
the inner ring has no
row cylindrical roller bearings with a

Single row cylindrical roller bearings
flanges
cage. These bearings are an excellent

with a cage are produced in many de-
N design: The inner
choice for applications where there are

signs, differing primarily in the config- ring has two integral
particularly heavy radial loads combined

uration of the flanges. The rollers are
flanges while the outer
with high speeds, especially if there is

always guided between integral flanges
ring has no flanges
a limited amount of axial displacement

on one of the rings. The ring with the
of the shaft with respect to the hous- integral flanges together with the
NJ design: The outer
ing as a result of thermal elongation.

cylindrical roller and cage assembly
ring has two integral
As axial displacement takes place

can be withdrawn from the other ring.
flanges while the inner
within the bearing, there is practically

The most popular single row cylindrical
ring has one integral
no increase in friction as the bearing

roller bearings are those of the NU, N,
flange
rotates.
NJ and NUP designs.
NUP design: The

outer ring has two
are separable, i.e. the ring with roller

integral flanges while
and cage assembly can be mounted

the inner ring has one
independently of the other ring. This

integral flange and one
loose flange ring
High radial load
carrying capacity
High speed
capability
Accommodate axial
displacement
Separable design
Customer benefits Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
SKF cylindrical roller bearings –
better by design
Norma-Compagnie, Cannstatt, Germany.

offered three additional advantages:
SKF milestones leading
This company was incorporated into

increased axial load carrying ability,
to the single row cylindrical
the SKF Group in 1 91 4. Since then,

optimized running properties and
roller bearings of today
the history of the single row cylindrical

reduced maintenance. These are just
roller bearing has been intertwined

two of the SKF pioneering successes
1 909: Patent granted to Dr.-Ing.
with that of SKF and there have been

from the past.
Kirner for the “NU bearing”
many developmental milestones.

In addition to the caged single row
1 930: Participation in standardiza-

With each milestone, SKF offered
cylindrical roller bearings described
tion of boundary dimensions
design and maintenance engineers

and listed in this brochure, the compre-
1 950: Introduction of the “B” roller,
the option to power up, size-down

hensive SKF cylindrical roller bearing
slightly crowned toward the
and improve the performance of their

assortment also includes single and
roller ends, in order to prevent
application.
double row full complement bearings
damaging edge stresses
In the 1 960s, SKF’s development of

(without cage), precision bearings,
1 962: Introduction of the E-type
the E-bearing, with its reinforced roller

multi-row bearings, printing press
cylindrical roller bearings with
complement, increased the load carry- bearings as well as support rollers
reinforced roller complement
ing ability by an average of 35 %. Then,

(➔ pages 62 and 63).
1 981 : Introduction of the EC
in the 1 980’s when SKF introduced the
cylindrical roller bearings with
single row EC cylindrical roller bearing,
modified roller end/flange
design engineers and end-users were
contact
1 984: Introduction of the logarithmic
contact profile providing
excellent load distribution
2002: Introduction of SKF Explorer
performance class bearings
Cylindrical roller bearings are a tradi-

tion within SKF. It is hardly surprising
that the major technical developments
for these bearings have been initiated
by SKF.
It all started in 1 909 with the inven-

tion of the modern caged single row
cylindrical roller bearing by Dr.-Ing.
Josef Kirner, a leading engineer at the
Fig 1 SKF standard bearings

The second improvement deals
specifically with the roller end/flange

1
– benefits contact. The geometry of the flange
Conventional
EC design
design When an application calls for bearings
has an “opened” design (➔ fig 3 ) and
that can accommodate heavy radial

the roller ends are surface treated to
loads, high speeds and axial displace- improve the effectiveness of the lubri-
ment of the shaft with respect to the
cant, reduce friction and lower opera-
housing, SKF single row cylindrical
ting temperatures. The improved roller
roller bearings are an obvious choice.

end/flange contact results also in high-
These bearings are always state-of-the- er axial load capability for those bear-
art and they feature
ings with flanges on inner and outer
rings.
• an optimized cross section,

The optimal internal geometry
• excellent contact conditions,

provides
• interchangeability of bearing
Optimized cross section
components
• higher radial and axial load carrying
• cages made of three different

capacity,
materials and
• higher operational reliability,
• a wide product range.

• longer service life,
• extended maintenance intervals,
Fig 2
The result is an assortment of cylind- • lighter, more compact, energy-saving
Conventional
Logarithmic
rical roller bearings that will provide
designs.
contact profile contact profile

long service life even under the most
arduous operating conditions.
Interchangeability
Optimized cross section

of bearing components
Another advantage of SKF single row
The cross section of SKF cylindrical

cylindrical roller bearings is that the
roller bearings is optimally utilized. The

bearing components are completely
diameter and length of the rollers and

interchangeable. Any bearing ring with
the wall thickness of the rings and

cage and roller assembly can be
retaining flanges have been optimized

assembled with any removable ring of
to provide maximum bearing service

the same bearing type and size. This
life (➔ fig
1 ). The optimized cross
is particulary important with bearing
Optimal contact conditions
section of SKF cylindrical roller bearings

components that have to be mounted
enables manufacturers to downsize

independently of each other.
their designs so that they are more
cost-effective, lighter and consume
less energy, without affecting perform-

Fig 3
ance.
Optimal contact
conditions
The internal geometry of SKF single
row cylindrical roller bearings is special
in two very significant ways.
First is the “logarithmic contact pro-

file” between the rollers and raceways
(➔ fig
2 ). This profile provides opti-
mal load distribution between the roll-
er and raceway, to significantly reduce
the risk of edge stresses and increase
Opened flanges
operational reliability even in applica-

tions where there is misalignment and
shaft deflections.
Cages made of three

• high elasticity,
Machined brass cages
• light weight,
There are several machined brass
different materials
• quiet running from good damping,
cage designs available for SKF single
SKF single row cylindrical roller bear- • excellent tribological properties, and
row cylindrical roller bearings: roller
ings are used in a wide range of appli- • very good behaviour under emer- guided cages and shoulder guided
cations and subjected to very different

gency running.
cages. Roller guided cages are centred
operating conditions. As a result, no

on the roller complement and are typic-
single cage could satisfy all possible
These properties have been confirmed
ally used for grease lubricated bearing
demands. To meet the needs of

by the successful operation of millions
arrangements. Shoulder guided cages
design engineers, cages are made

of bearings. Bearings with this poly- are centred on one of the bearing rings
from three different materials:

amide cage carry the designation suffix
and are typically used in oil lubricated
P, e.g. NU 203 ECP.

applications.
• polyamide,
• steel and
Steel window-type cages
One-piece machined brass cages
• brass.
A pressed steel window-type cage
The one-piece form-turned window-
is available for a large number of bear- type brass cage is an SKF innovation
Bearings fitted with a polyamide cage

ings, mainly as an alternative to the
and represents the new generation of
are suitable for the majority of applica- standard P cage. Bearings fitted with
machined brass cages for SKF single
tions. Metal cages are usually used for

a pressed steel cage are an excellent
row cylindrical roller bearings.
difficult operating conditions.

choice for applications where high
The advantages of this machined
temperatures or aggressive lubricants

brass cage include:
Polyamide cages
make the use of a polyamide cage
This injection moulded, window-type

unsuitable. Such bearings are identified
• very high strength,
cage of glass fibre reinforced and heat

by the designation suffix J, e.g. NU
• suitable for very high speeds and
stabilized polyamide 6,6 is the standard

31 0 ECJ, or no suffix.
accelerations,
recommendation for SKF small and

• suitable for high temperatures,
medium size single row cylindrical

• high endurance limit,
roller bearings. Its advantageous

• light weight design, and
properties speak for themselves:

• excellent lubrication conditions in
the roller/cage contact zones.
Bearings fitted with an inner or outer
ring centred, form-turned window-type
brass cage are identified by the desig-

nation suffix ML, e.g. NU 231 4 ECML.
Two-piece machined brass pronged
cages
This cage is designed as a pronged
cage with a cover. It features strong
cage bars with machined trapezoidal
shaped prongs that are peened in
place. As a result, heat-induced expan-

sion has no influence on cage strength.
Depending on bearing size this
brass cage is either
• roller guided, designation suffix M,
e.g. NU 232 ECM, or
• outer ring guided, designation suffix
MA, e.g. NU 232 ECMA,
and in some cases there is a choice of
guidance for the same bearing size.
Product range Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
Fig 4
1 8 28 1 9 29 10 20 30 31 2 12 22 3 23 4
1
Bearing series
NU design
A wide product range The SKF programme includes
The SKF manufacturing programme

• standard design bearings,
The outer ring of an NU-design bear-
of single row cylindrical roller bearings
• standard design bearings without
ing has two integral flanges while the
with a cage includes the Dimension

the removable ring,
inner ring has no flanges (a). Axial
Series shown in fig 4

. The standard
• special design bearings,
displacement of the shaft with respect
range comprises all flange configur- to the housing can be accommodated
ations and sizes normally used, start- as well as a large number of matching
in both directions.
ing at 1 5 mm bore diameter up to

angle rings.
800 mm bore diameter. The SKF stand- N design
ard range of bearings covers the

Standard design bearings
Standard design SKF single row cylin- The inner ring of an N-design bearing
• Dimension Series 2, 3, 4, 1 0, 1 2, 20,

drical roller bearings are manufactured
has two integral flanges while the
22 and 23 and
in four different designs. The main dif- outer ring has no flanges (b). Axial
• NU, N, NJ and NUP designs.

ference between them is the flange
displacement of the shaft with respect
configuration. These four designs

to the housing can be accommodated
(➔ fig
5
) are described below and
in both directions.
listed in the product table starting on
page 32.
NJ design
The outer ring of an NJ-design bearing
has two integral flanges and the inner
ring has one integral flange (c). These
Standard bearing designs

bearings can locate the shaft axially in
one direction only.
Fig 5
NUP design
The outer ring of an NUP-design bear-

ing has two integral flanges and the
inner ring has one integral flange and
one non-integral flange in the form of
a loose flange ring (d). These bearings
can be used as locating bearings to
locate the shaft axially in both direc-

tions.
a b c d
Fig 6 Fig 7 Fig 8 Fig 9 Fig 10
NUB NF
NJP NP
RNU design RN design Special designs Bearing with

Bearing with a
a tapered bore
snap ring groove
in the outer ring
Standard design bearings without

Engineering Catalogue, available on
housing. To restrain the outer ring from
the removable ring

CD-ROM or online at www.skf.com.
turning in the circumferential direction,
SKF supplies a selection of NU-design

SKF single row cylindrical roller bear-
cylindrical roller bearings without an
Bearings with a tapered bore
ings are also available with
inner ring (➔ fig

6
)– designation prefix
RNU – and N-design bearings without

SKF single row cylindrical roller bear- • one locating slot, designation suffix
an outer ring (➔ fig

7 ) – designation
ings are produced as standard with a
N1 , or
prefix RN. These bearings provide a

cylindrical bore. However, some bear- • two locating slots positioned 1 80°
solution for applications where hard- ings with a tapered bore 1 :1 2 can be
apart, designation suffix N2,
ened and ground raceways are pro- supplied (➔ fig

9
). Bearings with a
vided on the shaft or in the housing

tapered bore have a somewhat larger
in one outer ring side face (➔ fig
11 ).
bore.
radial internal clearance than corres- The dimensions of the locating slots
Because RNU bearings, for ex- ponding bearings with a cylindrical

are in accordance with DIN 541 2-1 :
ample, do not need an inner ring, the

bore and are identified by the designa- 2000.
shaft diameter can be larger to provide

tion suffix K.
a stronger, stiffer arrangement. Add- Additional SKF cylindrical roller
itionally, the possible axial displace- Bearings with a snap ring groove
bearings
ment of the shaft relative to the hous- Information on additional SKF cylindrical
ing is only limited by the width of the

Some single row cylindrical roller bear- roller bearings belonging to the SKF
raceway on the shaft.

ings are also produced with a snap
product range can be found on pages
ring groove in the outer ring (➔ fig

10 ).
62 and 63.
Special design bearings

These bearings are identified by the
Other single row cylindrical roller bear- designation suffix N. Because they
ings included in the SKF standard pro- can be located axially in the housing
Bearing with a locating slot
gramme, but not shown in this bro- bore by a retaining or snap ring, the
chure, are special design bearings

design of the arrangement can be
Fig 11
simplified and made more compact.
• with an extended inner ring (➔ fig

8 ),
The dimensions of the snap ring
• with flange configurations (➔ fig

8 )
groove and of the chamfer adjacent
that differ from the standard designs,

to the groove are in accordance with
• with a tapered bore,

ISO 464:1 995, which also specifies
• with a snap ring groove in the outer

suitable snap ring dimensions.
ring,
• with location slots in the outer ring.

Bearings with locating slots
Please contact SKF for availability of

In some applications where it is essen-
these special design bearings before
tial that mounting and dismounting
ordering. Details of these bearings can

can be done easily, outer rings have to
be found in the SKF Interactive

be mounted with a clearance fit in the
Angle rings
Fig 12
Angle rings, series designation HJ, are

1
designed to stabilize NU- and NJ-type
cylindrical roller bearings in the axial
direction (➔ fig
). They are used in
12
heavily loaded applications instead of
an NUP-type bearing because the full
width inner ring of the NU- or NJ-type
bearing provides a more stable seating
than the shorter inner ring and loose
flange of an NUP-type bearing. Also,
a b
angle rings very often simplify mount-

ing and dismounting.
SKF angle rings, manufactured from
carbon chromium steel are hardened
Bearings with an angle ring
and ground. The side face runout con-

forms to the SKF Normal tolerance
class of the appropriate bearing. HJ
angle rings, where available, are listed
in the product table with their designa-

tion and dimensions together with the
relevant bearing.
NU + HJ execution
NU-design bearings combined with an
HJ angle ring (a) can be used to locate
the shaft axially in one direction.
NJ + HJ execution
NJ-design bearings combined with an
HJ angle ring (b) can be used as locat-

ing bearings to provide axial shaft
location in both directions.
New performance class Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
SKF Explorer cylindrical roller
bearings – a new level of
performance
are also available in the new SKF

Logarithmic contact profile
Explorer performance class for endur- Material
ance and reliability. They are the result

hardness
of many years of intensive research by
flange geometry
an international team of SKF scientists

Heat treatment
and engineers. During this time SKF
materials and manufacturing special- Material
Roller end/
ists together with those responsible for
production have successfully com-
Cage design
pleted the puzzle of how to combine
Surface Permanent
the pieces
improvements
• material
finish
• heat treatment
Optimized
• material hardness
space
• manufacturing quality
utilization
Manufacturing quality
• logarithmic contact profile
• roller end/flange geometry
• surface finish
• cage design
to form an optimum product. The
result is one to be proud of: single row
cylindrical roller bearings that set new
standards with respect to performance
and endurance; single row cylindrical
roller bearings with enhanced ability to
support dynamic loads; single row Performance improvements permit downsizing
Diagram 1
2002
1984
NJ 305 EC
NJ 306 EC
SKF Explorer
1981
NJ 307 EC
1962

NJ 308 E
1950
NJ 309
10
cylindrical roller bearings with up to

Material
Logarithmic
three times longer service life than the

SKF Explorer bear- contact profile
1
previous SKF standard, which is super- ings feature an

This important fea-
ior to all other conventional cylindrical
extremely clean
ture of SKF cylin-
roller bearings. The performance
and homogenous steel with a minimum
drical roller bearings – for the past
improvements of SKF cylindrical roller

number of inclusions. This improved
twenty-odd years – has been further
bearings over the past 50 years have

steel is so much cleaner than the high- refined for the rollers used in SKF
permitted downsizing, whilst still main- est grades covered by present classi- Explorer bearings. The bearings are
taining the required performance

fications. The reduction in the number
thus even less sensitive to small mis-
(➔ diagram 1 ).
of inclusions increases the fatigue
alignment and can carry heavy loads.
strength in the rolling contacts and
enables the bearings to operate much
longer.
Heat treatment
Roller end/flange
New heat treatment

geometry
procedures opti- The optimized roller
mize the bearing

end/flange contacts
resistance to operational damage and

of SKF cylindrical roller bearings are
temperatures without affecting dimen- also present in SKF Explorer bearings.
sional stability.
The resultant advantages include re-
duced friction, lower operating tempera-
tures and less wear.
Material hardness
Surface finish
The hardness of
The surface finish of
the rings and rollers

the raceways on the
of SKF Explorer
rings and rollers has
bearings have been selected for opti- been further refined and provides
mum performance. This makes them

enhanced lubrication conditions in SKF
less sensitive to contaminants and

Explorer bearings so that they can oper-
contributes to their extremely long
ate longer even under poor lubrication
service life.
conditions.
Manufacturing
Cage design
quality
The design and
Upgraded manufac- material of the cage
turing processes
can have a signifi-
have contributed to a significant im- cant impact on a bearing’s ability to
provement in product quality. This

withstand given operating conditions.
means that the rings can be produced

That is the reason for making SKF
with an increased roundness and the

Explorer bearings available with up to
deviation from true form of the rollers

four different cages. The design of the
has also been further reduced. The

cages used in SKF Explorer bearings
results of the tighter tolerances may be

contributes to good lubrication of all
invisible but the bearings run markedly

contact surfaces, even under occa-
quieter and with less vibration.
sional interruptions in lubricant supply.
11
The proof is in the performance …

.... as well as the long life
All the product improvements de-
If an SKF Explorer cylindrical roller
To take full advantage of the increased
scribed can be exploited, for example,
bearing is compared with any other

load carrying capacity and improved
cylindrical roller bearing, several unique

wear resistance, the life of SKF Explorer
• to increase service life of existing
design features will be discovered.

bearings should always be calculated
designs,
These derive from the many improve- using the SKF rating life. In this calcu- • to maintain power output of new
ments described before and make the

lation, the life extending improvements
designs,
SKF Explorer performace class bear- to SKF Explorer bearings are taken
• to increase power output of existing
ings superior. The numerous “micro”

into account by
designs or
improvements do not become obvious

• to increase power density of new
until the bearing goes into operation.

• an increased basic dynamic load
designs.
It runs more quietly as well as longer –

rating, and
in fact much, much longer than any

• an increased SKF life modification
cylindrical roller bearing used so far –

factor aSKF, adjusted by multiplying
because it is an SKF Explorer bearing.

the term c (Pu/P) by 1 ,4 to take into
account the improved material and
operating behaviour.
Increase service life

Maintain power output
of existing designs of new designs
Don’t need to increase power output?

Use a smaller SKF Explorer bearing to:
Use an SKF Explorer bearing of equal size to:
• Reduce overall dimensions to save on material
• Increase safety factor

costs and weight
• Reduce vibration
• Achieve a stiffer design
• Reduce heat generation

• Reduce heat generation
• Increase service intervals

• Increase speeds
• Increase machine uptime
Increase power
Increase power
output of existing
density of new
designs
designs
Use a lower section height
Avoid costly redesign by using an

SKF Explorer bearing with the same
SKF Explorer bearing of equal size to:

outside diameter to:
• Increase power density

• Increase shaft size
• Increase speeds
• Achieve a stiffer design
• Increase loads
• Operate at the same or higher speeds
12
Availability Product designation

1
The most common cylindrical roller

SKF Explorer bearings retain the
bearings of the N, NU, NJ and NUP

designation of earlier standard bear-
designs in the 2, 3, 22 and 23
ings, e.g. NJ 221 8 ECP or NU 2330
Dimension Series are available as SKF

ECMA. However, each bearing and
Explorer bearings. They are listed in

its box are marked with the name
the product table, printed in blue.

EXPLORER, to avoid confusion.
13
Proven reliability Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
High performance in all
applications
SKF cylindrical roller bearings – espe- Two-stage bevel gear
cially SKF Explorer bearings – are state- High radial load carrying capacity,
of-the-art products. Their characteristics

wide speed range, low friction and
make them suitable for use in all types

easy axial displacement in a non-
of industrial applications and essential
locating bearing are just some of the
for some.
characteristics which make SKF
Here are just a few examples from

cylindrical roller bearings so interesting
the extensive range of SKF cylindrical

to gearbox manufacturers.
roller bearing applications.
Commercial vehicle rear axle gear
SKF cylindrical roller bearings contrib-

ute significantly to enhanced operation-
al reliability and extended vehicle ser-
vice life.
Applications Requirements Solution
• Stationary gearboxes
• Most modern design
• Automotive gearboxes
• High load carrying capacity
• Electric motors
• Compact bearings
• Vibration motors
• High speed capability
• Vibration generators for road

• High operational reliability
rollers
• High running accuracy
• Pumps and compressors

• Quiet operation, low vibration
• Ventilators
• Low operating temperatures
• Material handling equipment

• Easy mounting
• Paper machines
• Little maintenance
• Textile machinery
• Extremely long service life
• Rail vehicles
• Large choice of variants
• Rolling mills
• Worldwide availability
• Wind turbines
Proven reliability Page ............. 1 6 Page ............. 24
Marine reduction gear

Vibration motors
SKF cylindrical roller bearings have

Depending on their size, SKF cylindrical
1
made a significant contribution to ship

roller bearings of the NJ design with
safety and manoeuvrability over many,

a polyamide 6,6 cage or a one-piece
many sea miles.

window-type brass cage can accom-
modate heavy loads and high speeds in
Screw compressor with

combination with considerable eccen-
oil-lubricated screw flanks
tric motion.
Bearings must be able to support
heavy dynamic loads and operate at

These few examples do not do justice
high speeds – good reasons for

to the full range of applications for
selecting SKF cylindrical roller bear- cylindrical roller bearings and in par-
ings with an injection moulded PEEK
ticular to those of SKF Explorer cylin-
cage, for example, to support the
drical roller bearings in industry.
screws at the non-locating end.
Page ............. 3 Bearing size Page ............. 24
Selection of bearing size
Bearing life
Life modification factor aSKF
Table 1
This factor represents the relationship

Degree of
Factor η c
For modern high quality bearings the

between the fatigue load limit ratio
cleanliness/ for bearings with
basic rating life can deviate signifi- (Pu/P), the lubrication condition
contamination mean diameter
dm (mm)
cantly from the actual service life in

(viscosity ratio κ) and the contamina- ≤ 1 00 > 1 00
a given application. Therefore ISO

tion level in the bearing (η c). Values for
281 :1 990/Amd 2:2000 contains a

the factor aSKF can be obtained from
Cleanliness
modified life equation to supplement

diagram
1
as a function of η c (Pu/P) Extreme
1 1
the basic rating life, which now makes

for SKF standard and SKF Explorer
High 0,8 .. 0,6 0,9 .. 0,8
Normal 0,6 .. 0,5 0,8 .. 0,6
predicting the bearing life of SKF

cylindrical roller bearings and for differ-
Explorer bearings more precise.
ent values of the viscosity ratio κ.
Contamination
This life calculation makes use of a

Guideline values when selecting η c are
Slight
0,5 .. 0,3
0,6 .. 0,4
Typical 0,3 .. 0,1 0,4 .. 0,2
modification factor to account for the

given in table
1 . More detailed infor- Severe 0,1 .. 0 0,1 .. 0
amount of contamination, the viscosity

mation can be found in the SKF
of the lubricant, and the fatigue limit of

General Catalogue or the SKF
Guideline values for factor η c
the material. The SKF life modification

Interactive Engineering Catalogue,
for contamination level
factor aSKF applies to the standardized

available on CD-ROM or online at
concept.
www.skf.com.
The SKF rating life of a roller bearing

Diagram
1 has been drawn up for
according to ISO 281:1990/Amd 2:2000

a safety factor commonly used in fatigue
is
life considerations and is valid for lubri- where
cants without EP additives. If a lubricant

e = limiting value
1 0/3
containing such additives is used,
= 0,2 for bearings
C
Lnm = a1 aSKF ()P
reference should be made to the

in the 1 0, 2, 3 and 4 series
SKF General Catalogue or the SKF

= 0,3 for bearings

in the 22 and 23 series
If the speed is constant, the life can be

Y = axial load factor
expressed in operating hours, using

www.skf.com.
= 0,6 for bearings
the equation
in the 1 0, 2, 3 and 4 series
Equivalent dynamic bearing load

= 0,4 for bearings
When dynamically stressed cylindrical

in the 22 and 23 series
1 000 000 C 1 0/3
Lnmh = a1 aSKF
60 n( )
P
roller bearings are used as non-locat-

ing bearings
Since axially loaded cylindrical roller
bearings only operate satisfactorily
where
P = Fr
when they are subjected to a simultan-
Lnm = SKF rating life (at 1 00 – n %
eously acting radial load, the ratio
reliability), millions of revolutions

If cylindrical roller bearings with flanges
Fa/Fr should not exceed 0,5.
Lnmh = SKF rating life (at 100 – n %

on both the inner and outer rings are
reliability), operating hours

used to locate a shaft in one or both
Equivalent static bearing load
a1
= life adjustment factor for reliabil- directions, the equivalent dynamic
For statically stressed cylindrical roller
ity according to ISO 281:1990,

bearing load can be calculated using
bearings
normally a1 = 1
aSKF = SKF life modification factor

P = Fr
when Fa/Fr ≤ e
P0 = Fr
(➔ diagram
1 )
P = 0,92 Fr + YFa
when Fa/Fr > e
C = basic dynamic load rating, kN
P
= equivalent dynamic bearing
load, kN
n = rotational speed, r/min
16
Page ............. 3 Bearing size Page ............. 24
Previous and new –

Diagram 1
a comparison
50
The performance enhancements of
SKF Explorer cylindrical roller bearings

a SKF
can best be demonstrated by life calcu-

lations for the bearing NU 207 ECP.
20 2
For the same operating conditions the
life of
1 0
• the previous standard NU 207 ECP
with
– a basic dynamic load rating
C = 48,4 kN, and
– a fatigue load limit Pu = 6,1 kN and
• the SKF Explorer bearing NU 207 ECP
with
2
– a basic dynamic load rating
=
2
C = 56 kN, and
– a fatigue load limit Pu = 6,1 kN
0 ,
0 ,
are calculated. The operating condi-
0,
tions are assumed to be
0,5 0 ,
• an equivalent dynamic bearing load
P = 4,8 kN,
3
0 ,
• a viscosity ratio κ = 2, and
• a contamination level η c = 0,4.

0,2
0,
The L1 0m lives of the two bearings are

0 ,1 5
then as follows, since a1 = 1 .

0,1
0,1
Previous standard bearing
For η c (Pu/P) = 0,4 (6,1 /4,8) = 0,5 using

0,05
Other
SKF standard
the black values on the x axis in

0,005 0,01 0,02 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5
bearings
diagram
1 and κ = 2 P
u
ηc
––
aSKF ≈ 3,2
SKF Explorer
bearings
0,005 0,01 0,02 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2
u
so that the life becomes ηc
––
L10m = aSKF (C/P)1 0/3 = 3,2 (48,4/4,8)10/3
If κ > 4, use curve for κ = 4.
As the value of η c (Pu/P) tends to zero, aSKF tends to 0,1 for all values of κ
= 7 080 millions of revolutions
SKF life modification factor aSKF for cylindrical roller bearings
SKF Explorer bearing
For η c (Pu/P) = 0,4 (6,1 /4,8) = 0,5 using
the blue values on the x axis in
diagram
1 and κ = 2
aSKF ≈ 6,2
In this comparison, the life of the SKF
Explorer bearing, when compared to
so that the life becomes

a previous standard bearing, is 22 320
hours versus 7 080 hours – or approxi-

L1 0m = aSKF (C/P)1 0/3 = 6,2 (56/4,8)1 0/3
mately three times longer life.
= 22 320 millions of revolutions
17
Page ............. 3 Application advice Page ............. 24
Design of bearing arrangements
When designing a bearing arrange- Bearing arrangement

is achieved. A typical arrangement
ment it is not just a question of select- Because of their design characteris- with a cylindrical roller bearing
ing a suitable bearing and determining

tics, SKF cylindrical roller bearings are
at the non-locating side is shown in
its size – a number of other factors

particularly suitable for bearing
fig 1
.
have to be taken into account: type

arrangements
The choice between the NU and
and quantity of lubricant, bearing fits

N designs should take arrangement
and bearing clearance, design of

• that have to accommodate heavy
design and mounting procedures into
associated components, selection of

radial loads and sometimes also
consideration. N design bearings are
seals etc. Each individual decision

axial loads while operating at high
preferred for high-speed applications
influences the subsequent perform- speeds, and

or where idling under very light loads is
ance, reliability and economy of the

• where there is a need to have inter- to be expected.
bearing arrangement.
ference fits on the shaft as well as in
In most applications cylindrical roller
To design a bearing arrangement

the housing.
bearings with a cylindrical bore are
thus calls for some considerable ex- used. Bearings with a tapered bore
perience as well as knowledge of

Bearings with a flangeless inner or
are required for a limited number of
mechanics. If this is available, the

outer ring can accommodate axial
applications.
information contained in the SKF

displacements of the shaft as a result
The matrixprovides an overview of
General Catalogue or the SKF Inter- of thermal expansion. As axial dis- the suitability of the different cylindrical
active Engineering Catalogue, available

placement takes place within the bear- roller bearing standard designs for
on CD-ROM or online at www.skf.com,

ing rather than between the bearing
given application conditions.
should be adequate. If not, please con- and shaft or housing bore, there is
tact the SKF application engineering

practically no increase in friction as
service for assistance.

the bearing rotates. Eliminating the
Here, the characteristics of SKF

axial interaction between the locating
cylindrical roller bearings and their

and the non-locating bearing means
suitability for various application

that stresses are low, temperature is
demands are presented.

minimized and maximum service life
Fig 1
NU type cylindrical roller bearing as
non-locating bearing on a gear shaft
18
Page ............. 3 Design characteristics Page ............. 24
Overview of the characteristics of the various standard designs of single row cylindrical roller bearings
Matrix
Characteristics Standard designs 2
Suitability of
Cage
bearing for design NU NU + HJ N NJ NJ + HJ NUP RNU RN
Radial All
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
loads
Combined All
–– +
–– +
+
+ –– – –
loads
←
←
←→ ←→
Non-locating
All +++ ++
+++ ++ –– –– +++ +++
positions
← ←
Locating
All –– +
–– +
+
+ –– – –
positions
←
←
←→ ←→
High running
All +++ ++ +++ ++ ++ ++ +++ +++
accuracy
Loads smaller
P – – + – – – – +
than minimum load
High speeds +
P, M
++
++ ++ ++
++ ++
++ ++
grease lubrication
J
+ +
+ +
+ +
MA, ML, MP
– – – – – – – –
High speeds +
P, M
++
++ ++ ++
++ ++
++
++
oil lubrication
J
+ +
+ +
+
+
MA, ML, MP
+++ +++ +++
+++ +++
+++
+++ +++
High P, M
+
+ + + +
+ + +
accelerations J
– –
– – – –
MA, ML, MP +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
High radial
P, M – –
– – –
– –
–
accelerations´+ J
+ +
+ +
+ +
vibrations MA, ML, MP

+++ +++
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
High operating
P – –
– – –
– –
–
temperatures J
++ ++
++
++
++
++
M, ML, MP ++ ++ ++
++
++
++
++ ++
Symbols:
Cages:
+++
eminently suitable
J Pressed steel cage, roller centred
++ very suitable
M Two-piece machined brass cage, roller centred
+ suitable MA Two-piece machined brass cage, outer-ring centred
– less suitable ML One-piece form-turned window-type brass cage, inner or outer ring centred
–– unsuitable
MP
One-piece window-type brass cage with milled, reamed or broached pockets,
← in one direction
inner or outer ring centred
←→ in both directions
P
Injection moulded cage of glass fibre reinforced polyamide 6,6, roller centred
not applicable
presupposes shaft or housing raceway of bearing quality
19
Page ............. 3 Mounting Page ............. 24
Mounting and dismounting
Cylindrical roller bearings are precision

Mounting
designed for heating the inner ring of
mechanical components that should

cylindrical roller bearings (➔ fig
8 )
be handled with care during mounting

The inner and outer rings of cylindrical
can also be used.
and dismounting. This includes using

roller bearings are mounted separate- When assembling the removable ring
the correct methods and the appropri- ly. This simplifies mounting as inter- and the ring with roller and cage
ate tools. To realize maximum bearing

ference fits are generally prescribed
assembly, the shaft or the housing
service life, SKF has a full line of

for both rings.
should be turned slowly (➔ fig
2
).
mounting, dismounting and mainten- If the required interference is not too

Skewing the rings must be prevented
ance tools for nearly every purpose.

great, the rings of small cylindrical roller
(➔ fig
3
), as otherwise the rollers and
Full information can be found in the

bearings can usually be mounted
raceways may be damaged. Where
catalogue MP3000 “SKF Maintenance

using a mechanical fitting tool, such
series mounting or large bearings are
and Lubrication Products” or online at

as the SKF TMFT bearing fitting tool.
involved, a mounting sleeve is often
www.skf.com. Additional information

Large numbers of bearings are gener- used (➔ fig
4 ). The sleeve should
about how to mount and dismount

ally mounted using mechanical or
have the same diameter as the raceway
single row cylindrical roller bearings can

hydraulic presses.
diameter F of the inner ring and ma-
also be found at www.skf/mount.com.
The rings of larger bearings are sel- chined to tolerance d1 0.
dom mounted in the cold state. The
inner ring and – if possible – the hous-

ing must therefore be heated prior to
mounting. SKF induction heaters
(➔ fig
1 ) are suitable for heating inner
rings to some 60 to 80 °C above ambi-

ent temperature. Hotplates as well as
aluminium heating rings specially
Care must been taken that shaft and
An induction heater for safely heating

Rotate the shaft or housing during
housing are correctly aligned to avoid
inner rings
assembly
scoring the raceways
Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3
20
Page ............. 3 Dismounting Page ............. 24
Dismounting handles (➔ fig 8

) that is simple and Fig 6
easy-to-use and avoids shaft and
If the bearings are to be reused after

inner ring damage.
Withdrawal tool
inspection, they must be dismounted

The use of electric withdrawal tools
as carefully as they were mounted.

becomes economic when bearings of
Dismounting an outer ring is easier

the same size are frequently mounted
if tapped holes are provided in the

and dismounted. These electrical
2
housing shoulders to take withdrawal

induction heaters have one or more
screws (➔ fig
5 ).
coils energized by alternating current.
The inner ring of a cylindrical roller

It is necessary to demagnetize the
bearing can be dismounted mechan- inner rings after heating and removal.
ically or with heat.

Pullers, heaters and heating rings
The inner ring of small bearings and

are available from SKF. Additional infor-
the inner ring with roller and cage
mation can be found in the catalogue
assembly of N-type bearings can be

MP3000 “SKF Maintenance and
Notches pre-machined in the shaft
removed using mechanical withdrawal

Lubrication Products” or online at
shoulder that accommodate puller arms
tools. This can be performed with

www.skf.com.
eliminate the risk of damaging the inner
ring or seating
• a jaw puller, if the shaft is pre-

machined (➔ fig
6 ) or
• a strong back puller such as SKF
TMBS pullers, when there is enough

The SKF TMBS strong back puller is
space behind (➔ fig

7 ).
supplied in kit form to cover the most
difficult pulling operations
Special heaters have been develop-

ed to dismount the inner rings of
Fig 7
cylindrical roller bearings having no
flanges or only one flange. They heat
the inner ring rapidly without appre-

ciably heating the shaft, so that the
expanded inner ring can be removed
easily.
If inner rings do not have to be
removed frequently, or if larger sizes
of inner rings (up to approximately
400 mm bore diameter) have to be
dismounted the use of an aluminium
heating ring is the preferred method.
This tool consists of a slotted ring with
The use of a mounting sleeve facilitates

Outer rings can be removed more easily
The SKF TMBR series aluminium heating
the assembly of a larger number of

if tapped holes are provided in the
ring is an economic, easy-to-use tool to
bearings
housing shoulder
mount and dismount inner rings
Fig 4 Fig 5 Fig 8
21
Page ............. 3 Lubrication Page ............. 24
Lubrication and handling
Lubrication
The greases generally recommend- Bearing handling
ed for cylindrical roller bearings have
SKF cylindrical roller bearings can be

a consistency of 2 and may contain
Before packaging, SKF cylindrical roller
lubricated with grease or oil. There is

EP additives. Where the bearings are
bearings are treated with a rust in-
no strict boundary where one type of
subjected to axial loads, the grease
hibiting medium and can be stored for
lubricant is more appropriate than the

should have an oil bleed to DIN
several years in their original packages.
other. The upper temperature limit for

51 81 7:1 998 (IP 1 21 /75:1 992) of ap- The bearings should be stored lying
greases based on mineral oils is about

proximately 3 %. For this reason,
down, preferably in rooms that are free
1 20 °C for continuous operation. The

high-temperature greases should only
from vibration, have a relative humidity
limit is much higher for oil lubrication

be used when the operating tempera- that does not exceed 60 % and where
and even higher if synthetic oils are

ture is always above +80 °C. Similarly,
the temperature is reasonably con-
used, provided that the cage and other
greases with a consistency of 3 should
stant.
components of the bearing arrange- only be used if, for example, strong
When purchasing, make sure that
ment can withstand the higher tempera- vibrations favour distribution of the
the SKF cylindrical roller bearings are
tures.
grease.
in their original packages (➔ page 13).
The advantage of grease over oil is

To enhance the operational reliability
A single bearing package cannot be
that grease is more easily retained in

of axially loaded cylindrical roller bear- opened without breaking the seal, this
the bearing arrangement. This is par- ings SKF recommends using a grease
proves that the bearing is in “mint” con-
ticularly important in applications
or oil with a viscosity that is at least
dition and has not been exposed to
where the bearing axes are vertical or

1,5 times the requisite viscosity for the
undesirable environmental conditions.
at an angle.
operating temperature (viscosity ratio
On the other hand, oil lubrication

κ = /1 ≥ 1 ,5). If an axial load is applied
allows operation at higher speeds and

for long periods (> 1 h), the relubrication
temperatures and contributes to the

intervals should be shortened.
removal of frictional or applied heat
from the bearing position.
SKF cylindrical roller bearings with
an injection moulded cage of glass
fibre reinforced polyamide 6,6 are
particularly suited to grease lubrica-

tion. The special cage bar design
enables the build-up of a grease reser-

voir by adhesion. This allows mainten-
ance intervals to be extended, good
performance under emergency condi-

tions and help to prevent bearing seiz-
ure under lubrication starvation.
22
Page ............. 3 SKF concepts to benefit customers Page ............. 24
Comprehensive support
for long-term success

2
Why not profit from SKF competence?

Another SKF concept that takes an
assets – from personnel to machinery
Decades of experience in almost all

even wider view of customer-related
– bringing together knowledge and
branches of industry have enabled

technologies and competencies is
technology to achieve the greatest
SKF to establish expertize in improving
known as Asset Efficiency Optimiza- return on investment. It covers
machine performance and productivity

tion™ (AEO) and focuses, as the
that can be shared with customers

name suggests, on considering ma- • condition-dependent maintenance,
and bearing users. SKF Total Shaft

chines and plants as assets and opti- • proactive maintenance for reliability
Solutions™ can provide

mizing their efficiency.
enhancement,
The AEO concept from SKF picks

• maintenance service and
• failure analysis and root cause

up where most plant asset manage- • integrated maintenance concepts.
elimination,
ment programmes typically stop. Using
• engineering consultancy for all

this concept enables a plant to produce
More information on the SKF com-
rotating components,
the same amount for less cost, or to
petencies and services can be obtained
• products, services and systems, and

produce more for the same costs. It is
from the local SKF representative.
• machine condition diagnoses.

a system for organizing and applying
23
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6 Bearing data
Bearing data – general
Designs
SKF Explorer class bearings
SKF single row cylindrical roller bear- Cylindrical roller bearings in the SKF
ings with a cage guided roller comple- Explorer performance class are listed
ment are produced in many different

in blue in the product table. SKF
designs. The most popular ones

Explorer bearings retain the designa-
(➔ fig 1 )
tion of earlier standard bearings, e.g.
NU 21 6 ECP. However, each bearing
• NU design (a)
and its box are marked with the name
• N design (b)
“EXPLORER”, to avoid confusion.
• NJ design (c)
• NUP design (d)

Dimensions
The dimensions of SKF single row
are described on page 7 and listed in

cylindrical roller bearings are in accord-
the product table.
ance with ISO 1 5-1 998.
The dimensions of the HJ angle
Angle rings
rings correspond to those specified in
Angle rings, series designation HJ

ISO 246:1 995.
(➔ fig 2 ), are designed to fit
Tolerances
• NU-design bearings (a) or

• NJ-design bearings (b).
ings are manufactured to Normal toler-
ances for dimensional accuracy and to
The HJ angle rings, where available,

P6 for running accuracy as standard.
are listed in the product table with

The tolerances correspond to those
their designation and dimensions

specified in ISO 492:2002 and can be
together with the relevant bearing.

found in the SKF General Catalogue
Detailed information on angle rings

or the SKF Interactive Engineering
can be found on page 9.

Catalogue, available on CD-ROM or
online at www.skf.com.
Standard bearing designs Bearings with an angle ring
Fig 1 Fig 2
a b c d a b
24
Table 1
Radial internal clearance

ings are manufactured with Normal
radial internal clearance as standard.
Most of the bearings are also available
with C3 radial internal clearance. Some
of the bearings can even be supplied
with the smaller C2 or the appreciably
greater C4 clearance. In addition some
bearings are produced with special
Bore
diameter
reduced clearances. This special clear-
d
C2 Normal
C3 C4 C5 ance corresponds to a section of
over incl. min max min max min max min max min max
a standard clearance range or to sec-
mm µm
tions of two adjacent clearance ranges.
Bearings with non-standard clear-

ance or with the special reduced clear-
– 24
0
25
20 45
35 60
50 75
65
90
24 30 0 25 20 45 35 60 50 75 70 95
ances can be supplied to special order.
30 40 5 30 25 50 45 70 60 85 80 1 05
The actual clearance limits for bear-
40 50 5 35 30 60 50 80 70 1 00
95
1 25
ings with a cylindrical bore are provid-
50 65 10 40 40 70 60 90 80 110 1 1 0 1 40
ed in table
1 and are in accordance
65 80 10 45 40 75 65 1 00 90 1 25 1 30 1 65
with ISO 5753:1 991 . They are valid for
80 100
1 5 50 50 85
75
1 1 0
1 05
1 40
1 55
1 90
unmounted bearings under zero meas-
100 120 15 55 50 90 85 1 25 1 25 1 65 1 80 220
uring load.
120 140 15 60 60 1 05 1 00 1 45 1 45 1 90 200 245

The separable components of all
140
160
20
70
70
1 20
1 1 5
1 65
1 65
21 5
225
275
SKF bearings with standard clearance
160 180 25 75 75 1 25 1 20 1 70 1 70 220 250 300

as well as those with reduced clearance
180 200 35 90 90 1 45 1 40 1 95 1 95 250 275 330
are interchangeable.
200
225
45 1 05
1 05
1 65
1 60
220
220
280
305
365
225 250 45 110 1 1 0 1 75 1 70 235 235 300 330 395
250 280 55 1 25 1 25 1 95 1 90 260 260 330 370 440
280
315
55 1 30
1 30
205
200
275
275
350
41 0
485
315 355 65 1 45 1 45 225 225 305 305 385 455 535
355 400 1 00 1 90 1 90 280 280 370 370 460 51 0 600
400
450
1 1 0
21 0
21 0
31 0
31 0
41 0
41 0
51 0
565
665
450 500 1 1 0 220 220 330 330 440 440 550 625 735
500 560 1 20 240 240 360 360 480 480 600 690 81 0
560
630
1 40
260
260
380
380
500
500
620
780
900
630 710 1 45 285 285 425 425 565 565 705 865 1 005
710 800 1 50 31 0 31 0 470 470 630 630 790 975 1 1 35
800 900 1 80 350 350 520 520 690 690 860 1 095 1 265
Radial internal clearance of cylindrical roller bearings with a cylindrical bore
25
Table 2 Axial internal clearance
NUP-design cylindrical roller bearings,
which can locate a shaft axially in both
directions, are manufactured with an
axial internal clearance as shown in
table
2
. The axial internal clearance
+
of NJ-design bearings when combined
with an HJ angle ring is specified in
table
3
.
The clearance limits quoted in tables
Bearing
Axial internal clearance of bearings in the series
2
and 3 should be considered as
Bore Size NUP 2

NUP 3
NUP 22
NUP 23
diameter code min max min max min max min max
guideline values. When axial internal
clearance is measured, the rollers may
mm – µm
tilt, causing an enlargement of the
axial clearance, which may be as
15 02 – –
– –
– –
– –
much as
17 03 37 1 40 37 1 40 37 1 40 47 1 55
20 04 37 1 40 37 1 40 47 1 55 47 1 55
• the radial internal clearance of bear-

25 05 37 1 40
47
1 55
47
1 55
47
1 55
30 06 37 1 40 47 1 55 47 1 55 47 1 55
ings in the 2, 3 and 4 series or
35 07 47 1 55 47 1 55 47 1 55 62 1 80
• 2/3 of the radial internal clearance
for bearings in the 22 and 23 series.
40 08 47 1 55
47 1 55
47
1 55
62
1 80
45 09 47 1 55 47 1 55 47 1 55 62 1 80
50 10 47 1 55 47 1 55 47 1 55 62 1 80
55 11 47 1 55
62 1 80
47 1 55
62
1 80
60 12 47 1 55 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
65 13 47 1 55 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
70 14 47 1 55
62 1 80
62 1 80
87 230
75 15 47 1 55 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
80 16 47 1 55 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
85 17
62
1 80
62 1 80
62 1 80
87 230
90 18 62 1 80 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
95 19 62 1 80 62 1 80 62 1 80 87 230
100
20
62
1 80
87
230
87 230
1 20 31 5
105 21 62 1 80 – – – – – –
110 22 62 1 80 87 230 87 230 1 20 31 5
120
24 62 1 80
87
230
87
230
1 20 31 5
130 26 62 1 80 87 230 87 230 1 20 31 5
140 28 62 1 80 87 230 87 230 1 20 31 5
150
30 62 1 80
– – 87 230
1 20 31 5
160 32 87 230 – – – – – –
170 34 87 230 – – – – – –
180
36 87 230
– – – – – –
190 38 87 230 – – – – – –
200 40 87 230 – – – – – –
220
44
95
230
– – – – – –
240 48 95 250 – – – – – –
260 52 95 250 – – – – – –
Axial internal clearance of NUP cylindrical roller bearings
26
Axial displacement
Table 3
Cylindrical roller bearings with flange-

less inner or outer rings, NU- and N-
designs, and NJ-design bearings with
one integral flange at the inner ring,
can accommodate axial displacement
of the shaft with respect to the hous- +
ing as a result of thermal expansion
within certain limits (➔ fig

3
). As axial
displacement takes place within the
Bearing
Axial internal clearance of bearings in the series
bearing and not between the ring and

Bore Size NJ 2+HJ
NJ 3+HJ
NJ 4+HJ
NJ 22+HJ
NJ 23+HJ
shaft or housing bore, there is practic- diameter code min max min max min max min max min max 3
ally no increase in friction as the bear- mm – µm
ing rotates. Values for the permissible
axial displacement “s” from the normal
15 02 42 1 65
42 1 65
– – –
–
–
–
position of one bearing ring relative to

17 03 42 1 65 42 1 65 – – 42 1 65 52 1 83
the other are listed in the product table.

20 04 42 1 65 42 1 65 – – 52 1 85 52 1 83
25 05 42 1 65
52
1 85
–
–
52
1 85
52 1 83
Influence of operating temperature

30 06 42 1 65 52 1 85 60 200 52 1 85 52 1 83
on bearing material
35 07 52 1 85 52 1 85 60 200 52 1 85 72 21 5
SKF cylindrical roller bearings undergo

40 08
52
1 85
52
1 85
60 200
52 1 85
72 21 5
a special heat treatment. When fitted

45 09 52 1 85 52 1 85 60 200 52 1 85 72 21 5
with a steel or brass cage, they can be

50 10 52 1 85 52 1 85 80 235 52 1 85 72 21 5
used at temperatures of up to +1 50 °C.

55 11 52 1 85
72 21 5
80 235
52 1 85
72 21 5
60 12 52 1 85 72 21 5 80 235 72 21 5 1 02 275
Misalignment
65 13 52 1 85 72 21 5 80 235 72 21 5 1 02 275
The ability of single row cylindrical

70 14 52 1 85
72 21 5
80 235
72
21 5
1 02
275
roller bearings to accommodate angu- 75 15 52 1 85 72 21 5 80 235 72 21 5 1 02 275
80 16 52 1 85 72 21 5 80 235 72 21 5 1 02 275
lar misalignment of the inner ring with
respect to the outer ring is limited to a

85 17 72 21 5
72 21 5
1 1 0 290
72
21 5
1 02
275
few minutes of arc. The actual values

90 18 72 21 5 72 21 5 1 1 0 290 72 21 5 1 02 275
95 19 72 21 5 72 21 5 1 1 0 290 72 21 5 1 02 275
are
100
20 72 21 5
1 02 275
1 1 0 290
1 02 275
1 40
375
• 4 minutes of arc for bearings in the

105 21 72 21 5 1 02 275 1 1 0 290 1 02 275 1 40 375
110 22 72 21 5 1 02 275 1 1 0 290 1 02 275 1 40 375
narrow 2, 3, 4, 1 0 and 1 2 series and
• 3 minutes of arc for bearings in the

120
24
72
21 5
1 02 275
1 1 0 31 0
1 02 275
1 40
375
130 26 72 21 5 1 02 275 1 1 0 31 0 1 02 275 1 40 375
20, 22 and 23 series.

140 28 72 21 5 1 02 275 1 40 385 1 02 275 1 40 375
These guideline values apply to non- 150

30
72
21 5
1 02 275
1 40 385
1 02 275
1 40
375
160 32 1 02 275 1 02 275 – – 1 40 375 1 40 375
locating bearings, provided the posi- 170 34 1 02 275 – – – – 1 40 375 – –
tions of the shaft and housing axes
remain constant. Larger misalignments

180
36
1 02
275
–
– – – 1 40 375
– –
190 38 1 02 275 – – – – – – – –
may be possible but may result in
200 40 1 02 275 – – – – – – – –
shorter bearing service life. In these
220
44
1 1 0 290
– – – – – – – –
240 48 1 1 0 31 0 – – – – – – – –
Fig 3 260 52 1 1 0 31 0 – – – – – – – –
280 56 1 1 0 31 0 – – – – – – – –
s s
Axial internal clearance of NJ cylindrical roller bearings + HJ angle ring
Axial displacement
27
cases, it is advisable to contact the

Cages
Note
SKF application engineering service.

Depending on their size and design,
Bearings with a polyamide cage
When the bearings are used to locate

SKF single row cylindrical roller bear- can be operated at temperatures
the shaft axially, the guideline values

ings are equipped as standard with
up to +120 °C. The lubricants gen-
must be reduced, as uneven flange
one of the cages described below and
erally used for rolling bearings do
loading can lead to increased wear

shown in fig
4 . Bearings included in
not have a detrimental effect on
and possibly even to flange fracture.

the SKF standard programme are also
cage properties, with the exception
The maximum values for misalign- available with a choice of up to four

for a few synthetic oils and greases
ment do not apply to NUP bearings or

different cages (➔ product table).
with synthetic base oil as well as
NJ bearings with an HJ angle ring.

The various cages used for single
some lubricants containing a high
Because these bearings have two

row cylindrical roller bearings are
proportion of EP additives when
inner and two outer ring flanges and

used at elevated temperatures.
the axial internal clearance is relatively

•injection moulded cage of glass fibre
For bearing arrangements, which
small, axial stresses may be induced

reinforced polyamide 6,6, roller
are to operate at continuosly high
in the bearing. In case of doubt, please

centred, designation suffix P (a),
temperatures or under difficult con-
contact the SKF application engineering
•unhardened pressed steel cage, roller
ditions, the use of bearings with
service.
centred, designation suffix J or no
metallic cages is recommended.
suffix (b),
For applications using refrigerants
•one-piece window-type brass cage,

such as ammonia or freon replace-
inner or outer ring centred, designa- ments, bearings with a polyamide
tion suffixes ML and MP (c),

cage can be used for operating
•two-piece machined brass cage,

temperatures up to 70 °C. At higher
roller centred, designation suffix M,

operating temperatures bearings
or outer ring centred, designation

incorporating a machined brass or
suffix MA, or inner ring centred, des- steel cage should be used.
ignation suffix MB (d).

For demanding applications, like
compressors, the use of glass fibre
reinforced PEEK cages is common.
The exceptional properties of PEEK
are a superior combination of
strength and flexibility, high operat-

ing temperature range, high chem-
ical and wear resistance and good
processability.
Standard cages
Fig 4
a b c d
28
Speed ratings
influence on the rolling conditions in
The limiting speed is determined by

the bearing arrangement and may
criteria that include the form stability

cause damaging sliding movements to
and strength of the cage, lubrication of

occur between the rollers and race-
the cage guiding surfaces, centrifugal
ways.
and gyratory forces acting on the roll- The requisite minimum load to be
ing elements, precision etc.

applied to single row cylindrical roller
The values listed in the product table

bearings can be estimated using
are valid for the appropriate standard
cage. To estimate the limiting speed
4 n dm
2
for bearings with an alternative cage,
table
4 provides the appropriate
Frm = kr 6 + ( )( )
nr 1 00
3
conversion factors.
Bearings with an outer ring centred

where
brass cage are not particularly suited

Frm = minimum radial load, kN
for grease lubrication. If grease lubri- kr = minimum load factor
cated, they should not be used at

(➔ product table)
speeds higher than n × dm = 250 000

n = rotational speed, r/min
mm/min and the relubrication intervals

nr = reference speed, r/min
should be shortened.
(➔ product table)
Detailed information on reference

d m = bearing mean diameter
and limiting speeds can be found in

= 0,5 (d + D), mm
the SKF General Catalogue or the SKF

When starting up at low temperatures

or when the lubricant is highly viscous,
www.skf.com.
even greater minimum loads may be
required. The weight of the compon-

Minimum load
ents supported by the bearing, to-
In order to provide satisfactory oper- gether with external forces, generally
ation, single row cylindrical roller bear- exceeds the requisite minimum load.
ings, like all ball and roller bearings,

If this is not the case, the single row
must always be subjected to a given

cylindrical roller bearing must be sub-
minimum load, particularly if they are
jected to an additional radial load.
to operate at high speeds or are sub-

jected to high accelerations or rapid
changes in the direction of load. Under
such conditions, the inertia forces of
the rollers and cage, and the friction in
the lubricant, can have a detrimental
Table 4
Bearing with
standard cage alternative standard cage
P, J, M, MR MA, MB ML, MP
P, J, M, MR 1 1 ,3 1 ,5
MA, MB 0,75 1 1 ,2
ML, MP 0,65 0,85 1
Conversion
factors for
limiting speeds
29
Dynamic axial load carrying capacity

The above equation is based on con- where
Bearings with flanges on both the

ditions that are considered typical for
Fa = the occasionally acting axial load,
inner and outer ring can support axial

normal bearing operation:
kN
loads in addition to radial loads. Their

D = bearing outside diameter, mm
axial load carrying capacity is primarily

• a difference of 60 °C between the
determined by the ability of the sliding

bearing operating temperature and
To obtain an even flange load and
surfaces of the roller end/flange con- the ambient temperature;

provide sufficient running accuracy of
tact to support loads. Factors having

• a specific heat loss from the bearing
the shaft when cylindrical roller bearings
the greatest effect on this ability are

of 0,5 mW/mm2
°C; with reference to
are subjected to heavy axial loads, axial
the lubrication conditions, operating

the bearing outside diameter surface
runout and the size of the abutment
temperature and heat dissipation from

(π D B);
surfaces of adjacent components be-
the bearing.
• a viscosity ratio κ ≥ 2.
come particularly important. As to the
Assuming the conditions cited

diameter of the abutment surfaces, SKF
below, the permissible axial load can

For grease lubrication the viscosity of
recommends supporting the inner ring
be calculated with sufficient accuracy

the base oil in the grease may be used.
at a height corresponding to half of the
from
If κ is less than 2, the friction will in- flange height (➔ fig 5 ). For the inner
crease and there will be more wear.

ring flange, for example, the abutment
4
These effects can be reduced at low
diameter can be obtained using
k C 10
Fap = 1 0 − k2 Fr speeds, for example, by using oils with
n (d + D) AW (anti-wear) and EP (extreme pres- d as = 0,5 (d 1 + F)
sure) additives.
where
Where axial loads act for longer
where
Fap = maximum permissible axial load,

periods and the bearings are grease
d as = shaft abutment diameter, mm
kN
lubricated, it is advisable to use grease
d 1 = inner ring flange diameter, mm
C0 = basic static load rating, kN

that has good oil bleeding properties
F = inner ring raceway diameter, mm
Fr = actual radial bearing load, kN

at the operating temperatures (> 3 %
n
= rotational speed, r/min
according to DIN 51 81 7 or IP
Where misalignment between the inner
d = bearing bore diameter, mm

1 21 75/1 992). Frequent relubrication
and outer rings exceeds 1 minute of
D = bearing outside diameter, mm

is also recommended.
arc, the action of the load on the flange
k1 = a factor
The values of the permissible load
changes so considerably that the safety
= 1 ,5 for oil lubrication

Fap obtained from the heat balance
factors included in the guideline values
= 1 for grease lubrication

equation are valid for a continuously
may be inadequate. In these cases,
k2 = a factor
acting constant axial load and adequate
please contact the SKF application
= 0,1 5 for oil lubrication

lubricant supply to the roller end/flange
engineering service.
= 0,1 for grease lubrication

contacts. Where axial loads act only for
short periods, the values may be multi-

plied by 2, or for axially acting shock
loads by 3.
To avoid any risk of flange breakage,
the constantly acting axial load Fa
applied to the bearing should never
Bearings subjected to axial loads
should be supported to a height

exceed the numerical value of
corresponding to half of the flange
height
• 0,0045 D1 ,5
for bearings of series 2
and
Fig 5
• 0,0023 D1,7 for bearings of other
series.
Where the axial load acts only occa-

sionally and for brief periods, Fa
should never be greater than the
numerical value of
d 1 d as • 0,01 3 D1 ,5
for bearings of series 2
F and
• 0,007 D1,7
for bearings of other series
30
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6 Supplementary designations
Supplementary designations
N Snap ring groove in the outer
The designation suffixes used to identify

ring outside diameter
certain features of SKF single row

NRSnap ring groove in the outer
cylindrical roller bearings are explained

ring, with snap ring
in the following.
One locating slot in one outer
N1
ring side face
CN Normal radial internal clear- N2 Two locating slots 1 80° apart
ance; generally only appears in

in one outer ring side face
connection with one of the

P Injection moulded cage of
following letters for reduced

glass fibre reinforced poly-
or displaced clearance range
amide 6,6, roller centred
H Reduced clearance range

PH Injection moulded PEEK cage,
3
corresponding to the upper

roller centred
half of the actual range

PHA
Injection moulded PEEK cage,
L Reduced clearance range

outer ring centred
corresponding to the lower

S1 Rings dimensionally stabilized
half of the actual range

for operating temperatures up
The above letters are also used

to +200 °C
together with the clearance

S2
Rings dimensionally stabilized
class suffixes C2, C3 and C4

for operating temperatures up
C2
to +250 °C
smaller than Normal

VA301
Bearing for railway vehicle
C3 Radial internal clearance

traction motors
greater than Normal

VA305
VA301 + special inspection
C4
routines
greater than C3
VA3091 VA301 + VL0241
C5
VA350
Bearing for railway axleboxes
greater than C4
VA820
Bearing for railway axleboxes
EC
Optimized internal design
according to EN 1 2080:1998,
incorporating more and/or

class 1
larger rollers and with modi- VC025 Bearing with specially wear-
fied roller end/flange contact
resistant raceways for applica-
HA3
Inner ring of case-hardening
tions in heavily contaminated
steel
environments
HB1 Bainite hardened inner and

VL0241 Aluminium-oxide coated out-
outer ring
side surface of the outer ring
HN1 Inner and outer ring with spe- for electrical resistance up to
cial surface “enriched” heat

1 000 V DC
treatment
VL2071 Aluminium-oxide coated out-
J Pressed steel cage, roller
side surface of the inner ring
centred, unhardened
for electrical resistance up to
K Tapered bore, taper 1 :1 2

1 000 V DC
M Two-piece machined brass

VQ015 Inner ring with crowned race-
cage, roller centred
way for increased permissible
MA Two-piece machined brass

misalignment
cage, outer ring centred
MB
Two-piece machined brass
cage, inner ring centred
ML One-piece form-turned win-

dow-type brass cage, inner or
outer ring centred
MP One-piece window-type brass
cage with milled, reamed or
broached pockets, inner or
outer ring centred
MR One-piece form-turned win-

dow-type brass cage, roller
centred
31
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6 Single row cylindrical roller bearings
d 15 – 25 mm
B
r2 r4
r1
r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Type NU Type NJ Type NUP Type N
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations
dimensions dynamic static load Reference Limiting Bearing Bearing with

Alternative
limit speed speed with standard cage standard
d D B C C0 Pu standard cage designs1 )
cage
mm kN kN r/min kg –
15 35 11 1 2,5
1 0,2
1 ,22
22 000
26 000
0,047
NU 202 ECP
–
35 11 1 2,5 1 0,2 1 ,22 22 000 26 000 0,049 NJ 202 ECP –
17 40 1 2
1 7,2
1 4,3
1 ,73
1 9 000
22 000
0,068
NU 203 ECP
ML
40 12 1 7,2 1 4,3 1 ,73 1 9 000 22 000 0,070 NJ 203 ECP ML
40 12 1 7,2
1 4,3
1 ,73
1 9 000
22 000
0,073
NUP 203 ECP ML
40 12 1 7,2 1 4,3 1 ,73 1 9 000 22 000 0,066 N 203 ECP

40 16 23,8
21 ,6
2,65
1 9 000
22 000
0,092
NU 2203 ECP
–
40 16 23,8 21 ,6 2,65 1 9 000 22 000 0,095 NJ 2203 ECP –

40 16 23,8 21 ,6 2,65 1 9 000 22 000 0,097 NUP 2203 ECP –
47 14 24,6
20,4
2,55
1 5 000
20 000
0,1 2
NU 303 ECP
–
47 14 24,6 20,4 2,55 1 5 000 20 000 0,1 2 NJ 303 ECP –

47 14 24,6 20,4 2,55 1 5 000 20 000 0,1 2 N 303 ECP –
20 47 14 25,1
25,2
2,75
1 6 000
19 000
0,1 1
NU 204 ECP
ML
47 14 25,1 25,2 2,75 1 6 000 19 000 0,1 1 NJ 204 ECP ML
47 14 25,1
25,2
2,75 1 6 000 19 000 0,1 2 NUP 204 ECP ML
47 14 25,1 25,2 2,75 1 6 000 19 000 0,1 1 N 204 ECP –
47 18 29,7
27,5
3,45
1 6 000
1 9 000
0,1 4
NU 2204 ECP
–
47 18 29,7 27,5 3,45 1 6 000 1 9 000 0,1 4 NJ 2204 ECP –
52 1 5
35,5
26 3,25
1 5 000
1 8 000
0,1 7
NU 304 ECP
–
52 15 35,5 26 3,25 1 5 000 1 8 000 0,1 7 NJ 304 ECP –
52 15 35,5
26 3,25
1 5 000
1 8 000
0,1 6
NUP 304 ECP –
52 15 35,5 26 3,25 1 5 000 1 8 000 0,1 5 N 304 ECP –
52 21 47,5
38 4,8
1 4 000
1 8 000
0,21
NU 2304 ECP
–
52 21 47,5 38 4,8 1 4 000 1 8 000 0,22 NJ 2304 ECP –

52 21 47,5 38 4,8 1 4 000 1 8 000 0,22 NUP 2304 ECP –
25 47 12 1 4,2 1 3,2 1 ,4 1 8 000 1 8 000 0,084 NU 1005 –
52 1 5
28,6
27 3,35
1 4 000
1 6 000
0,1 4
NU 205 ECP
J, ML
52 15 28,6 27 3,35 1 4 000 1 6 000 0,1 5 NJ 205 ECP J, ML
52 15 28,6
27 3,35
1 4 000
1 6 000
0,1 4
NUP 205 ECP ML
52 15 28,6 27 3,35 1 4 000 1 6 000 0,1 3 N 205 ECP –
52 18 34,1
34
4,25
1 4 000
1 6 000
0,1 7
NU 2205 ECP
ML
52 18 34,1 34 4,25 1 4 000 1 6 000 0,1 8 NJ 2205 ECP ML
52 18 34,1 34 4,25 1 4 000 1 6 000 0,1 7 NUP 2205 ECP ML
The designations of SKF Explorer class bearings are printed in blue
1)
When ordering bearings with an alternative standard cage the suffix of the standard cage has to be replaced by the suffix of the cage in question. e.g. NU 203 ECP becomes
NU 203 ECML
32
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Da d a db db da Da d d1
Angle ring
Dimensions Abutment and fillet dimensions Calcu- Angle ring
lation Designation Mass Dimensions
factor
d d1 D1
F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s1 )
da
da
db, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
~ ~ min min min max min max max max

mm mm – – kg mm
15 – 27,9
1 9,3
0,6
0,3
1 1 7,4
1 8,5
21 30,8
0,6
0,3
0,1 5
–
21 ,9 27,9 1 9,3 0,6 0,3 1 1 8,5 1 8,5 23 30,8 0,6 0,3 0,1 5 –
17 – 32,4
22,1
0,6
0,3
1 1 9,4
21 24 35,8
0,6
0,3
0,1 5
–
25 32,4 22,1 0,6 0,3 1 21 21 27 35,8 0,6 0,3 0,1 5 –
25 32,4 22,1 0,6 0,3 – 21 ,2 – 27 35,8 0,6 0,3 0,1 5 –

25 – 35,1 0,6 0,3 1 21 ,2 33 37 37,6 0,6 0,3 0,1 5 –
– 32,4
22,1
0,6
0,3
1 ,5
1 9,4
21 24 35,8
0,6
0,3
0,2
–
25 32,4 22,1 0,6 0,3 1 ,5 21 21 27 35,8 0,6 0,3 0,2 –

25 32,4 22,1 0,6 0,3 – 21 ,2 – 27 35,8 0,6 0,3 0,2 –
– 37 24,2
1 0,6
1 21 ,2
23
26
41 ,4
1
0,6
0,1 5
–
27,7 37 24,2 1 0,6 1 22,6 23 29 41 ,4 1 0,6 0,1 5 –

27,7 – 40,2 1 0,6 1 22,6 38 42 42,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
20 – 38,8
26,5
1 0,6
1 24,2
25 28 41 ,4
1 0,6
0,1 5
–
29,7 38,8 26,5 1 0,6 1 25 25 31 41 ,4 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
29,7 38,8 26,5 1 0,6 – 25,6 – 31 41 ,4 1 0,6 0,1 5 –

29,7 – 41 ,5 1 0,6 1 25,6 40 43 42,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
– 38,8
26,5
1 0,6
2 24,2
25 28 41 ,4
1 0,6
0,2
–
29,7 38,8 26,5 1 0,6 2 25 25 31 41 ,4 1 0,6 0,2 –
31 ,2
42,4
27,5
1 ,1 0,6
0,9
24,2
26
29
45
1
0,6
0,1 5
HJ 304 EC
0,01 7
4 6,5
31 ,2 42,4 27,5 1 ,1 0,6 0,9 27 29 33 45 1 0,6 0,1 5 HJ 304 EC 0,01 7 4 6,5
31 ,2
42,4
27,5
1 ,1 0,6 – 27 – 33 45 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
31 ,2 – 45,5 1 ,1 0,6 0,9 27 44 47 47,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
– 42,4
27,5
1 ,1 0,6
1 ,9
24,2
26 29 45 1
0,6
0,2
–
31 ,2 42,4 27,5 1 ,1 0,6 1 ,9 26 26 33 45 1 0,6 0,2 –

31 ,2 42,4 27,5 1 ,1 0,6 – 27 – 33 45 1 0,6 0,2 –
25 – 38,8 30,5 0,6 0,3 2 27 29 32 43,8 0,6 0,3 0,1 –
34,7
43,8
31 ,5
1 0,6
1 ,3
29,2
30 33 46,4
1 0,6
0,1 5
HJ 205 EC
0,01 4
3 6
34,7 43,8 31 ,5 1 0,6 1 ,3 30 30 36 46,4 1 0,6 0,1 5 HJ 205 EC 0,01 4 3 6
34,7
43,8
31 ,5
1 0,6
– 30,6
– 36 46,4
1 0,6
0,1 5
–
34,7 – 46,5 1 0,6 1 ,3 30,6 45 48 47,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
34,7
43,8
31 ,5
1 0,6
1 ,8
29,2
30 33 46,4
1 0,6
0,2
HJ 2205 EC
0,01 4
3 6,5
34,7 43,8 31 ,5 1 0,6 1 ,8 30 30 36 46,4 1 0,6 0,2 HJ 2205 EC 0,01 4 3 6,5
34,7 43,8 31 ,5 1 0,6 – 30,6 – 36 46,4 1 0,6 0,2 –
1)
Permissible axial displacement from normal position of one ring in relation to the other
33
d 25 – 35 mm
B
r2 r4
r1
r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
speed speed with standard cage standard
d D B C C0
Pu
standard cage designs1 )
cage
25 62 17 46,5
36,5
4,55
12 000
1 5 000
0,28
NU 305 ECP
J, ML
cont. 62 17 46,5 36,5 4,55 12 000 1 5 000 0,29 NJ 305 ECP J, ML
62 17 46,5 36,5 4,55 12 000 1 5 000 0,25 NUP 305 ECP J, ML
62 17 46,5 36,5 4,55 12 000 1 5 000 0,24 N 305 ECP –
62 24
64 55 6,95
1 2 000
1 5 000
0,38
NU 2305 ECP
J, ML
62 24 64 55 6,95 1 2 000 1 5 000 0,39 NJ 2305 ECP ML
62 24 64 55 6,95 1 2 000 1 5 000 0,38 NUP 2305 ECP ML
30 55 13 1 7,9 1 7,3 1 ,86 1 4 000 1 5 000 0,1 2 NU 1006 –
62 16 44
36,5
4,55
1 3 000
1 4 000
0,23
NU 206 ECP
J, ML
62 16 44 36,5 4,55 1 3 000 1 4 000 0,24 NJ 206 ECP J, ML
62 16 44 36,5 4,55 1 3 000 1 4 000 0,22 NUP 206 ECP ML
62 16 44 36,5 4,55 1 3 000 1 4 000 0,20 N 206 ECP –
62 20 55 49 6,1 1 3 000
1 4 000
0,26
NU 2206 ECP
J, ML
62 20 55 49 6,1 1 3 000 1 4 000 0,27 NJ 2206 ECP J, ML
62 20 55 49 6,1 1 3 000 1 4 000 0,27 NUP 2206 ECP ML
72 1 9
58,5
48 6,2
11 000
12 000
0,40
NU 306 ECP
J, M, ML
72 19 58,5 48 6,2 11 000 12 000 0,41 NJ 306 ECP J, M, ML
72 19 58,5
48 6,2
11 000
12 000
0,38
NUP 306 ECP J, M, ML
72 19 58,5 48 6,2 11 000 12 000 0,36 N 306 ECP –
72 27 83 75 9,65
1 1 000
1 2 000
0,53
NU 2306 ECP
ML
72 27 83 75 9,65 1 1 000 1 2 000 0,54 NJ 2306 ECP ML
72 27 83 75 9,65 1 1 000 1 2 000 0,55 NUP 2306 ECP ML
90 23 60,5
53 6,8
9 000
1 1 000
0,75
NU 406
–
90 23 60,5 53 6,8 9 000 1 1 000 0,77 NJ 406 –
35 62 14 35,8 38 4,55 1 2 000 1 3 000 0,1 6 NU 1007 ECP –
72 17 56 48 6,1 11 000
12 000
0,33
NU 207 ECP
J, M, ML
72 17 56 48 6,1 11 000 12 000 0,33 NJ 207 ECP J, M, ML
72 17 56 48 6,1 11 000 12 000 0,31 NUP 207 ECP J, M, ML
72 17 56 48 6,1 11 000 12 000 0,30 N 207 ECP –
72 23
69,5
63
8,1 5
1 1 000
1 2 000
0,40
NU 2207 ECP
J, ML
72 23 69,5 63 8,1 5 1 1 000 1 2 000 0,41 NJ 2207 ECP J, ML
72 23 69,5 63 8,1 5 1 1 000 1 2 000 0,42 NUP 2207 ECP ML
1)
NU 305 ECML
34
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
25 38,1
50,7
34 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,3
32 32 36 55 1 1
0,1 5
HJ 305 EC
0,023
4 7
cont. 38,1 50,7 34 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,3 32 32 40 55 1 1 0,1 5 HJ 305 EC 0,023 4 7
38,1
50,7
34 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 32 – 40 55 1 1 0,1 5 –
38,1 – 54 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,3 32 52 56 55 1 1 0,1 5 –
38,1
50,7
34 1 ,1 1 ,1 2,3
32 32 36 55 1 1 0,25
HJ 2305 EC
0,025
4 8
38,1 50,7 34 1 ,1 1 ,1 2,3 32 32 40 55 1 1 0,25 HJ 2305 EC 0,025 4 8
38,1 50,7 34 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 32 – 40 55 1 1 0,25 –

30 – 45,6 36,5 1 0,6 2,1 33,2 35 38 50,4 1 0,6 0,1 –
41 ,2
52,5
37,5
1 0,6
1 ,3
34,2
36 39 56,4
1 0,6
0,1 5
HJ 206 EC
0,025
4 7
41 ,2 52,5 37,5 1 0,6 1 ,3 35,6 36 43 56,4 1 0,6 0,1 5 HJ 206 EC 0,025 4 7
41 ,2
52,5
37,5
1 0,6
– 35,6
– 43 56,4
1 0,6
0,1 5
–
41 ,2 – 55,5 1 0,6 1 ,3 35,6 54 57 57,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
– 52,5
37,5
1
0,6
1 ,8
34 36 39 57 1 0,6
0,2
–
41 ,2 52,5 37,5 1 0,6 1 ,8 34 36 43 57 1 0,6 0,2 –

41 ,2 52,5 37,5 1 0,6 – 34 – 43 57 1 0,6 0,2 –
– 58,9
40,5
1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,4
37 39 42 65
1
1
0,1 5
–
45 58,9 40,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,4 37 39 47 65 1 1 0,1 5 –
45 58,9 40,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 37 – 47 65 1 1 0,1 5 –

45 – 62,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,4 37 60 64 65 1 1 0,1 5 –
– 58,9
40,5
1 ,1
1 ,1 2,4
37 39 42 65 1 1 0,25
–
45 58,9 40,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 2,4 37 39 47 65 1 1 0,25 –

45 58,9 40,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 37 – 47 65 1 1 0,25 –
50,5
66,6
45 1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,6
41 43 47 79 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 406
0,080
7 1 1 ,5
50,5 66,6 45 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,6 41 43 47 79 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 406 0,080 7 1 1 ,5
35 – 54,5 42 1 0,6 1 38,2 41 44 56 1 0,6 0,1 –
48,1
60,7
44
1 ,1 0,6
1 ,3
39,2
42 46 65 1 0,6
0,1 5
HJ 207 EC
0,033
4 7
48,1 60,7 44 1 ,1 0,6 1 ,3 42 42 50 65 1 0,6 0,1 5 HJ 207 EC 0,033 4 7
48,1 60,7 44 1 ,1 0,6

– 42 – 50 65 1 0,6
0,1 5
–
48,1 – 64 1 ,1 0,6 1 ,3 42 62 66 67,8 1 0,6 0,1 5 –
– 60,7
44 1 ,1 0,6
2,8
39,2
42 46
65
1
0,6
0,2
–
48,1 60,7 44 1 ,1 0,6 2,8 42 42 50 65 1 0,6 0,2 –

48,1 60,7 44 1 ,1 0,6 – 42 – 48 65 1 0,6 0,2 –
1)
35
d 35 – 45 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
35 80 21 75 63
8,1 5
9 500
11 000
0,54
NU 307 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 80 21 75 63 8,1 5 9 500 11 000 0,55 NJ 307 ECP J, M, ML
80 21 75 63 8,1 5 9 500 11 000 0,51 NUP 307 ECP J, M, ML
80 21 75 63 8,1 5 9 500 11 000 0,48 N 307 ECP –
80 31
1 06
98 1 2,7
9 500
1 1 000
0,72
NU 2307 ECP
J
80 31 1 06 98 1 2,7 9 500 1 1 000 0,73 NJ 2307 ECP –

80 31 1 06 98 1 2,7 9 500 1 1 000 0,75 NUP 2307 ECP –
1 00
25 76,5
69,5
9 8 000
9 500
1 ,00
NU 407
–
1 00 25 76,5 69,5 9 8 000 9 500 1 ,05 NJ 407 –
40 68 15 25,1 26 3 1 1 000 1 8 000 0,22 NU 1008 ML –
80 1 8
62
53
6,7
9 500
11 000
0,42
NU 208 ECP
J, M, ML
80 18 62 53 6,7 9 500 11 000 0,43 NJ 208 ECP J, M, ML
80 18 62 53 6,7
9 500
11 000
0,40
NUP 208 ECP J, M, ML
80 18 62 53 6,7 9 500 11 000 0,37 N 208 ECP –
80 23 81 ,5
75 9,65
9 500
1 1 000
0,54
NU 2208 ECP
J, ML
80 23 81 ,5 75 9,65 9 500 1 1 000 0,55 NJ 2208 ECP J, ML
80 23 81 ,5 75 9,65 9 500 1 1 000 0,56 NUP 2208 ECP J, ML
90 23 93 78 1 0,2
8 000
9 500
0,73
NU 308 ECP
J, M, ML
90 23 93 78 1 0,2 8 000 9 500 0,75 NJ 308 ECP J, M, ML
90 23 93 78 1 0,2 8 000 9 500 0,68 NUP 308 ECP M, ML
90 23 93 78 1 0,2 8 000 9 500 0,64 N 308 ECP –
90 33
1 29
1 20
1 5,3
8 000
9 500
0,94
NU 2308 ECP
J, M, ML
90 33 1 29 1 20 1 5,3 8 000 9 500 0,96 NJ 2308 ECP J, M, ML
90 33 1 29 1 20 1 5,3 8 000 9 500 0,98 NUP 2308 ECP M, ML
1 1 0
27 96,8
90 1 1 ,6
7 000
8 500
1 ,40
NU 408
–
110 27 96,8 90 1 1 ,6 7 000 8 500 1 ,35 NJ 408 –
45 75 16 44,6 52 6,3 9 500 1 1 000 0,26 NU 1009 ECP –
85 19 69,5
64
8,1 5
9 000
9 500
0,48
NU 209 ECP
J, M, ML
85 19 69,5 64 8,1 5 9 000 9 500 0,49 NJ 209 ECP J, M, ML
85 19 69,5 64 8,1 5 9 000 9 500 0,45 NUP 209 ECP J, M, ML
85 19 69,5 64 8,1 5 9 000 9 500 0,43 N 209 ECP –
85 23
85 81 ,5
1 0,6
9 000
9 500
0,52
NU 2209 ECP
J
85 23 85 81 ,5 1 0,6 9 000 9 500 0,54 NJ 2209 ECP J

85 23 85 81 ,5 1 0,6 9 000 9 500 0,55 NUP 2209 ECP –
1)
NU 307 ECML
36
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1
F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
35 51 66,3
46,2
1 ,5
1 ,1 1 ,2
42 44 48 71 1 ,5
1
0,1 5
HJ 307 EC
0,058
6 9,5
cont. 51 66,3 46,2 1 ,5 1 ,1 1 ,2 44 44 53 71 1 ,5 1 0,1 5 HJ 307 EC 0,058 6 9,5
51 66,3
46,2
1 ,5
1 ,1 – 44 – 53 71 1 ,5 1 0,1 5 –
51 – 70,2 1 ,5 1 ,1 1 ,2 44 68 72 73 1 ,5 1 0,1 5 –
– 66,3
46,2
1 ,5
1 ,1 2,7
42 44 48 71 1 ,5
1 0,25
–
51 66,3 46,2 1 ,5 1 ,1 2,7 44 44 53 71 1 ,5 1 0,25 –

51 66,3 46,2 1 ,5 1 ,1 – 44 – 53 71 1 ,5 1 0,25 –
– 76,1
53 1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,7
46 50 55 89 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
–
59 76,1 53 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,7 46 50 61 89 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
40 – 57,6 47 1 0,6 2,4 43,2 45 49 63,4 1 0,6 0,1 –
54 67,9
49,5
1 ,1
1 ,1
1 ,4
47
48
51 73 1 1 0,1 5
HJ 208 EC
0,047
5 8,5
54 67,9 49,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,4 47 48 56 73 1 1 0,1 5 HJ 208 EC 0,047 5 8,5
54 67,9 49,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 47 – 56 73 1 1 0,1 5

–
54 – 71 ,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,4 47 69 73 73 1 1 0,1 5 –
54 67,9
49,5
1 ,1
1 ,1
1 ,9
47
48
51
73
1 1 0,2
HJ 2208 EC
0,048
5 9
54 67,9 49,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,9 47 48 56 73 1 1 0,2 HJ 2208 EC 0,048 5 9
54 67,9 49,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 47 – 56 73 1 1 0,2 –
57,5
75,6
52 1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,4
49 50 54 81 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 308 EC
0,084
7 11
57,5 75,6 52 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 49 50 60 81 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 308 EC 0,084 7 1 1
57,5
75,6
52 1 ,5
1 ,5
– 49 – 60 81 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
57,5 – 80 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 49 78 82 81 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
– 75,6
52 1 ,5
1 ,5
2,9
49 50 54 81 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,25
–
57,5 75,6 52 1 ,5 1 ,5 2,9 49 50 60 81 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,25 –

57,5 75,6 52 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 49 – 60 81 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,25 –
– 84,2
58 2 2 2,5
53 56 60 97 2 2 0,1 5
–
64,8 84,2 58 2 2 2,5 53 56 67 97 2 2 0,1 5 –
45 – 65,3 52,5 1 0,6 0,9 48,2 51 54 70,4 1 0,6 0,1 –
59 73
54,5
1 ,1
1 ,1
1 ,2
52
53 56 78 1 1 0,1 5
HJ 209 EC
0,052
5 8,5
59 73 54,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,2 52 53 61 78 1 1 0,1 5 HJ 209 EC 0,052 5 8,5
59 73 54,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 52 – 61 78 1 1 0,1 5
–
59 – 76,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,2 52 74 78 78 1 1 0,1 5 –
– 73 54,5
1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,7
52 53 56 78 1 1 0,2
–
59 73 54,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,7 52 53 56 78 1 1 0,2
59 73 54,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 52 – 61 78 1 1 0,2 –
1)
37
d 45 – 55 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
45 1 00
25 1 1 2
1 00
1 2,9
7 500
8 500
1 ,00
NU 309 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 1 00 25 112 1 00 1 2,9 7 500 8 500 1 ,05 NJ 309 ECP J, M, ML
1 00 25 112 1 00 1 2,9 7 500 8 500 0,95 NUP 309 ECP J, ML
1 00 25 112 1 00 1 2,9 7 500 8 500 0,88 N 309 ECP –
1 00
36
1 60
1 53
20 7 500
8 500
1 ,30
NU 2309 ECP
ML
1 00 36 1 60 1 53 20 7 500 8 500 1 ,35 NJ 2309 ECP ML
1 00 36 1 60 1 53 20 7 500 8 500 1 ,35 NUP 2309 ECP ML
1 20
29 1 06
1 02
1 3,4
6 700
7 500
1 ,78
NU 409
–
1 20 29 1 06 1 02 1 3,4 6 700 7 500 1 ,70 NJ 409 –
50 80 16 46,8 56 6,7 9 000 9 500 0,27 NU 1010 ECP –
90 20
73,5
69,5
8,8
8 500
9 000
0,49
NU 210 ECP
J, M, ML
90 20 73,5 69,5 8,8 8 500 9 000 0,50 NJ 210 ECP J, M, ML
90 20 73,5 69,5 8,8

8 500
9 000
0,51
NUP 210 ECP J, ML
90 20 73,5 69,5 8,8 8 500 9 000 0,48 N 210 ECP –
90 23 90 88 1 1 ,4
8 500
9 000
0,56
NU 2210 ECP
J, M, ML
90 23 90 88 1 1 ,4 8 500 9 000 0,59 NJ 2210 ECP J, M, ML
90 23 90 88 1 1 ,4 8 500 9 000 0,59 NUP 2210 ECP J, ML
1 1 0
27 1 27
1 1 2
15 6 700
8 000
1 ,1 5
NU 310 ECP
J, M, ML
110 27 1 27 112 15 6 700 8 000 1 ,1 5 NJ 310 ECP J, M, ML
1 1 0
27 1 27
1 1 2
15 6 700 8 000 1 ,20 NUP 310 ECP J, M, ML
110 27 1 27 112 15 6 700 8 000 1 ,1 5 N 310 ECP M
1 1 0
40
1 86
1 86
24,5
6 700
8 000
2,00
NU 2310 ECP
ML
110 40 1 86 1 86 24,5 6 700 8 000 1 ,75 NJ 2310 ECP ML
110 40 1 86 1 86 24,5 6 700 8 000 1 ,80 NUP 2310 ECP ML
1 30
31 1 30
1 27
1 6,6
6 000
7 000
2,00
NU 410
–
1 30 31 1 30 1 27 1 6,6 6 000 7 000 2,05 NJ 410 –
55 90 18 57,2 69,5 8,3 8 000 8 500 0,40 NU 1011 ECP –
1 00
21 96,5
95
1 2,2
7 500
8 000
0,67
NU 211 ECP
J, M, ML
1 00 21 96,5 95 1 2,2 7 500 8 000 0,67 NJ 211 ECP J, M, ML
1 00 21 96,5 95 1 2,2 7 500 8 000 0,69 NUP 211 ECP J, M, ML
1 00 21 96,5 95 1 2,2 7 500 8 000 0,66 N 211 ECP M
1 00
25
1 1 4
1 1 8
1 5,3
7 500
8 000
0,79
NU 2211 ECP
J, M, ML
1 00 25 114 118 1 5,3 7 500 8 000 0,81 NJ 2211 ECP J, M, ML
1 00 25 114 118 1 5,3 7 500 8 000 0,82 NUP 2211 ECP J, ML
1)
NU 309 ECML.
38
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
45 64,4
83,8
58,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,7
54 56 61 91 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 309 EC
0,1 1
7 1 1 ,5
cont. 64,4 83,8 58,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,7 54 56 67 91 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 309 EC 0,1 1 7 1 1 ,5
64,4
83,8
58,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
– 54 – 67 91 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
64,4 – 88,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,7 54 86 91 91 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
– 83,8
58,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
3,2
54 56 61 91 1 ,5
1 ,5
0,25
–
64,4 83,8 58,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 3,2 54 56 67 91 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,25 –

64,4 83,8 58,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 54 – 67 91 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,25 –
71 ,8
92,2
64,5
2 2 2,5
58 62 67 1 07
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 409
0,1 8
8 1 3,5
71 ,8 92,2 64,5 2 2 2,5 58 62 74 1 07 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 409 0,1 8 8 1 3,5
50 – 70 57,5 1 0,6 1 53,2 56 60 75,4 1 0,6 0,1 –
64 78
59,5
1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,5
57 57 62 83 1 1 0,1 5
HJ 210 EC
0,058
5 9
64 78 59,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,5 57 57 66 83 1 1 0,1 5 HJ 210 EC 0,058 5 9
64 78 59,5
1 ,1 1 ,1 – 57 – 66 83 1 1 0,1 5
–
64 – 81 ,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,5 57 79 83 83 1 1 0,1 5 –
– 78 59,5
1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,5
57 57
62
83
1 1 0,2
–
64 78 59,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 1 ,5 57 57 66 83 1 1 0,2 –
64 78 59,5 1 ,1 1 ,1 – 57 – 66 83 1 1 0,2 –
71 ,2
92,1
65 2 2 1 ,9
61 63 67 99 2
2
0,1 5
HJ 310 EC
0,1 4
8 13
71 ,2 92,1 65 2 2 1 ,9 61 63 73 99 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 310 EC 0,1 4 8 1 3
71 ,2
92,1
65 2 2 – 61 – 73 99 2 2 0,1 5 –
71 ,2 – 97 2 2 1 ,9 61 95 99 99 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 92,1
65 2 2 3,4
61 63 67 99 2 2 0,25
–
71 ,2 92,1 65 2 2 3,4 61 63 73 99 2 2 0,25 –

71 ,2 92,1 65 2 2 – 61 – 73 99 2 2 0,25 –
– 1 02
70,8
2,1 2,1 2,6
64 68 73 1 1 6
2 2 0,1 5
–
78,8 1 02 70,8 2,1 2,1 2,6 64 68 81 116 2 2 0,1 5 –
55 – 79 64,5 1 ,1 1 0,5 59,6 63 67 84 1 1 0,1 –
70,8
86,3
66
1 ,5
1 ,1
1
62
64 68 91 1 ,5
1 0,1 5
HJ 211 EC
0,083
6 9,5
70,8 86,3 66 1 ,5 1 ,1 1 64 64 73 91 1 ,5 1 0,1 5 HJ 211 EC 0,083 6 9,5
70,8 86,3 66 1 ,5 1 ,1 – 64 – 73 91 1 ,5
1 0,1 5
–
70,8 – 90 1 ,5 1 ,1 1 64 88 92 93 1 ,5 1 0,1 5 –
70,8
86,3
66
1 ,5
1 ,1
1 ,5
62
64
68
91 1 ,5
1 0,2
HJ 2211 EC
0,085
6 1 0
70,8 86,3 66 1 ,5 1 ,1 1 ,5 64 64 73 91 1 ,5 1 0,2 HJ 2211 EC 0,085 6 1 0
70,8 86,3 66 1 ,5 1 ,1 – 64 – 73 91 1 ,5 1 0,2 –
1)
39
d 55 – 65 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
55 1 20
29 1 56
1 43
1 8,6
6 000
7 000
1 ,45
NU 311 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 1 20 29 1 56 1 43 1 8,6 6 000 7 000 1 ,50 NJ 311 ECP J, M, ML
1 20 29 1 56 1 43 1 8,6 6 000 7 000 1 ,55 NUP 311 ECP J, M, ML
1 20 29 1 56 1 43 1 8,6 6 000 7 000 1 ,45 N 311 ECP M
1 20
43
232
232
30,5
6 000
7 000
2,25
NU 2311 ECP
ML
1 20 43 232 232 30,5 6 000 7 000 2,30 NJ 2311 ECP ML
1 20 43 232 232 30,5 6 000 7 000 2,35 NUP 2311 ECP ML
1 40
33 1 42
1 40
1 8,6
5 600
6 300
2,50
NU 411
–
1 40 33 1 42 1 40 1 8,6 5 600 6 300 2,55 NJ 411 –
60 95 18 37,4 44 5,3 8 000 1 1 000 0,48 NU 101 2 ML –
1 1 0
22
1 08
1 02
1 3,4
6 700
7 500
0,81
NU 212 ECP
J, M, ML
110 22 1 08 1 02 1 3,4 6 700 7 500 0,83 NJ 212 ECP J, M, ML
110 22 1 08 1 02 1 3,4
6 700
7 500
0,86
NUP 212 ECP J, ML
110 22 1 08 1 02 1 3,4 6 700 7 500 0,81 N 212 ECP M
1 1 0
28 1 46
1 53
20 6 700
7 500
1 ,1 0
NU 2212 ECP
J, M, ML
110 28 1 46 1 53 20 6 700 7 500 1 ,1 5 NJ 2212 ECP J, M, ML
110 28 1 46 1 53 20 6 700 7 500 1 ,1 5 NUP 2212 ECP J, ML
1 30
31 1 73
1 60
20,8
5 600
6 700
1 ,80
NU 312 ECP
J, M, ML
1 30 31 1 73 1 60 20,8 5 600 6 700 1 ,90 NJ 312 ECP J, M, ML
1 30
31 1 73
1 60
20,8 5 600 6 700 1 ,95 NUP 312 ECP J, M, ML
1 30 31 1 73 1 60 20,8 5 600 6 700 1 ,80 N 312 ECP M
1 30
46
260
265
34,5
5 600
6 700
2,75
NU 2312 ECP
ML
1 30 46 260 265 34,5 5 600 6 700 2,80 NJ 2312 ECP ML
1 30 46 260 265 34,5 5 600 6 700 2,85 NUP 2312 ECP ML
1 50
35 1 68
1 73
22 5 000
6 000
3,00
NU 412
–
1 50 35 1 68 1 73 22 5 000 6 000 3,1 0 NJ 412 –
65 1 00 18 62,7 81 ,5 9,8 7 000 7 500 0,45 NU 1013 ECP –
1 20
23 1 22
1 1 8
1 5,6
6 300
6 700
1 ,05
NU 213 ECP
J, M, ML
1 20 23 1 22 118 1 5,6 6 300 6 700 1 ,07 NJ 213 ECP J, M, ML
1 20 23 1 22 118 1 5,6 6 300 6 700 1 ,1 0 NUP 213 ECP J, ML
1 20 23 1 22 118 1 5,6 6 300 6 700 1 ,05 N 213 ECP –
1 20
31
1 70
1 80
24 6 300
6 700
1 ,40
NU 2213 ECP
J
1 20 31 1 70 1 80 24 6 300 6 700 1 ,45 NJ 2213 ECP J

1 20 31 1 70 1 80 24 6 300 6 700 1 ,50 NUP 2213 ECP –
1)
When ordering bearings with an alternative standard cage the suffix of the standard cage has to be replaced by the suffix of the cage in question. e.g. NU 31 1 ECP becomes
NU 31 1 ECML
40
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1
F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
55 77,5
1 01
70,5
2 2 2 66
68
73
1 09
2 2
0,1 5
HJ 311 EC
0,1 9
9 1 4
cont. 77,5 1 01 70,5 2 2 2 66

68
80
1 09
2 2 0,1 5 HJ 311 EC 0,1 9 9 1 4
77,5
1 01
70,5
2 2 – 66 – 80 1 09 2 2 0,1 5
–
77,5 – 1 06,5 2 2 2 66
1 04
1 09
1 09
2 2
0,1 5 –
77,5
1 01
70,5
2
2 3,5
66 68 73 1 09
2 2 0,25
HJ 2311 EC
0,1 9
9 1 5,5
77,5 1 01 70,5 2 2 3,5 66 68 80 1 09 2 2 0,25 HJ 2311 EC 0,1 9 9 1 5,5
77,5 1 01 70,5 2 2 – 66 – 80 1 09 2 2 0,25 –

85,2
1 08
77,2
2,1 2,1 2,6
69 74 79 1 26
2 2 0,1 5
–
85,2 1 08 77,2 2,1 2,1 2,6 69 74 88 1 26 2 2 0,1 5 –
60 – 81 ,6 69,5 1 ,1 1 2,9 64,6 68 72 89 1 1 0,1 –
77,5
95,7
72
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,4
69
70
74
1 01
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 212 EC
0,1 0
6 1 0
77,5 95,7 72 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 69 70 80 1 01 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 212 EC 0,1 0 6 1 0
77,5 95,7 72 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 69 – 80 1 01
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
–
77,5 – 1 00 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 69 98 1 01 1 01 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
77,5
95,7
72
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,4
69
70
74
1 01
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,2
HJ 212 EC
0,1 0
6 1 0
77,5 95,7 72 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 69 70 80 1 01 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 HJ 212 EC 0,1 0 6 1 0
77,5 95,7 72 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 69 – 80 1 01 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –
84,3
1 1 0
77 2,1 2,1 2,1 72 74 79 1 1 8
2 2
0,1 5
HJ 312 EC
0,22
9 1 4,5
84,3 1 1 0 77 2,1 2,1 2,1 72 74 87 118 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 312 EC 0,22 9 1 4,5
84,3
1 1 0
77 2,1 2,1 – 72 – 87 1 1 8
2 2 0,1 5 –
84,3 – 115 2,1 2,1 2,1 72 112 118 118 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 1 0
77
2,1 2,1 3,6
72 74 79 1 1 8
2 2 0,25
–
84,3 110 77 2,1 2,1 3,6 72 74 87 118 2 2 0,25 –

84,3 110 77 2,1 2,1 – 72 – 87 118 2 2 0,25 –
– 1 1 7
83 2,1 2,1 2,5
74 80 85 1 36
2 2 0,1 5
–
91 ,8 117 83 2,1 2,1 2,5 74 80 94 1 36 2 2 0,1 5 –
65 – 88,5 74 1 ,1 1 1 69,6 72 77 94 1 1 0,1 –
84,4
1 04
78,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,4
74
76
81 1 1 1
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 213 EC
0,1 2
6 1 0
84,4 1 04 78,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 74 76 87 111 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 213 EC 0,1 2 6 1 0
84,4 1 04 78,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 74 – 87 1 1 1
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
–
84,4 – 1 08,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,4 74 1 06 111 111 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
– 1 04
78,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,9
74 76 81 1 1 1
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,2
–
84,4 1 04 78,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,9 74 76 87 111 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –

84,4 1 04 78,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 74 – 87 111 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –
1)
41
d 65 – 75 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
65 1 40
33 21 2
1 96
25,5
5 300
5 600
2,28
NU 313 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 1 40 33 21 2 1 96 25,5 5 300 5 600 2,30 NJ 313 ECP J, M, ML
1 40 33 21 2 1 96 25,5 5 300 5 600 2,35 NUP 313 ECP J, ML
1 40 33 21 2 1 96 25,5 5 300 5 600 2,25 N 313 ECP M
1 40
48
285
290
38 5 300
5 600
3,30
NU 2313 ECP
ML
1 40 48 285 290 38 5 300 5 600 3,35 NJ 2313 ECP ML
1 40 48 285 290 38 5 300 5 600 3,45 NUP 2313 ECP ML
1 60
37 1 83
1 90
24 4 800
5 600
3,60
NU 413
–
1 60 37 1 83 1 90 24 4 800 5 600 3,65 NJ 413 –
70 110 20 76,5 93 12 6 300 7 000 0,62 NU 1014 ECP –
1 25
24
1 37
1 37
1 8
6 000
6 300
1 ,1 5
NU 214 ECP
J, M, ML
1 25 24 1 37 1 37 18 6 000 6 300 1 ,1 5 NJ 214 ECP J, M, ML
1 25 24 1 37 1 37 18 6 000
6 300
1 ,20
NUP 214 ECP M, ML
1 25 24 1 37 1 37 18 6 000 6 300 1 ,1 5 N 214 ECP –
1 25
31 1 80
1 93
25,5
6 000
6 300
1 ,55
NU 2214 ECP
J, M, ML
1 25 31 1 80 1 93 25,5 6 000 6 300 1 ,55 NJ 2214 ECP M, ML
1 25 31 1 80 1 93 25,5 6 000 6 300 1 ,55 NUP 2214 ECP M, ML
1 50
35 236
228
29 4 800
5 600
2,75
NU 314 ECP
J, M, ML
1 50 35 236 228 29 4 800 5 600 2,80 NJ 314 ECP J, M, ML
1 50
35 236
228
29 4 800 5 600 2,85 NUP 314 ECP M, ML
1 50 35 236 228 29 4 800 5 600 2,75 N 314 ECP M
1 50
51
31 5
325
41 ,5
4 800
5 600
4,00
NU 2314 ECP
ML
1 50 51 31 5 325 41 ,5 4 800 5 600 4,05 NJ 2314 ECP ML
1 50 51 31 5 325 41 ,5 4 800 5 600 4,1 5 NUP 2314 ECP ML
1 80
42 229
240
30 4 300
5 000
5,25
NU 414
–
1 80 42 229 240 30 4 300 5 000 5,35 NJ 414 –
75 115 20 58,3 71 8,5 6 700 1 0 000 0,74 NU 101 5 ML –
1 30
25 1 50
1 56
20,4
5 600
6 000
1 ,25
NU 215 ECP
J, M, ML
1 30 25 1 50 1 56 20,4 5 600 6 000 1 ,30 NJ 215 ECP J, M, ML
1 30 25 1 50 1 56 20,4 5 600 6 000 1 ,30 NUP 215 ECP M, ML
1 30 25 1 50 1 56 20,4 5 600 6 000 1 ,25 N 215 ECP –
1 30
31
1 86
208
27 5 600
6 000
1 ,60
NU 2215 ECP
J, ML
1 30 31 1 86 208 27 5 600 6 000 1 ,60 NJ 2215 ECP J, ML
1 30 31 1 86 208 27 5 600 6 000 1 ,65 NUP 2215 ECP J, ML
1)
NU 31 3 ECML
42
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1 D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
65 90,5
1 1 9
82,5
2,1 2,1 2,2
77 80 85 1 28
2 2
0,1 5
HJ 313 EC
0,27
1 0 1 5,5
cont. 90,5 1 1 9 82,5 2,1 2,1 2,2 77 80 93 1 28 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 313 EC 0,27 10 1 5,5
90,5
1 1 9
82,5
2,1 2,1 – 77 – 93 1 28
2 2 0,1 5 –
90,5 – 1 24,5 2,1 2,1 2,2 77 1 22 1 27 1 28 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 1 9
82,5
2,1 2,1 4,7
77 80 85 1 28
2 2 0,25
–
90,5 119 82,5 2,1 2,1 4,7 77 80 93 1 28 2 2 0,25 –

90,5 119 82,5 2,1 2,1 – 77 – 93 1 28 2 2 0,25 –
98,5
1 25
89,3
2,1 2,1 2,6
79 86 92 1 46
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 413
0,42
1 1 18
98,5 1 25 89,3 2,1 2,1 2,6 79 86 92 1 46 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 413 0,42 11 1 8
70 84 97,5 79,5 1 ,1 1 1 ,3 74,6 78 82 1 04 1 1 0,1 HJ 1014 EC 0,082 5 1 0
89,4
1 09
83,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,2
79 81 86 1 1 6
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 214 EC
0,1 5
7
11
89,4 1 09 83,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,2 79 81 92 116 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 214 EC 0,1 5 7 1 1
89,4 1 09 83,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 79 – 92 116 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –

89,4 – 1 1 3,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,2 79 111 116 116 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
– 1 09
83,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,7
79
81 86 1 1 6
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,2
–
89,4 1 09 83,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,7 79 81 92 116 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –

89,4 1 09 83,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 79 – 92 116 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –
97,3
1 27
89 2,1 2,1 1 ,8
82 86
91
1 38
2
2
0,1 5
HJ 314 EC
0,32
1 0 1 5,5
97,3 1 27 89 2,1 2,1 1 ,8 82 86 1 00 1 38 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 314 EC 0,32 10 1 5,5
97,3
1 27
89 2,1 2,1 – 82 – 1 00 1 38 2 2 0,1 5 –
97,3 – 1 33 2,1 2,1 1 ,8 82 1 30 1 36 1 38 2 2 0,1 5 –
97,3
1 27
89 2,1 2,1 4,8
82 86 91 1 38
2
2
0,25
HJ 2314 EC
0,34
1 0 1 8,5
97,3 1 27 89 2,1 2,1 4,8 82 86 1 00 1 38 2 2 0,25 HJ 2314 EC 0,34 10 1 8,5
97,3 1 27 89 2,1 2,1 – 82 – 1 00 1 38 2 2 0,25 –
– 1 40
1 00
3 3 3,5
86 97 1 02
1 64
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
110 1 40 1 00 3 3 3,5 86 97 113 1 64 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
75 – 1 01 85 1 ,1 1 3 79,6 83 87 1 09 1 1 0,1 –
94,3
1 1 4
88,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,2
84 86 91 1 21
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
HJ 215 EC
0,1 6
7 11
94,3 1 1 4 88,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,2 84 86 97 1 21 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 HJ 215 EC 0,1 6 7 1 1
94,3
1 1 4
88,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
– 84 – 97 1 21
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,1 5
–
94,3 – 1 1 8,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,2 84 116 1 21 1 21 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,1 5 –
– 1 1 4
88,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,7
84 86 91 1 21
1 ,5
1 ,5
0,2
–
94,3 114 88,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 1 ,7 84 86 97 1 21 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –

94,3 114 88,5 1 ,5 1 ,5 – 84 – 97 1 21 1 ,5 1 ,5 0,2 –
1)
43
d 75 – 85 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
75 1 60
37 280
265
33,5
4 500
5 300
3,30
NU 315 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 1 60 37 280 265 33,5 4 500 5 300 3,35 NJ 315 ECP J, M, ML
1 60 37 280 265 33,5 4 500 5 300 3,45 NUP 315 ECP M, ML
1 60 37 280 265 33,5 4 500 5 300 3,30 N 315 ECP M
1 60
55
380
400
50 4 500
5 300
4,90
NU 2315 ECP
J, ML
1 60 55 380 400 50 4 500 5 300 5,00 NJ 2315 ECP ML
1 60 55 380 400 50 4 500 5 300 5,1 0 NUP 2315 ECP ML
1 90
45 264
280
34 4 000
4 800
6,75
NU 415
–
1 90 45 264 280 34 4 000 4 800 6,90 NJ 415 –
80 1 25
22 66 81 ,5
1 0,4
6 300
6 300
1 ,00
NU 1016
–
1 25 22 99 1 27 1 6,3 5 600 9 500 1 ,1 0 NJ 1016 ECML –
1 40
26 1 60
1 66
21 ,2
5 300
5 600
1 ,50
NU 216 ECP
J, M, ML
1 40 26 1 60 1 66 21 ,2 5 300 5 600 1 ,60 NJ 216 ECP J, M, ML
1 40 26 1 60 1 66 21 ,2 5 300 5 600 1 ,65 NUP 216 ECP ML
1 40 26 1 60 1 66 21 ,2 5 300 5 600 1 ,50 N 216 ECP –
1 40
33
21 2
245
31 5 300
5 600
2,00
NU 2216 ECP
J, M, ML
1 40 33 21 2 245 31 5 300 5 600 2,05 NJ 2216 ECP J, M, ML
1 40 33 21 2 245 31 5 300 5 600 2,1 0 NUP 2216 ECP M, ML
1 70
39
300
290
36
4 300
5 000
3,95
NU 316 ECP
J, M, ML
1 70 39 300 290 36 4 300 5 000 4,00 NJ 316 ECP J, M, ML
1 70 39 300 290 36 4 300

5 000
4,1 0
NUP 316 ECP M, ML
1 70 39 300 290 36 4 300 5 000 3,90 N 316 ECP M
1 70
58 41 5
440
55 4 300
5 000
5,95
NU 2316 ECP
M, ML
1 70 58 41 5 440 55 4 300 5 000 6,00 NJ 2316 ECP M, ML
1 70 58 41 5 440 55 4 300 5 000 6,00 NUP 2316 ECP M, ML
200
48 303
320
39 3 800
4 500
7,30
NU 416
–
200 48 303 320 39 3 800 4 500 8,05 NJ 416 –
85 1 30 22 68,2 86,5 1 0,8 6 000 9 000 1 ,05 NU 101 7 ML –
1 50
28 1 90
200
24,5
4 800
5 300
1 ,90
NU 217 ECP
J, M, ML
1 50 28 1 90 200 24,5 4 800 5 300 1 ,95 NJ 217 ECP J, M, ML
1 50
28 1 90
200
24,5
4 800 5 300 2,00 NUP 217 ECP J, ML
1 50 28 1 90 200 24,5 4 800 5 300 1 ,90 N 217 ECP M
1 50
36
250
280
34,5
4 800
5 300
2,45
NU 2217 ECP
J, M, ML
1 50 36 250 280 34,5 4 800 5 300 2,55 NJ 2217 ECP J, M, ML
1 50 36 250 280 34,5 4 800 5 300 2,65 NUP 2217 ECP ML
1)
NU 31 5 ECML
44
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1
F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
75 1 04
1 36
95 2,1 2,1 1 ,8
87 92 97 1 48
2 2
0,1 5
HJ 315 EC
0,39
1 1 1 6,5
cont. 1 04 1 36 95 2,1 2,1 1 ,8 87 92 1 07 1 48 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 315 EC 0,39 11 1 6,5
1 04
1 36
95 2,1 2,1 – 87 – 1 07
1 48
2 2 0,1 5 –
1 04 – 1 43 2,1 2,1 1 ,8 87 1 40 1 46 1 48 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 04
1 36
95 2,1 2,1 4,8
87 92 97 1 48
2 2 0,25
HJ 2315 EC
0,42
1 1 1 9,5
1 04 1 36 95 2,1 2,1 4,8 87 92 1 07 1 48 2 2 0,25 HJ 2315 EC 0,42 11 1 9,5
1 04 1 36 95 2,1 2,1 – 87 – 1 07 1 48 2 2 0,25 –

– 1 48
1 04,5
3 3 3,8
91 1 01
1 07
1 74
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
116 1 48 1 04,5 3 3 3,8 91 1 01 1 1 9 1 74 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
80 – 1 09
91 ,5
1 ,1 1 3,3
86 90 94 1 1 9
1 1 0,1 –
96,2 111 91 ,5 1 ,1 1 1 ,5 86 90 94 119 1 1 0,1 –
1 01
1 23
95,3
2 2
1 ,4
91
93
98
1 29
2
2
0,1 5
HJ 216 EC
0,21
8 1 2,5
1 01 1 23 95,3 2 2 1 ,4 91 93 1 04 1 29 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 216 EC 0,21 8 1 2,5
1 01
1 23
95,3
2 2 – 91 – 1 04 1 29 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 01 – 1 27,3 2 2 1 ,4 91 1 25 1 29 1 29 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 01
1 23
95,3
2 2 1 ,4
91
93
98
1 29
2
2
0,2
HJ 216 EC
0,21
8 1 2,5
1 01 1 23 95,3 2 2 1 ,4 91 93 1 04 1 29 2 2 0,2 HJ 216 EC 0,21 8 1 2,5
1 01 1 23 95,3 2 2 – 91 – 1 04 1 29 2 2 0,2 –
1 1 0
1 44
1 01
2,1
2,1
2,1
92 98 1 04
1 58
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 316 EC
0,44
1 1 1 7
110 1 44 1 01 2,1 2,1 2,1 92 98 113 1 58 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 316 EC 0,44 11 1 7
110 1 44 1 01 2,1 2,1 – 92 – 1 1 3

1 58
2 2 0,1 5
–
110 – 1 51 2,1 2,1 2,1 92 1 48 1 54 1 58 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 1 0
1 44
1 01
2,1
2,1
5,1
92
98
1 04
1 58
2 2 0,25
HJ 2316 EC
0,48
1 1 20
1 1 0 1 44 1 01 2,1 2,1 5,1 92 98 113 1 58 2 2 0,25 HJ 2316 EC 0,48 11 20
1 1 0 1 44 1 01 2,1 2,1 – 92 – 113 1 58 2 2 0,25

1 22
1 57
1 1 0
3 3 3,7
96 1 06
1 1 3
1 84
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 416
0,78
1 3 22
1 22 1 57 110 3 3 3,7 96 1 06 1 25 1 84 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 416 0,78 13 22
85 – 114 96,5 1 ,1 1 3,3 89,6 95 99 1 24 1 1 0,1 –
1 07
1 31
1 00,5
2
2
1 ,5
96
98
1 03
1 39
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 217 EC
0,24
8 1 2,5
1 07 1 31 1 00,5 2 2 1 ,5 96 98 110 1 39 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 217 EC 0,24 8 1 2,5
1 07 1 31 1 00,5 2 2 – 96 – 1 1 0
1 39
2 2 0,1 5
–
1 07 – 1 36,5 2 2 1 ,5 96 1 34 1 39 1 39 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 31
1 00,5
2 2 2 96
98
1 03
1 39
2 2
0,2
1 07 1 31 1 00,5 2 2 2 96
98
1 1 0
1 39
2 2 0,2

–
1 07 1 31 1 00,5 2 2 – 96 – 110 1 39 2 2 0,2 –
1)
45
d 85 – 95 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
85 1 80
41 340
335
41 ,5
4 000
4 800
4,70
NU 317 ECP
J, M
cont. 1 80 41 340 335 41 ,5 4 000 4 800 4,80 NJ 317 ECP J, M
1 80 41 340 335 41 ,5 4 000 4 800 4,90 NUP 317 ECP J, M
1 80 41 340 335 41 ,5 4 000 4 800 4,70 N 317 ECP M
1 80
60
455
490
60 4 000
4 800
6,85
NU 2317 ECP
J, ML
1 80 60 455 490 60 4 000 4 800 7,00 NJ 2317 ECP ML
1 80 60 455 490 60 4 000 4 800 7,00 NUP 2317 ECP ML
21 0
52 31 9
335
39 3 600
4 300
9,70
NU 417
–
21 0 52 31 9 335 39 3 800 4 300 8,90 NJ 417 –
90 1 40 24 80,9 1 04 1 2,7 5 600 8 500 1 ,35 NU 101 8 ML –
1 60
30
208
220
27
4 500
5 000
2,35
NU 218 ECP
J, M, ML
1 60 30 208 220 27 4 500 5 000 2,40 NJ 218 ECP J, M, ML
1 60 30 208 220 27 4 500

5 000
2,45
NUP 218 ECP M, ML
1 60 30 208 220 27 4 500 5 000 2,35 N 218 ECP M
1 60
40 280
31 5
39 4 500
5 000
3,1 5
NU 2218 ECP
J, M, ML
1 60 40 280 31 5 39 4 500 5 000 3,20 NJ 2218 ECP M, ML
1 60 40 280 31 5 39 4 500 5 000 3,30 NUP 2218 ECP –
1 90
43 365
360
43 3 800
4 500
5,45
NU 318 ECP
J, M, ML
1 90 43 365 360 43 3 800 4 500 5,55 NJ 318 ECP J, M, ML
1 90
43 365
360
43 3 800 4 500 5,65 NUP 318 ECJ M, ML
1 90 43 365 360 43 3 800 4 500 5,40 N 318 ECP M
1 90
64
500
540
65,5
3 800
4 500
8,00
NU 2318 ECP
J, ML
1 90 64 500 540 65,5 3 800 4 500 8,1 5 NJ 2318 ECP J, ML, M
1 90 64 500 540 65,5 3 800 4 500 8,30 NUP 2318 ECP ML
225 54 380 41 5 48 3 400 4 000 1 1 ,5 NU 418 –
95 1 45 24 84,2 110 1 3,2 5 300 8 000 1 ,40 NU 101 9 ML –
1 70
32
255
265
32,5
4 300
4 800
2,85
NU 219 ECP
J, M, ML
1 70 32 255 265 32,5 4 300 4 800 2,90 NJ 219 ECP J, M, ML
1 70 32 255 265
32,5
4 300
4 800
3,00
NUP 219 ECP ML
1 70 32 255 265 32,5 4 300 4 800 2,85 N 219 ECP –
1 70
43 325
375
45,5
4 300
4 800
3,85
NU 2219 ECP
J, M
1 70 43 325 375 45,5 4 300 4 800 3,95 NJ 2219 ECP J, M
1 70 43 325 375 45,5 4 300 4 800 4,00 NUP 2219 ECP –
1)
NU 31 7 ECM
46
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1)
d d1
D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
85 1 1 7
1 53
1 08
3 3 2,3
99 1 05
1 1 1
1 66
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 317 EC
0,55
1 2 1 8,5
cont. 1 1 7 1 53 1 08 3 3 2,3 99 1 05 1 20 1 66 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 317 EC 0,55 12 1 8,5
1 1 7
1 53
1 08
3 3 – 99 – 1 20
1 66
2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
117 – 1 60 3 3 2,3 99 1 57 1 63 1 66 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
– 1 53
1 08
3 3 5,8
99 1 05
1 1 1
1 66
2,5
2,5
0,25
–
117 1 53 1 08 3 3 5,8 99 1 05 1 20 1 66 2,5 2,5 0,25 –
117 1 53 1 08 3 3 – 99 – 1 20 1 66 2,5 2,5 0,25

– 1 63
1 1 3
4 4 3,8
1 05
1 09
1 1 6
1 90
3 3 0,1 5
–
1 26 1 63 113 4 4 3,8 1 05 1 09 1 29 1 90 3 3 0,1 5 –
90 – 1 22 1 03 1 ,5 1 ,1 3,5 96 1 01 1 06 1 33 1 ,5 1 0,1 –
1 1 4
1 40
1 07
2
2
1 ,8
1 01
1 04
1 1 0
1 49
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 218 EC
0,31
9 1 4
114 1 40 1 07 2 2 1 ,8 1 01 1 04 117 1 49 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 218 EC 0,31 9 1 4
114 1 40 1 07 2 2 – 1 01 – 1 1 7
1 49
2 2 0,1 5
–
114 – 1 45 2 2 1 ,8 1 01 1 42 1 48 1 49 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 40
1 07
2 2 2,6
1 01
1 04
1 1 0
1 49
2 2 0,2
–
114 1 40 1 07 2 2 2,6 1 01 1 04 1 1 7 1 49 2 2 0,2 –

114 1 40 1 07 2 2 – 1 01 – 117 1 49 2 2 0,2 –
1 24
1 62
1 1 3,5
3 3 2,5
1 04
1 1 0
1 1 6
1 76
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 318 EC
0,60
1 2 1 8,5
1 24 1 62 1 1 3,5 3 3 2,5 1 04 110 1 27 1 76 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 318 EC 0,60 12 1 8,5
1 24
1 62
1 1 3,5
3 3 – 1 04
– 1 27
1 76
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
1 24 – 1 69,5 3 3 2,5 1 04 1 66 1 73 1 76 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 24
1 62
1 1 3,5
3 3 6 1 04
1 1 0
1 1 6
1 76
2,5
2,5
0,25
–
1 24 1 62 1 1 3,5 3 3 6 1 04 1 1 0 1 27 1 76 2,5 2,5 0,25 –

1 24 1 62 1 1 3,5 3 3 – 1 04 1 1 0 1 27 1 76 2,5 2,5 0,25 –
– 1 76 1 23,5 4 4 4,9 1 06 1 20 1 26 209 3 3 0,1 5 –
95 – 1 27 1 08 1 ,5 1 ,1 3,5 1 01 1 06 111 1 38 1 ,5 1 0,1 –
1 20
1 49
1 1 2,5
2,1 2,1 1 ,7
1 07
1 1 0
1 1 5
1 58
2 2 0,1 5
HJ 219 EC
0,33
9 14
1 20 1 49 1 1 2,5 2,1 2,1 1 ,7 1 07 110 1 23 1 58 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 219 EC 0,33 9 1 4
1 20
1 49
1 1 2,5
2,1 2,1 – 1 07
– 1 23
1 58
2 2 0,1 5 –
1 20 – 1 54,5 2,1 2,1 1 ,7 1 07 1 52 1 57 1 58 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 49
1 1 2,5
2,1
2,1 3 1 07
1 1 0
1 1 5
1 58
2 2 0,2
–
1 20 1 49 1 1 2,5 2,1 2,1 3 1 07 1 1 0 1 23 1 58 2 2 0,2 –

1 20 1 49 1 1 2,5 2,1 2,1 – 1 07 – 1 23 1 58 2 2 0,2 –
1)
47
d 95 – 105 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
95 200
45 390
390
46,5
3 600
4 300
6,25
NU 319 ECP
J, M, ML
cont. 200 45 390 390 46,5 3 600 4 300 6,45 NJ 319 ECP J, M, ML
200 45 390 390 46,5 3 600 4 300 6,25 NUP 319 ECP M, ML
200 45 390 390 46,5 3 600 4 300 6,25 N 319 ECP M
200
67
530
585
69,5
3 600
4 300
9,65
NU 2319 ECP
J, ML
200 67 530 585 69,5 3 600 4 300 9,85 NJ 2319 ECP J, ML
200 67 530 585 69,5 3 600 4 300 9,75 NUP 2319 ECP J, ML
240 55 41 3 455 52 3 200 3 600 1 3,5 NU 419 M –
100 1 50 24 85,8 114 1 3,7 5 000 7 500 1 ,45 NU 1020 ML M
1 80
34 285
305
36,5
4 000
4 500
3,45
NU 220 ECP
J, M, ML
1 80 34 285 305 36,5 4 000 4 500 3,50 NJ 220 ECP J, M, ML
1 80
34 285
305
36,5 4 000 4 500 3,60 NUP 220 ECP ML
1 80 34 285 305 36,5 4 000 4 500 3,45 N 220 ECP –
1 80
46
380
450
54
4 000
4 500
4,75
NU 2220 ECP
J, ML
1 80 46 380 450 54 4 000 4 500 4,80 NJ 2220 ECP J, ML
1 80 46 380 450 54 4 000 4 500 4,90 NUP 2220 ECP ML
21 5
47 450
440
51
3 200
3 800
7,85
NU 320 ECP
J, M, ML
21 5 47 450 440 51 3 200 3 800 7,65 NJ 320 ECP J, M, ML
21 5 47 450 440 51 3 200 3 800 7,80 NUP 320 ECJ ML
21 5 47 450 440 51 3 200 3 800 7,55 N 320 ECP M
21 5
73 670
735
85 3 200
3 800
1 2,0
NU 2320 ECP
J, ML
21 5 73 670 735 85 3 200 3 800 1 2,2 NJ 2320 ECP J, ML
21 5 73 670 735 85 3 200 3 800 1 2,5 NUP 2320 ECP J, ML
250 58 429 475 53 3 000 3 600 1 4,0 NU 420 M –
105 1 60 26 1 01 1 37 16 4 800 7 500 1 ,85 NU 1021 ML M
1 90
36 300
31 5
36,5
3 800
4 300
4,00
NU 221 ECP
J, ML
1 90 36 300 31 5 36,5 3 800 4 300 4,1 0 NJ 221 ECP ML
1 90
36 300
31 5 36,5 3 800 4 300 4,20 NUP 221 ECP ML
1 90 36 300 31 5 36,5 3 800 4 300 3,95 N 221 ECP –
225
49
500
500
57
3 200
3 800
8,75
NU 321 ECP
J, ML
225 49 500 500 57 3 200 3 800 9,00 NJ 321 ECJ ML
225 49 500 500 57 3 200 3 800 8,65 N 321 ECP –
260 60 501 570 64 2 800 3 400 1 9,0 NU 421 M –
1)
NU 31 9 ECML
48
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
95 1 32
1 70
1 21 ,5
3 3 2,9
1 09
1 1 8
1 24
1 86
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 319 EC
0,76
1 3 20,5
cont. 1 32 1 70 1 21 ,5 3 3 2,9 1 09 118 1 35 1 86 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 319 EC 0,76 13 20,5
1 32
1 70
1 21 ,5
3 3 – 1 09
– 1 35
1 86
2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 32 – 1 77,5 3 3 2,9 1 09 1 74 1 81 1 86 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 32
1 70
1 21 ,5
3 3 6,9
1 09
1 1 8
1 24
1 86
2,5
2,5
0,25
HJ 2319 EC
0,81
1 3 24,5
1 32 1 70 1 21 ,5 3 3 6,9 1 09 1 1 8 1 35 1 86 2,5 2,5 0,25 HJ 2319 EC 0,81 13 24,5
1 32 1 70 1 21 ,5 3 3 – 1 09 – 1 35 1 86 2,5 2,5 0,25 –

– 1 86 1 33,5 4 4 5 115 1 30 1 36 220 3 3 0,1 5 –
100 – 1 32 113 1 ,5 1 ,1 3,5 1 06 111 116 1 43 1 ,5 1 0,1 –
1 27
1 57
1 1 9
2,1
2,1
1 ,7
1 1 2
1 1 6
1 22
1 68
2
2
0,1 5
HJ 220 EC
0,42
1 0 15
1 27 1 57 119 2,1 2,1 1 ,7 112 116 1 30 1 68 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 220 EC 0,42 10 1 5
1 27 1 57 119 2,1 2,1 – 112 – 1 30 1 68 2 2 0,1 5 –

1 27 – 1 63 2,1 2,1 1 ,7 112 1 60 1 66 1 68 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 27
1 57
1 1 9
2,1
2,1
2,5
1 1 2
1 1 6
1 22
1 68
2
2
0,2
HJ 2220 EC
0,43
1 0 16
1 27 1 57 119 2,1 2,1 2,5 112 1 1 6 1 30 1 68 2 2 0,2 HJ 2220 EC 0,43 10 1 6
1 27 1 57 119 2,1 2,1 – 112 – 1 30 1 68 2 2 0,2 –

1 39
1 82
1 27,5
3 3 2,9
1 1 4
1 24
1 30
201
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 320 EC
0,87
1 3 20,5
1 39 1 82 1 27,5 3 3 2,9 114 1 24 1 42 201 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 320 EC 0,87 13 20,5
1 39 1 82
1 27,5
3 3 – 1 1 4
– 1 42
201
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
1 39 – 1 91 ,5 3 3 2,9 114 1 88 1 95 201 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 39
1 82
1 27,5
3
3 5,9
1 1 4
1 24
1 30
201
2,5
2,5
0,25
HJ 2320 EC
0,93
1 3 23,5
1 39 1 82 1 27,5 3 3 5,9 114 1 24 1 42 201 2,5 2,5 0,25 HJ 2320 EC 0,93 13 23,5
1 39 1 82 1 27,5 3 3 – 114 – 1 42 201 2,5 2,5 0,25 –
– 1 95 1 39 4 4 4,9 1 20 1 35 1 42 230 3 3 0,1 5 –
105 – 1 40 1 1 9,5 2 1 ,1 3,8 111 117 1 22 1 51 2 1 0,1 –
– 1 64
1 25
2,1 2,1 2 1 1 7
1 22
1 28
1 78
2
2
0,1 5
–
1 34 1 64 1 25 2,1 2,1 2 117 1 22 1 37 1 78 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 34 1 64 1 25 2,1 2,1 – 117 – 1 37 1 78 2 2 0,1 5 –

1 34 – 1 73 2,1 2,1 2 117 1 70 1 76 1 78 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 90
1 33
3
3
3,4
1 1 9
1 30
1 36
21 1
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
1 45 1 90 1 33 3 3 3,4 119 1 30 1 48 21 1 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –

1 45 – 201 3 3 3,4 119 1 98 203 21 1 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
– 203 1 44,5 4 4 4,9 1 25 1 40 1 47 240 3 3 0,1 5 –
1)
49
d 110 – 120 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
110 1 70 28 1 28 1 66 1 9,3 4 500 7 000 2,30 NU 1022 ML M
200
38 335
365
42,5
3 600
4 000
4,80
NU 222 ECP
J, M, ML
200 38 335 365 42,5 3 600 4 000 4,90 NJ 222 ECP J, M, ML
200
38 335
365
42,5
3 600
4 000
5,00
NUP 222 ECP ML
200 38 335 365 42,5 3 600 4 000 4,80 N 222 ECP M
200
53 440
520
61
3 600
4 000
6,70
NU 2222 ECP
J, ML
200 53 440 520 61 3 600 4 000 6,85 NJ 2222 ECP J, ML
200 53 440 520 61 3 600 4 000 7,00 NUP 2222 ECP ML
240
50 530
540
61
3 000
3 400
1 0,8
NU 322 ECP
J, M, ML
240 50 530 540 61 3 000 3 400 1 1 ,1 NJ 322 ECP J, M, ML
240 50 530 540 61 3 000 3 400 1 1 ,2 NUP 322 ECP J, ML
240 50 530 540 61 3 000 3 400 1 0,5 N 322 ECP M
240
80
780
900
1 02
3 000
3 400
1 7,0
NU 2322 ECP
MA
240 80 780 900 1 02 3 000 3 400 1 8,9 NJ 2322 ECP MA
240 80 780 900 1 02 3 000 3 400 1 8,9 NUP 2322 ECP MA
280
65 532
585
64 2 600
3 200
20,0
NU 422
–
280 65 532 585 64 2 600 3 200 20,3 NJ 422 –
120 1 80 28 1 34 1 83 20,8 4 000 6 300 2,45 NU 1024 ML M
21 5
40
390
430
49
3 400
3 600
5,75
NU 224 ECP
J, M, ML
21 5 40 390 430 49 3 400 3 600 5,85 NJ 224 ECP J, M, ML
21 5 40 390 430 49 3 400

3 600
6,00
NUP 224 ECJ ML
21 5 40 390 430 49 3 400 3 600 5,75 N 224 ECP M
21 5
58 520
630
72 3 400
3 600
8,30
NU 2224 ECP
J, M, ML
21 5 58 520 630 72 3 400 3 600 8,50 NJ 2224 ECP J, M, ML
21 5 58 520 630 72 3 400 3 600 9,00 NUP 2224 ECP ML
260
55 61 0
620
69,5
2 800
3 200
1 3,3
NU 324 ECP
J, M, ML
260 55 61 0 620 69,5 2 800 3 200 1 3,5 NJ 324 ECP J, M, ML
260
55 61 0
620
69,5
2 800 3 200 1 3,7 NUP 324 ECP ML
260 55 61 0 620 69,5 2 800 3 200 1 3,2 N 324 ECP M
260
86
91 5
1 040
1 1 6
2 800
3 200
24,0
NU 2324 ECMA
–
260 86 91 5 1 040 116 2 800 3 200 24,3 NJ 2324 ECMA M

260 86 91 5 1 040 116 2 800 3 200 24,3 NUP 2324 ECMA –
31 0 72 644 735 78 2 400 2 800 28,0 NU 424 –
1)
NU 222 ECML
50
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1
D1
F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
110 – 1 49 1 25 2 1 ,1 3,8 116 1 23 1 28 1 61 2 1 0,1 –
1 41
1 74
1 32,5
2,1
2,1
2,1
1 22
1 30
1 35
1 88
2
2
0,1 5
HJ 222 EC
0,60
1 1 1 7
1 41 1 74 1 32,5 2,1 2,1 2,1 1 22 1 30 1 45 1 88 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 222 EC 0,60 11 1 7
1 41 1 74 1 32,5 2,1 2,1 – 1 22 – 1 45 1 88 2 2 0,1 5 –

1 41 – 1 80,5 2,1 2,1 2,1 1 22 1 77 1 83 1 88 2 2 0,1 5 –
– 1 74
1 32,5
2,1
2,1
3,7
1 22
1 29
1 35
1 88
2
2
0,2
–
1 41 1 74 1 32,5 2,1 2,1 3,7 1 22 1 29 1 45 1 88 2 2 0,2 –

1 41 1 74 1 32,5 2,1 2,1 – 1 22 – 1 45 1 88 2 2 0,2 –
1 55
201
1 43
3
3
3
1 24
1 39
1 46
226
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 322 EC
1 ,20
1 4 22
1 55 201 1 43 3 3 3 1 24 1 39 1 59 226 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 322 EC 1 ,20 14 22
1 55 201 1 43 3 3 – 1 24
– 1 59
226
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
1 55 – 21 1 3 3 3 1 24 208 21 5 226 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
– 201
1 43
3 3 7,5
1 24
1 39
1 46
226
2,5
2,5
0,25
–
1 55 201 1 43 3 3 7,5 1 24 1 39 1 59 226 2,5 2,5 0,25 –

1 55 201 1 43 3 3 – 1 24 – 1 59 226 2,5 2,5 0,25 –
1 71
21 7
1 55
4 4 4,8
1 30
1 50
1 58
260
3 3 0,1 5
HJ 422
2,1 0
1 7 29,5
1 71 21 7 1 55 4 4 4,8 1 30 1 50 1 74 260 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 422 2,1 0 17 29,5
120 – 1 59 1 35 2 1 ,1 3,8 1 26 1 33 1 38 1 71 2 1 0,1 –
1 53
1 88
1 43,5
2,1
2,1
1 ,9
1 32
1 40
1 46
203
2
2
0,1 5
HJ 224 EC
0,69
1 1 1 7
1 53 1 88 1 43,5 2,1 2,1 1 ,9 1 32 1 40 1 56 203 2 2 0,1 5 HJ 224 EC 0,69 11 1 7
1 53 1 88 1 43,5 2,1 2,1 – 1 32 – 1 56 203 2 2 0,1 5

–
1 53 – 1 95,5 2,1 2,1 1 ,9 1 32 1 92 1 99 203 2 2 0,1 5 –
1 53
1 88
1 43,5
2,1
2,1
3,8
1 32
1 40
1 46
203
2
2
0,2
HJ 2224 EC
0,74
1 1 20
1 53 1 88 1 43,5 2,1 2,1 3,8 1 32 1 40 1 56 203 2 2 0,2 HJ 2224 EC 0,74 11 20
1 53 1 88 1 43,5 2,1 2,1 – 1 32 – 1 56 203 2 2 0,2 –
1 68
21 9
1 54
3 3 3,7
1 34
1 50
1 57
246
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 324 EC
1 ,40
1 4
22,5
1 68 21 9 1 54 3 3 3,7 1 34 1 50 1 71 246 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 324 EC 1 ,40 14 22,5
1 68 21 9 1 54 3 3 – 1 34 – 1 71 246 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –

1 68 – 230 3 3 3,7 1 34 226 234 246 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 68
21 9
1 54
3 3 7,2
1 34
1 50
1 57
246
2,5
2,5
0,25
HJ 2324 EC
1 ,45
1 4 26
1 68 21 9 1 54 3 3 7,2 1 34 1 50 1 71 246 2,5 2,5 0,25 HJ 2324 EC 1 ,45 14 26
1 68 21 9 1 54 3 3 – 1 34 – 1 71 246 2,5 2,5 0,25 –
1 88 240 1 70 5 5 6,3 1 44 1 65 1 73 286 4 4 0,1 5 HJ 424 2,60 17 30,5
1)
51
d 130 – 140 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
130 200 33 1 65 224 25 3 800 5 600 3,80 NU 1026 ML M
230
40 41 5
455
51 3 200
3 400
6,45
NU 226 ECP
J, M, ML
230 40 41 5 455 51 3 200 3 400 6,60 NJ 226 ECP J, M, ML
230
40 41 5
455
51 3 200
3 400
6,75
NUP 226 ECP J, ML
230 40 41 5 455 51 3 200 3 400 6,30 N 226 ECP –
230
64 61 0
735
83
3 200
3 400
1 0,5
NU 2226 ECP
ML
230 64 61 0 735 83 3 200 3 400 1 2,2 NJ 2226 ECP ML
230 64 61 0 735 83 3 200 3 400 1 2,2 NUP 2226 ECP ML
280
58 720
750
81 ,5
2 400
3 000
1 6,5
NU 326 ECP
J, M, ML
280 58 720 750 81 ,5 2 400 3 000 1 8,4 NJ 326 ECP J, M, ML
280 58 720 750 81 ,5 2 400 3 000 1 9,6 NUP 326 ECP ML
280 58 720 750 81 ,5 2 400 3 000 1 8,5 N 326 ECP M
280
93
1 060
1 250
1 37
2 400
3 000
30,0
NU 2326 ECMA
–
280 93 1 060 1 250 1 37 2 400 3 000 30,5 NJ 2326 ECMA –

280 93 1 060 1 250 1 37 2 400 3 000 31 ,0 NUP 2326 ECMA –
140 21 0 33 1 72 245 27 3 600 5 300 4,05 NU 1028 ML M
250
42 450
51 0
57
2 800
3 200
8,50
NU 228 ECM
J, ML
250 42 450 51 0 57 2 800 3 200 8,75 NJ 228 ECM J, ML
250 42 450 51 0 57 2 800 3 200 8,90 NUP 228 ECM ML
250
68 655
830
93 2 800
4 800
1 5,0
NU 2228 ECML
–
250 68 655 830 93 2 800 4 800 1 5,3 NJ 2228 ECML –

250 68 655 830 93 2 800 4 800 1 5,6 NUP 2228 ECML –
300
62 780
830
88 2 400
2 800
22,7
NU 328 ECM
J, ML
300 62 780 830 88 2 400 2 800 23,0 NJ 328 ECM J, ML
300 62 780 830 88 2 400 2 800 23,5 NUP 328 ECM ML
300
1 02
1 200
1 430
1 50
2 400
3 600
37,0
NU 2328 ECMA
–
300 1 02 1 200 1 430 1 50 2 400 3 600 37,5 NJ 2328 ECMA –

300 1 02 1 200 1 430 1 50 2 400 3 600 38,0 NUP 2328 ECMA –
1)
NU 226 ECML
52
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1 D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
130 – 1 75 1 48 2 1 ,1 4,7 1 36 1 45 1 51 1 91 2 1 0,1 –
1 64
202
1 53,5
3
3
2,1
1 44
1 50
1 56
21 6
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 226 EC
0,75
1 1 1 7
1 64 202 1 53,5 3 3 2,1 1 44 1 50 1 67 21 6 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 226 EC 0,75 11 1 7
1 64 202 1 53,5 3 3 – 1 44 – 1 67 21 6 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –

1 64 – 209,5 3 3 2,1 1 44 206 21 3 21 6 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 64
202
1 53,5
3
3
4,3
1 44
1 49
1 56
21 6
2,5
2,5
0,2
HJ 2226 EC
0,83
1 1 21
1 64 202 1 53,5 3 3 4,3 1 44 1 49 1 67 21 6 2,5 2,5 0,2 HJ 2226 EC 0,83 11 21
1 64 202 1 53,5 3 3 – 1 44 – 1 67 21 6 2,5 2,5 0,2
1 81
236
1 67
4 4 3,7
1 47
1 63
1 70
263
3 3 0,1 5
HJ 326 EC
1 ,60
1 4 23
1 81 236 1 67 4 4 3,7 1 47 1 63 1 85 263 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 326 EC 1 ,60 14 23
1 81
236
1 67
4 4 – 1 47
– 1 85
263
3 3 0,1 5
–
1 81 – 247 4 4 3,7 1 47 243 251 263 3 3 0,1 5 –
1 81
236
1 67
4 4 8,7
1 47
1 63
1 70
263
3 3 0,25
HJ 2326 EC
1 ,70
1 4 28
1 81 236 1 67 4 4 8,7 1 47 1 63 1 85 263 3 3 0,25 HJ 2326 EC 1 ,70 14 28
1 81 236 1 67 4 4 – 1 47 – 1 85 263 3 3 0,25 –
140 – 1 85 1 58 2 1 ,1 4,4 1 46 1 55 1 61 201 2 1 0,1 –
– 21 7
1 69
3 3 2,5
1 54
1 66
1 72
236
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
1 79 21 7 1 69 3 3 2,5 1 54 1 66 1 83 236 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –

1 79 21 7 1 69 3 3 – 1 54 – 1 83 236 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
1 79
21 7
1 69
3 3 4,4
1 54
1 64
1 72
236
2,5
2,5
0,2
HJ 2228 EC
1 ,05
1 1 23
1 79 21 7 1 69 3 3 4,4 1 54 1 64 1 83 236 2,5 2,5 0,2 HJ 2228 EC 1 ,05 11 23
1 79 21 7 1 69 3 3 – 1 54 – 1 83 236 2,5 2,5 0,2 –

1 95
252
1 80
4
4
3,7
1 57
1 76
1 83
283
3 3 0,1 5
HJ 328 EC
2,00
1 5 25
1 95 252 1 80 4 4 3,7 1 57 1 76 1 99 283 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 328 EC 2,00 15 25
1 95 252 1 80 4 4 – 1 57 – 1 99 283 3 3 0,1 5 –
1 95
252
1 80
4 4 9,7
1 57
1 76
1 83
283
3
3
0,25
HJ 2328 EC
2,1 5
1 5 31
1 95 252 1 80 4 4 9,7 1 57 1 76 1 99 283 3 3 0,25 HJ 2328 EC 2,1 5 15 31
1 95 252 1 80 4 4 – 1 57 – 1 99 283 3 3 0,25 –
1)
53
d 150 – 170 mm
B
r2 r4
r1 r3
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1 E
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit
d D B C C0
Pu
cage
150 225 35 1 94 275 30 3 200 5 000 4,85 NU 1030 ML M
270
45 51 0
600
64 2 600
2 800
1 1 ,8
NU 230 ECM
J, ML
270 45 51 0 600 64 2 600 2 800 1 2,0 NJ 230 ECM J, ML
270 45 51 0 600 64 2 600 2 800 1 2,2 NUP 230 ECM ML
270
73 735
930
1 00
2 600
2 800
20,0
NU 2230 ECM
–
270 73 735 930 1 00 2 600 2 800 20,3 NJ 2230 ECM –
320
65 900
965
1 00
2 200
2 600
27,5
NU 330 ECM
MA
320 65 900 965 1 00 2 200 2 600 28,0 NJ 330 ECM MA
320
1 08
1 370
1 630
1 66
2 200
3 400
45,5
NU 2330 ECMA
–
320 1 08 1 370 1 630 1 66 2 200 3 400 46,0 NJ 2330 ECMA –

320 1 08 1 370 1 630 1 66 2 200 3 400 46,5 NUP 2330 ECMA –
160 240 38 229 325 35,5 3 000 4 800 5,95 NU 1032 ML M
290
48
585
680
72 2 400
2 600
1 4,5
NU 232 ECM
ML
290 48 585 680 72 2 400 2 600 1 5,0 NJ 232 ECM ML
290 48 585
680
72 2 400
2 600
1 5,5 NUP 232 ECM ML
290 48 585 680 72 2 400 2 600 1 5,5 N 232 ECM –
290
80 930
1 200
1 29
2 400
3 600
24,0
NU 2232 ECMA
–
290 80 930 1 200 1 29 2 400 3 600 24,5 NJ 2232 ECMA –
340
68 1 000
1 080
1 1 2
2 000
2 400
33,0
NU 332 ECM
MA
340 68 1 000 1 080 112 2 000 2 400 33,5 NJ 332 ECM MA
340
1 1 4
1 250
1 730
1 73
1 800
2 800
53,0
NU 2332 ECMA
–
340 114 1 250 1 730 1 73 1 800 2 800 53,5 NJ 2332 ECMA –
170 260 42 275 400 41 ,5 2 800 4 300 8,1 5 NU 1034 ML M
31 0
52
695
81 5
85 2 200
2 400
1 9,0
NU 234 ECM
MA
31 0 52 695 81 5 85 2 200 2 400 1 9,5 NJ 234 ECM MA
31 0 52 695 81 5 85 2 200 2 400 20,0 NUP 234 ECM MA
31 0 86 1 060 1 340 1 40 2 200 3 200 30,0 NU 2234 ECMA –
360
72 952
1 1 80
1 1 6
1 700
2 200
37,5
NU 334 ECM
MA
360 72 952 1 1 80 116 1 700 2 200 38,5 N 334 ECM –
360
1 20
1 450
2 040
204
1 700
3 000
62,0
NU 2334 ECMA
–
360 1 20 1 450 2 040 204 1 700 3 000 63,0 NJ 2334 ECMA –
1)
When ordering bearings with an alternative standard cage the suffix of the standard cage has to be replaced by the suffix of the cage in question. e.g. NU 230 ECM becomes
NU 230 ECML
54
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra rb
rb ra r3
r4
B1
Angle ring
factor
1)
d d1
D1 F, E r1 ,2 r3,4 s da
da
d b, Da
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
mm mm – – kg mm
150 – 1 98 1 69,5 2,1 1 ,5 4,9 1 57 1 67 1 73 21 5 2 1 ,5 0,1 –
1 93
234
1 82
3
3
2,5
1 63
1 78
1 85
256
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
HJ 230 EC
1 ,25
1 2 1 9,5
1 93 234 1 82 3 3 2,5 1 64 1 78 1 97 256 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 HJ 230 EC 1 ,25 12 1 9,5
1 93 234 1 82 3 3 – 1 64 – 1 97 256 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –

1 94
234
1 82
3 3 4,9
1 64
1 79
1 85
256
2,5
2,5
0,2
HJ 2230 EC
1 ,35
1 2 24,5
1 94 234 1 82 3 3 4,9 1 64 1 79 1 97 256 2,5 2,5 0,2 HJ 2230 EC 1 ,35 12 24,5
– 270
1 93
4 4 4 1 67
1 89
1 96
303
3 3 0,1 5
–
209 270 1 93 4 4 4 1 67 1 89 21 3 303 3 3 0,1 5 –
209
270
1 93
4
4
1 0,5
1 67
1 89
1 96
303
3 3 0,25
–
209 270 1 93 4 4 1 0,5 1 67 1 89 21 3 303 3 3 0,25 –

209 270 1 93 4 4 – 1 67 – 21 3 303 3 3 0,25 –
160 1 88 21 1 1 80 2,1 1 ,5 5,2 1 67 1 77 1 83 230 2 1 ,5 0,1 HJ 1032 0,65 10 1 9
– 250
1 95
3 3 2,7
1 74
1 91
1 98
276
2,5
2,5
0,1 5
–
206 250 1 95 3 3 2,7 1 74 1 91 21 0 276 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
206 250 1 95 3 3 – 1 74 – 21 0 276

2,5
2,5
0,1 5 –
206 – 259 3 3 2,7 1 74 255 263 276 2,5 2,5 0,1 5 –
205
252
1 93
3 3 4,5
1 74
1 88
1 96
276
2,5
2,5
0,2
HJ 2232 EC
1 ,55
1 2 24,5
205 252 1 93 3 3 4,5 1 74 1 88 209 276 2,5 2,5 0,2 HJ 2232 EC 1 ,55 12 24,5
221
286
204
4 4 4 1 77
200
207
323
3 3 0,1 5
HJ 332 EC
2,55
1 5 25
221 286 204 4 4 4 1 77 200 225 323 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 332 EC 2,55 15 25
– 286
204
4 4 11 1 77
200
207
323
3 3 0,25
–
221 286 204 4 4 11 1 77 200 225 323 3 3 0,25 –
170 201 227 1 93 2,1 2,1 5,8 1 80 1 90 1 96 250 2 2 0,1 HJ 1034 0,94 11 21
220
268
207
4 4 2,9
1 87
203
21 0
293
3
3
0,1 5
HJ 234 EC
1 ,65
1 2 20
220 268 207 4 4 2,9 1 87 203 224 293 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 234 EC 1 ,65 12 20
220 268 207 4 4 – 1 87 – 224 293 3 3 0,1 5 –

– 270 205 4 4 4,2 1 87 200 208 293 3 3 0,2 –
– 303
21 8
4 4 4,6
1 87
21 4
221
343
3 3 0,1 5
–
236 – 31 8 4 4 4,6 1 87 31 3 323 343 3 3 0,1 5 –
– 299
21 6
4 4 10 1 87
21 1
220
343
3 3 0,25
–
238 299 21 6 4 4 10 1 87 21 1 242 343 3 3 0,25 –
1)
55
d 180 – 220 mm
B
r2
r1
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1
Type NU Type NJ Type NUP
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass
Designations

Alternative
limit speed speed with standard cage standard
d D B C C0 Pu standard cage design1 )
cage
180 280 46 336 475 51 2 600 4 000 1 0,5 NU 1036 ML M
320
52
720
850
88
2 200
3 200
1 9,5
NU 236 ECMA
–
320 52 720 850 88 2 200 3 200 20,2 NJ 236 ECMA –

320 52 720 850 88 2 200 3 200 21 ,0 NUP 236 ECMA –
320
86 1 1 00
1 430
1 46
2 200
3 200
31 ,5
NU 2236 ECMA
M
320 86 1 1 00 1 430 1 46 2 200 3 200 32,0 NJ 2236 ECMA M
380
75 1 020
1 290
1 25
1 600
2 200
44,0
NU 336 ECM
–
380 1 26 1 61 0 2 240 220 1 600 2 800 71 ,5 NU 2336 ECMA –
190 290 46 347 500 53 2 600 3 800 1 1 ,0 NU 1038 ML –
340
55
800
965
98 2 000
3 000
24,0
NU 238 ECMA
M
340 55 800 965 98 2 000 3 000 24,5 NJ 238 ECMA M

340 55 800 965 98 2 000 3 000 25,0 NUP 238 ECMA M
340 92 1 220 1 600 1 60 2 000 3 000 39,0 NU 2238 ECMA –
400
78 1 1 40
1 500
1 43
1 500
2 000
50,0
NU 338 ECM
–
400 1 32 1 830 2 550 236 1 500 2 600 82,5 NU 2338 ECMA –
200 31 0 51 380 570 58,5 2 400 3 000 1 4,5 NU 1040 MA M
360
58 850
1 020
1 00
1 900
2 800
28,5
NU 240 ECMA
M
360 58 850 1 020 1 00 1 900 2 800 29,0 NJ 240 ECMA M
360
58 850 1 020 1 00 1 900 2 800 29,5 NUP 240 ECMA M
360 98 1 370 1 800 1 80 1 900 2 800 46,0 NU 2240 ECMA –
420
80
1 230
1 630
1 50
1 400
2 400
56,0
NU 340 ECMA
–
420 1 38 1 980 2 800 255 1 400 2 400 97,0 NU 2340 ECMA –

420 1 38 1 980 2 800 255 1 400 2 400 98,0 NJ 2340 ECMA –
220 340 56 495 735 73,5 2 200 2 800 1 9,0 NU 1044 MA M
400
65 1 060
1 290
1 25
1 600
2 400
38,5
NU 244 ECMA
M
400 65 1 060 1 290 1 25 1 600 2 400 39,0 NJ 244 ECMA M
400
65 1 060 1 290 1 25 1 600 2 400 39,5 NUP 244 ECMA M
400 1 08 1 570 2 280 21 2 1 600 2 400 62,5 NU 2244 ECMA –
460
88
1 21 0
1 630
1 50
1 500
1 700
72,5
NU 344 M
–
460 88 1 21 0 1 630 1 50 1 500 1 700 73,5 NJ 344 M –

460 1 45 2 380 3 450 31 0 1 300 2 200 1 20 NU 2344 ECMA –
1)
When ordering bearings with an alternative standard cage the suffix of the standard cage has to be replaced by the suffix of the cage in question. e.g. NU 2236 ECMA becomes
NU 2236 ECM
56
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra
rb r3
r4
B1
Da d a db db d d1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1 D1
F r1 ,2
r3,4 s da
da
d b
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
~ ~ min
min min max min max max max
mm mm – – kg mm
180 – 244 205 2,1 2,1 6,1 1 90 202 208 270 2 2 0,1 –
230
279
21 7
4
4
2,9
1 97
21 3
220
303
3
3
0,1 5
HJ 236 EC
1 ,70
1 2 20
230 279 21 7 4 4 2,9 1 97 21 3 234 303 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 236 EC 1 ,70 12 20
230 279 21 7 4 4 – 1 97 – 234 303 3 3 0,1 5 –

– 280
21 5
4 4 4,2
1 97
21 0
21 8
303
3 3 0,2
–
229 280 21 5 4 4 4,2 1 97 21 0 233 303 3 3 0,2 –
– 31 9
227
4 4 5 1 97
223
230
363
3 3 0,1 5
–
– 320 227 4 4 1 0,5 1 97 223 230 363 3 3 0,25 –
190 – 254 21 5 2,1 2,1 6,1 200 21 2 21 8 280 2 2 0,1 –
244
295
230
4 4 3 207
226
234
323
3
3
0,1 5
HJ 238 EC
2,1 0
1 3 21 ,5
244 295 230 4 4 3 207 226 248 323 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 238 EC 2,1 0 13 21 ,5
244 295 230 4 4 – 207 – 248 323 3 3 0,1 5 –
– 297 228 4 4 5 207 222 232 323 3 3 0,2 –
264
338
245
5 5 4,3
21 0
240
249
380
4 4 0,1 5
HJ 338 EC
4,30 18 29
– 341 240 5 5 9,5 21 0 235 244 380 4 4 0,25 –
200 239 269 229 2,1 2,1 7 21 0 225 233 299 2 2 0,1 HJ 1040 1 ,65 13 25,5
258
31 2
243
4
4
2,6
21 7
239
247
343
3 3 0,1 5
HJ 240 EC
2,55
1 4 23
258 31 2 243 4 4 2,6 21 7 239 262 343 3 3 0,1 5 HJ 240 EC 2,55 14 23
258 31 2 243 4 4 – 21 7 – 262

343
3 3 0,1 5
–
– 31 3 241 4 4 5,1 21 7 235 245 343 3 3 0,2 –
– 337
260
5 5 4 220
253
264
400
4 4 0,1 5
–
– 350 247 5 5 9,4 220 241 251 400 4 4 0,25 –

278 350 247 5 5 9,4 220 241 280 400 4 4 0,25 –
220 262 297 250 3 3 7,5 233 246 254 327 2,5 2,5 0,1 HJ 1044 2,1 0 14 27
– 344
268
4
4
2,3
237
264
270
383
3
3
0,1 5
–
284 344 268 4 4 2,3 237 264 288 383 3 3 0,1 5 –
284 344 268 4 4 – 237 – 288 383 3 3 0,1 5 –

– 349 259 4 4 7,9 237 255 264 383 3 3 0,2 –
– 371
284
5 5 5,2
240
277
288
440
4
4
0,1 5
–
307 371 284 5 5 5,2 240 277 31 1 440 4 4 0,1 5 –

– 384 277 5 5 1 0,4 240 268 280 440 4 4 0,25 –
1)
57
d 240 – 340 mm
B
r2
r1
r3 r1 r
r4
r2
r4
D D1 d F d1 d d1
Type NU Type NJ Type NUP
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass Designation
dimensions dynamic static load Reference Limiting

limit speed speed
d D B C C0 Pu
240 360 56 523 800 78 2 000 2 600 20,0 NU 1048 MA
440
72 952
1 370
1 29
1 600
2 200
51 ,5
NU 248 MA
440 72 952 1 370 1 29 1 600 2 200 52,5 NJ 248 MA
440 72 952 1 370 1 29 1 600 2 200 53,5 NUP 248 MA
440
1 20
1 450
2 360
21 6
1 500
2 200
84,0
NU 2248 MA
440 1 20 1 450 2 360 21 6 1 500 2 200 85,0 NJ 2248 MA
500
95
1 450
2 000
1 80
1 300
1 600
94,5
NU 348 M
500 95 1 450 2 000 1 80 1 300 2 000 98,5 NJ 348 MA
500 1 55 2 600 3 650 320 1 200 2 000 1 55 NU 2348 ECMA
260 400 65 627 965 96,5 1 800 2 400 29,5 NU 1052 MA
480
80 1 1 70
1 700
1 56
1 400
2 000
68,5
NU 252 MA
480 80 1 1 70 1 700 1 56 1 400 2 000 70,0 NJ 252 MA
480 80 1 1 70 1 700 1 56 1 400 2 000 72,0 NUP 252 MA
480
1 30
1 790
3 000
265
1 300
2 000
1 1 0
NU 2252 MA
480 1 30 1 790 3 000 265 1 300 2 000 112 NJ 2252 MA
540 1 02 1 940 2 700 236 1 1 00 1 800 1 25 NU 352 ECMA
280 420 65 660 1 060 1 02 1 700 2 200 32,5 NU 1056 MA
500
80 1 1 40
1 700
1 53
1 400
1 900
71 ,5
NU 256 MA
500 80 1 1 40 1 700 1 53 1 400 1 900 73,0 NJ 256 MA
500 1 30 2 200 3 250 285 1 200 1 900 115 NU 2256 ECMA
580 1 75 2 700 4 300 365 1 000 1 700 230 NU 2356 MA
300 460
74 858
1 370
1 29
1 500
2 000
46,5
NU 1060 MA
460 74 858 1 370 1 29 1 500 2 000 47,0 NJ 1060 MA
540
85 1 420
2 1 20
1 83
1 300
1 800
89,5
NU 260 MA
540 1 40 2 090 3 450 300 1 200 1 800 1 45 NU 2260 MA
320 480
74 880
1 430
1 32
1 400
1 900
48,5
NU 1064 MA
480 74 880 1 430 1 32 1 400 1 900 49,0 NJ 1064 MA
580
92 1 61 0
2 450
204
1 200
1 600
1 1 5
NU 264 MA
580 1 50 3 1 90 5 000 41 5 1 000 1 600 1 80 NU 2264 ECMA
340 520
82 1 080
1 760
1 56
1 300
1 700
65,0
NU 1068 MA
520 82 1 080 1 760 1 56 1 300 1 700 68,0 NJ 1068 MA
620 1 65 2 640 4 500 365 1 000 1 500 220 NU 2268 MA
58
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra
rb r3
r4
B1
Da d a db db d d1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1 D1
F r1 ,2
r3,4
s da
da
d b
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
~ ~ min
mm mm – – kg mm
240 282 31 7 270 3 3 7,5 253 266 274 347 2,5 2,5 0,1 HJ 1048 2,25 14 27
– 365
295
4 4 3,4
257
288
299
423
3 3 0,1 5
–
31 3 365 295 4 4 3,4 257 288 31 7 423 3 3 0,1 5 –

31 3 365 295 4 4 – 257 – 31 7 423 3 3 0,1 5 –
– 365
295
4 4 4,3
257
284
299
423
3 3 0,2
–
31 3 365 295 4 4 4,3 257 284 31 7 423 3 3 0,2 –
335
401
31 0
5
5
5,6
260
302
31 4
480
4 4 0,1 5
HJ 348
8,90
22 39,5
335 401 31 0 5 5 5,6 260 302 339 480 4 4 0,1 5 HJ 348 8,90 22 39,5
– 426 299 5 5 1 0,3 260 295 305 480 4 4 0,25 –
260 309 349 296 4 4 8 276 291 300 384 3 3 0,1 HJ 1052 3,30 16 31 ,5
340
397
320
5 5 3,4
280
31 3
324
460
4 4 0,1 5
HJ 252
6,20
1 8 33
340 397 320 5 5 3,4 280 31 3 344 460 4 4 0,1 5 HJ 252 6,20 18 33
340 397 320 5 5 – 280 – 344 460 4 4 0,1 5 –
– 397
320
5 5 4,3
280
309
324
460
4 4 0,2
–
340 397 320 5 5 4,3 280 309 344 460 4 4 0,2 –
– 455 337 6 6 4,2 286 330 341 51 4 5 5 0,1 5 –
280 329 369 31 6 4 4 8 295 31 1 320 405 3 3 0,1 HJ 1056 3,55 16 31 ,5
– 41 7
340
5 5 3,8
300
333
344
480
4
4
0,1 5
–
360 41 7 340 5 5 3,8 300 333 364 480 4 4 0,1 5 –

350 433 327 5 5 1 0,2 300 320 331 480 4 4 0,2 HJ 2256 EC 6,75 18 38
– 467 362 6 6 6,6 306 347 366 554 5 5 0,25 –
300 356
402
340
4 4 9,7
31 7
335
344
443
3 3 0,1 HJ 1060
5,30
1 9 36
356 402 340 4 4 9,7 31 7 335 360 443 3 3 0,1 HJ 1060 5,30 19 36
– 451
364
5 5 4,8
320
358
368
520
4 4 0,1 5
–
– 451 364 5 5 5,6 320 352 368 520 4 4 0,2 –
320 376
422
360
4 4 9,7
335
355
364
465
3 3 0,1 HJ 1064
5,65
1 9 36
376 422 360 4 4 9,7 335 355 380 465 3 3 0,1 HJ 1064 5,65 19 36
– 485
390
5 5 5,3
340
383
394
560
4 4 0,1 5
–
– 507 380 5 5 5,9 340 377 384 560 4 4 0,2 –
340 403
455
385
5 5 6,5
358
380
389
502
4 4 0,1 HJ 1068
7,40
21 39,5
403 455 385 5 5 6,5 358 380 408 502 4 4 0,1 HJ 1068 7,40 21 39,5
– 51 5 41 6 6 6 8 366 401 421 594 5 5 0,2 –
1)
59
d 360 – 800 mm
B
r2
r1
r3 r1
r4
r2
D D1 d F d1
Type NU Type NJ
Principal
Basic load ratings
Fatigue
Speed ratings
Mass Designation
dimensions dynamic static load Reference Limiting

limit speed speed
d D B C C0 Pu
360 540
82 1 1 00
1 830
1 63
1 300
1 600
67,5
NU 1072 MA
650 1 70 2 920 4 900 400 950 1 400 250 NU 2272 MA
380 560
82 1 1 40
1 930
1 70
1 200
1 600
71 ,0
NU 1076 MA
560 82 1 1 40 1 930 1 70 1 200 1 600 73,0 NJ 1076 MA
680 1 75 3 1 40 5 500 440 900 1 600 275 NU 2276 ECMA
400 600 90 1 380 2 320 204 1 1 00 1 500 92,5 NU 1080 MA
420 620 90 1 420 2 450 21 2 1 1 00 1 400 96,0 NU 1084 MA
440 650 94 1 51 0 2 650 21 2 1 000 1 300 1 05 NU 1088 MA
460 680
1 00
1 650
2 850
224
950
1 200
1 1 5
NU 1092 MA
830 1 65 4 1 80 6 800 51 0 750 1 1 00 41 5 NU 1292 MA
830 21 2 5 1 20 8 650 655 700 1 1 00 530 NU 2292 MA
480 700 1 00 1 680 3 000 232 900 1 200 1 30 NU 1096 MA
500 720
1 00
1 720
3 1 00
236
900
1 1 00
1 35
NU 10/500 MA
920 1 85 5 280 8 500 620 670 950 585 NU 12/500 MA
530 780
1 1 2
2 290
4 050
305
800
1 000
1 90
NU 10/530 MA
780 1 45 3 740 7 350 550 670 1 000 255 NU 20/530 ECMA
560 820
1 1 5
2 330
4 250
31 0
750
1 000
21 0
NU 10/560 MA
820 1 50 3 800 7 650 560 630 1 000 290 NU 20/560 ECMA
1 030 206 7 21 0 1 1 200 780 560 800 805 NU 12/560 MA
600 870
1 1 8
2 750
5 1 00
365
700
900
245
NU 10/600 N2MA
870 1 55 4 1 80 8 000 570 600 900 325 NU 20/600 ECMA
1 090 1 55 5 61 0 9 800 670 480 850 71 0 NU 2/600 ECMA/HB1
630 920
1 28
3 41 0
6 200
430
630
1 000
285
NU 10/630 ECN2MA
920 1 70 4 730 9 500 670 560 850 400 NU 20/630 ECMA
1 1 50 230 8 580 1 3 700 91 5 450 700 1 1 00 NU 12/630 ECMA
670 980
1 36
3 740
6 800
465
530
800
350
NU 10/670 ECMA
980 1 80 5 390 1 1 000 750 500 800 480 NU 20/670 ECMA
710 1 030
1 40
4 680
8 500
570
500
750
41 5
NU 10/710 ECN2MA
1 030 1 85 5 940 1 2 000 81 5 480 700 540 NU 20/71 0 ECMA
750 1 090
1 50
4 730
8 800
585
430
670
490
NU 10/750 ECN2MA
1 090 1 95 7 040 1 4 600 980 430 670 635 NU 20/750 ECMA
800 1 1 50 200 7 040 1 4 600 950 400 630 71 5 NU 20/800 ECMA
60
Page ............. 3 Page ............. 1 6
B2
ra
rb r3
r4
B1
Da d a db db d d1
Angle ring
factor
1 )
d d1 D1
F r1 ,2
r3,4 s da
da
d b
Da
ra rb kr B1 B2
~ ~ min
mm mm – – kg mm
360 423
475
405
5 5 6,5
378
400
41 0
522
4 4 0,1 HJ 1072
7,75 21 39,5
– 542 437 6 6 1 6,7 386 428 442 624 5 5 0,2 –
380 443
495
425
5 5 1 0,8
398
420
430
542
4 4 0,1
HJ 1076
8,25
21 39,5
443 495 425 5 5 1 0,8 398 420 448 542 4 4 0,1 HJ 1076 8,25 21 39,5
– 595 451 6 6 8,3 406 447 455 654 5 5 0,2 –
400 470 527 450 5 5 14 41 8 446 455 582 4 4 0,1 HJ 1080 9,75 23 43
420 490 547 470 5 5 14 438 466 475 602 4 4 0,1 HJ 1084 1 0,0 23 43
440 51 2 574 493 6 6 1 4,7 463 488 498 627 5 5 0,1 HJ 1088 1 1 ,5 24 45
460 537
600
51 6
6 6 1 5,9
483
51 1
521
657
5
5
0,1
HJ 1092
1 4,0 25 48
– 71 5 554 7,5 7,5 6,4 492 542 559 798 6 6 0,1 4 –

– 706 554 7,5 7,5 1 6,5 492 542 559 798 6 6 0,2 –
480 557 620 536 6 6 1 5,9 503 531 541 677 5 5 0,1 HJ 1096 1 4,5 25 48
500 577
640
556
6 6 1 1 ,2
523
550
561
697
5 5 0,1 HJ 10/500
1 5,0 25 48
– 728 576 7,5 7,5 1 4,5 532 564 581 798 6 6 0,21 –
530 – 692
593
6 6 1 0,4
553
585
598
757
5 5 0,1 –
– 704 591 6 6 6,8 553 587 596 757 5 5 0,1 4 –
560 648
726
625
6 6 1 2,3
583
61 7
630
797
5
5
0,1
HJ 10/560
21 ,0 27,5 53
– 726 625 6 6 1 2,3 583 61 7 630 797 5 5 0,1 –

– 741 626 6 6 6,7 583 61 6 631 797 5 5 0,1 4 –
600 695
779
667
6
6
1 4
623
658
672
847
5
5
0,1
HJ 10/600
27,5 31 55
– 793 661 6 6 6,1 623 652 667 847 5 5 0,1 4 –

– 935 749 9,5 9,5 3 640 743 755 1 050 8 8 0,1 7 –
630 – 837
702
7,5
7,5
6,2
658
691
706
892
6 6 0,1 –
– 832 699 7,5 7,5 8,7 658 690 705 892 6 6 0,1 4 –
– 1 005 751 12 12 1 3,5 678 735 757 1 1 02 1 0 10 0,1 7 –
670 – 891
747
7,5
7,5
7,9
698
736
753
952
6 6 0,1 –
– 890 746 7,5 7,5 7 698 736 752 952 6 6 0,1 4 –
710 – 939
778
7,5
7,5
8 738
769
783
1 002
6 6 0,1 –
– 939 787 7,5 7,5 10 738 774 793 1 002 6 6 0,1 4 –
750 – 993
832
7,5
7,5
3 778
823
838
1 062
6 6 0,1 –
– 993 832 7,5 7,5 2 778 823 838 1 062 6 6 0,1 4 –
800 – 1 051 882 7,5 7,5 2 828 868 888 1 1 22 6 6 0,1 4 –
1)
61
Other SKF cylindrical
roller bearings

Precision cylindrical roller bearings
Details of these precision cylindrical
with a cage listed in the product table

Where characteristics such as high
roller bearings can be found in the SKF
starting on page 32 constitute the basic

radial load carrying capacity, high stiff- catalogue “High-precision bearings”.
SKF assortment and are only part of

ness and high speed capability are
the total range of SKF cylindrical roller

required at the same time as high
bearings. Other products belonging to

running accuracy and compact form,
the range and which are briefly de- SKF precision cylindrical roller bear-
scribed in the following are
ings are an obvious choice.
They are available mainly as double
• precision cylindrical roller bearings,

row bearings and are primarily used
• full complement cylindrical roller

where heavy radial loads have to be
bearings,
accommodated without excessive
• backing bearings for cluster mills,

elastic deformation. In applications
• bearings for rolling mills, and

where high speed capability is re-
• cylindrical roller thrust bearings.
quired, but heavy radial load
capability is not, single row pre-

The SKF manufacturing programme
cision cylindrical roller bearings
also covers electrically insulating

can be used. These bearings
cylindrical roller bearings for electric

are available as all-steel bear-
motors and other electrical machines:
ings as well as hybrid bear-
the INSOCOAT®
bearings. Other items
ings with ceramic rollers.
include various designs of support roll-

ers and cam followers, indexing rollers
for sintering and pelletising plants,
bearings for crane wheels and pulleys,
special bearings for the automotive
industry, cylindrical roller bearing units
for traction motors and complete
railway axleboxes.
62
Full complement cylindrical

The SKF standard range comprises
Bearings for rolling mills
roller bearings
single and double row full complement
The operating conditions that are typical
Heavy radial loads, limited space, rela- cylindrical roller bearings in several
for rolling mill bearing applications
tively low speeds and, where possible,

designs and dimension series.
place special demands on the bearings.
oil lubrication are excellent conditions

As a rule special bearings that differ
for SKF full complement cylindrical roll- Backing bearings for cluster mills
from standardized bearings in design
er bearings and where they have proven

The operating conditions in a multi-roll
and execution are required, including
their exceptional value. Considerable

cold rolling mill or cluster mill as they
multi-row cylindrical roller bearings.
reliability reserves are derived from the

are sometimes called, involve high
These bearings are preferred when
special internal design and the loga- specific rolling forces and relatively
rolling speeds are high, because of their
rithmic roller profile.

high roll speeds. Additionally, the
low friction, when compared with
demands on the finished product with

other roller bearing designs. Their low
regard to flatness and surface quality

cross section means that the roll necks
are extremely high. To achieve high

can be relatively large with respect to
running accuracy and the ability to ac- the roll diameter. SKF multi-row cylin-
commodate heavy loads are key oper- drical roller bearings are designed so
ational parameters for the back-up rolls.

that they incorporate a large number
SKF backing bearings meet these

of rollers and can therefore carry very
demands as they have extremely nar- heavy loads. However, the bearings
row tolerances for cross-sectional

cannot accommodate any axial loads
height and radial runout.

and as a result, a separate thrust bear-
Detailed information can be
ing must be used.
found in the SKF Interactive

Detailed information on SKF cylin-
Engineering Catalogue,
drical roller bearings for rolling mills,
available on CD-ROM or
including the multi-row bearings, can
be found in the SKF Interactive
Engineering Catalogue, available on
CD-ROM or online at www.skf.com.
Cylindrical roller thrust bearings
SKF cylindrical roller thrust bearings
are an excellent choice for stiff bearing
arrangements that are relatively com-

pact in the axial direction and where
heavy axial loads have to be accom-

modated. The bearings are relatively
insensitive to shock loads. Complete
bearings comprise a cylindrical roller
and cage thrust assembly, a shaft
washer and a housing washer. The
components are available separately
or in various combinations.
The basic SKF range comprises the
single direction bearings in the 81 1 and
81 2 series as well as the particularly
robust bearings in the 874, 893 and
894 series. For applications where
axial loads act in both directions, com-

ponents from bearings in the 811 series
together with intermediate washers can
be combined to form double direction
bearings.
Detailed information on SKF cylin-

drical roller thrust bearings can be found
in the SKF General Catalogue or in
the SKF Interactive Engineering
Catalogue, available on CD-ROM or
63
SKF – The knowledge
engineering company
Developing a cleanercleaner
The business of the SKF Group con- The electric motor and its bearings are the
sists of the design, manufacture and

heart of manyhousehold appliances. SKF
marketing of the world’s leading brand

works closelywith appliance manufacturers
of rolling bearings, with a global leader- to improve their product performance,
cut costs and reduce weight. A recent
ship position in complementary prod-

ucts such as radial seals. SKF also
holds an increasingly important pos-

ition in the market for linear motion
products, high precision aerospace
bearings, machine tool spindles, as
well as plant maintenance services
and is an established producer of
high-quality bearing steel.
The SKF Group maintains special-

Harnessing wind power
ized businesses to meet the needs of

The growing industryof wind-generated
the global marketplace. SKF supports

electric powerprovides an environmentally
specific market segments with ongoing

compatible source of electricity. SKF is
example produced a new generation of
research and development efforts that

working closelywith global industrylead- vacuum cleaners with substantiallymore
ers to develop efficient and trouble-free

suction. SKF’s knowledge in small bearing
have led to a growing number of in- technologyis also applied to manufacturers
turbines, using SKF knowledge to provide
novations, new standards and new

highlyspecialized bearings and condition
of power tools and office equipment.
products.
monitoring systems to extend equipment
SKF Group has global ISO 1 4001

life in the extreme and often remote en-
environmental certification. Individual
vironments of wind farms.
divisions have been approved for
quality certification in accordance
with either ISO 9000 or appropriate
industry specific standards.
Some 80 manufacturing sites world-

wide and sales companies in 70 coun-
tries make SKF a truly international
corporation. In addition, our 7 000
distributor and dealer partners around
the world, e-business marketplace and
global distribution system put SKF
close to customers for the supply of
both products and services. In essence,
SKF solutions are available wherever
and whenever our customers need
them.
Overall, the SKF brand now stands
Delivering asset efficiency
for more than ever before. It stands for

optimization
the knowledge engineering company

To optimize efficiencyand boost product- SKF ReliabilitySystems, SKF provides
ready to serve you with world-class

ivity, manyindustrial facilities outsource
a comprehensive range of asset efficiency
product competences, intellectual

some orall of their maintenance services
services, from maintenance strategies and
to SKF, often with guaranteed perform- engineering assistance, to operator-driven
resources and the vision to help you
ance contracts. Through the specialized

reliabilityand machine maintenance
succeed.
capabilities and knowledge available from
programs.
64
Creating a new “cold remedy”
In the frigid winters of northern China,
sub-zero temperatures can cause rail car
wheel assemblies and their bearings to
seize due to lubrication starvation. SKF
created a new familyof synthetic lubri-

cants formulated to retain their lubrication
viscosityeven at these extreme bearing
temperatures. SKF’s knowledge of lubri-

cants and friction are unmatched
throughout the world.
Evolving by-wire technology
SKF has unique expertise and knowledge

having jointlydeveloped the revolutionary
in fast growing by-wire technology, from

Filo and Novanta concept cars which
fly-by-wire, to drive-by-wire, to work-by- employSKF mechatronics for steering
wire. SKF pioneered practical fly-by-wire

and braking. Further by-wire develop-
technologyand is a close working part- ment has led SKF to produce an all-
ner with all aerospace industryleaders.
electric forklift truck which uses mecha-
As an example, virtuallyall aircraft of the
tronics ratherthan hydraulics for all
Airbus design use SKF by-wire systems

controls.
for cockpit flight control. SKF is also
a leader in automotive drive-by-wire,
Planning forsustainable growth
Bytheir verynature, bearings make a posi-

tive contribution to the natural environment.
Reduced friction enables machineryto
operate more efficiently, consume less
power and require less lubrication. SKF is
continuallyraising the performance bar,

Maintaining a 320 km/h R&D lab
enabling new generations of high-efficiency

In addition to SKF’s renowned research
Scuderia Ferrari a formidable force in F1
products and equipment. With an eye to

and development facilities in Europe and
racing. (The average racing Ferrari utilizes
the future, SKF’s global policies and manu- the United States, Formula One car racing
more than 150 SKF components.)Lessons
facturing techniques are planned and

provides a unique environment forSKF to
learned here are applied to the products
implemented to help protect and preserve

push the limits of bearing technology. For
we provide to automakers and the after-
the earth’s limited natural resources. We
over 50 years, SKF products, engineering
market worldwide.
remain committed to sustainable, environ- and knowledge have helped make
mentallyresponsible growth.
65
® SKF and INSOCOAT are registered
trademarks of the SKF Group.
™ Total Shaft Solutions and Asset
Efficiency Opimization are trademarks
of the SKF Group.
© Copyright SKF 2004
The contents of this publication are the
copyright of the publisher and may not
be reproduced (even extracts) unless
permission is granted. Every care has
been taken to ensure the accuracy of
the information contained in this pub-

lication but no liability can be accepted
for any loss or damage whether direct,
indirect or consequential arising out of
the use of the information contained
herein.
Publication 51 08 E · May 2004
Printed in Sweden on environmentally
friendly, chlorine-free paper (Multiart
Silk) by Strokirk-Landströms AB. www.skf.com
TAB 4
INTERMOT - ADVANCED - MOTORS
IAM SERIES
H1 MODEL
Standard Series:
IAM 80-100-150-175
195-200-250-300 H1
Special Series:
IAM 100-150-175-195
200-250/BH H1
INDEX
TECHNICAL DATA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pag. 14
– STANDARD SERIES – SIZE & SHAFT –
IAM H1 80-100-150-175-195 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 15
IAM H1 200-250-300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 16
– SPECIAL SERIES – SIZE & SHAFT –
IAM H1 100-150-175-195-200-250/BH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 17
DISTRIBUTOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 18
TACHOMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 19
SPLINE BILLET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 19
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 20
GRAPHIC PERFORMANCES H1 80-100-150-175 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 21
GRAPHIC PERFORMANCES H1 195-200-250-300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - “ 22
03/2006 H1 - Pag. 13
TECHNICAL DATA H1
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
MODEL 80
100
150
175
195
200
250
300
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
Displacement cc/rev 80 100 157 176 195 207 257 307
Specific
Nm/bar 1.3 1.6 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.3 4.1 4.9
Torque
Max cont.
bar 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
Pressure
Max int.
bar 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280
Pressure
Peak
bar 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
pressure
Max
continuous
rpm 950 950 950 800 800 750 750 750
speed
Peak speed rpm 1050 1050 1050 900 900 850 850 850
HP 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54
Max power
kW 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
x N° of pistons: 5
x Max case pressure: 6 bar
x Max back pressure: 70 bar
x Dry weight: 26 kg
x Temperature range: -30°C y +70°C
x Minimum speed: 2y3 rpm
x Flushing flow(*)
: IAM H1 80 – 100 – 150

5 l/min

IAM H1 175 – 195 – 200 – 250 – 300
6 l/min
(*) for further details regarding flushing go to page 9 of this catalogue.
H1 - Pag. 14 03/2006
SIZE
IAM H1 80-100-150-175-195
STANDARD SERIES
SHAFT
IAM H1 80-100-150-175-195
A0: Standard Splined

A1: Splined Shaft on
A2: Parallel shaft on request
Shaft
request
FEMALE SHAFT AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST N35x2x30x16x9H DIN 5480
03/2006 H1 - Pag. 15
SIZE
IAM H1 200-250-300
STANDARD SERIES
SHAFT
IAM H1 200-250-300
A0: Standard Splined Shaft

A2: Parallel shaft on request
H1 - Pag. 16 03/2006
SIZE
IAM H1 100/BH – 150/BH – 175/BH – 195/BH – 200/BH – 250/BH SPECIAL SERIES
SHAFT
IAM H1 100/BH – 150/BH – 175/BH – 195/BH – 200/BH – 250/BH
A0: Standard Splined Shaft
03/2006 H1 - Pag. 17
DISTRIBUTOR
BSP CONFIGURATION
D31
D310
D40
SAE CONFIGURATION
D47
H1 - Pag. 18 03/2006
TACHOMETER
TA TB
EST
EST.30
SPLINE BILLET
SB1 SB2
03/2006 H1 - Pag. 19
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS H1
H1 - Pag. 20 03/2006
PERFORMANCES
IAM 80 H1 IAM 100 H1
450 10 kW 20 kW 30 kW 10 kW 20 kW 30 kW 40 kW
400 500
0.92
0.
3 3
9
0
0.
.9
0.9
92

350
0.
6 6
.9

400
2 2

300
0
.9
350 bar 350 bar
5 5

2
.9

2
Torque [Nm]
Torque [Nm]
.9
250 .9
.9
300

280 bar 280 bar
.9
0
9
200
.9
230 bar 230 bar
1 1 4
0.9
200
150 180 bar 180 bar
0.9
0.9

2
.9
0.9
92 0
0.
100 120 bar 0. 9
120 bar
9 0 .
0.9 100
50 60 bar 60 bar
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800 1000
Speed [Rpm]
Speed [Rpm]
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 20 40 60 80 100
Volumetric flowrate [l/min]

IAM 150 H1 IAM 175 H1
900
10 20 30 40 kW 10 20 30 40 kW
800
800
3
0.
0.9
9
3 700 2
0.92
2 0.
0.
700 9
.9
92

600
600 2
0.
350 bar
300 bar
500 280 bar
.92
Torque [Nm]
Torque [Nm]
.9
500
0.92

.9
0
2
0
280 bar
.9
6 5
.9

230 bar
400
400 1
230 bar
1 5
0.
0.9
180 bar
300
300 180 bar
0.9
0.9
0.
92
2
0.
0.
92 4 120 bar
0.
200
9
200 120 bar
0.9
9
0.
100 100 60 bar
60 bar
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800
Speed [Rpm]
Speed [Rpm]
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

1 Continuous operation 4
Continuous operation with flushing
Intermittent operation for period 3-5 minute every 10-15

2 minute
5 minute with flushing
Intermittent operation for very short period (3-5 seconds

3 every 10-15 minutes) 6

every 10-15 minutes) with flushing
The specified data are for product description purpose only and must not be interpreted as warranted characteristic in legal sense
For more details please contact our Technical Department.
03/2006 H1 - Pag. 21
PERFORMANCES
IAM 195 H1 IAM 200 H1
10 20 30 40 kW 1000 10 20 30 40 kW
900
3
900
3
0.92
800
0.
.9
0.
92
0.
92
800
0.
9
700
.9
700
0
600 300 bar

300 bar
600
.9
280 bar
0
Torque [Nm]
Torque [Nm]
.9
0.92
0
0.
92
500
0.
9
6
6
250 bar
500
230 bar
.9
0.
5
5
210 bar
400 1
0.9
180 bar 400
300 150 bar
0.
0.
92
300 4
92
4
92
92
0.
0.
9
0.
120 bar
0
.
9 9
200 0.9 200

0. 100 bar
60 bar
100 100 50 bar
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 200 400 600 800
Speed [Rpm]
Speed [Rpm]
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

IAM 250 H1 IAM 300 H1
1500
10 20 30 40 kW 10 20 30 40 kW
1200
2
92
3 3 0.
0.9

92
0.
0.
92
1000

0.
0.
.9
2
2
0
.9

1000
800
300 bar 300 bar
0.
92
Torque [Nm]
Torque [Nm]

.9

2
.9
2
.9
250 bar 250 bar
.9
0.
600
1 6 210 bar
1 210 bar
0.9
0.
5 6
400 150 bar
500 150 bar
0.
92
5
92
0.
0.
92
92
0.
0.
0.
4
9
0.9 100 bar

100 bar
0.9 4
200
50 bar 50 bar
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 200 400 600 800
Speed [Rpm]
Speed [Rpm]
50 100 150 200 50 100 150 200 250

1 Continuous operation 4 Continuous operation with flushing

2 minute 5 minute with flushing

3 every 10-15 minutes) 6

every 10-15 minutes) with flushing
The specified data are for product description purpose only and must not be interpreted as warranted characteristic in legal sense
For more details please contact our Technical Department.
H1 - Pag. 22 03/2006
TAB 5
TAB 6
TAB 7
Cable-Extension Position Transducer
PT8420
t Industrial Grade – Short to Medium Range
t 4...20 mA Output Signal
t Intrinsically Safe R
Specification Summary:
GENERAL
Full Stroke Ranges .................................... 0-2 to 0-60 inches, see next page
Output Signal ................................ 4 - 20 mA (2-wire), 0 - 20 mA (3-wire), see
Accuracy ...................................................... + 0.28 to +0.15% full stroke, see
Repeatability ................................................................ + 0.05% full stroke, max.
Resolution ............................................................................... essentially infinite
Measuring Cable ............... stainless steel, nylon-coated or thermoplastic, see
Enclosure Material ............... powder-painted aluminum or stainless steel, see
Sensor .................................................... plastic-hybrid precision potentiometer
Weight, Aluminum (Stainless Steel) Enclosure ....................... 3 lbs. (6 lbs.) max.
ELECTRICAL
Input Voltage ................................................................................. 12 to 40 VDC
Input Current ................................................................................... 20 mA, max.
Loop Resistance (Load) .......................... (loop supply voltage - 12 ) / 0.02, max.
Circuit Protection ...................................................................... 38 mA maximum
Impedance ................................................................. 100 M W @ 100 VDC, min.
Zero and Span Adjustment ............................................................. 2:1 turndown

The PT8420 with its 4-20 mA feedback sig-
nal, is ideal for monitoring the stroke of a hy-
ENVIRONMENTAL
Enclosure Design ................................ NEMA 4/4X/6, IP 65/67/68, see and

draulic cylinder and other applications requir-
R
Hazardous Area Certification (see )
ing position data acquistion in harsh environ-
CSA 22.2: ......................................................... Class 1, Groups A, B, C and D
ments.
Cenelec: .............................................................................. LCIE EEx ia IIc T4
Operating Temperature ............................................................... -40 o

F to 200 oF
Thermal Effects
As a member of Celesco’s family of NEMA 4-
Zero ........................................................................ 0.01% full stroke / oF, max.
rated ca b le -e xte n sio n transducers, the
Span ........................................................................................ 0.01% / oF, max.

PT8420 provides a feedback signal that is pro-
Vibration ............................................................... up to 10 G's to 2000 Hz max.
portional to the linear movement of a travel-

EMC COMPLIANCE PER DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC
ing stainless-steel extension cable. Simply
Emission / Immunity ..................................................... EN50081-2 / EN50082-2

mount the body of the transducer to a fixed
surface and attach the extension cable to the
0.19 [4,8] dia. thru 0.99 [25,1]

moving object.
Electrical Output Signal:
1.80 [45,7]
1.30 [33,3]
(m illia m p e re s )
0.08 [2,0]
20 mA
3.50 [88,9]

SIGNAL
2.49 [63,3]
1.50 [37,6]

OUTPUT
4 mA
0.60 [15,2]
3.60 [91,4]
5.56 [141,2] max.
FULL STROKE RANGE
"
A "
D IM E N S IO N
R A N G E
IN . (M M )
2 ", 1 0 " 1
.1 6 (2 9 .5 )
3.00 [76,2]
5 " , 2 5 " , 5 0 "

0 .6 6 (1 6 .8 )
15" 0 .9 9 (2 5 .7 )
20, 40" 0 .8 5 (2 1 .6 )
3 0 ", 6 0 " 0 .5 2 (1 3 .3 )
A L L D IM E N S IO N S A R E IN IN C H E S (M M )
Celesco Transducer Products, Inc.
to le ra n c e s a re + 0 .0 2 in . (+ 0
.5 m m ) 7800 Deering Avenue · Canoga Park, CA · 91309
u n le s s o th e rw is e n o te d
0.27 [6,8] dia. thru (4 places) 1.64 [41,6] tel: (800) 423-5483 · (818) 884-6860 · fax: (818) 340-1175
www.celesco.com · info@celesco.com
PT8420 · Cable-Extension Transducer · 4...20 mA Output Signal
t Ordering Information
Model Number:
PT8420- o rd e r c o d e : R
-
A B
1
- 1
C D E F G
Full Stroke Range:
R o rd e r c o d e : 0002 0005 0010 0015 0020 0025 0030 0040 0050 0060
full s tr o k e r a n g e , m in : 2 in. 5 in. 1 0 in. 1 5 in. 2 0 in. 2 5 in. 3 0 in. 4 0 in. 5 0 in. 6 0 in.
a c c u r a c y (% o f f.s.): 0.2 8 % 0 .2 8 % 0 .1 8 % 0 .1 8 % 0 .1 8 % 0 .1 8 % 0 .1 8 % 0 .1 5 % 0 .1 5 % 0 .1 5 %
m axim um c a b l e a c c e le r a tio n : 2 5 G 's 5 G 's 2 5 G 's 1 0 G 's 8 G 's 5 G 's 3 G 's 8 G 's 5 G 's 3 G 's
s t d . c a b l e t e n s io n ( + 2 0 %): 28 oz. 12 oz. 28 oz. 19 oz. 15 oz. 12 oz. 9 oz. 15 oz. 12 oz. 9 o z .
p o t e n t i o m e t e r c y c l e life*: 2.5 x 1 0 6 2 .5 x 1 0 6 5 x 105 5 x 105 5 x 105 5 x 105 5 x 105 2 .5 x 1 0 5 2 .5 x 1 0 5 2 .5 x 1 0 5
note: * potentiometer cycle life is defined as the minimum number of times the measuring cable can be fully extended and retracted before
any measurable degradation of the output signal occurs.
Enclosure Material and Measuring Cable Tension:
A o rd e r c o d e : 1 2 3 4
e n c lo s u r e m a te ria l: p o w d e r - p a i n t e d a lu m in u m 3 0 3 s ta in le s s s t e e l
c a b l e te n s io n * m u ltip lie r: 1x 3x 1x 3 x
note: *refer to above
Measuring Cable:
B o rd e r c o d e : 1* 2** 3***
c a b l e c o n s tru c tio n : .0 3 4 n y l o n - c o a t e d s ta in le s s s t e e l .0 4 7 s ta in le s s s t e e l .0 6 2 t h e r m o p l a s t i c
0.190 in. (4.83 mm) dia. thru 0.190 in. (4.83 mm) dia. thru 0.190 in. (4.83 mm) dia. thru
0.034 in.
0.047 in.
0.062 in.
(0.86 mm) dia.

(1.19 mm) dia.
(1.57 mm) dia.
0.170 in. (4.32 mm) 0.170 in. (4.32 mm) 0.170 in. (4.32 mm)
no te s: *av ailab le in all rang e s **5, 1 5 , 20, 25, 30-inch rang e s o nly ***av ailab le in rang e s u p to 30-inches o nly
Output Signals:
E o rd e r c o d e : 1 2 3 4 5* 6*
4...2 0 m A
2 0 ...4 m A
0 ...2 0 m A
2 0 ...0 m A
4 ...2 0 m A
2 0 ...4 m A
[2 -w ire]
[2 -w ire]
[3 -w ire]
[3 -w ire]
[2 -w ire]
[2 -w ire]
20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
o u t p u t s ig n a l
c o n fig u ra tio n
4 mA 4 mA 0 mA 0 mA 4 mA 4 mA
CSA Standard 22.2
Class 1
h a z a rd o u s a r e a
Groups A, B, C and D
c e r ti f i c a t io n none none none none
Cenelec
LCIE EEx
ia IIc T4
*Im p o rtan t: In trin s ic ally Saf e w h e n po w e re d f ro m a CSA c e rif ie d ze ne r b arrie r rate d 28 VDC m ax, 110 m A m ax as pe r In stallatio n Draw in g 677984.
7800 Deering Avenue · Canoga Park, CA · 91309 · tel: (800) 423-5483 · (818) 884-6860 · fax: (818) 340-1175
PT8420 · Cable-Extension Transducer · 4...20 mA Output Signal
Electrical Connection:
F o rd e r c o d e : 1 2 3 4
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n : 6 -p in p l a s ti c c o n n e c t o r
1 0 ft. w a t e r p r o o f c a b l e 6 -p in m e t a l c o n n e c t o r
2 5 ft. in s t r u m e n ta tio n c a b l e
a n d m a tin g p lu g
a n d m a tin g p lu g
M S3106E -14S-6S
M S3106E -14S-6S
3-CONDUCTOR, 18 GA., TYPE SJOW-A MULTICONDUCTOR, 2 4 G A., SHIELDED
5/16" (8 m m ) m a x c a b l e d ia .
5/16" (8 m m ) m a x c a b l e d ia .
16 AWG m a x c o n d u c to r size
16 AWG m a x c o n d u c to r size ~0.2 in. (5 mm) dia.
~0.35 in. (9 mm) dia.
~ 3.2 in. (81 mm) ~ 3.2 in. (81 mm)
M S3102E -14S-6P M S3102E -14S-6P
c o n t a c t v ie w c o n n e c tio n s c o n n e c tio n s c o n t a c t v ie w c o n n e c tio n s c o n n e c tio n s
A A
2-wire 3-wire 2-wire 3-wire 2-wire 3-wire 2-wire 3-wire
B F
B F
12...40 VDC A A 12...40 VDC WHT n/a 12...40 VDC A A 12...40 VDC RED RED
4...20 mA out B C 4...20 mA out BLK n/a 4...20 mA out B C 4...20 mA out BLK BLK
C E C E
common n/a B common n/a n/a common n/a B common n/a WHT
D D
case ground D n/a case ground GRN n/a case ground D n/a case ground GRN n/a
IP r a tin g : 67 6 7 , 68* 65 67
NEMA r a tin g : 6 , 4X** 6 , 4X** 4 6
no te : *re quire s f ac to ry subm e rsio n te st **ap p lie s to stainle ss ste e l e nc lo sure , se e
Cable Guide Options:
G o rd e r c o d e : 0 1 2* 3
s ta n d a r d nylon c a b l e g u id e stainless steel c a b l e g u id e p o ly u re th a n e c a b l e bellow s integral c a b l e brush
in
in
in
7 5 in .
8 7
8 7
8 8
no te : *w ill lim it m e asure m e nt rang e to 25 inc he s (635 m m ) m axim u m
t Sample Model Number
PT8420- 0030
- 1
1
1
- 1
o rd e r c o d e :
R A
B
C D
1
E
1
0
F
G
Specifications: Full Stroke Range: 30 inches
Enclosure Material: powder-painted aluminum
Measuring Cable: 0.034-in dia. nylon coated stainless steel cable
Output Signals: 4-20 mA, 2-wire, output increasing with cable extension
Electrical Connection: 6-pin plastic connector
Cable Guide: standard nylon
7800 Deering Avenue · Canoga Park, CA · 91309 · tel: (800) 423-5483 · (818) 884-6860 · fax: (818) 340-1175
PT8420 Installation Instructions Rev 2.1
Do not free release measuring cable!
! Do not over extend measuring cable!
WARNING
Limit misalignment to 5˚ maximum!
MECHANICAL
1. Mount transducer via the 4 feet to a

±5˚ maxium
mounting holes
flat solid surface. misalignment angle

(4 places)
2. Connect measuring cable to moving
.27 in. [6,8 mm] dia.
object.
ELECTRICAL 2–Wire System +
SHIELDED CABLE
POWER
12...40 VDC
12...40 VDC input SUPPLY
3. Connect system wiring.
4...20 mA output
4. If desired, use the zero

PT8420
and span controls to
CONTROLLER
calibrate to exact
earth ground 18-guage

22-guage
measurement range (see

B
waterproof instrumentation
C
E
cable cable 4...20 mA
below).
(recommended) D
12..40 VDC
A
WHT
RED
4...20 mA
B
BLK
BLK ground shield at the controller
earth ground
D GRN
GRN
(recommended)
3–Wire System
+
POWER
12...40 VDC input 12...40 VDC
SHIELDED CABLE SUPPLY
common
–
PT8420
0...20 mA output
CONTROLLER
SPAN ZERO

A
18-guage
22-guage

B
F
waterproof instrumentation
E
cable cable 0...20 mA
12..40 VDC
A
n/a
RED
0...20 mA
C
n/a
BLK ground shield at the controller
common B n/a WHT

(recommended)
Changing Calibrated Range
i. Remove Phillips-head cover screws to reveal zero and span trimpots
ii. Extend measuring cable to 0/4 mAposition and adjust zero pot.
iii. Extend measuring cable to 20 mAposition and adjust span pot
iv. Repeat steps ii and iii.
v. Replace plugs.
MEASURING CABLE REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
PT8000 SERIES
For Models
PT8101, PT8150, PT8420, PT8510
Celesco Transducer Products 7800 Deering Avenue, Canoga Park, CA 91309 Tel: 800-884-
6860, Fax 818-34-1175
Created 2/18/00 C:data/PT8man
Page 1 of 4
MEASURING CABLE REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the four socket head cap screws that attach the sensor cover to the
housing/endcover assembly and set aside.
2. Remove the sensor cover, being careful not to pull on the wires, and set aside.
3. Loosen the socket head cap screw in the sensor mounting plate
4. Pry the mounting plate (including the rotational sensor) out of the housing and set
aside. Try to keep the o-ring in place around the mounting plate for ease of re-
installation later.
5. Remove the 4 small phillips head screws holding the endplate in the housing and
set aside.
6. Remove the endplate and set aside.
7. Rotate the spring arbor slightly in the counter-clockwise direction, by hand, to
determine whether there is spring torque. If cable has broken and the spool has
unwound, releasing all spring torque, skip to step 12, otherwise continue with step
8.
8. Extend the measurement cable enough that it can be cut with wire cutters.
9. Keep the spring arbor/spool from turning. This is best done by holding the spring
arbor with your fingers and holding the housing with the same hand.
10. Cut the measurement cable with a pair of wire cutters.
11. Slowly release all spring tension by letting the housing slowly turn while keeping
a hold on the spring arbor.
12. There are two allen wrench screws, offset 90 degrees that lock the spool on the
main shaft. You should be able to see them with the endplate removed. Rotate
the spool so that an allen wrench can be inserted in the access hole in the bottom
of the housing and loosen the lock screw.
13. Remove the allen wrench and rotate the spool so the other lock screw can be
accessed and loosen the other lock screw.
14. Slide the spool out of the housing. It may be stubborn and you may have to
pound the shaft down through the spool to loosen it. This will open a space
between the spring and spring arbor. The spring still has tension and may shoot
out of the housing. Be cautious when performing this step. Once you get the
spool and shaft loose, the spool should slide the rest of the way. If the arbor
moved, push the spring arbor back in against the spring.
15. Rotate the spring arbor with fingers to ensure spring is engaged. Make sure the
arbor is rotated counter-clockwise. Noticeable cable tension should build.
16. Carefully release spring tension by allowing the arbor to spin until all tension is
gone.
17. Attach spring winding tool to transducer housing. Make sure “T” fits between the
pegs on the spring arbor.
Page 2 of 4
18. Using the spring winding tool, wind the spring (one full revolution) as per the
table below:
Range: Spring winds:
2 inches 15
5 15
10 15
15 20
20 20
25 20
30 25
40 25
50 25
60 30
19. Insert the replacement measurement cable down through the cable guide and
through the angled hole in the spool.
20. Place a crimp over the end of the cable (inside the spool) with as little excess
cable showing as possible.
21. Squeeze the crimp with a crimp tool or a pair of pliers to secure it on the cable.
22. While keeping slack out of the measurement cable, replace the spool over the
main shaft and into the housing. Push it in as far as it can go.
23. Re-tighten the spool lock screws.
24. Attach the end of the cable to an external post to keep tension on the cable.
25. Carefully release the spring winding tool and set aside.
26. Allow the cable to wind onto the spool by slowly moving the housing towards the
post.
27. Release the cable end from the post
28. Extend and retract the cable a few times to check for smooth movement of the
cable.
29. Replace the endplate.
30. Replace the 4 small phillips head screws holding the endplate in the housing.
31. If unit has a potentiometer, check potentiometer for damage. If cable has been
free-released or broken, the potentiometer may be broken. Turn the potentiometer
shaft all the way in both directions. The shaft should rotate smoothly with no
resistance until it suddenly stops. If rough spots, resistance, or “soft” stops are
felt, the potentiometer is damaged and must be replaced. Contact Celesco for new
potentiometers and replace if necessary.
32. On the sensor mounting bracket, position the locking nut on the edge such that a
flat side of the nut is parallel with the edge of the sensor bracket. Do not tighten.
33. Replace the o-ring and install the bracket and seat it snugly in the housing. Make
sure the legs of the clutch spring are in between the wider set of posts on the
spring arbor. Make sure the o-ring is seated correctly.
34. If your transducer is a PT8150 skip to step 38.
35. Connect a 10 VDC power supply to the potentiometer terminals so +10VDC is
connected to CCW and – 10VDC is connected to CW.
Page 3 of 4
36. Connect a voltage meter to potentiometer terminals so positive lead is connected
to S and negative lead is connected to CW.
37. Rotate entire potentiometer/mounting bracket assembly so output is between 0.04
and 0.1 VDC.
38. Tighten socket head cap screw to lock sensor bracket in place
39. Replace sensor cover, making sure o-ring seats properly.
40. Replace the 4 socket head cap screws that attach the sensor cover to the housing.
Page 4 of 4
TAB 8
EO1 0 0 / SB1 1 VALVE TORQUE DATA FOR ACTUATOR SI ZI NG
NEW VALVE BREAK TORQUE
VALI D FOR E SEAT AND T SEAT SPECI FI CATI ONS
Gland packing : T Gland packing : GRAPHI TE
IN-LBS ON-LBS
Different ial Pressure : PSI Different ial Pressure : PSI
Size
Size
[ inch]
[ inch]
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
1/2'' 68 70 70 70 1/2'' 75 77 77 77
3/4'' 89 93 96 96 3/4'' 98 102 105 105
1'' 109 109 114 117 1'' 120 120 125 128
1 1/2'' 130 134 137 142 1 1/2'' 143 147 150 155
2'' 176 178 183 197 2'' 193 195 200 215
2 1/2'' 298 322 349 361 2 1/2'' 327 352 379 391
3'' 351 399 489 604 3'' 387 434 524 639
4'' 568 614 775 1,029 4'' 625 671 832 1,086
6'' 1,474 1,523 1,610 1,923 6'' 1,620 1,670 1,758 2,070
8'' 2,928 3,172 3,709 4,929 8'' 3,221 3,465 4,002 5,222
Version: Release V2 US Units
Date: 02. Dec. 2004
ACTUATOR SI ZI NG W I TH APPLI ED SAFETY FACTORS DOUBLE ACTI NG ACTUATORS
FOR CLEAN LIQUIDS A Valve Size

1 .4 0
Valve Size
SAFETY FACTOR 1 .4 0
FOR SOLVENTS, HIGH VISCOSITY, DRY GAS B 1 " and above

1 .8 5
1 / 2 '' or 3 / 4 "
IN-LBS IN-LBS
Fluid
Fluid
Fact or
0 100 200 300
Fact or 0 100 200 300
Size
Size
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
[ inch] [ inch]
1/2'' 96 96 98 98 98 98 98 98 1/2'' 105 105 108 108 108 108 108 108
3/4'' 124 124 130 130 134 134 134 134 3/4'' 137 137 142 142 146 146 146 146
1'' 153 202 153 202 160 211 164 217 1'' 168 222 168 222 175 231 179 237
1 1/2'' 182 240 187 247 191 253 198 262 1 1/2'' 200 264 205 271 209 277 216 286
2'' 246 325 249 329 256 338 276 365 2'' 271 358 273 361 280 370 301 397
2 1/2'' 417 551 451 596 489 646 506 668 2 1/2'' 458 605 493 651 531 702 547 723
3'' 492 650 559 739 685 905 846 1,118 3'' 541 715 608 804 734 970 895 1,183
4'' 795 1,051 860 1,136 1,085 1,434 1,440 1,903 4'' 875 1,156 939 1,241 1,165 1,539 1,520 2,008
6'' 2,063 2,727 2,132 2,817 2,255 2,979 2,692 3,557 6'' 2,268 2,997 2,338 3,090 2,461 3,252 2,898 3,830
8'' 4,099 5,417 4,441 5,869 5,193 6,862 6,901 9,119 8'' 4,509 5,959 4,851 6,410 5,603 7,403 7,311 9,660
Date: 02. Dec. 2004
ACTUATOR SI ZI NG W I TH APPLI ED SAFETY FACTORS SPRI NG RETURN ACTUATORS
FOR CLEAN LIQUIDS A Valve Size

1 .3 0
Valve Size
SAFETY FACTOR 1 .2 0
FOR SOLVENTS, HIGH VISCOSITY, DRY GAS B 1 " and above

1 .7 0
1 / 2 '' or 3 / 4 "
IN-LBS IN-LBS
Fluid
Fluid
Fact or
0 100 200 300
Fact or 0 100 200 300
Size
Size
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
[ inch] [ inch]
1/2'' 82 82 84 84 84 84 84 84 1/2'' 90 90 93 93 93 93 93 93
3/4'' 107 107 111 111 115 115 115 115 3/4'' 117 117 122 122 125 125 125 125
1'' 142 186 142 186 148 194 152 199 1'' 156 204 156 204 163 213 166 218
1 1/2'' 169 221 174 227 178 232 184 241 1 1/2'' 185 242 191 249 195 254 201 263
2'' 228 299 231 302 237 310 256 335 2'' 251 329 254 332 260 340 279 365
2 1/2'' 387 506 419 548 454 594 469 614 2 1/2'' 425 556 457 598 493 645 508 665
3'' 457 597 519 679 636 831 785 1,027 3'' 502 657 565 738 681 891 831 1,087
4'' 738 966 798 1,044 1,007 1,317 1,337 1,749 4'' 812 1,062 872 1,140 1,081 1,414 1,411 1,845
6'' 1,916 2,506 1,979 2,588 2,094 2,738 2,500 3,269 6'' 2,106 2,754 2,171 2,839 2,285 2,988 2,691 3,519
8'' 3,807 4,978 4,124 5,393 4,822 6,305 6,408 8,379 8'' 4,187 5,476 4,504 5,890 5,202 6,803 6,788 8,877
Date: 02. Dec. 2004
TAB 9
TAB 10
WAR
RREN VALVES
IN
NSTALLAT ERATION,, AND MAINTENANC
TION, OPE CE INSTR
RUCTIONS
S
W
WARREN BAL
LL VALVE MO
ODELS 366, 322, 356, 399
9
INSTALLATIO
ON
1. These
e valves are bi-directional

b
a
and will contro
ol flow in eithe
er direction.
2. Keep
end protectio
on on the valv
es until they a
are ready for i
installation. P
Prepare the piipe connection and the
valve
connection u
sing standard
d piping proce
edures.
3. Exces
ssive over-tigh
htening of thre
eaded valves
to the pipe co
onnection ma
y cause dama
age to the val
lve body.
4. Weld
end valves may
m
be installe
assembly, ho
wever, the PR
ed without disa
REFERRED m
method is to r
emove the
body
bolts and the
center body s
section.
Weld
the end of the
e valves to the
e piping and t
then reassem
mble, referring
to the Mainte
enance section
n of these
instru
ctions. To we
eld the valve i

n the piping li
ine, use the fo
ollowing steps
s:
a. P
lace the valve
e in the open
flow position
b. If
welded in line
e as an assem
mbled valve, tthe temperatu

ure of the centter section bo
ody piece shalll not exceed
35
50 deg. F.
c.
P
repare surfac
ces for welding
g using stand
ard welding p
practices.
5. Warre
en valve mode
el #366FRG a
and #356FRG
G are supplied
with two (2) e
extra graphite
e body seals.
Warren
Valve
recommends
s replacement
t of the origina
al seals with t
the spare sea
als once the va
alves have be
een
disass
sembled.
Page 1

O
OPERATION
The valve can
n be opened to
o allow flow b
y turning the handle ¼ turn
n counter-cloc
ckwise and ca
an be closed b
by turning
t
he handle ¼ t
turn clockwise
e.
Direction of flo
ow can be det
termined by th
he handle pos
sition. If the h
handle is in lin
ne with the pip

ping, the valve
e is open. If
t
he handle is p
perpendicular
r to the piping
the valve is i
n the closed p
position.
T
The valves can be automatted using stan
ndard valve ac
ctuators.
M
MAINTENANC
CE
These valves
are designed
for long life; h
however, peri
iodic inspectio
on for possible
e stem leakag
ge is recomm
ended. If
stem leakage
is observed, tighten
t
the gla
and nut no mo
ore than 1/8 o
of a turn until
leak has stop
ped. CAUTIO
ON – over-
t
ightening of th
he packing wi
ill cause incre
eased torque a
and reduce va
alve life.
Iff leakage is o
observed at the body joint c
connections, tighten body b
bolts evenly.
D
DISASSEMBL
LY
1. Warn
ning: Valves
are not to be
disassemble
d in a pressur
rized line. Be
efore the valve
e is removed f
from the line,
open
the valve slig
htly to allow a
any trapped a
nd/or pressur
rized media to
o escape from
m behind the b
ball.
2. The v
valves may be
e disassemble
ed by removin
g the body bo
olts, nuts, and
d lock washer
. If replaceme
ent of seats
and b
ody seals is required,
r
it ca
n be done at
this time. Ins
spect the ball,

and if the sur
rface of the ba
all is found
unsat
isfactory, it m
ust be replace
ed.
3.
Remo
ove the stem nut

n
and washe
er, handle an
d gland nut. This will allow
w the stem and
d stem packin
ng to be
remov
ved through th
he valve cavit
ty.
REASSEMBL
LY
1.
All pa
arts must be i
nspected and
d clean prior to
o reassembly
.
2. Insert
t the stem thro
ough the valve
e body and th
he stem packi
ng through the top of the v
valve. Secure
e with
packin
ng nut.
3.
With t
the valve in th
he open positi
on, install the
e seats and bo
ody seals.
4. Attach
h end caps to
the valve bod
dy center piec
ce. Insert bod
dy bolts. Atta
ch lock washe
ers and nuts t
to the bolts
and s
ecure. Tighte
en the body n
uts evenly. O
Over-tightening
g the bolts an
nd nuts may c
e to the bolts.
cause damage
5.
Attach
h handle and
handle nut.
6. Hydro
o-Test the valv
ve prior to pla
acing it back in
nto service.
Page 2

TAB 11
DOCUMENTATION
NOT AVAILABLE
AT TIME OF
MANUAL
SUBMISSION.
INFORMATION
WILL BE
PROVIDED AS A
FOLLOW-UP.
TAB 12
Generated by Foxit PDF Creator © Foxit Software
http://www.foxitsoftware.com For evaluation only.
TAB 13
Industrial
Electric Drives
Linear Motion and
Service
Mobile
Hydraulics and Controls Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Automation Hydraulics
RA 09 907/07.04
Section 6
Pump Manifolds
The Drive & Control Company
73
74/1 48 Bosch Rexroth Corp. Industrial Hydraulics Section 6: Pump Manifolds RA 09 907/07.04
Section 6 Index
Description Page
Pump Relief Block ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 75
Pump Unloading Block ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78
Pump Manifold with Unloading Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Pump Manifold Pressure Relief Block with Unloading ................................................................................................................................................. 82
RA 09 907/07.04 Section 6: Pump Manifolds Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth Corp. 75/1 48
Pump Manifolds
Pressure Relief Block
RVB – XX / – –
Flange Size
Size = 3/4
Sealing Material
= 1
1 M =
=
Buna
= 1 -1 /4
V =
=
Viton
= 1 -1 /2
/21
Threaded Port Style
Pressure Range
Range 01 =
=
BSPP Threaded Ports
Standard Pressure Line (Code 61 )

= N
N 07 =
=
SAE Flanged
High Pressure Line (Code 62)

= H
12 =
=
SAE O-Ring
(Available in ductile iron only)

Port Size
Revision
Revision = XX
XX 12 =
Material
Material 16 = =
for Port Size see chart on Page 2
Aluminum 6061 –T6, 3000 psi

= A
A 20 =
Ductile Iron2 65-45-1 2, 5000 psi = D

3/4 =
1 =
For SAE Flanged port–
See page 76 for dimensional information.

indentical to pressure port size
1 -1 /4 =
1 ) 1 -1 /2 Flange is only available in H (Code 62) version

Omit = =
2) Blackening
SAE & BSPP Model
P2
P1
T1 2

G
T2
G3
1

G
G
Assemblies include mounting bolts, O-rings,
and plugs for G ports and T2
Pressure relief valve must be ordered separately.
Flanged Model
P2
P1
T1 2

G
T2
G3
1

G
G4

Assemblies include O-rings and
plugs for G ports and T2
Pressure relief valve must be ordered separately. All dimensions in inches
Pump Manifolds
G4
F T2
I A C
J D F
G2
G1
P2 P1
E G
T1 P2 G3 G4
G3
F
G2
G1 T1
P T
O
P1 T2
Schematic Symbol
P1
P2
Relief
T1 ,T2 G1 ,G2,
Dimension A B C D E F G H I J K L M3 N1 O1 P2
Valve2
G31 ,G41
RVB3/4N…12 4.50 3.00 2.25 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 SAE-8 SAE-4 SAE-12
RVB3/4N…01 4.50 3.00 2.25 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 1/2” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 3/4” BSPP
RVB3/4N…07 4.50 3.00 2.25 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 SAE-8 SAE-4 –
RVB1N…12 4.50 3.50 2.25 1.00 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.35 7.18 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-16
RVB1N…01 4.50 4.00 2.25 1.00 2.00 1.13 2.0 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.60 7.18 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1” BSPP
RVB1N…07 4.50 3.50 2.25 1.00 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.35 7.18 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 –
RVB1-1/4N…12 5.00 3.50 2.25 1.25 1.75 1.13 1.75 3.30 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.35 7.68 — — DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-20
RVB1-1/4N…01 5.00 4.00 2.50 1.25 2.00 1.25 2.00 3.30 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.60 7.68 — — DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1-1/4” BSPP
RVB1-1/4N…07 5.00 3.50 2.25 1.25 1.75 1.13 1.75 3.30 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.35 7.68 — — DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 –
RVB3/4H…12 4.50 3.00 2.25 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 SAE-8 SAE-4 –
RVB3/4H…01 4.50 3.50 2.25 0.88 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.45 7.18 — — DBDS10 1/2” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 3/4” BSPP
RVB3/4H…07 4.50 3.00 2.25 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 SAE-8 SAE-4 –
RVB1H…1 2 4.50 3.00 2.25 1 .00 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.35 7.18 1 .00 1.00 DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-1 6
RVB1H…01 4.50 3.00 4.25 1.00 1.75 2.13 1.75 2.13 1.75 1.00 2.15 2.53 1.73 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1” BSPP
RVB1H…07 4.50 3.00 3.50 1 .00 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.00 2.15 2.15 1.35 1 .00 1.00 DBDS10 SAE-12 SAE-4 –
RVB1-1/4H…12 6.00 3.75 2.25 1.38 1.88 1.13 1.88 3.70 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.35 8.56 — — DBDS20 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-20
RVB1-1/4H…01 6.00 3.75 2.25 1.38 1.88 1.13 1.88 3.70 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.35 8.56 — — DBDS20 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1-1/4” BSPP
RVB1-1/4H…07 6.00 3.75 2.25 1.38 1.88 1.13 1.88 3.70 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.35 8.56 — — DBDS20 SAE-12 SAE-4 –
RVB1-1/2H…07 7.00 5.00 2.75 1.38 2.50 1.38 2.50 4.64 2.00 1.25 2.90 2.10 10.27 — — DBDS30 SAE-24 SAE-4 –
1) Ports G3 and G4 available only on RVB1 … for use with AA1 0VSO71 Series 31
2) Pressure Relief Valve must be ordered separately
3) Dimension “M” shown for S Type adjustment
4) 1 -1 /2 Flange is only available in H (Code 62) version All dimensions in inches
Pump Manifolds
Orientation for AA1 0VSO71 Series 31 Pump
RVB1 …
Orientation for Relief Blocks:
RVB3/4...
RVB1 ...
RVB1 -1 /4...
RVB1 -1 /2...
All dimensions in inches
Pump Manifolds
Unloading
RVBL – XX / –
Flange Size
Size = 1 -1 /2
Port Style
= 2
2 07 =
SAE Flanged
Pressure Range
Material

= N
N D =
=
Ductile Iron1 64-45-1 2, 5000 psi
High Pressure Line (Code 62) = H
Logic Size
Size = 25
= 32
Revision
Revision = XX
(4) 5/1 6-1 8 x .75 DP
P1
GA K
O L J
P P
P1
C
8 A B
Y
P T
Y
9 H
X
3
4 5
T
2 P
7
6
1
GA B
P P
F
* Components must be
G
ordered separately
E
Logic P, P1 T GA A
Size 25 1 -1 /2” SAE 3000 PSI 1 -1 /2” SAE 3000 PSI SAE-6 (9/1 6-1 8UNF)
(Code 61 Flange) (Code 61 Flange)
Size 25 1 -1 /2” SAE 6000 PSI

1 -1 /2” SAE 3000 PSI
SAE-6 (9/1 6-1 8UNF)
(Code 62 Flange)
(Code 61 Flange)
Size 32 2” SAE 3000 PSI 2” SAE 3000 PSI SAE-6 (9/1 6-1 8UNF)
Size 32 2” SAE 6000 PSI 2” SAE 3000 PSI SAE-6 (9/1 6-1 8UNF)
Logic A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S
Size 25 8.20 6.45 4.90 5.50 2.04 4.75 1 .59 5.50 3.01 3.01 4.08 2.04 1 .70 4.55 0.35 6.1 0 0.35 1 2.75 1 4.00
Size 32 9.90 6.95 5.40 6.65 2.43 5.25 1 .89 6.65 3.1 1 3.1 1 4.1 5 2.43 1 .70 5.05 0.35 6.60 0.35 1 3.25 1 4.50
1 ) Blackening All dimensions in inches
Pump Manifold
Size 1 8 through 1 00, AA1 0VSO with Unloading Control
PSB – A1 0 – XX / D –
Pump
Pump = A1 0
0 DR-R =
=
Revision
Revision = XX
XX DR-L =
DFR-R =
Material
Material DFR-L =
Ductile Iron1 65-45-1 2, 5000 psi

= D
Threaded Ports
1 ) Blackening 12 =
=
SAE
Item Part No. Quantity Description Item Part No. Quantity Description
1 US00 811 978 1 Manifold Block 7 RR00 008838 2 Setscrew M4X06-5.8 D427
2 RR00 003038 4 M6x100 SHCS D912-8.8 A3C 8 US00 800693 4 SHCS 1 0-24X2 ASTM A574
3 US00 8001 51 6 4HP50N-S Plug HOLHEX/SH 9 RR00 0005527 1 Jet 1 .0 M4X7 MS RN115.38
4 US00 800087 2 STR THRD EL90 4-4S SAE 37 PUA20 10 US00 802879 4 SHCS 10-24X1 1 /4 ASTM A574
5 US00 8001 80 2 O-RG Sz 2-011 NBR 70SH WAS 0044 11 US00 802658 1 Socket Setscrew 1/4-20 UNC
6 US00 800496 1 O-RG Sz 2-014 NBR 70SH WAS 0090 All dimensions in inches
Pump Manifold
Size 1 8 through 1 00, AA1 0VSO with Unloading Control
For information on variable displacement pumps
please refer to Rexroth Pump and Motor Catalog
P2 A2 T2 P7 P3 P5 X1
Optional
ZBD
TECH. POS. #1
TECH. POS. #3
TECH. POS. #2
P A
T B
4WE6
B
P1 A1 T1 Y P6 P4
S L1
L
RA 09 907/07.04 Section 6: Pump Manifolds Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth Corp. 81 /1 48
Pump Manifold
Pressure Relief Block with Unloading
RVBU – XX / – –
Flange Size (P1 )
) = 3/4
Sealing Material
= 1
1 M =
Buna
= 1 -1 /4
V =
=
Viton
Pressure Range
Threaded Port Style

= N
N 1 2 =
SAE
High Pressure Line (Code 62)

= H
01 =
BSPP
(Available in Ducile Iron Only)

07
07
=
=
SAE Flanged
Revision
Revision = XX
Port Size (P2)
Material
1 2 =
Aluminum 6061 -T6, 3000 psi

= A
A 1 6 =
SAE Ports
Ductile Iron1 65-45-1 2, 5000 psi = D

20 =
3/4 =
=
See pages 83
1 =
=
BSPP Ports
for dimensional information.

1 -1 /4 =
1 ) Blackening
Omit =
=
SAE Flanged Port
identical to press. port size (P1 )
(Sandwich Plate Design)
SAE & BSPP Model
Assemblies include mounting bolts,
o-rings, and plugs for “G” ports and T2.
Pressure relief valve and directional valve (“B” solenoid only). Must be ordered separately.
Flanged Model
Assemblies include o-rings, and plugs
for “G” ports and T2.
Pressure relief valve and directional valve (“B” solenoid only). Mounting flange, and bolts must be order separately.
Pump Manifold
T2
A C
I
F
J
D
G2
G1
P1
B P2
E G
T1 G1 G2 T1
SAE & BSPP Model

P2 T2
P1
Optional
Plug/Orifice P T
Schematic Symbol
DO3 Pattern
P A B T
Flanged Model
P1
P2
See page 83 for dimensional information.
Pump Manifold
Relief G1 ,G2,
Dimension A B C D E F G H I J K L M3 N1 O1 T1 ,T2 P2
Valve2 G31 ,G41

RVBU3/4N…12 SAE-8 SAE-4 SAE-12
RVBU3/4N…01 4.50 4.00 3.00 0.88 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.80 1.75 1.00 1.80 1.20 7.18 — — DBDS10 1/2” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 3/4” BSPP
RVBU3/4N…07 SAE-8 SAE-4 —
RVBU1N…12 4.50 1.75 1 .75 2.15 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-16
RVBU1N…01 4.75 5.00 2.25 1.00 2.00 1.13 2.00 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.60 7.18 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1” BSPP
RVBU1N…07 4.50 1.75 1 .75 2.15 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 —
RVBU1-1/4N…12 4.50 3.00 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.15 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-20
RVBU1-1/4N…01 5.00 5.00 3.25 1.25 2.00 1.25 2.00 3.30 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.60 7.68 — — DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1-1/4” BSPP
RVBU1-1/4N…07 4.50 3.00 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.15 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 —
RVBU3/4H…12 4.00 1.50 1.50 1.80 1.20 SAE-8 SAE-4 —
RVBU3/4H…01 4.50 4.50 2.25 0.88 1.75 1.13 1.75 2.80 1.75 1.00 2.15 1.45 7.18 — — DBDS10 1/2” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 3/4” BSPP
RVBU3/4H…07 4.00 1.50 1.50 1.80 1.20 SAE-8 SAE-4 —
RVBU1H…12 4.50 1.75 1.75 2.1 5 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-16
RVBU1H…01 4.50 5.25 3.00 1.00 2.13 1 .13 2.13 2.13 1.75 1.00 2.53 1.73 7.18 1.00 1.00 DBDS10 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1” BSPP
RVBU1H…07 4.5 1.75 1.75 2.15 1.35 SAE-12 SAE-4 —
RVBU1-1/4H…12 SAE-12 SAE-4 SAE-20
RVBU1-1/4H…01 6.00 4.75 2.25 1.38 1.88 1.13 1.88 3.70 1.75 1.00 2.40 1.35 8.56 — — DBDS20 3/4” BSPP 1/4” BSPP 1-1/4” BSPP
RVBU1-1/4H…07 SAE-12 SAE-4 —
1 ) Ports G3 and G4 available only on RVB1 ... for use with AA1 0VSO71 Series 31
2) Pressure relief valve must be ordered separately
3) Dimension “M” shown for S type adjustment
See page 82 (MS-06-0400, page 4 of 4) for mounting orientations.
Pump Manifold
Orientation for AA1 0VSO71 Series 31
Pump RVBU1 ...
P2
G2
Directional Valve (“B” solenoid only)
only)
X
T1
G1
L1
Orienation for relief blocks:
RVBU3/4...
RVBU1 ...
RVBU1 -1 /4... X
P2
P2
T1
G1 & G2
L X
L1
TAB 14
2-way flow control valve RE 281 63/02.09
Replaces: 02.03
1 /1 2
Type 2FRM
Size 6
Component series 3X
Maximum operating pressure 31 5 bar 1 )
Maximum flow 32 L/min
H5851 +5852
Table of contents Features
Contents Page
– Location of the ports according to DIN 24340 form A
Features 1
– Subplates see data sheet RE 45052 (separate order)
Order details 2
– external closing of the pressure compensator, optional
Symbols 3
– as threaded connection for panel mounting with connection
Function, section 4 to 6
thread G3/8
Technical data 7
– Check valve, optional
Characteristic curves 8
– 2 adjustment types, optional:
• Rotary knob with scale
Unit dimensions 9 to 1 2
• lockable rotary knob with scale
Information on available spare parts:

1) For use of the component with a rectifier sandwich plate up
www.boschrexroth.com/spc
to 21 0 bar
2/1 2 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics 2FRM RE 281 63/02.09
Order details: 2-way flow control valve
2FRM 6 6 3X V *
2-way flow control valve

Further details in the clear text
Size 6
=6 Seal material
With closing of the pressure compensator = A

V= FKM seals
(suppression of the start-up jump)

(other seals upon request)
Without closing of the pressure compensator

=B Attention!
Without closing of the pressure compensator
= SB Observe compatibility of seals with the
For panel mounting

hydraulic fluid used!
Adjustment type
R= With check valve
Lockable rotary knob with scale 1 )

=3 M =
Without check valve
Rotary knob with scale = 7

Flow (A → B)
Zero position of the marking at port P =6 0.2Q = up to 0.2 l/min
0.6Q = up to 0.6 l/min
Component series 30 to 39
= 3X
(30 to 39: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
1 .5Q = up to 1 .5 l/min
3Q = up to 3.0 l/min
1) Key with the material no. R9000081 58 is included in the

delivery.
1 0Q = up to 1 0.0 l/min
1 6Q = up to 1 6.0 l/min
Preferred types and standard units are contained in the 32Q = up to 32.0 l/min
EPS (standard price list).
Order details: Rectifier sandwich plate (only for version “B”)
Z4S 6 1X V *
Rectifier sandwich plate

Further details in the clear text
Size 6
=6 Seal material
Component series 1 0 to 1 9
= 1X V= FKM seals
(1 0 to 1 9: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)

Attention!
Observe compatibility of seals with the hydraulic fluid
used!
RE 281 63/02.09 2FRM Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/1 2
Symbols: 2-way flow control valves
Simplified Detailed
Without check valve;
without external closing
Type 2FRM 6 B…MV
A B A B
Type 2FRM 6 SB…MV
With check valve;
without external closing
Type 2FRM 6 B…RV

A B
A B
Type 2FRM 6 SB…RV
Without check valve;
with external closing
Type 2FRM 6 A…MV A B

A B
P P

With check valve;
with external closing
A B
Type 2FRM 6 A…RV

A B
P P

Symbol: Rectifier sandwich plate (① = component side, ② = plate side)
P A 2 B
T
Function, section: Type 2FRM 6 B…
General
The flow control valve type 2 FRM is a 2-way flow control valve.
It is used for maintaining a constant flow, independent of

2
pressure and temperature.
The valve basically comprises of a housing (1 ), a rotary knob
(2), orifice bush (3), pressure compensator (4) and an option-

al check valve.
Flow control valve type 2FRM 6 B…MV
(without external closing, without check valve)
The flow from channel A to channel B is throttled at the throt-

tling point (5). The throttle cross-section is set by turning the
rotary knob (2).

3
In order to keep the flow in channel B constant, independent
of the pressure, a pressure compensator (4) is fitted down-

stream of the throttling point (5).
The compression spring (6) presses the pressure compen-

5
sator (4) downwards against its stop and keeps the pres-
sure compensator (4) in the open position when there is no
flow through the valve. When fluid flows through the valve,
6
the pressure present in port A applies a force to the pressure
compensator (4) via orifice (7).
The pressure compensator (4) moves to the control position

4
until the forces are in balance. When the pressure in channel
A rises, the pressure compensator (4) moves in the closing

7
direction until a balance of forces is once again attained. Due
to this continuous compensation of the pressure compensator
(4), a constant flow is obtained.
In order to control a flow through the valve in both directions,

A B
a rectifier sandwich plate type Z4S 6 may be fitted below this
flow control valve.

Type 2FRM 6 B76-3X/.MV
Function, section: Type 2FRM 6 SB…
General

2

al check valve (8).
1 8
Flow control valve type 2FRM 6 SB…RV
(without external closing, with check valve, with threaded
connection for panel mounting)
The flow from channel A to channel B is throttled at the throt-

tling point (5). The throttle cross-section is set by turning the
3
rotary knob (2).
In order to keep the flow in channel B constant, independent
of the pressure, a pressure compensator (4) is fitted down-

stream of the throttling point (5).
5
The compression spring (6) presses the pressure compen-

sator (4) downwards against its stop and keeps the pres-
sure compensator (4) in the open position when there is no
6
flow through the valve. When fluid flows through the valve,
the pressure present in port A applies a force to the pressure

4
compensator (4) via orifice (7).

7
The pressure compensator (4) moves to the control position
until the forces are in balance. When the pressure in channel
A rises, the pressure compensator (4) moves in the closing
direction until a balance of forces is once again attained. Due
to this continuous compensation of the pressure compensator
(4), a constant flow is obtained.

A B
The free return flow from channel B to channel A is directed

Type 2FRM 6 SB76-3X/..RV
via the check valve (8).
Function, section, sample circuit: Type 2FRM 6 A…
General

2

al check valve (8).
1 8
Flow control valve type 2FRM 6 A…RV
(with external closing, with check valve)
The function of this valve is basically the same as that of
valve type 2FRM 6 B...MV.
However, the flow control valve features external closing of

3
the pressure compensator (4) via channel P (9). The exter-

nal pressure acting in channel P (9) via orifice (1 0), holds the
pressure compensator (4) closed against the compression
spring (6). When the connected directional valve (1 1 ) is ac- 5
tuated to permit flow from P to B, control is achieved as with
type 2 FRM 6 B. Thus, a start-up jump is avoided.
The version with closing of the pressure compensator can

6
only be used for meter-in control.
The free return flow from channel B to channel A is directed
via the check valve (8).

4
Attention!
The pressure loss of port P upstream of the directional valve

9
to port A upstream of the flow control valve makes itself felt
by a reduced flow.
10
A P B
Type 2FRM 6 A76-3X/..RV
Actuator
A B
11 AB
PT
Technical data: 2-way flow control valve
(For applications of the component outside the specified values, please contact us!)
general
Weight – Version “A” and “B” kg ca. 1 .3
– Version “SB” kg ca. 1 .5
Installation position Any
Ambient temperature range °C –20 to +50
hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure (port A) bar 31 5
Pressure differential ∆p with free return flow B → A bar See characteristic curves page 8
Minimum pressure differential bar 6 to 1 4
Pressure stability up to ∆p = 31 5 bar % ±2 (qV max)
Maximum flow l/min 0.2 0.6 1 .5 3.0 6.0 1 0.0 1 6.0 25.0 32.0
Minimum flow – up 1 00 bar cm3/min 15 15 15 15 25 50 70 1 00 250
– up 31 5 bar cm3/min 25 25 25 25 25 50 70 1 00 250
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN51 524;
other hydraulic fluids upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range °C –20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 1 0 to 800
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic

Class 20/1 8/1 5 1 )
fluid - cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c)
1) The cleanliness classes specified for the components
must be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Efficient filtration
prevents malfunctions and at the same time prolongs the
service life of components.
For the selection of the filters, see data sheets RE 50070,
RE 50076, RE 50081 , RE 50086, RE 50087, and
RE 50088.
Technical data: Rectifier sandwich plate
(For applications of the component outside the specified values, please contact us!)
general
Weight kg ca. 0.9
hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure bar 21 0
Cracking pressure bar 0.7
Maximum flow l/min 32
Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 ± 5°C)
Flow dependency on the scale setting (flow control A → B)
6 6Q 32
32Q
30
28
5 26 25Q
24
22
Flow in l/min →
→
4
Flow in l/min
20
3Q 18
16Q
3 16
14
12
10Q
2 10
1,5Q
8
1,5
1
6
0,6Q 4
0,5 2
0,2Q
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Scale divisions → Scale divisions →
∆p-qV characteristic curve via check valve B → A;
Orifice closed pE-qV characteristic curve
17
32Q
Pressure differential in bar →
16 30
25Q
25
14 20
16Q
12
15
10 10Q
10
8
6Q
6 5
→
Flow in l/min
4 4
3Q
3
2
2 1,5Q
0
0
10 20 30 40 50
Flow in l/min → 1
0,6Q
0,5
Temperature dependency at ∆p = 20 bar

1500
0,2Q
1400 0,2
0
1300 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320
Flow difference in cm3/min →
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Input pressure in bar →
Temperature in °C →
600
Rectifier sandwich plate
500 ∆p-qV characteristic curve
400 6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Pressure differ-
ential in bar →
Temperature in °C →
4
200 3
100
1
0
10 20 30 40 50
60 70 1 5 10
15 20
25
30 32
Temperature in °C → Flow in l/min →

Unit dimensions: Subplate mounting – Version “A” and “B” (dimensions in mm)
40
38
19
134
111
67
22
47
“X”
3 6 View “X”
60
9,75
T P

A B A B 5
45
2
12,6
P
0
4 x 5,5
7 8
For explanation of items, subplates, and

0,01/100
valve mounting bolts, see page 1 1 .

Rt 4
Required surface quality of
the valve mounting face
1 0/1 2 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics 2FRM RE 281 63/02.09
Unit dimensions: Threaded connection for panel mounting – version “SB”
(dimensions in mm)
40
38
19
M5
139
116
11
8
72
G3/8
62
28
9
“X”
View “X”
60
48±0,1 15,5 15,5
5
5
0,1
48±
60
0
B
A

10 6
For explanation of items and valve mounting bolts,
see page 1 1 .
RE 281 63/02.09 2FRM Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 1 1 /1 2
Unit dimensions
1 Adjustment type “3” (lockable rotary knob with scale)

Subplate mounting (version “A” and “B”):
2
Adjustment type “7” (rotary knob with scale)
Subplates according to data sheet RE 45052
3 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, and T

(separate order)
Type G 341 /01 (G1 /4)
4 Space required to remove the key
Type G 342/01 (G3/8)
5 Ø3 bore in version “B” not bored

Type G 502/01 (G1 /2)
(without external closing)
Valve mounting screws (separate order)
6
Nameplate
– without rectifier sandwich plate
7 Position of the marking at port P

4 hexagon socket head cap screws
8 Porting pattern according to DIN 24340 form A

ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 1 0.9-flZn-240h-L
9 Connection thread G3/8 according to ISO 228-1

with friction coefficient µtotal = 0.09 to 0.1 4,
tightening torque MT = 7 Nm ±1 0%,
1 0 Position of the marking vis-à-vis nameplate

Material no. R91 300031 6
– with rectifier sandwich plate
Panel mounting (version “SB”):

ISO 4762 - M5 x 70 - 1 0.9-flZn-240h-L

ISO 4762 - M5 - 8.8-flZn-240h-L

Material no. R91 3000325
tightening torque MA = 7 Nm ±1 0%,
(minimum useable thread depth = 6.5 mm)
Unit dimensions: Adapter plate HSE 05 G06A001 -3X/V00 (dimensions in mm)
12 14
60
30
48 6 16,7; 1,9
8 11
B
10; 12
48
60
A
B 1
B
13,8
9,8 5,3 13
47
13
11 Connection surface for flow control valve type 2FRM 6

Note!
1 2 Connection surface for flow control valve type 2FRM 5

The adapter plate (Material no. R9004961 21 ) is required for
1 3 Seal ring
mounting a flow control valve type 2FRM 6 B..-3X/.. to an ex-
isting flow control valve type 2FRM 5 -3X/...
1 4 Mounting screws for adapter plate,
4 cylinder bolts
ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 1 0.9-flZn-240h-L
are included in the delivery.
1 2/1 2 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics 2FRM RE 281 63/02.09
Unit dimensions: Rectifier sandwich plate type Z4S 6-1 X/V (dimensions in mm)
15
60
48 6
A B 16
40
60
32,5
48
31
12,5; 1,3
max 35
40,5
17 18
Attention!
0,01/100
The rectifier sandwich plate type Z4S 6 -1 X/V can
only be used in connection with the flow control valve

Rzmax 4
type 2FRM 6 B..-3X/.. (without closing of the pressure com-

pensator)!
Required surface quality of
the valve mounting face
1 5 2-way flow control valve
1 6 Rectifier sandwich plate
1 7 Subplate according to data sheet RE 45052 and valve
mounting screws, see page 1 1 .
1 8 Seal ring
Bosch Rexroth AG
©This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hydraulics
tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengießer 1
may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany

The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 /18-0
ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain applica-
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 /18-23 58
tion can be derived from our information. The information given does not
documentation@boschrexroth.de
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
www.boschrexroth.de
must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and aging.
TAB 15
FLUID COOLING | Industrial AO Series
FEATURES
n Young Interchange –OCH
n Adjustable Louvers
n Medium Flow Rates
n Moderate Heat Removal
n One or Two Pass
n
Fluid Power Systems
A IR COOLED
AO/AOR
n
Gear Drives
OPTIONS
n
Injection Molding Machines
SAE & Metric Connections
Relief Bypass
n
Machine Tools
Foot Brackets
n
Torque Converters
Corrosive Resistant
n
Hydraulic Presses
Marine Coating
Ratings
Materials
Weights
Operating Pressure - 300 psi

Tubes Copper
MODEL Net Weight (LBS)
Test Pressure - 300 psi

Fins Aluminum
AO-5 47
Operating Temperature - 400° F

Turbulators Steel
AO-10 62
Fan Blade Aluminum with steel hub

AO-15 72
Fan Guard Zinc plated steel

AO-20 86
Cabinet Steel with baked enamel finish

AO-25 120
Manifolds Steel
AO-30 135
Connections
S
teel AO-35 160
AO-40 185
One Pass (Medium to High Oil Flows) Two Pass (Low to Medium Oil Flows)
One Pass
Oil
IN
Oil
OUT
Model Number Flow Range GPM (USA)

Model Number
Flow Range GPM (USA)
AOR - 5-1 2 - 80 AOR - 5-2 2 - 25
AOR - 10-1 3 - 80 AOR - 10-2 2 - 30
AOR - 15-1 4 - 80 AOR - 15-2 2 - 30
AOR - 20-1 5 - 80 AOR - 20-2 2 - 40

Two Pass
Oil
AOR - 25-1 6 - 100

AOR - 25-2 2 - 40 OUT
AOR - 30-1 7 - 100 AOR - 30-2 2 - 40
AOR - 35-1 8 - 112 AOR - 35-2 3 - 40
AOR - 40-1 9 - 118 AOR - 40-2 4 - 40 Oil
IN
How to Order
AO
– – – – – –
Model
Model Size
Number of Passes*
Connection
Relief Bypass
Foot Mounted
Specify Motor
Series
Selected Blank - No Bypass
Type
Setting*
Brackets
Required
AO
1 - One Pass
Blank - NPT
30-30 psi
Blank - No
Single Phase
AOR-Includes
2 - Two Pass
S - SAE
60 - 60 psi
Brackets
Single Phase Expl. Proof
Bypass
M - Metric
FB - Foot Brackets
Three Phase
Three Phase 575 Volt
*ADD FOR AOR MODELS ONLY: Relief Bypass Setting & Number of Passes
Three Phase Expl. Proof
8 TTPSales@thermasys.com 262.554.8330 www.thermaltransfer.com
Specifications
Electric motor & Fan data*
Sound
Full
Bearing

Horse

Load
Nema

Thermal
B-Bal
CFM
dB(A)**
Volts Phase
Hz RPM Type Circuit
Model Power Amps Frame Overload

S-Sleeve
at 7
ft.
AO-5 401/487
68
1/12
110/115 1
1.2/1.2 50/60
1400/1700
TEAO
A
494 70 1/4 208-230/460

3 1.4-1.3/.65
60 48
1725 TEFC D No B
576/700
68
1/12
110/115 1
1.2/1.2 50/60
48 1400/1700
TEAO
A
No B
AO-10
710
70
1/4 208-230/460
3 1.4-1.3/.65
60 1725
TEFC
D

824/1000
69
1/12
110/115 1
1.2/1.2 50/60
48 1400/1700
TEAO
A
AO-15
No B

1015
71
1/4 208-230/460
3 1.4-1.3/.65
60 1725
TEFC
D
70
1/6
115/208-230
1
4/2.1-2 60
48 TEFC
C
AO-20 1555
1725 No B

72
1/4
208-230/460 3 1.4-1.3/.65
60 TEFC

D
AIR COOLED
AO/AOR
72
115/208-230
1
4.6/2.2 48 C
AO-25
2240 1/6

208-230/460
3 1.3-1.2/.6
60 1140 TEFC
D
No B
73

75 115/208-230 1 5.2/2.7-2.6 C
AO-30 3100 1/6 60 48

1140 TEFC No B
76 208-230/460 3 1.3-1.2/.6 D

76
115/208-230
1
8/4.2-4 C
AO-35 4370 1 /2 60 56 1140 TEFC No B
77 208-230/460
3
2.5-2.4/1.2
D
78
115/208-230
1
8/4.2-4
C
AO-40 5450 79 1 /2 60 56 1140 TEFC No B
208-230/460 3
2.5-2.4/1.2
D

*Published electrical ratings are approximate, and may vary because ofmotor brand. Actual ratings are on motor nameplate.
**
Catalog dB(A) sound levels are at seven (7) feet. dB(A) sound levels increase by six (6) dB(A) for halving this distance and decrease by six (6) dB(A) for doubling this distance.

Explosion Proof Motors (Class I GP.D & Class II GP.F, G)*
Sound
Full
Bearing
Horse

Load
Nema

Thermal
B-Bal
Model CFM
dB(A)**
Volts
Phase
Hz RPM Type Circuit
Power Amps Frame Overload

S-Sleeve
at7
ft.
68
115/230 1 5.8/2.9 C
AO-5
494 70 1/4
208-230/460
3 1.4-1.3/.65
60 48
1725 FC D
Yes B
68 115/230 1 5.8/2.9 C
AO-10
710 70 1/4 208-230/460 3 1.4-1.3/.65 60
48 1725 FC Yes B
69 115/230 1 5.8/2.9 C
AO-15
1015 71 1/4 208-230/460 3 1.4-1.3/.65 60
48 1725 FC Yes B
70 115/230 1
5.8/2.9 C
AO-20
1555 72 1/4
208-230/460
3 1.4-1.3/.65
60
48 1725 FC Yes B
72 115/230 1 6.8/3.4 C
AO-25
2240 73 1/3 208-230/460 3 1.8-1.6/.8 60
56 1140 FC Yes B
75 115/230 1 6.8/3.4 C
AO-30
3100 76 1/3 208-230/460 3 1.8-1.6/.8 60
56 1140 FC Yes B
76
115/230 1 8/4 C
AO-35
4370 77 1/2 208-230/460 3 2.5-2.4/1.2 60
56 1140 FC Yes B
78
115/230 1 8/4 C
AO-40
5450 79 1/2 208-230/460 3 60 56 1140 FC D Yes B
2.5-2.4/1.2
*Published electrical ratings are approximate, and may vary because ofmotor brand. Actual ratings are on motor nameplate.
575 Volt
Sound
Full
Bearing
Horse
Load
Nema

Thermal
B-Bal
Model CFM dB(A)**

Volts
Phase
Hz RPM Type Circuit
Power Amps Frame Overload

S-Sleeve
at 7 ft.
AO-5 494 70 1/4 575 3 .52 60 48 1725 TEFC

D
No
B
AO-10
710 70
1/4
575
3
.52
60
48
1725
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-15 1015
71
1/4
575
3
.52
60
48
1725
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-20 1555
72
1/4
575
3
.52
60
48
1725
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-25 2240 73 1/2

575
3
.88
60
56
1140
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-30 3100 76 1/2 575 3

.88
60
56
1140
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-35 4370 77 1/2 575 3 .88 60

56
1140
TEFC
D
No
B
AO-40 5450
*D Squirrel Cage
79 1/2 575 3 .88 60 56 1140 TEFC D No

AO
B
**Catalog dB (A) sound levels atseven (7) feet. dB (A) sound levels increase by six (6) dB (A) for halving this distance, and decrease by six (6) dB (A) for doubling this distance.
Lubrication Notes
Caution: Do not over oil or over grease. Ball bearings –No grease needed at start up. Grease as follows:
5,000 Hours/Year 5 Year Grease Interval
Continuous

2 Years
Normal Applications
Seasonal Service

1 Year
Motor is idle for 6 months or more
Continuous
6 Months
High ambients, dirty or moist locations, high vibration
www.thermaltransfer.com TTPSales@thermasys.com 262.554.8330 9
Dimensions
M M T
Model A B
C D E F G H J K L
N P
NPT
SAE
AO-5 7.40 14.81 5.90 11.81 20.00 9.19 8.31 6.47 12.94 3.78 7.56 1” #16 SAE 5.84 11.69 —
AO-10 9.50 19.00 6.56 13.12 19.25 10.50 12.50 8.56 17.12 4.44 8.88 1” 1-5/16-12UN-2B 7.94 15.88 —
AO-15 10.19 20.38 7.87 15.75 19.25 13.12 13.88 9.25 18.50 5.75 11.50 1” Thread 8.62 17.25 —
AO-20 11.91 23.81 9.19 18.38 19.25 15.75 17.91 10.90 21.81 7.00 14.00 1-1/4” 10.28 20.56 —
AO-25 13.34 26.68 11.81 23.62 19.25 21.00 20.19 12.40 24.81 9.62 19.25 1-1/4” #20 SAE 11 .78 23.56 —
AO-30 15.81 31.62 13.78 27.56 19.50 24.94 25.12 14.87 29.75 11.59 23.19 1-1/4” 1-5/8-12UN-2B 14.25 28.50 11.00
AO-35 16.90 33.81 15.09 30.19 21.50 27.56 27.31 15.97 31.94 12.90 25.81 1-1/4” Thread 15.34 30.69 11.00
AO-40 20.81 41.62 18.37 36.75 20.50 34.12 35.12 19.87 39.75 16.19 32.38 1-1/4” 19.25 38.50 13.25
NOTE: All dimensions in inches.
AIR COOLED AO/AOR
Installation Piping Diagram Fan Rotation Clockwise/Facing Motor Shaft
One Oil Pass Two Oil Passes
Oil
OUT
1/2-13 UNC-28
4 Places
8 Places on
AO-30, 35 & 40
Oil
(Top & Bottom)
OUT
Oil
Cap Oil
IN
IN
AIR
*See dimension chartfor NPTor optional internal SAE connection size.

FLOW
NOTE: MOTOR MOUNTING BRACKET ON
AO-5 & AO-10 IS ROTATED 90°
CV Viscosity Correction

OIL

SAE 5
SAE 10
SAE 20
SAE 30
SAE 40
50-50
Average 110 SSU at 100°F 150 SSU at 100°F 275 SSU at 100°F 500 SSU at 100°F
750 SSU at 100°F
Ethylene Glycol
Oil Temp °F 40 SSU at 210°F 43 SSU at 210°F 50 SSU at 210°F 65 SSU at 210°F 75 SSU at 210°F & Water
100 1.14 1.22 1.35 1.58 1.77 1.11
150 1.01 1.05 1.11 1.21 1.31 1.02
200 .99 1.00 1.01 1.08 1.10 .96
250 .95 .98 .99 1.00 1.00 .95
AO

10 TTPSales@thermasys.com 262.554.8330 www.thermaltransfer.com
Performance Curves Selection Procedure
Performance Curves are based on 50SSU oil leaving the cooler 40°F higher
One Pass Oil

than the ambient air temperature used for cooling.This is also referred to as
100
a 40°F approach temperature.
STEP 1
etermine the Heat Load.This will vary with different systems,
D
but typically coolers are sized to remove 25 to 50% of the input
nameplate horsepower.
(Example: 100 HP Power Unit x .33 = 33 HP Heat load.)
  + AO -4 0
If BTU/Hr. is known: HP = BTU/Hr
2545

 + AO -3 5
STEP 2
Determine Approach Temperature. Desired oil leaving cooler

AO/AOR
HORSEPOWER TO BE REMOVED
   + AO -3 0
°F – Ambient air temp. °F = Actual Approach
  +
AO -2 5
 STEP 3 Determine Curve Horsepower Heat Load. Enter the
AIR COOLED
10
information from above:
 + AO -2 0
40 x Cv
  Horsepower heat load x = Curve Horsepower
Actual Approach
  + AO -1 5

STEP 4 Enter curves at oil flow through cooler and curve horsepower.

 + AO -1 0
Any curve above the intersecting point will work.
OIL P Determine Oil Pressure Drop from Curves:
STEP 5
AO -5
 
 +  = 5 PSI
= 10 PSI
l = 5 PSI; n = 10 PSI; s = 14 PSI; ; = 20 PSI. Multiply
= 15 PSI

pressure drop from curve by correction factor found in oil P
+ = 20 PSI
correction curve.
1 10 100 1000
Desired Reservoir Temperature
FLOW (GPM)
Return Line Cooling: Desired temperature is the oil temperature leaving the
cooler. This will be the same temperature that will be found in the reservoir.
Two Pass Oil

Off-Line Recirculation Cooling Loop: Desired temperature is the oil tem-
100
perature entering the cooler. In this case, the oil temperature change must be
determined so that the actual oil leaving temperature can be found.
Calculate the oil temperature change (oil T) with this formula:
Oil T = (BTU’s/Hr.) / (GPM Oil Flow x 210).
To calculate the oil leaving temperature from the cooler, use this formula:
   + AO -4 0
Oil Leaving Temp. = Oil Entering Temp – Oil T.
This formula may also be used in any application where the only temperature
   + AO -3 5
available is the entering oil temperature.
  + AO -3 0
HORSEPOWER TO BE REMOVED

Oil Pressure Drop: Most systems can tolerate a pressure drop through the
   + AO -2 5
heat exchanger of 20 to 30 PSI. Excessive pressure drop should be avoided.
10
Care should be taken to limit pressure drop to 5 PSI or less for case drain
AO -2 0
  + applications where high back pressure may damage the pump shaft seals.
+ AO -1 5
 
Oil Temperature


  +
AO -1 0
5
OIL P CORRECTION CURVE

AO
Typical operating temperature
ranges are:
P MULTIPLIER
+ AO -5 3
  OIL P

 = 5 PSI
Hydraulic Motor Oil
110° - 130°F
 = 10 PSI
 = 15 PSI
2
Hydrostatic Drive Oil 130° - 180°F
+ = 20 PSI
Bearing Lube Oil

120° - 160°F
OIL
10 100
Lube Oil Circuits 110° - 130°F
1
FLOW (GPM)
1
50 100 2 00 300 400 500
OIL VISCOSITY - SSU
www.thermaltransfer.com TTPSales@thermasys.com 262.554.8330 11
TAB 16
Low Pressure Filters
RF Series
In-Tank Inline Filters
360 PSI • up to 400 GPM Hydraulic Symbol:
Features:
Technical Details:
• RF 60 - 330 filters constructed of aluminum material. Aluminum

Mounting Method 4 Mounting holes - filter housing
alloy is water tolerant - anodization is not required for high water

Port Connections Inlet
Outlet
based fluids (HWBF).

60/1 1 0 SAE-1 2 SAE-1 2
• RF 660 - 1 300 filters constructed of ductile iron.

1 60/240
SAE-20 SAE-20
330 2” NPT 2” NPT
• Non-welded housing design reduces stress concentrations d pre- 2” SAE Flange, Code 61 2” NPT
vents fatigue failure.

660
3” SAE Flange, Code 61 3”NPT
950 3 1/2” SAE Flange, Code 61 3 1/2” SAE Flange, Code 61
• Inlet/outlet port options include NPT, SAE straight thread O-ring

1 300 4” SAE Flange, Code 61 4” SAE Flange, Code 61
boss, and SAE 4-bolt flange to allow easy installation without
costly adapters.
Direction of Flow Inlet: Side Outlet: bottom
• O-ring seals are used to provide positive, reliable sealing. Choice

Materials of Construction
Housing, Lid, Transfer Valve RF60-330

Aluminum
of O-ring materials (Nitrile, Fluoro Rubber, EPDM)provides

RF660-1 300 Ductile Iron
compatibility with petroleum oils, synthetic fluids, water-glycols,
oil/water emulsions, and high water base fluids.

Flow Capacity
60 1 6 gpm (60 lpm)
• Bolt-on lid requires minimal clearance for removal.

110 29 gpm (1 1 0 lpm)
• Reusable contamination basket prevents loss of retained

1 60 42 gpm (1 60 lpm)
240 63 gpm (240 lpm)
contaminants into the reservoir during element replacement.

330 87 gpm (330 lpm)
• Clogging indicators can be serviced without interruption of the

660 1 74 gpm (660 lpm)
hydraulic system.
950 251 gpm (950 lpm)
1 300 343 gpm (1 300 lpm)
• Single piece casting provides rigidity for inline or in-tank mounting.
Housing Pressure Rating
Max. Operating Pressure:

360 psi (25 bar)
Proof Pressure: 540 psi (38 bar)
Fatigue Pressure: 360 psi (25 bar) @ 700,000 cycles
Burst Pressure: 60/1 1 0

1 080 psi (75 bar)
Applications:
ons: 1 60/240 1 230 psi (85 bar)
330 1 440 psi (1 00 bar)
660-1 300 >1 440 psi (100 bar)
Element Collapse Pressure Rating
BN/HC, W/HC, V
250 psid (1 7 bar)
ECO/N, BN/AM, P/HC, AM 1 45 psid 1 0 bar)
Agricultural Automotive Construction

Gearboxes Fluid Temperature Range -22° to 250°F (-30° to 1 21 °C)
Fluid Compatability
Compatible with all petroleum oils and synthetic fluids rated for use
with Fluoro-Rubber or Ethylene Propylene seals. Contact HYDAC for
information on special housing and element constructions available for
use with water glycols, oil/water emulsions, and HWBF.
Industrial Offshore Power

Pulp & Paper
Generation Indicator Trip Pressure

∆P = 29 psid (2 bar) -1 0% (standard)
∆P = 72 psid (5 bar) -1 0% (optional)
Bypass Valve Cracking Pressure
∆P = 43 psid (3 bar) +1 0% (standard)
∆P = 87 psid (6 bar) +1 0% (optional)
Railways Shipbuilding Steel / Heavy
Industry
19 Filter Catalog
Model Code:
RF BN/HC 330 D L 10 H 1 . X / 16 - V - B6 .
Filter Type
RF
= In-Tank Return Line Filter
Filter Media
BN/HC
= Betamicron®
Low Collapse
ECO/N = ECOmicron® Low Collapse
AM = Aquamicron® Disposable
BN/AM = Betamicron®/Aquamicron®1
P/HC
= Polyester
W/HC = Wire Screen Cleanable
Size
60, 1 1 0, 1 60, 240, 330, 660, 950, 1 300
Pressure Rating
D
= 360 psi (25 bar)
Type of Connection
C
=
SAE 1 2 (sizes 60, 110)
Includes Adapter
E = SAE 20 (sizes RF 160, 240, 330) SAE-NPT
G = 1 1 /4” NPT (size 330)

L = SAE 32 Flange (size 330)
N = SAE 48 Flange (size 660)
O = SAE 56 Flange (size 950)
P
= SAE 64 Flange (size 1300)
Filtration Rating (micron)
3
Betamicron®
(BN/HC)
10 Polyester (P/HC)
5 ECOmicron® (ECO/N) 20 Nominal Filtration Rating
10 Absolute Filtration Rating
20 (ßx(c) ≥ 1 000)
Betamicron®
/Aquamicron (BN/AM) 25

74 Wire Screen (W/HC)
10 (ßx(c) ≥ 1 00) 1 49
Nominal Filtration Rating
40 Aquamicron® (AM)
Absolute Filtration Rating (ß40(c) ≥ 1 00)
Type of Static Clogging Indicator (static)
A
= no clogging indicator
Indicator Model
B = visual (pop-up) clogging indicator VR...B
H
= electrical clogging indicator (AC Electric Switch) VR...H
D = electrical & visual (lamp) clogging indicator VR...DL...
E = color-coded pressure gauge (also Type ES) VR...E
F = pressure switch (42 volt max.) (DC Electric Switch) VR...F
LE = Electrical & Visual (pop-up) VR...LE
LZ = Electrical (75% & 100%) & Visual (pop-up) VR...LZ
Type Number
1
= Standard Connection
Modification Number (latest version always supplied)
Port Configuration
3
= NPT (size 330)
12 = SAE Straight Thread Inlet/Outlet Connections (sizes 60, 110, 160, 240, 330)
16 = SAE Flange Code 61 Inlet Connections (sizes 330 - 1300 only)
Seals
(omit)
=
Nitrile (NBR) (standard)
V = Fluoro Rubber (FKM)
EPR = Ethylene Propylene (EPDM)
Bypass Valve
(omit)
=
43 psid (3 bar) (return line standard)
KB = No Bypass (flushing system)
B6 = 87 psid (6 bar) (return line)
B1 = 1 5 psid (1 bar) (lubrication or coolant applications)
B0.2 = 3 psid (0.20 bar) (suction line)
Supplementary
SO1 03H =
Modification of BN3HC & W/HC Elements For Phosphate Ester Fluids
L24 = Lamp for 24 Volt

D-type clogging
L1 1 5 = Lamp for 1 1 5 Volt indicator only

T1 00
= Indicator Thermal Lockout, 1 00°F (Consult factoryfor B and BM indicators)
1 ) Betamicron Aquamicron Combination Absolute and Water Removal Elements available in sizes 330, 660, 950, and 1 300.
Model Codes Containing Red are non-stock items — Minimum quantities mayapply– Contact HYDAC for information and availability
1-877-GO HYDAC Filter Catalog 20
RF Series
Dimensions:
RF 60 - 240 RF 330 - 660
RF 60
RF 1 1 0
RF 1 60
RF 240
RF 330
RF 660
3.54”
6.30”
5.1 2”
7.48”
7.09”
1 2.60”
(90mm)
(1 60mm)
(1 30mm)
(1 90mm)
(1 80mm)
(320mm)
Clearance required
Clearance required
for element changeout

Indicator Port
Indicator Port
G 1 /2”
G 1 /2”
RF 330
RF 60
RF 60 /1 1 0
5.63”
6.53”
3.94”
(1 43mm)
(1 66mm)
(1 00mm)
RF 660
RF 1 1 0
RF 1 60 /240
7.05”
9.17”
4.72”
(1 79mm)
RF 330
(233mm)
(1 20mm)
1 1 .1 ”
(282mm)
RF 1 60
8.18”
RF 660
(208mm)
1 6.61 ”
(422mm)
RF 330
RF 240
2.48”
1 0.58”
(63mm)
(269mm)
RF 60 /1 1 0
1 .73”
RF 660
(44mm)
3.31”
(84mm)
RF 1 60 /240
2.1 3”
(54mm)
RF 60
RF 1 60
RF 1 1 0
RF 240
RF 330
RF 660
3.77”
4.96”
5.98”
7.72”
(96mm)
(1 26mm)
(1 52mm)
(1 96mm)
RF 950 - 1300 Mounting Pattern
RF 950
RF 1 300
1 3.78”
1 8.1 1 ”
(350mm)
(460mm)
Clearance required
øD6
Indicator Port
øD5
G 1 /2”
RF 950
øD1
8.27”
(21 0mm)
RF 1 300
RF 950
9.96”
1 8.1 1 ”
(253mm)
(460mm)
RF 1 300
22.99”
(584mm) Size øD1 øD5 øD6
RF 950
60 / 1 1 0 3.1 5”
3.94”
0.26”
3.66”
(80mm) (1 00mm) (6.5mm)
(93mm)
4.1 7”
5.32”
0.30”
1 60 / 240 (1 06mm) (1 35mm) (7.5mm)
RF 1 300
4.76”
5.31 ”
6.9”
0.35”
330 (1 35mm) (1 70mm) (9mm)
(1 21 mm)
660 6.89”
8.66”
0.55”
(1 75mm) (220mm) (1 4mm)
8.1 9”
1 1 .42”
0.71 ”
1 0.04”
950 / 1 300 (208mm) (290mm) (1 8mm)
(255mm)
Size
RF 60
RF 110
RF 160
RF 240
RF 330
RF 660
RF 950
RF 1300
Weight (lbs.)
1 .7
2.0
3.3
3.7
7.5
40.8
86
94.8
Dimensions shown are for general information and overall envelope size only. Weights listed are without element.
For complete dimensions please contact HYDAC to request a certified print, or visit www.hydacusa.com/filter-cp
21 Filter Catalog
Sizing Information:
Housing Curves
Assembly ∆P = Housing ∆P (from curves) + Flow (in GPM) x K Factor (from chart)
Adjustments must be made for viscosity & specific gravity of the fluid to be used! (see sizing section)
Element K Factors:
...R...BN3HC (Betamicron® Low Collapse) …R…ECO/N
Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm
0060 1 .627 1 .245 1 .1 60 0.642

01 1 0 – – 0.464 0.31 7
01 1 0 0.81 4 0.622 0.580 0.321
01 60 0.556 0.378 0.329 0.225
01 60 0.491 0.376 0.350 0.1 94

0240 – – 0.209 –
0240 0.31 2 0.239 0.223 0.1 23

0330 0.228 0.1 56 0.1 35 –
0330 0.234 0.1 79 0.1 67 0.093

0660 0.1 00 0.068 0.059 0.041
0660 0.099 0.076 0.071 0.039

0950 0.067 0.052 0.048 0.027 0950 0.068 0.0467 0.041 0.028
1 300 0.048 0.037 0.034 0.01 9 1 300 0.049 0.034 0.029 0.020
...R...P/HC (Paper)
…R…W/HC (Wire Screen)
Size Size ...R...BN/AM …R…AM
10, 20 µm
25, 50, 74, 100, 149, 200 µm
Size Size
0060 0.255 0060

0.055 3 µm 10 µm 040A
01 1 0 0.1 28 01 1 0 0.030
0330 0.477 0.1 64 0330 0.21 6
01 60 0.077 01 60 0.021
0240 0.049 0240 0.01 5
0660 0.1 92 0.066 0660 0.095
0330 0.037 0330 0.01 0

0660 0.01 6 0660 0.005 0950 0.1 32 0.045 0950 0.067
0950 0.01 0 0950 0.003
1 300 0.088 0.033 1 300 0.048
1 300 0.007 1 300 0.003
1-877-GO HYDAC Filter Catalog 22
TAB 17
RESERVOIRS - AIR / OIL - SHELF/BASE MOUNT
Air / oil tanks provide precision hydraulic power from shop air. Exact cylinder movement is achieved without the
high cost of conventional hydraulic power requiring pump, motor, filter, etc. Basic circuits, when used with low
pressure hydraulic check, flow control and directional valves, allow oil (driven at 1:1 ratio) to force piston rod at
the same speed through both forward and return stroke. The speed control is adjustable to your work requirement.
STANDARD MATERIALS:
! Aluminum base and cover
! Buna N seals
! Steel stem
! Break resistant, colorless, transparent polymer
OPERATING CONDITIONS:
! Polymer up to 140°F (60°C)
! Aluminum up to 250°F (121.1°C)
! Maximum working pressure:
Polymer up to 80 PSI (552 kPa)
Aluminum up to125 PSI (861.9 kPa)
MODIFICATIONS OF ALUMINUM BOWL OR ALUMINUM BOWL WITH GAGE AVAILABLE
CONSULT OUR FACTORY (MINIMUM ORDER MAY BE REQUIRED)
CAPACITY
DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION
CATALOG NUMBER
CU. IN.
INCHES (mm)
(cu. cm)
ALUMINUM
POLYMER
WITH GAGE
POLY ALUM A B C D E F G H J

6.9
8.8
2.50
4.12
2.25
1.44
.81
.25
1.25
A/OR1009-1 - (113.1)
(144.2)
(63.5)
(104.6)
(57.2)
1/8 1/4
(36.6)
(20.6)
(6.4)
(31.8)
14.0
18.0
2.50
6.62
4.75
1.44
.81
.25
1.25
A/OR1018-2 A/OR11018-2 (229.4)

(295.0)
(63.5)
(168.1)
(120.6)
1/4 1/4
(36.6)
(20.6)
(6.4)
(31.8)
20.0
26.0
2.50
8.62
6.75
1.44
.81
.25
1.25
A/OR1024-2 - (327.7)
(426.1)
(63.5)
(218.9)
(171.4)
1/4 1/4
(36.6)
(20.6)
(6.4)
(31.8)
26.0
33.0
2.50
10.62
8.75
1.44
.81
.25
1.25
A/OR1030-2 A/OR11030-2 (426.1)

(540.8)
(63.5)
(269.7)
(222.2)
1/4 1/4
(36.6)
(20.6)
(6.4)
(31.8)
35.0
45.0
2.50
13.62
11.75
1.44
.81
.25
1.25
A/OR1042-2 - (573.4)
(737.4)
(63.5)
(345.9)
(298.4)
1/4 1/4
(36.6)
(20.6)
(6.4)
(31.8)
A/OR2053-3 A/OR12053-3 47.0

56.0
3.50
8.94
6.88
1.62
.94
.50
2.00
1/4 3/8
(770.2)
(917.7)
(88.9)
(227.1)
(174.8) (41.1)
(23.9)
(12.7)
(50.8)
A/OR2075-3 - 3/8
67.0
79.0
3.50
11.81
9.75
1.62
.94
.50
2.00
1/4
(1098)
(1295)
(88.9)
(300.0)
(247.6) (41.1)
(23.9)
(12.7)
(50.8)
A/OR2075-4 - 1/2
88.0
104.0
3.50
15.08
12.75
1.62
.94
.50
2.00
A/OR2100-3 - (1442)
(1704)
(88.9)
(383.0)
(323.8)
1/4 3/8
(41.1)
(23.9)
(12.7)
(50.8)
130.0
153.0
3.50
20.81
18.75
1.62
.94
.50
2.00
A/OR2150-3 - (2130)
(2507)
(88.9)
(528.6)
(476.2)
1/4 3/8
(41.1)
(23.9)
(12.7)
(50.8)
171.0
201.0
3.50
27.02
24.75
1.62
.94
.50
2.00
A/OR2200-3 - (2802)
(3294)
(88.9)
(686.3)
(628.6)
1/4 3/8
(41.1)
(23.9)
(12.7)
(50.8)
RESERVOIRS - AIR / OIL
LUBE DEVICES, INC.

SHELF/BASE MOUNT
1864 NAGLE AVE., P.O. BOX 1810, MANITOWOC, WI 54221-1810
PHONE: (920) 682-6877 FAX: (920) 684-7210

BULLETIN F1077-1
3/04
E-MAIL: sales@lubedevices.com WEBSITE: www.lubedevices.com
[BULL
RESERVOIRS - AIR / OIL - WALL MOUNT
Air / oil tanks provide precision hydraulic power from shop air. Exact cylinder movement is achieved without the
high cost of conventional hydraulic power requiring pump, motor, filter, etc. Basic circuits, when used with low
pressure hydraulic check, flow control and directional valves, allow oil (driven at 1:1 ratio) to force piston rod at
the same speed through both forward and return stroke. The speed control is adjustable to your work requirement.
STANDARD MATERIALS:
OPERATING CONDITIONS:
! Aluminum construction
! Polymer up to 140°F (60°C)
! Buna N seals
! Aluminum up to 250°F (121.1°C)
! Break resistant, colorless,

! Maximum working pressure:
transparent polymer
Polymer up to 60 PSI (413.7 kPa)
Aluminum up to100 PSI (689.5 kPa)
MODIFICATIONS OF ALUMINUM BOWL OR ALUMINUM BOWL WITH GAGE AVAILABLE
CONSULT OUR FACTORY (MINIMUM ORDER MAY BE REQUIRED)
CATALOG NUMBER CAPACITY

B
C
INCHES
INCHES
NPTF
ALUMINUM
POLYMER POLYMER ALUMINUM

(mm)
(mm)
WITH GAGE
97.0 cu. in.

102.0 cu. in.
7.00
4.56
A/OR5075-3 - 3/8
(1589.5) cu. cm.

(1671.5) cu. cm.
(177.80)
(115.82)
127.0 cu. in.

133.0 cu. in.
8.50
6.06
A/OR5100-3 - 3/8
(2081.2) cu. cm.

(2179.5) cu. cm.
(215.90)
(153.92)
196.0 cu. in.

205.0 cu. in.
12.00
9.56
- A/OR15175-3 3/8
(3211.9) cu. cm.

(3359.3) cu. cm.
(304.80)
(242.82)
220.0 cu. in.

231.0 cu. in.
13.25
10.75
A/OR5200-3 - 3/8
(3605.2) cu. cm.

(3785.4) cu. cm.
(336.55)
(273.05)
RESERVOIRS - AIR / OIL

LUBE DEVICES, INC.
WALL MOUNT
1864 NAGLE AVE., P.O. BOX 1810, MANITOWOC, WI 54221-1810
PHONE: (920) 682-6877 FAX: (920) 684-7210
3/04 BULLETIN F1077-2

E-MAIL: sales@lubedevices.com WEBSITE: www.lubedevices.com
TAB 18
Multi Level Switch

Features
Level
UNS-1000 Series
FormerlySeries BLS 700
Fully customizable
Up to 5 independent switch points
Reversible switch logic
Suitable for high viscosity liquids
Optional integral temperature switch
Hermetically sealed reed switches
Applications
Sump tanks
Hydraulic power units
Storage tanks
Solvent recovery systems
Lube oil console systems
Marine applications
General Specifications*
Max. Operating
220 psig (1 5 bar), NBR (BUNA),
Operating Temperature: +1 4 °F to +221 °F (-1 0 °C to +1 05 °C),
Pressure:
and SS fl oat
PVC-cable
Minimum Specific
NBR (BUNA) - .57 g/cm3
Special Design Options:
DR - Damping tube
Gravity:
SS - .71 g/cm3
(On Request)
HT - High temperature silicone-cable
-40 °F to +302 °F (-40 °C to +1 50 °C)
Mounting Position: Vertical, ±30°, through top or bottom

U - Mounting location through bottom
PT1 00 - PT1 00-element
Protection Class: IP65 for ST-, KL- and PG-design
V V - Vertical adjustment
IP67, IP68 on request
Exi - ATEX approval EEx ia
IP54 for K-design
* See Product Configurator for additional options. Contact Mode:

NO or NC are defi ned on the basis of an
empty tank and for installation through the
top.
Max. Switchpoints
Weight: Dependent on length and design
KL6C
KL1 2C
ST1
ST2
PG
AL Terminal
AL Terminal
DIN
DIN
Cable
Box
Box
Connector
Connector
gland
Connect Group 1 5 5 2 5 3
Connect Group 2 2 4 1 2 1 Wiring Color / Code
Connect Group 3 3 4 1 3 2
Group 1 SPST
Group 2 SPDT
Connect Group 4 2 3 1 2 1 Common Terminal Common

Terminal
white
1
white
1
L5
black
9
pink
6
L4
Combinations L4 grey
5
red
blue
L3 L3
pink
Material Mounting Electrical Connection Float yellow

4
6
L2
green
3
gray
5
DIN Connector (ST1 & ST2)

L1 L2
brown
2
yellow
4
Terminal box (KL6C

green
3
T1 NPT
L1
or KL1 2C)
31 6
Stainless
FLA3
brown
2
Cable gland (PG)

Stainless Steel
Steel (VA)
PVC Cable (K)
Group 3 SPST
(VA27)
Group 4 SPDT
Independent
Independent Terminal
1 /8 NPT
Cable gland (PG)
Terminal
black 9
1 /2 NPT
PVC Cable (K)
red 8 red 8
L4 7 L3
blue
DIN Connector (ST1 & ST2)

blue 7
pink
6
pink
6
Terminal box (KL6C

L3
gray
5
gray
5
T1 NPT
or KL1 2C)
NBR
yellow
4
L2
L2
yellow
4
Brass (MS)
Cable gland (PG)
BUNA-N
green
3
green
3
PVC Cable (K)

(BN25)
brown
2
L1 L1
brown
2
1 /8 NPT
Cable gland (PG)
white
1 white
1
1 /2 NPT
PVC Cable (K)
Multi Level Switch UNS-1000 Series
Technical Drawing FormerlySeries BLS 700
Dimensions in inch (mm)
With Aluminum
With DIN
With Cable
Dual switching
Junction Box
Connector
gland
(1 fl oat for 2
and 1 /2” NPT Female Conduit

(ST1 )
(PG)
switchpoints)
(KL6C or KL1 2C)
Mounting Types:
1 . Length tolerance ±1 /8” (±3 mm)
2. L0 = max. 40 in. (1 000 mm)
1 ” NPT
(25)
* Immersion depth at density 1 :
VA27 = 1 3/1 6 in ±0.1 in (21 ±2 mm)
BN25 = 1 /2 in ±0.1 in (1 3 ±2 mm)
REF. PT. REF. PT.
Temperature sensor PT1 00=dimension B+1 0mm
# Float position:
VA27 = NO/NC ⇒ see float marking 1/8” or 1 /2”

T1 ” NPT
SPDT
⇒ NO-function
NPT Male
BN25 = NO
⇒ compound points at bottom
NC
⇒ compound points at top
SPDT
⇒ compound points at bottom
6”(1 52.4) Dia.
4.75”(1 20.7) Dia.
Dimensions Min. distances in inch/mm
AF AT AD B C D
Float
.75 (1 9.1 )

type
(Holes 4 places)
VA27 1 /26 1 /26 1 /26 1 .6/40 2.56/65 1 .25/32
BN25 .86/22 .86/22 .86/22 1 /25 1 .78/45 1 .25/32

FLA3
2” 1 50# Flange
(When using -DR: Dimension B + 3/4” (20 mm)!) on request
Flange DJN2527
DN50/PN1 6
Multi Level Switch

UNS-1 000 Series Order Form
Level
UNS-1000 Series
FormerlySeries BLS 700
Check Boxes to Select Specification Requirements
Description: UNS 1 000 -

_____ / ________ - _______ - ________ - ______ / ____.____ - ____________
Special P/N to be assigned once order is received: L700XXX
Product Configurator Example UNS 1 000 -VA / T1 NPT -KL6C -VA27 -L2 / 2.1 -U-HT-(DR)(-VV)-PT100-Exi
Basic Configuration
UNS-1 000 Series Level switch type
Check
Required
Specs
Material of Stem
T
VA 31 6 SS
T
MS Brass
Mounting Element
T 1 /8NPT 1 /8” NPT, mounting thread (inside tap)
T 1 /2NPT 1 /2” NPT, mounting thread (inside tap)
T T1 NPT 1 ” NPT tank screw
T
FLA3 Blind fl ange, 2” 1 50 lbs RF (ANSI) (VA only)
Electrical Connection1
No. of Switchpoints***
T ST1 Cube plug DIN 43650, 3-pin + earth
T ST2
Angle plug DIN 43651 , 6-pin + earth
T L1
1 Switchpoint @ __________in / mm
T KL6C
Aluminum terminal box, 6 terminals w/1 /2” NPT conduit
T L2
2 Switchpoints @ __________in / mm
T KL1 2C Aluminum terminal box, 9 terminals w/1 /2” NPT conduit

T L3
T PG
PG-cable gland with 1 m PVC-cable (22 AWG)
T L4
T K
PVC-cable sealed std 1 meter (22 AWG)
T
L5 5 Switchpoints @ __________in / mm
T KXPC
Explosion proof junction box with 1 /2” conduit female
T
C 1 /2” NPT male conduit (VA only)
1
See “Combinations” section on page 1 for mounting and electrical connection options.
Float Type Contact Type of Float(s)
Pressure
Contact Mode Contact Rating
Min. Density Material Form 

Dia. ( ) Max. Temp.
(+20 °C)
T 1 -SPST (NO) 230 V AC / DC, 2 A, 40 VA / W
1 ”
T
BN25 0.57 g/cm3 BUNA NBR Cylinder
25 mm
21 2 °F (1 00 °C) 1 5 bar T 2-SPST (NC) 230 V AC / DC, 2 A, 40 VA / W
1 50 V AC / 1 00 V DC, 0.2 A,
T
VA27 0.71 g/cm3
Stainless steel,
Cylinder
1 -1 /1 6”
302 °F (1 50 °C) 1 5 bar

T 3-SPDT
3 VA / W
31 6 27 mm
Stainless steel,
1 -3/4”
T VA44 0.67 g/cm3

31 6
Ball
44 mm
302 °F (1 50 °C) 1 5 bar
IMPORTANT
Options
Must specify with your orders

Please specify when needed
1 - Overall stem length: L0= ______________ in/mm max. 40” (1000 mm)
2 - Dimensional position of fl oat***

T
DR Damping tube
3 - Pick wiring code:

High temperature silicone-cable
T Group 1
T Group 2
T Group 3 T Group 4
T HT
(-40 °F to +302 °F (-40 °C to +1 50 °C))
SPST
SPDT
SPST
SPDT
Common
Terminal Common
Terminal Independent Terminal Independent Terminal
T
U
Mounting through bottom
L5
white
pink
L4
white
black
1
9
L4
red
blue
7
L3
black
red
9
8
T PT1 00
PT1 00-element
L4
L3
grey
yellow
4
L3
red
blue
7
L3
pink
gray
blue
pink
gray
T V V
Vertical adjustment
L2
L1
green
brown
2
L2
pink
gray
L2
yellow
green
brown
L2
yellow
green
4
3
T
Exi ATEX approval EEx ia (Enclosure)
yellow
4
L1 brown
2
green
3
white
1 L1
L1
white
1
brown
2
3211 Fruitland Avenue • Los Angeles, CA90058 • 800-835-1060 • Fax: 323-589-3463 • www.barksdale.com
See Barksdale’s Standard Conditions of Sale • Specifications are subject to modification at any time • Bulletin #L0033-E • 03/1 0 • ©201 0 • Printed in the U.S.A. 3
TAB 19
TAB 20
TAB 21
http://www.chromalox.com
PDS QUALITY
On first impression, various manufacturers of screw plug immersion
heaters appear to be all alike; but when you take a closer look at screw plug
immersion heaters, it becomes evident that considerable differences exist.
The following information will help to explain the differences in construction
of Chromalox screw plug immersion heaters compared to other manufacturers.
D ifferences
It will also describe Chromalox’s third party listing program, quality testing,
and delivery capabilities.
Am ong
Before buying a screw plug heater, you should ask the manufacturer
questions to insure you are getting a quality heater that will last in your
Screw Plug
application. Below, you will find a list of some of these important questions.
Im m ersion
Heaters
Screw Plug Immersion Heaters
include one, two or three hair-

pin bent tubular element(s)
joined to a threaded hex plug.
Screwed into tank walls,
this UL Listed / CSA Certified

l1 How is your resistance
l 9
Are screw plug hex and
direct contact heat source heats

wire sized?
threads to industry
liquids, viscous fluids, forced air

standards?
and gases with maximum
energy efficiency. In addition,

l 2
What grade of
elements can be bent into many

magnesium oxide is
l10
Do you provide a standard
configurations to suit a variety

being used?
thermowell?
of applications. Most screw plug
heaters come with a thermowell
(for temperature control sensor)

l3 How is your cold pin
l11
Is the terminal housing
and a completely wired terminal

attached to your
rotatable?
enclosure for electrical connec-

resistance wire?
tion. Certain models available
with a patented 360° rotatable
l12
Do you have a standard
grounding lug?
screw plug housing to facilitate

l4
What is your standard
easy conduit connections. Select

element diameter?
from a variety of sheath materi-

l13
Are your heaters UL listed
als, element lengths, plug sizes
and CSA certified?
and ratings from 0.5 kW and up,

l 5
Do you passivate
for 120 to 600 volts.

stainless steel heaters?
l14
What quality assurance
testing is done on your
l6
Do you repress U-bends
when required?
finished products?
l 7
Do you use terminal
l15
Can you ship out of
sealant as a standard?
stock in 24 hours and
provide assembly stock
l 8
How are your elements
products in 5 days?
fixed to the screw plug?
l16
Can you provide me expert
technical assistance when
needed?
©
PH: 412-967-3800 · FX: 412-967-5148 www.chromalox.com 1998 Wiegand Industrial Division Emerson Electric Co. ®
Quality - Differences Among Screw Plug Immersion Heaters
The basic construction of an immersion heater includes the terminal housing,
Basic Construction
standard NPT screw plug, thermowell and heating elements. If you take a
closer look at the construction of a heating element, you will find the heart of
Rotatable Terminal
the heater is the resistance wire. Chromalox’s resistance wire is computer
Housing
designed in order to select the correct gauge wire for the required heating
Hex
element wattage and voltage. M any manufacturers use limited sizes of wire,
Hex Threads
and may not choose the optimal wire for the application. Ask the heater
m anufacturer how they determ ine resistance w ire dim ensions.
Thermowell
Elements
Chromalox connects the resistance wire to the cold pin with a weld. This provides a
Elements Internal
solid electrical connection that better withstands thermal cycling. Some manufac-
Construction
turers press or braze the cold pin onto the resistance wire, making failure due to
thermal cycling more common. Ask the heater manufacturer how they make
M etallic
Resistance Wire
their cold pin connections. Chromalox uses only high purity magnesium oxide
Sheath
-Computer Designed for
correct gauge wire

insulation to insure good dielectric resistance between the resistance wire and the
metal sheath. In addition, Chromalox uses a rolling method to reduce the diameter
and compact the M gO refractory. Other manufacturers often use lower grades of
MgO, and swage versus rolling down the element diameters, causing inferior
Compacted
Solid Cold
dielectric properties which can lead to a less reliable heater. By utilizing high
Magnesium Oxide
Pin Junction
grade materials and having controlled manufacturing processes, good thermal
Insulation
conductivity is achieved and a longer life heating element is produced. Ask the
heater m anufacturer how they com pact elem ent refractory.
Although Chromalox makes elements that range from 0.315” to 0.475” in
Element Diameter
diameter, our standard 2” and 2-1/2” NPT screw plug immersion heater
Chromalox standard 0.475” Diameter
® elements are 0.475” in diameter. Other manufacturers have standardized on
0.430” diameter elements to reduce costs. For an equivalent immersion length,
the 0.475” diameter heating element provides 10% more surface area versus a
0.475”
0.430” diameter element. The greater the surface area, the lower the heater
watt density and lower its operating temperature. Lower operating tempera-
10% more surface area than
tures result in longer heater life. A sk th e h e a te r m a n u fa ctu re r w ha t
0.430” diameter typical of competitors

diam eter elem ents they supply as standard.
Results in longer life and lower
operating temperature
Stainless Steel Heating

Corrosion is often accelerated by a poor surface finish. Proper surface finish of
Element Surface Finish

stainless steel heating elements is very important to prevent corrosion. During
typical heater manufacturing processes, steel dies and rollers come into
contact with the element sheath, and as a result, carbon steel particles are
embedded into the surface of the element. If not removed, pitting and corro-
sion will occur, eventually leading to premature heater failure. As standard
practice, Chromalox pickles and passivates stainless steel heaters by soaking
the elements in an acid bath. This process removes the carbon steel particles
from the surface of the heating element and prolongs heater life. Other
Pickling & Passivation

manufacturers will only passivate for an extra charge. Ask the heater
Removes most carbon particles

m anufacturer if passivation is a standard p ra ctice .
Chromalox · 701 Alpha Drive · Pittsburgh, PA 15238 · PH: 412-967-3800 · FX: 412-967-5148 · www.chromalox.com
Most screw plug immersion heater elements are bent in a U-bend configura-
Elements U-Bends
tion. When bending a heating element on a tight radius, air gaps can occur in
the magnesium oxide insulation within the element bend. Air gaps can permit a
dielectric (insulation) breakdown to occur, and cause an electrical short to the
Air gaps
metal sheath of the heater.
in M go
Chromalox represses U-bends to recompact the M gO and remove any air gaps,
Electrical
which ensures dielectric integrity. M any manufacturers do not repress bends to
short
save time and money. Ask the heater m anufacturer if they repress
to sheath
U -bends w hen necessary.
Elements U-Bends -
Repressed
Recompacts
M go
Removes
any
air gaps
Heating element refractory can absorb moisture from the air, and if enough
Terminal Seal Types

moisture is absorbed, high leakage current could occur during start-up.
Silicone - Fluid, Resin, RTV

Chromalox screw plug immersion heaters contain heating element terminal
200 °F to 300 °F continuous exposure

sealant as a standard feature. A terminal sealant inhibits moisture from being
Moderate moisture barrier

absorbed by the heating element refractory.
There are several optional types of terminal sealants to suit the particular
Epoxy
200 °F continuous exposure

application. Ask the heater m anufacturer about te rm in a l sealants before
Good moisture barrier

m aking a purchase decision.
Hermetic
Up to1000 °F sheath temperature
The only true seal
Welded Stainless/
Chromalox stainless steel, INCOLOY® and carbon steel elements are welded to
Steel Elements
stainless and carbon steel screw plugs. A welded element provides superior
Minimizes corrosion
corrosion protection and element attachment. Some manufacturers braze
at element attachment
elements to the screw plug without concern for the heaters intended applica-
tion. In heating a corrosive fluid, braze material is susceptible to being chemi-
cally attacked by the fluid. A welded-in element prevents corrosive fluid
leakage into the terminal housing which can lead to heater failure. Ask the
heater m anufacturer how they secure th e ir elem ents to the screw plug.
Solder not a good
corrosion resistant material
Prevents leakage
into terminal enclosure
Differences Among Screw Plug Immersion Heaters - Quality
Chromalox heater design provides a screw plug hex and threads that are user
Hex and Threads

friendly. Wide hex and generous threaded lengths allow standard tools to be
used and allows a secure fit.
Other manufacturers often provide a narrow hex, making the hex difficult to
Wide hex fits
grip, potentially damaging the screw plug threads, or short thread lengths that
standard tools
may not provide a tight seal. Chromalox screw plug immersion heaters are easy
Long threads
to install — no special tools are required. Ask the heater m anufacturer if
for
th e ir Hex and Threads m eet industry standards.
tighter fit
Chromalox stainless steel and steel screw plugs come with a standard solid hex
Easy to install
and threads. Others use stamped, cast or hollow plugs and threads that can fail
under higher pressures.
Hex and Threads -

Other Supplier Alternatives
Short hex requires
special tools
Short threads
susceptible to
damage
Short threads
cause loose fit
into tank
Difficult to install
Chromalox screw plug immersion heaters can be provided with or without an
Thermowells
integral thermostat. Regardless, a thermowell is standard on most heaters to
accept the sensing bulb of a thermostat. This allows an easy retrofit if later you
learn that a thermostat is necessary. Most manufacturers charge extra for
thermowells. Ask the heater m anufacturer if a th e rm o w e ll is standard.
Standard to accept
sensing bulbs
Integral and remote
thermostat options
Rotatable Terminal
The NEMA 1 terminal enclosure of the Chromalox screw plug heater is fully
Housing
rotatable. This patented feature allows 360° rotation of the terminal enclosure
(270° rotation for heaters with thermostat). Thus, you are able to rotate the
enclosure (housing) to face the electrical conduit connection after the heater
I T DOES
has been properly installed.
THE
During installation, it is preferred that the conduit for the wiring be in a down
TWIST
position. This prevents any moisture that may accumulate on the conduit from
Unique w ith
running down into the terminal enclosure of the heater and cause potential
360 Degree
heater failure. No other heater m anufacturer offers th is feature.
Rotation Feature
Differences Among Screw Plug Immersion Heaters - Quality
Proper electrical grounding is extremely important and is required by the
Electrical Grounding
National Electrical Code. Some manufacturers do not provide a standard
grounding lug with their heaters. Grounding lugs are a standard feature with
National
Chromalox heaters. Ask the heater m anufacturer if a grounding lu g is
Electrical Code
standard.
Requirement
Chromalox
Standard
Ground lugs
not provided
by all suppliers
Chromalox has the most extensive third party listing in the industry. We provide
Third Party Listing

more heaters with Underwriters Laboratory listing and/or Canadian Standards
Association Certification than a ll o th e r heater m anufacturers com bin ed .
M ost Extensive
This assures the heater is built to stringent standards and allows you to receive
in the Industry
quick electrical inspector approval. Ask the heater manufacturer about UL
Underwriters
Listing and CSA Certification.
UL
®
Listing (UL)
Canadian Standards
Association (CSA)
Chromalox heaters undergo extensive quality inspection prior to shipment. All
Quality Testing
screw plug heaters are 100 percent hydrostatically pressure tested to insure a
100% Hydrostatic
tight leak-proof fit of the elements to the screw plug. We also perform a 100
Pressure Test for

percent resistance check on all our heater elements to ensure proper heating
Weld Leaks
element wattage. A two-step insulation resistance check is also performed.
100% Resistance Check

First, elements must have a test measurement of insulation resistance to insure
for Element Wattage

minimal moisture content of the element refractory. Then, a dielectric high
Insulation Resistance
potential check insures that no electrical short exists from the resistance wire
Check for Moisture

to the metal sheath. M any manufacturers do not perform all of this quality
20 M egohms or greater
assurance testing. Ask the heater m anufacturer about th e ir te stin g
Dielectric Hi-pot Check

program.
Chromalox’s stocking program is unequaled in the industry. Our distribution
Delivery and Service

warehouse can ship stock heaters within 24 hours of receipt of an order.
Stock heaters shipped in 24 Hours

Chromalox has over 1,000 different screw plug heaters in stock. In addition,
Over 1000 Screw Plug heaters in stock

most of our assembly stock products can ship within 5 days. And, we offer 10
day shipment for many of our other thousands of pre-engineered designs. We
also provide a toll free service number for replacement part orders and installa-
tion assistance. 1 -8 0 0 -3 6 8 -2 4 9 3 . Ask the heater m anufacturer about
th e ir delivery tim es and sto ck o ffe rin g .
Toll free service number
1-800-368-2493
Chromalox has over 80 years of experience, the highest quality construction,
In Summary
extensive UL Listings and CSA Certifications, a comprehensive quality program
Over 80 years of experience

and the largest stock and pre-engineered designs of any manufacturer.
Chromalox also has the largest and most technically competent field sales
Highest quality heater
construction
force in the industry. This means you get the best products and application
support when you need it!
Extensive UL/CSA
Listings/Certifications
To Chromalox, an educated customer is our best customer. We are proud to
Comprehensive testing
build the world’s highest quality and longest lasting screw plug heaters. We
prior to delivery
ask you to ask these questions to whomever you buy your screw plug heaters
Fast delivery and

from. Remember, not all screw plug heaters are created equal.
customer service
Feature / B enefit Analysis
Feature B enefit
¨ High Quality Components ¨ Longer Lasting, M ore Reliable Heater
¨ Strict M anufacturing Processes ¨ Higher Consistency and Quality
¨ Element Diameter as required ¨ Longer Lasting Heaters
¨ Repressed Bends where necessary ¨ Higher Dielectric Integrity
¨ Standard Terminal Sealant ¨ Insulation Moisture Inhibitor
¨ Welded Elements ¨ Resists Chemical Attack
¨ Standard Hex Width and Thread Length ¨ Easier Installation, Better Fit
¨ Standard Grounding Lug ¨ Insures NEC Compliance for Ground
¨ Rotatable Enclosure ¨ Proper Enclosure Orientation Makes for Easy Installation
¨ Third Party Listing (for a list, ask your Representative

¨ Insures Highest Quality and Strict M anufacturing
for bulletin PD314)
Procedures
¨ Comprehensive Quality Assurance Testing

¨ Greater Reliability
¨ Product Availability
¨ Large Stock & Assembly Stock Offering
¨ Responsive Production Facilitye

¨ Lower Lead Times for Assembly Stock and Special Order Products
¨ Highly Technical and Experienced Sales Force

¨ Support and Assistance When You Need It Most
PD315-1
PDS QUALITY
®
OCT 98
99-006
TAB 22
NEMA Frame Motors
TABLE 6 - NEMA ‘C’ Face Motor Dimensions
U-Frame Dimensions
1 82UC
21 3UC
254UC
284UC
324USC
324UC
364USC
364UC
404USC
404UC
444USC
444UC
1 84UC
21 5UC
256UC
286UC
326USC
326UC
365USC
365UC
405USC
405UC
445USC
445UC
AH
2.1 25
2.75
3.50
4.625
3.00
5.375
3.50
6.1 25
4.00
6.875
4.00
8.375
U
7/8 1 1 /8 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 2 1 /8 2 1 /8 2 3/8 2 1 /8 2 7/8
S 3/1 6
1 /4 5/1 6
3/8
3/8
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
5/8
1 /2
3/4
AK 4.50 8.50
8.50 1 0.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 6.00
1 6.00
AJ 5.875 7.25 7.25 9.00

1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 4.00
1 4.00
BF 3/8-1 6 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1
1
3
7.5
1 5
25
25
40
40
60
60
1 25
1 25
HP*
2
5
1 0
20
30
30
50
35
75
75
1 50
1 50
T-Frame Dimensions
1 43TC
1 82TC
21 3TC
254TC
284TSC
284TC
324TSC
324TC
364TSC
364TC
404TSC
404TC
444TSC
444TC
056C
1 45TC
1 84TC
21 5TC
256TC
286TSC
286TC
326TSC
326TC
365TSC
365TC
405TSC
405TC
449TSC
449TC
AH 2.062
2.1 25
2.625
3.1 25
3.75
3.00
4.375
3.50
5.00
3.50
5.625
4.00
7.00
4.50
8.25
U
5/8
7/8 1 1 /8
1 3/8
1 5/8
1 5/8
1 7/8
1 7/8
2 1 /8
1 7/8
2 3/8
2 1 /8
2 7/8
2 3/8
3 3/8
S 3/1 6
3/1 6
1 /4
5/1 6
3/8
3/8
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
5/8
1 /2
3/4
5/8
7/8
AK
4.50
4.50 8.50
8.50
8.50
1 0.50
1 0.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 6.00
1 6.00
AJ 5.875
5.875
7.25
7.25
7.25
9.00
9.00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 4.00 1 4.00
BF 3/8-1 6 3/8-1 6 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1
1 /4
1
3
7.5
1 5
25
25
40
40
60
60
1 00
1 00
1 50
1 50
HP*
1 /2
2
5
1 0
20
30
30
50
50
75
75
1 25
1 25
200
200
* Horse Power at 1750 RPM
Magnaloy Cast Aluminum Mounts
MAGNALOY CAST ALUMINUM MOUNTS are permanent mold cast of lightweight, high strength aluminum alloy
and incorporate many unique design features. Custom molded OSHA orange coupling access covers are
included for mounts larger than motor group size 056. These covers are quickly and securely retained via a lip-
tab on one end and a single self-tapping screw on the other. Magnaloy’s horizontal mounts are supplied with a
pre-cast drain hole for residual fluids. This unique feature assists in quick detection of leaky seals and other
trouble areas.
Using Magnaloy’s Pump/Motor Mounts ensure a lightweight, high strength, precision mount for efficient assembly,
quiet operation, accurate shaft alignment and complete coupling concealment.
Magnaloy Horizontal Pump/Motor Mounts
MAGNALOY’S HORIZONTAL PUMP/MOTOR MOUNTS are available for mounting NEMA C’Face motors in
frame sizes 56C through 449TSC to most SAE and Metric 2 and 4 bolt pump flanges.
A MOUNT KIT is included which contains all the bolts and washers required to attach the pump and motor to the
mount.
4 magnaloy coupling company 501 Commerce Drive Alpena, MI 49707 989 356-2186
A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989 354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Horizontal Pump/Motor Mounts
Horizontal Mount Selection Method
1. Check TABLES 2 thru 5 to determine pump flange size.
2. Measure the pump shaft length from the shaft end to the flange mounting face and ADD to the motor shaft length shown
in TABLE 6. An additional 1 /1 6 inch (minimum) is recommended for shaft end clearance.
3. Refer to the appropriate TABLE (7 thru 1 1 ) according to the NEMA motor frame size and locate the applicable pump
flange selection form STEP 1 , above.
4. Select the mount length option (dimension ‘XM’ or ‘M’ in tables) based on the minimum length determined in STEP 2,
above.
5. Check for proper clearance between the mount inner surfaces and the coupling O.D. (dimension ‘Z’ and ‘CL’ in tables).
Dimensional data for Magnaloy Couplings is shown in TABLE 1 for reference. A complete Magnaloy Coupling catalog is
available upon request or visit www.magnaloy.com.
Consult your Magnaloy Distributor for Magnaloy’s Product CD ROM which includes the Magnaloy Pump/Motor Mount
Selection Program for easy, computerized mount selection.
TABLE 7 - NEMA Frames 56C, 143TC/145TC, 182UC/184UC
Horizontal Mounting (or Vertical Mounting - Option A)
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 4.15
1
16
88
81
50
7/
6.
5.
4.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M056354F 2.81 3.50 M056424F 3.56 4.25 M056454F 3.81 4.50
SAE AA 2 Bolt 2.001 3.25 3/8-1 6 M056352AA 2.81 3.50 M056422AA 3.56 4.25 M056452AA 3.81 4.50
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M056352A 2.81 3.50 M056422A 3.56 4.25 M056452A 3.81 4.50
80 2A/B4 2(4) Bolt 80.01 mm 1 09mm 3/8-1 6 1 03mm 5/1 6-1 8 M0563580M 2.81 3.50 M0564280M 3.56 4.25 M0564580M 3.81 4.50
80 S4 4 Bolt 80.01 mm 1 00mm 5/1 6-1 8 M0563580MS 2.81 3.50 M0564280MS 3.56 4.25 M0564580MS 3.81 4.50
PUMP FLANGE PUMP END DATA 3.50 LENGTH 4.25 LENGTH 4.50 LENGTH
MOTOR END DATA

AJ BF BD AK
* RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 4.10
1
16
88
81
50
7/
5.
6.
4.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M056504F 4.31 5.00 M056524F 4.56 5.25
SAE AA 2 Bolt 2.001 3.25 3/8-1 6 M056502AA 4.31 5.00 M056522AA 4.56 5.25
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M056502A 4.31 5.00 M056522A 4.56 5.25
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M056502B* 3.93 5.00 M056522B* 4.1 8 5.25
80 2A/B4 2(4) Bolt 80.01 mm 1 09mm 3/8-1 6 1 03mm 5/1 6-1 8 M0565080M 4.31 5.00 M0565280M 4.56 5.25
80 S4 4 Bolt 80.01 mm 1 00mm 5/1 6-1 8 M0565080MS 4.31 5.00 M0565280MS 4.56 5.25
80 S4 4 Bolt 80.01 mm 1 00mm 5/1 6-1 8 M05650100M* 3.93 5.00 M05652100M* 4.1 8 5.25
PUMP FLANGE PUMP END DATA 5.00 LENGTH 5.25 LENGTH
magnaloy coupling company 501 Commerce Drive Alpena, MI 49707 989 356-2186 5
TABLE 8A - NEMA Frames 182TC - 256TC, 213UC - 256UC
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 5.00
182-A Casting
2
00
5
/3
50
2
9.
7.
17
8.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL M MOUNT NO. CL M MOUNT NO. CL M
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M182474F 4.00 4.75 M182504F 4.31 5.00 M182524F 4.31 5.25
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M182472A 4.00 4.75 M182502A 4.31 5.00 M182522A 4.31 5.25
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
2
00
5
/3
50
2
1 7
9.
7.
8.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL M MOUNT NO. CL M
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M182584F 5.06 5.81 M182684F 6.06 6.81
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M182582A 5.06 5.81 M182682A 6.06 6.81
TABLE 8B - NEMA Frames 182TC - 256TC, 213UC - 256UC
Horizontal Mounting
MOTOR END DATA
182-B Casting
00
5
/3
50
2
7.
9.
17
8.
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M182522B 4.50 5.25 M182582B 5.06 5.81 M182602B 5.25 6.00
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M182522C 4.50 5.25 M182582C 5.06 5.81 M182602C 5.25 6.00
100 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 00.01 mm 1 40mm 1 /2-1 3 1 25mm 3/8-1 6 M18252100M 4.50 5.25 M18258100M 5.06 5.81 M18260100M 5.25 6.00
125 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 25.01 mm 1 80mm 5/8-1 1 1 60mm 1 /2-1 3 M18252125M 4.50 5.25 M18258125M 5.06 5.81 M18260125M 5.25 6.00
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
1
00
25
/3
50
9.
7.
17
8.
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M1 82682B 6.06 6.81 M1 82702B 6.25 7.00
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M1 82682C 6.06 6.81 M182702C 6.25 7.00
1 00 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 00.01 mm 1 40mm 1 /2-1 3 1 25mm 3/8-1 6 M18268100M 6.06 6.81 M182701 00M 6.25 7.00
1 25 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 25.01 mm 1 80mm 5/8-1 1 1 60mm 1 /2-1 3 M18268125M 6.06 6.81 M182701 25M 6.25 7.00
TABLE 9 - NEMA Frames 284TC/TSC - 286TC/TSC, 284UC/286UC
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
0
1
2
0
00
/3
.0
.5
1 7
9.
11
10
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-63 M284682A 6.00 6.88 M284752A 6.62 7.50 M284862A 7.81 8.69
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M284682B 6.00 6.88 M284752B 6.62 7.50 M284862B 7.81 8.69
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M284682C 6.00 6.88 M284752C 6.62 7.50 M284862C 7.81 8.69
80 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 80.01 mm 1 09mm 3/8-1 6 1 03mm 5/1 6-1 8 M2846880M 6.00 6.88 M2847580M 6.62 7.50 M2848680M 7.81 8.69
1 00 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 00.01 mm 1 40mm 1 /2-1 3 1 25mm 3/8-1 6 M28468100M 6.00 6.88 M284751 00M 6.62 7.50 M284861 00M 7.81 8.69
1 25 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 25.01 mm 1 80mm 5/8-1 1 1 60mm 1 /2-1 3 M28468125M 6.00 6.88 M284751 25M 6.62 7.50 M284861 25M 7.81 8.69
TABLE 10 - NEMA Frames 324TC/TSC - 405TC/TSC, 324UC/USC - 405UC/USC
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
1
2
0
0
.0
0
/3
.0
.5
14
11
21
12
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M324762B 6.75 7.62 M324872B 7.88 8.75
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M324762C 6.75 7.62 M324872C 7.88 8.75
SAE D 2(4) Bolt 6.001 9.00 3/4-1 0 9.00 3/4-1 0 M324762D 6.75 7.62 M324872D 7.88 8.75
1 60 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 60.01 mm 224mm 3/4-1 0 200mm 5/8-1 1 M32476160M 6.75 7.62 M324871 60M 7.88 8.75
1 80 B4 4 Bolt 1 80.01 mm 224mm 5/8-1 1 M32476180M 6.75 7.62 M324871 80M 7.88 8.75
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 1 0.75
1
2
0
0
/3
.0
.0
.0
18
14
21
16
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL M
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M444882C 7.1 2 8.88
SAE D 2(4) Bolt 6.001 9.00 3/4-1 0 9.00 3/4-1 0 M444882D 7.1 2 8.88
SAE E 2 Bolt 6.501 1 2.50 1 -8 M444882E 7.1 2 8.88
PUMP FLANGE PUMP END DATA 8.88 LENGTH
TAB 23
Butterfly valve
AF-63, AF-80
Technical Data
description
order number size size A B C D E F
SAE DIN [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
AF 63 SDA0063 2 ½“ 65 89 50,8 111 119 1 61 20
AF 80 SDA0080 3“ 80 1 06,4 62 1 44 1 44 1 87 20
description order number G ØH M ØN NW TK weight
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
AF 63 SDA0063 40 83 M1 2 1 3,5 63 1 25 1 ,95
AF 80 SDA0080 41 97 M1 6 18 80 1 60 2,95
materials
housing GGG 40, cast iron
lever steel
valve disc aluminium
seals NBR
max. working pressure 7 bar
max. differential pressure 6 bar
temperature range -20°C to +80°C
options
limit switch mechanical or inductive type
Please read manual before use!
This data sheet shows a technical overview of our products. Please contact us if more exact information is needed. As we are constantly improving our products, their characteristics, dimensions and weights
may also change, although we do our best to incorporate these changes continually. The information in this data sheet is intended to be used as a first general guideline only. asa assumes no liability for any
information therein, any errors, omissions, misprints, nor any direct or indirect damages, losses or costs resulting therefrom. Do to the different installation conditions, we recommend all coolers to be checked
under the system operating conditions. This is also true of vibrations and mechanical stress as well as for pressure peaks and thermal stress and any other relevant factors.
© asa hydraulik, May 2009
TAB 24
Flow Control Valves
DV, DVE, & DVP Series
Needle Valves
Specifications
•
5000 psi operating Pressure
•
8 Sizes, 1/8” - 1-1/2”
•
SAE O-Ring, NPT or BSPP Threaded Connections;
Manifold Mounting; and Cartridge Type
•
Flows to 80 gpm
•
Carbon steel housing
•
FPM
(Fluoroelastomer) O-Rings (standard)
•
Color coded spindle for accurate flow control
•
Provision for panel mounting
DV Series
DVP Series
Inline Mounting
Manifold Mounting
•
Unique safety spindle design
•
Temperature Range: -4˚ to 212˚F at full pressure
Hydraulic Symbol
A B

DVE Series
Cartridge Valve
Model Code
DV - 06 - 01 .X / 5 - S - M
Needle Valve
DV
= Inline Mounting
DVP
= Manifold Mounting
DVE
= Cartridge Valve
Nominal Sizes
DV & DVP SAE (DV only)

NPTF (DV Only)
BSPP (DV Only)
Nom. Size Tube Size

Thread Size
Pipe Size Pipe OD
Thread Size
06
=
1/8” 0.405”
G1/8
08
= -4
7/16-20 UNF
1/4”
0.540”
G1/4
10 = -6
9/16-18 UNF
3/8”
0.675”
G3/8
12 = -8 3/4-16 UNF 1/2”

0.840”
G1/2
16
= -12
1-1/16-12 UN
3/4”
1.050”
G3/4
20
= -16
1-5/16-12 UN
1”
1.315”
G1
25 = -20
1-5/8-12 UN
1-1/4”
1.660”
G1 1/4
30 = -24 1-7/8-12 UN 1-1/2”

1.900
G1 1/2
DVE
Nom Size SAE Cavity

BSPP Cavity
08 = 3/4-16 UNF
G1/2
10 = 7/8-14 UNF
G1/2
12
= 1-1/16-12 UN
G3/4
16
= 1-5/16-12 UN G1
Housing Material
01 = Carbon Steel
Modification Number
Port Configuration
(omit)
= DVP Only
5
= NPTF - ANSI B1.20.3
12
= SAE - SAEJ1926 Ports with ISO 725 Threads and O-Ring Sealing
0
= BSPP to DIN 3852, Part 2-X
Supplementary Details
S = Panel Mounting Kit (not available in sizes 20, 25, 30)
Model Codes containing selections listed in RED are non-standard items – Minimum quantities will apply– Contact HYDAC forinformation and availability
Not all combinations are available
43 Accessories Catalog
Flow Control Valves
Pressure Drop Curves
DV, DVP, DRV, DRVP Series
Flow Direction: A to B / Throttled Flow
Size 06 Size 08 Size 10
Flow setting in turns

1 1 .5 2
2.5 3 1 2 3 4
56 1 2 3
4 5
1 00 1 00 7 1 00
80 80 80
6
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
60 60 60
40 4 40
40
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 10 20 30 40
50 0 10 20 30 40 50
60
Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
Size 12 Size 16
Size 20, 25, 30

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 1 2 3
4 5
6
1 00 1 00 8 1 00
80 80 9
80
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
10
60 60 60 7
40 40 40 8
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 15 30 45 60 75
90 0 30 60 90 1 20 1 50 1 80 0 50 1 00 1 50 200 250 300
Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
DVE Cartridge Flow Control Valves
Flow Direction: A to B / Throttled Flow
Size 08
Size 10

0.5 1
1 .5 2 3 0.5 1 1 .5 2 3 4 5
50 50
40 40
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
30 30
4 6
20 20
10 5
10 8
6 9
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
70 80
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
Size 12
Size 16

1 2 3 4
5 6 1 2 3 4
5 6
50 50
40 40
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
7
30
30 7
8
20 20
9
1 0
8
10 10
9
1 0
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 1 00 1 40 1 20 1 60 0 20 40 60 80 1 00 1 20 1 40 1 60
Pressure Drop curves were established by using mineral oil with kinematic viscosity 165 SUS at 112°F / 50°C
Accessories Catalog 44
Flow Control Valves
Dimensions
DV Series Inline Needle Valve
Hex extension
Knob for
Sizes 20-40
E
has Hex extension
for wrench
øG
Knob for
sizes 6-1 6 B
closed
øH required hole size

open
Panel Mount Kit

in panel
(Nut, Washer, Lock Washer)
J
Thickness
of panel
D
1 /4" max.
C
Model
Port Size
A B C D E F øG øH J 1) Hex Weight
Code
NPTF SAE
2.16
1.97
0.31
0.63
0.75
1.50
0.94
0.51
Pg 7
0.26
DV-06 1/8” 5/16-24UNF -

(55)
(50)
(8)
(16)
(19)
(38)
(24)
(13)
thread (0.12)
2.83
2.56
0.49
0.98
0.94
1.89
1.14
0.75
Pg 11
0.55
DV-08 1/4” 7/16-20UNF -

(72)
(65)
(12.5)
(25)
(24)
(48)
(29)
(19)
thread (0.25)
2.91
2.64
0.59
1.18
1.14
2.28
1.14
0.75
Pg 11
0.88
DV-10 3/8” 9/16-18UNF -

(74)
(67)
(15)
(30)
(29)
(58)
(29)
(19)
thread (0.40)
3.62
3.23
0.69
1.38
1.34
2.68
1.50
0.91
Pg 16
1.5
DV-12 1/2” 3/4-16UNF -

(92)
(82)
(17.5)
(35)
(34)
(68)
(38)
(23)
thread (0.70)
4.17
3.78
0.89
1.77
1.53
3.07
1.50
0.91
Pg 16
2.6
DV-16 3/4” 1-1/16-12UN -

(105)
(96)
(22.5)
(45)
(39)
(78)
(38)
(23)
thread (1.2)
5.71
5.04
0.98
1.97
2.13
4.25
1.93
1.50
Pg 29
3/4
4.6
DV-20 1” 1-5/16-12UN
(145)
(128)
(25)
(50)
(54)
(108)
(49)
(38)
thread
(19)
(2.1)
5.91
5.24
1.18
2.36
2.13
4.25
1.93
1.50
Pg 29
3/4
6.2
DV-25 1-1/4” 1-5/8-12UN

(150)
(133)
(30)
(60)
(54)
(108)
(49)
(38)
thread
(19)
(2.8)
6.10
5.43
1.38
2.76
2.13
4.25
1.93
1.50
Pg 29
3/4
7.7
DV-30 1-1/2” 1-7/8-12UN

(155)
(138)
(35)
(70)
(54)
(108)
(49)
(38)
thread
(19)
(3.5)
Panel Mount Kits
Size Model Code Part Number
6 Kit Panel Mount DV06 00705300
8/10 Kit Panel Mount DV08 00705310
12/16 Kit Panel Mount DV12 00705302
1) Note: Pg style thread per DIN 40430
Dimensions are for general information only, all critical dimensions should be verified by requesting a certified print.
Dimensions are in inches/(mm) and lbs./(kg.)
*Dependent upon valve and seal materials selected.
Flow Control Valves
Dimensions
DVP Manifold Mount Needle Valve
T øF
Knob for
B
sizes 6 - 1 6 closed
U
øC
open
S
øO øD
øP
M N Hex
K
L
Knob for
Sizes 20-40
has Hex extension
R G for wrench
Model
Nom.
A B øC øD E øF G (1 H J K L M N øO øP R S T U(2 Hex Wt.
Code
Size
2.48
2.28
.43
.26
.63
.94
.748
1.38
1.112
1.63
0.059
.630
0.197
0.382
0.315
0.35
0.37
Pg 7
0.44
DVP-06 1/8” – –
(63)
(58)
(11)
(6.6)
(16)
(24) (19)
(35)
(28.5)
(41.5)
(1.5)
(16)
(5)
(9.7)
(8)
(9)
(9.5)
thread (0.2)
3.11
2.83
.43
.26
.79
1.14
1.378
1.87
1.319
1.81
0.177
1.004
0.276
0.500
0.256
0.51
0.47
Pg 11
0.88
DVP-08 1/4” – –
(79)
(72)
(11)
(6.6)
(20)
(29) (35)
(47.5)
(33.5)
(46)
(4.5)
(25.5)
(7)
(12.7)
(6.5)
(13)
(12)
thread (0.4)
3.31
3.03
.43
.26
.98
1.14
1.319
2.01
1.496
2.01
0.165
1.004
0.394
0.614
0.335
0.71
0.55
Pg 11
1.3
DVP-10 3/8” – –
(84)
(77)
(11)
(6.6)
(25)
(29) (33.5)
(51)
(38)
(51)
(4.2)
(25.5)
(10)
(15.6)
(8.5)
(18)
(14)
thread (0.6)
3.90
3.50
.43
.26
.98
1.50
1.496
2.95
1.752
2.26
0.157
1.181
0.512
0.732
0.728
0.71
0.89
Pg 16
2.2
DVP-12 1/2” – –
(99)
(89)
(11)
(6.6)
(25)
(38) (38)
(75)
(44.5)
(57.5)
(4.0)
(30)
(13)
(18.6)
(18.5)
(18)
(22.5)
thread (1.0)
4.45
4.05
.55
.35
1.18
1.50
1.496
2.992
3.68
2.126
2.76
0.433
2.126
0.669
0.965
0.335
0.83
0.77
Pg 16
3.7
DVP-16 3/4” –
(113)
(103)
(14)
(9.0)
(30)
(38)
(38)
(76)
(93.5)
(54)
(70)
(11)
(54)
(17)
(24.5)
(8.5)
(21)
(19.5)
thread (1.7)
6.5
5.83
.55
.35
1.77
198
1.870
3.740
4.37
2.362
3.01
0.753
2.244
0.866
1.201
0.315
1.42
1.24
Pg 29
3/4
8.0
DVP-20 1”
(165)
(148)
(14)
(9.0)
(45)
(49)
(47.5)
(95)
(111)
(60)
(76.5)
(19.1)
(57)
(22)
(30.5)
(8)
(36)
(31.5)
thread
(19)
(3.6)
6.5
5.83
.71
.45
1.77
1.93
2.362
4.744
5.63
2.992
3.94
0.819
3.130
1.122
1.472
0.433
1.34
1.81
Pg 29
3/4
12.1
DVP-25 1 1/4”
(165)
(148)
(18)
(11.5)
(45)
(49)
(60)
(120.5)
(143)
(76)
(100)
(20.8)
(79.5)
(28.5)
(37.4)
(11)
(34)
(46)
thread
(19)
(5.5)
6.69
6.02
.79
.55
1.97
193
2.815
5.630
6.73
3.622
4.53
0.937
3.740
1.378
1.709
.591
1.46
1.53
Pg 29
3/4
16.6
DVP-30 1 1/2”
(170)
(153)
(20)
(14)
(50)
(49)
(71.5)
(143)
(171)
(92)
(115)
(23.8)
(95)
(35)
(43.4)
(15)
(37)
(39)
thread
(19)
(7.5)
DVE Cartridge Valve

øG
Size
A B C D øE øF øG H Hex Wgt
1.00
1.85
1.57
0.472
0.177
0.559
1.14
1 1/16
0.33
DVE-08 3/4-16UNF
4
(26)
(47)
(40)
(12)
(4.5)
(14.2)
(29) (27)
(0.15)
C
closed
1.18
2.52
2.13
0.492
0.315
0.622
1.50
1 1/16
0.55
DVE-10 7/8-14UNF
(30)
(64)
(54)
(12.5)
(8)
(15.8)
(38) (27)
(0.25)
B
open
1.57
2.56
2.17
0.531
0.375
0.807
1.50
1 5/16
1.10
DVE-12 1-1/16-12UNF
(40)
(65)
(55)
(13.5)
(9.5)
(20.5)
(38) (32)
(0.50)
Hex
1.71
2.56
2.17
0.689
0.433
1.060
1.50
1 5/8
1.54
DVE-16 1-5/16-12UNF
(43.5)
(65)
(55)
(17.5)
(11)
(26.9)
(38) (41)
(0.70)
OUT
D
1) Only 4 mounting holes are used on sizes 06, 08, 10, and 12
IN
2) Pg Style Thread per DIN 40430

øE
Note: Contact factory for certified drawing of cartridge valve cavity.
øF

H
TAB 25
High Pressure Filters
DF Series
Inline Filters
6000 PSI • up to 180 GPM Hydraulic Symbol:
INLET
Bypass
Filter
Element
Valve
Pop-up
Indicator
OUTLET
Features:
Technical Details:
• Non-welded housing design reduces stress concentrations and

Mounting Method 4 mounting holes
prevents fatigue failure.

Port Connection
30 SAE-8, 1 /2” NPT, 1 /2” BSPP
• Choice of NPT, SAE straight thread O-ring boss, and SAE 4-bolt
60/1 1 0 SAE-1 2, 3/4” NPT, 3/4” BSPP
flange porting (sizes 330 - 1320) to allow easy installation without

1 60/240/280 SAE-20, 1 1 /4” NPT, 1 1 /4” BSPP
costly adapters.
330/660/1 320 SAE-24, 1 1 /2” NPT, 1 1 /2” BSPP
• O-ring seals are used to provide positive, reliable sealing.

2” SAE Flange Code 62
Choice of O-ring materials (Nitrile, Fluoro Rubber, EPDM) pro- Flow Direction Inlet: Side Outlet: Side
vides compatibility with petroleum oils, synthetic fluids, water- Construction Materials
glycols, oil/water emulsions, and high water base fluids.

Head
Ductile iron
Bowl Steel
• Screw-in bowl mounted below the filter head requires minimal

Housing (1 320) Steel
clearance to remove the element for replacement, and contaminated

Cap (660 & 1 320 version 2) Ductile iron
fluid cannot be washed downstream when element is serviced.

Flow Capacity
• Differential Pressure Indicators. HYDAC indicators have no external

30 8 gpm (30 lpm)
60 1 6 gpm (60 lpm)
dynamic seal. This results in a high system reliability due to

110 29 gpm (1 1 0 lpm)
magnetic actuation, thus eliminating a potential leak point.

1 60 42 gpm (1 60 lpm)
• A poppet-type bypass valve (optional) is mounted in-line

240 63 gpm (240 lpm)
between the inlet and outlet ports to provide positive sealing

280 74 gpm (280 lpm)
330 87 gpm (330 lpm)
during normal operation and fast opening during cold starts and
660 1 74 gpm (660 lpm)
flow surges.
1 320 1 90 gpm (720 lpm)
• For special finishes and coatings – consult HYDAC for minimum

Housing Pressure Rating
quantities, availability and pricing.

Max. Operating Pressure
6000 psi (420 bar)
Proof Pressure 9000 psi (61 0 bar)
• Fatigue pressure ratings equals maximum allowable working

Fatigue Pressure 6000 psi (420 bar) @ 1 million cycles
pressure rating.
Burst Pressure 30 1 5950 psi (1 1 00 bar)
60/1 1 0 1 7400 psi (1 200 bar)
Applications: 1 60/240/280 1 71 1 0 psi (1 1 80 bar)
330/660/1 320 1 5080 psi (1 040 bar
Element Collapse Pressure Rating
BH/HC, V
3000 psid (207 bar)
BN/HC, W/HC 250 psid (1 7 bar)
Fluid Temperature Range -22° to 250°F (-30° to 1 21 °C)
Agricultural Automotive Construction Gearboxes

Fluid Compatability
Compatible with all petroleum oils and synthetic fluids rated for use
with Fluoro-Rubber or Ethylene Propylene seals. Contact HYDAC for
information on special housing and element constructions available for
use with water glycols, oil/water emulsions, and HWBF.
Indicator Trip Pressure
ΔP = 29 psid (2 bar) -1 0% (optional)
Industrial Offshore Commercial

Power
Municipal Generation
ΔP = 72 psid (5 bar) -1 0% (standard)
ΔP = 1 1 6 psid (8 bar) -1 0% (optional non bypass)
Bypass Valve Cracking Pressure
ΔP = 43 psid (3 bar) +1 0% (optional)
ΔP = 87 psid (6 bar) +1 0% (standard)
Non Bypass Available
Pulp & Paper Railways Shipbuilding Steel / Heavy
Industry
117 Filter Catalog
Model Code:
DF BH/HC 30 G 3 A 1 . 0 / 3 .
Filter Type
DF
= Inline filter
Element Media
BH/HC
= Betamicron®
High Collapse Disposable
BN/HC = Betamicron® Low Collapse
V = Metal Fiber Cleanable
W/HC = Wire Screen
Size and Nominal Connection
30
= 1 /2" BSPP /NPT / SAE 8
60 = 3/4" BSPP /NPT / SAE 1 2
110 = 3/4" BSPP /NPT / SAE 1 2
1 60 = 1 -1 /4" BSPP /NPT / SAE 20
240 = 1 -1 /4" BSPP /NPT / SAE 20
280 = 1 -1 /4" BSPP /NPT / SAE 20
330
= 1 -1 /2" BSPP /NPT / SAE 24
(or 2” Flange on DF model only)
660 = 1 -1 /2" BSPP /NPT / SAE 24 (or 2” Flange on DF model only)
1 320 = 1 -1 /2" BSPP /NPT / SAE 24 (or 2” Flange on DF model only)
Type of Connection
G = Threaded
F = Flange (onlyavailable on sizes 330, 660, & 1320)
Filtration Rating (microns)
3
Betamicron®
(BH/HC)
25
5 Betamicron® (BN/HC) 74 Wire Screen

1 49 Nominal Filtration Rating
20
(ßx(c) ≥ 1 000)
3
5
Metal Fiber
10 Nominal Filtration Rating
20
Type of ΔP Clogging Indicator
A
= no indicator
Indicator Model
B = visual (pop-up)(Automatic reset)

VD...B
BM = visual (pop-up)(manual reset)

VD...BM
C = electrical (electric switch)

VD...C
D = electrical/visual (lamp)(electric switch & light)

VD...D
J = electric switch (Brad Harrison, 5 pin mini)

VD...J
J4 = electric switch (Brad Harrison, 4 pin micro)

VD...J4
LE = visual-mechanical/electrical indicator VD...LE
LZ = visual-mechanical/electrical indicator with 75% and 1 00% switching contact VD...LZ
Type Number
1
= Sizes 30 to 660
2 = Sizes 660 to 1 320 (two-piece bowl)
Modification Number (latest version always supplied)
Port Configuration
0 =
BSPP
3 = NPT Ports
12 = SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss Ports
16 = SAE Flange Ports (sizes 330, 660, & 1320 only)
Seals
(omit)
=
Nitrile (NBR) (standard)
V = Fluoro Rubber (FKM)
EPR = Ethylene Propylene (EPDM)
Bypass Valve
(omit)
=
Without Bypass (BH3HC or V elements recommended)
B3 = 43PSID Bypass (optional)
B6 = 87PSID Bypass (standard)
Supplementary Details
SO1 03H =
Modification of BN3HC (Low Collapse) Element For Phosphate Esters
SO1 55H = Modification of BH3HC (High Collapse) Element For Phosphate Esters
SO1 84 = G-1 /2 Drain in Bowl Option For Sizes 60 - 280 (comes standard for sizes 330, 660, & 1320)
W = Indicator with brass piston (for use with water based fluids)
L24 = Lamp for 24 Volts
(D-type clogging indicator only)
L1 1 5 = Lamp for 1 1 5 Volts

T1 00 = Indicator Thermal Lockout, 1 00°F (Consult factoryon B & BM Indicators for thermal lockout)
Model Codes Containing Red are non-stock items — Minimum quantities may apply– Contact HYDAC for information and availability
Filter Catalog 118
DF Series
Dimensions:
DF30 10-32UNF x 0.24”
(6mm)
(4 Places)
DF1320 1 /2-20UNF x 0.67
M1 2 x 1 7
in 4 places
1.77”
ø 2.64”
(45mm) (67mm)
4.53”
(1 1 5mm)
6.26”
(1 59 mm)
5.43”
1.1 8”
(1 38mm)
(30mm)
2.72”
(69mm)
Indicator Port
2.36”
G 1 /2”
(60mm)
1320 G
1320 F
6.58”
6.30”
(1 67mm)
(1 60mm)
1.34”
(34mm)
0.650
(16.5 mm)
0.24”
INLET OUTLET (6mm)
2.05”
(52mm)
5.04”
(1 28mm) INLET OUTLET
3.46”
(88mm)
G 1 /2” Drain
Plug (optional)
3.00”
29.21 ”
ø 2.05”
(75mm)
(742mm)
(52mm)
Clearance Required
For Element Removal
DF 60-660 DF 60/110
DF 160/240/280
DF 330/660
1 .26”
1 .38”
2.36”
(32mm)
(35mm)
(60mm)
1 /4-28UNF x 0.35
(4 places)
DF 60/110
ø 3.31 ”
DF 60/11 0
(84mm)
2.21 ”
(56mm)
DF 1 60/240/280
4.41 ”
ø 4.57”
DF 160/240/280
(1 1 2mm)
(1 1 6mm)
3.45”
(85mm)
DF 330/660
ø 6.30”
DF 330/660
(1 60mm)
4.53”
(1 1 5mm)
DF 60/11 0
DF 1 60/240/280
DF 330/660
Drain Plug
3.62”
5.04”
6.38”
G 1 /2”
26.38”
(92mm)
(1 28mm)
(1 62mm)
5.20”
(670mm)
0.28”
Clearance Required
Indicator Port
(1 32mm)
G 1 /2”
(7mm)
for Element Removal
5.98”
DF 60/11 0
(1 52mm)
1 .61 ”
(41 mm)
DF 1 60/240/280
1 .89”
SAE-32 Flange Code 62
INLET OUTLET
(48mm)
DF 330/660
DF 330, 660 & 1320 F only
2.01 ”
(51 mm)
3.81 ”
DF 60
(97mm)
5.55”
DF 280
(1 41 mm)
1 7.1 3”
3/4-1 0UNC-2B x 1 .00”
DF 60
DF 1 10
(435mm)
(25mm)
3.35”
8.1 1 ”
DF 330
(85mm)
DF 280
(206mm)
(4 Places)
1 3.70”
9.92”
DF 11 0
(348mm)
DF 1 60
(252mm)
6.06”
DF 330
7.48”
(1 54mm)
DF 660
6.54”
(1 90mm)
1 6.65”
DF 160
(1 66mm)
DF 240
(423mm)
1 .750
4.61 ”
9.88”
(1 1 7mm)
DF 660
1 3.27”
(251 mm)
44.5
DF 240
(337mm)
6.93”
(1 76mm)
Drain Plug
G 1 /2”
(optional for sizes 30-280)
DF 60/110
DF 160/240/280
DF 330/660
2.68”
3.74”
5.1 2”
(68mm)
(95mm)
(1 30mm)
Size
30
60
110
160
240
280
330
660
1320
Weight (lbs.) 4.0

8.6
1 2.6
20.0
23.4
32.0
47.2
62.4
1 05.8
Dimensions shown are for general information and overall envelope size only. Weights listed are without element.
For complete dimensions please contact HYDAC to request a certified print.
119 Filter Catalog
Sizing Information:
Housing Curves
Assembly ΔP = Housing ΔP (from curves) + Flow (in GPM) x K Factor (from chart)
Adjustments must be made for viscosity & specific gravity of the fluid to be used! (see sizing section)
DF 30 Housing
DF 60 / 1 1 0 Housings
Q in l/min
Q in l/min
0 5 1 0 1 5 20 25 30
0 1 5 30 45 60 75 90 1 05
20 30 2.0
1 .2 25
15 1 .0 1 .5
∆P in bar
20
∆P in bar
∆P in psi
∆P in psi
0.8
10 15 1 .5
0.6
0.4 1 0
5 0.5
0.2 5
0 0 0 0
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 0 5 1 0 1 5 20 25 30
Q in gpm
Q in gpm
DF 1 60 / 240 / 280 Housings

DF 330 / 660 /1 320 Hou
Q in l/min
Q in l/min
0 40 80 1 20 1 60 200
0 1 20 240 360 480 60
20 25
1 .2
20
∆P in psi
1 5
1 .0
∆P in bar
1 5
∆P in psi
0.8
10
0.6
1 0
5 0.4
5
0.2
0 0 0
0 10 20 30
40 50 60 0 30 60 90 1 20 1 50
Q in gpm Q in gpm
Element K Factors:
...D...BN3HC (Betamicron® Low Collapse) ...D...BH3HC (Betamicron® High Collapse)
Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm
0030 2.480 1 .897 1 .768 0.979 0030 4.466 3.978 3.096 1 .795
0060 2.334 1 .785 1 .664 0.921 0060 3.054 2.720 2.1 1 7 1 .227
01 1 0 1 .1 1 4 0.852 0.794 0.440 01 1 0 1 .401 1 .248 0.972 0.563
01 60 0.675 0.51 6 0.481 0.266 01 60 0.872 0.777 0.605 0.351
0240 0.41 5 0.31 7 0.296 0.1 64 0240 0.522 0.465 0.362 0.21 0
0280 0.1 91 0.1 46 0.1 36 0.075 0280 0.234 0.208 0.1 62 0.094
0330 0.266 0.204 0.1 90 0.1 05 0330 0.369 0.328 0.256 0.1 48
0660 0.1 22 0.093 0.087 0.048 0660 0.1 66 0.1 48 0.1 1 5 0.067
1 320 0.058 0.043 0.031 0.024 1 320 0.077 0.046 0.033 0.027
…D…V Elements
…D…W/HC Elements
Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 25, 50, 74, 100, 149, 200 µm
0030 1 .01 1 0.740 0.41 1 0.200 0030 0.1 85
0060 0.877 0.51 1 0.296 0.1 83 0060 0.092
01 1 0 0.452 0.304 0.1 82 0.1 1 8 01 1 0 0.050
01 60 0.251 0.1 77 0.1 23 0.079 01 60 0.035
0240 0.1 69 0.1 37 0.093 0.062 0240 0.023
0280 0.1 26 0.093 0.064 0.041 0280 0.020
0330 0.1 21 0.097 0.065 0.043 0330 0.020
0660 0.063 0.050 0.034 0.021 0660 0.008
1 320 0.032 0.026 0.01 8 0.01 2 1 320 0.004
Filter Catalog 120
TAB 26
TAB 27
Flow Control Valves
RV & RVP Series
Check Valves
Specifications
•
5000 psi operating pressure
•
9 Sizes, 1/8” - 2”
•
NPT or SAE O-Ring connections and manifold mounting
•
Flows to 150 gpm
•
Carbon Steel Housing
•
FPM
(Fluoroelastomer) O-Rings (forRVP series)
•
Metal to metal seal design for poppet
•
Hardened and ground steel poppet
• 3 Cracking Pressures: 7 psi
(standard), 25 psi and 65 psi (optional)
RV Series
RVP Series
• Temperature Range: -4° to 212°F at full pressure
Inline Mounting
Manifold Mounting
Hydraulic Symbol
B A
Model Code
RV - 06 - 01 .X / 5 - 25
Check Valve
RV
=
Inline Mounting
RVP
=
Manifold Mounting
Nominal Sizes
Nom Size
SAE (RV Only)
NPTF (RV Only)
BSPP (RV Only)
(RV + RVP)
Tube Size
Thread Size
Pipe Size
Pipe OD
Thread Size
06 =
-2
5/16-24 UNF
1/8”
0.405”
G1/8
08 = -4
7/16-20 UNF
1/4”
0.540”
G1/4
10 = -6 9/16-18 UNF
3/8”
0.675”
G3/8
12 = -8 3/4-16 UNF 1/2”

0.840”
G1/2
16 = -12 1-1/16-12 UN 3/4” 1.050’

G3/4
20
= -16 1-5/16-12 UN 1” 1.315”
G1
25
=
-20
1-5/8-12 UN
1-1/4”
1.660”
G1 1/4
30
=
-24
1-7/8-12 UN
1-1/2”
1.900”
G1 1/2
40 =
-32
2-1/2-12 UN 2” 2.375”
G2
Housing Material
01 = Carbon Steel
Port Configuration
(omit)
=
RVP only
0
=
BSPP to DIN 3852, Part 2-X
5 =
NPTF - ANSI/ASME 1.20.3 Taper Pipe Thread
12 =
SAE - SAEJ1926 Ports with ISO 725 Threads and O-Ring Sealing
Cracking Pressure
(omit)
=
7 psi (standard)
25
=
25 psi
65 =
65 psi
Note: Not recommended for high-cycle applications!
Flow Control Valves
Flow Direction: B to A / Free Flow Through Check Valve (A to B is CompletelyBlocked)
RV-06... to RV-16... RV-20... to RV-40... RVP-06... to RVP-16... RVP-20... to RVP-40...
RV-06 RV-08 RV-1 0

10 10 20 1 0
RVP-1 2
RV-1 2
1 8
RV-20
8 8
1 6
RVP-08 8
RVP-20
∆p (bar)
RV-25
RVP-25
p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1 4
p (bar)
RVP-1 0
6 6 RV-30
1 2
6
RV-1 6 RVP-06 RVP-1 6

1 0
RVP-30
4 4 8
4
RV-40
6
RVP-40
2 2
4
2
2
0 0 0 0
0 40 80 1 20 1 60 200 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600
0 40 80 1 20 1 60 200 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600
Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
Dimensions
RV Inline Check Valves
Model
Port Size
Hex L Weight
Code
NPT SAE
11/16
1.77
0.22
RV-06 1/8” 5/16-24 UNF

(17)
(45)
(0.1)
2.17
0.44
RV-08 1/4” 7/16-20 UNF 3/4 (19)

(55)
(0.2)
2.60
0.44
RV-10 3/8” 9/16-18 UNF 1 (24)
(65)
(0.2)
B A
RV-12 1/2” 3/4-16 UNF
1 1/4
2.87
0.66
(30)
(73)
(0.3)
1 7/16
3.46
1.1
RV-16 3/4” 1 1/16-12 UN

(36)
(88)
(0.5)
1 13/16
5.00
2.4
Hex RV-20 1” 1 5/16-12 UN

L (46)
(127)
(1.1)
2 3/8
5.63
4.0
RV-25 1-1/4” 1 5/8-12 UN

(60)
(143)
(1.8)
2 9/16
5.63
5.7
RV-30 1-1/2” 1 7/8-12 UN

(65)
(143)
(2.6 )
3 3/16
6.50
9.7
RV-40 2” 2 1/2-12 UN
(80)
(165)
(4.4)
RVP Manifold Mounted Check Valves
Model
Port Size
D E F(1 G H J K L M N O R Wgt
Code
A B C
ØM 1.63
1.12
1.31
1.63
0.75
0.25
0.06
0.63
0.38
0.2
0.43
0.35
0.63
0.26
0.4
RVP-06 –
(41.5)
(28.5)
(46)
(41.5)
(19) (6.4)
(1.6)
(16)
(9.7)
(5)
(11)
(9)
(16)
(6.6)
(0.2)
N
O 1.81
1.32
2.64
2.5
1.38
0.56
0.19
1.00
0.50
0.28
0.43
0.51
0.79
0.26
0.9
RVP-08 –
(46)
(33.5)
(67)
(63.5)
(35) (14.2)
(4.8)
(25.5)
(12.7)
(7)
(11)
(13)
(20)
(6.6)
(0.4)
ØL Ø R
2.01
1.50
2.81
2.76
1.32
0.71
0.16
1.00
0.61
0.39
0.43
0.71
0.98
0.26
1.1
RVP-10 –
ØK (51)
(38)
(74)
(70)
(33.5) (18)
(4)
(25.5)
(15.6)
(10)
(11)
(18)
(25)
(6.6)
(0.5)
H J 2.26
1.75
3.33
3.15
1.50
0.83
0.16
1.18
0.73
0.51
0.43
0.98
1.26
0.26
2.2
RVP-12 –
(57.5)
(44.5)
(84.5)
(80)
(38) (21)
(4)
(30)
(18.6)
(13)
(11)
(25)
(32)
(6.6)
(1.0)
2.76
2.13
4.31
4.09
2.99
1.50
0.55
0.43
2.13
0.96
0.67
0.55
1.42
1.77
0.35
4.6
B A
RVP-16
B A
(70)
(54)
(109.5)
(104)
(76)
(38)
(14)
(11)
(54)
(24.5)
(17)
(14)
(36)
(45)
(9)
(2.1)
3.01
2.36
5.24
5.00
3.74
1.87
0.63
0.75
2.24
1.20
0.87
0.55
1.61
1.97
0.35
7.3
RVP-20
(76.5)
(60)
(133)
(127)
(95)
(47.5)
(16)
(19)
(57)
(30.5)
(22)
(14)
(41)
(50)
(9)
(3.3)
G F
3.94
2.99
6.77
6.50
4.74
2.36
0.59
0.81
3.13
1.47
1.12
0.71
1.73
2.17
0.45
12.8
RVP-25
E
(100)
(76)
(172)
(165)
(120.5)
(60)
(15)
(20.6)
(79.5)
(37.4)
(28.5)
(18)
(44)
(55)
(11.5)
(5.8)
C
4.53
3.62
7.72
7.32
5.63
2.81
0.59
0.94
3.74
1.71
1.38
0.79
2.44
2.95
0.55
22.7
RVP-30
(115)
(92)
(196)
(186)
(143)
(71.5)
(15)
(23.8)
(95)
(43.4)
(35)
(20)
(62)
(75)
(14)
(10.3)
5.51
4.37
7.91
7.56
5.26
2.64
0.63
1.00
3.50
2.25
1.85
0.79
3.43
3.94
0.55
39.5
RVP-40
(140)
(111)
(201)
(192)
(133.5)
(67)
(16)
(25.5)
(89)
(57.2)
(47)
(20)
(87)
(100)
(14)
(17.9)
1) Only 4 mounting holes are used on sizes 06, 08, 10, & 12
TAB 28
DOCUMENTATION
NOT AVAILABLE
AT TIME OF
MANUAL
SUBMISSION.
INFORMATION
WILL BE
PROVIDED AS A
FOLLOW-UP.
TAB 29
TAB 30
NEMA Frame Motors
TABLE 6 - NEMA ‘C’ Face Motor Dimensions
U-Frame Dimensions
1 82UC
21 3UC
254UC
284UC
324USC
324UC
364USC
364UC
404USC
404UC
444USC
444UC
1 84UC
21 5UC
256UC
286UC
326USC
326UC
365USC
365UC
405USC
405UC
445USC
445UC
AH
2.1 25
2.75
3.50
4.625
3.00
5.375
3.50
6.1 25
4.00
6.875
4.00
8.375
U
7/8 1 1 /8 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 2 1 /8 2 1 /8 2 3/8 2 1 /8 2 7/8
S 3/1 6
1 /4 5/1 6
3/8
3/8
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
5/8
1 /2
3/4
AK 4.50 8.50
8.50 1 0.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 6.00
1 6.00
AJ 5.875 7.25 7.25 9.00

1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 4.00
1 4.00
BF 3/8-1 6 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1
1
3
7.5
1 5
25
25
40
40
60
60
1 25
1 25
HP*
2
5
1 0
20
30
30
50
35
75
75
1 50
1 50
T-Frame Dimensions
1 43TC
1 82TC
21 3TC
254TC
284TSC
284TC
324TSC
324TC
364TSC
364TC
404TSC
404TC
444TSC
444TC
056C
1 45TC
1 84TC
21 5TC
256TC
286TSC
286TC
326TSC
326TC
365TSC
365TC
405TSC
405TC
449TSC
449TC
AH 2.062
2.1 25
2.625
3.1 25
3.75
3.00
4.375
3.50
5.00
3.50
5.625
4.00
7.00
4.50
8.25
U
5/8
7/8 1 1 /8
1 3/8
1 5/8
1 5/8
1 7/8
1 7/8
2 1 /8
1 7/8
2 3/8
2 1 /8
2 7/8
2 3/8
3 3/8
S 3/1 6
3/1 6
1 /4
5/1 6
3/8
3/8
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
1 /2
5/8
1 /2
3/4
5/8
7/8
AK
4.50
4.50 8.50
8.50
8.50
1 0.50
1 0.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 2.50
1 6.00
1 6.00
AJ 5.875
5.875
7.25
7.25
7.25
9.00
9.00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 1 .00
1 4.00 1 4.00
BF 3/8-1 6 3/8-1 6 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 1 /2-1 3 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1 5/8-1 1
1 /4
1
3
7.5
1 5
25
25
40
40
60
60
1 00
1 00
1 50
1 50
HP*
1 /2
2
5
1 0
20
30
30
50
50
75
75
1 25
1 25
200
200
* Horse Power at 1750 RPM
Magnaloy Cast Aluminum Mounts
MAGNALOY CAST ALUMINUM MOUNTS are permanent mold cast of lightweight, high strength aluminum alloy
and incorporate many unique design features. Custom molded OSHA orange coupling access covers are
included for mounts larger than motor group size 056. These covers are quickly and securely retained via a lip-
tab on one end and a single self-tapping screw on the other. Magnaloy’s horizontal mounts are supplied with a
pre-cast drain hole for residual fluids. This unique feature assists in quick detection of leaky seals and other
trouble areas.
Using Magnaloy’s Pump/Motor Mounts ensure a lightweight, high strength, precision mount for efficient assembly,
quiet operation, accurate shaft alignment and complete coupling concealment.
Magnaloy Horizontal Pump/Motor Mounts
MAGNALOY’S HORIZONTAL PUMP/MOTOR MOUNTS are available for mounting NEMA C’Face motors in
frame sizes 56C through 449TSC to most SAE and Metric 2 and 4 bolt pump flanges.
A MOUNT KIT is included which contains all the bolts and washers required to attach the pump and motor to the
mount.
Horizontal Mount Selection Method
1. Check TABLES 2 thru 5 to determine pump flange size.
2. Measure the pump shaft length from the shaft end to the flange mounting face and ADD to the motor shaft length shown
in TABLE 6. An additional 1 /1 6 inch (minimum) is recommended for shaft end clearance.
3. Refer to the appropriate TABLE (7 thru 1 1 ) according to the NEMA motor frame size and locate the applicable pump
flange selection form STEP 1 , above.
4. Select the mount length option (dimension ‘XM’ or ‘M’ in tables) based on the minimum length determined in STEP 2,
above.
5. Check for proper clearance between the mount inner surfaces and the coupling O.D. (dimension ‘Z’ and ‘CL’ in tables).
Dimensional data for Magnaloy Couplings is shown in TABLE 1 for reference. A complete Magnaloy Coupling catalog is
available upon request or visit www.magnaloy.com.
Consult your Magnaloy Distributor for Magnaloy’s Product CD ROM which includes the Magnaloy Pump/Motor Mount
Selection Program for easy, computerized mount selection.
TABLE 7 - NEMA Frames 56C, 143TC/145TC, 182UC/184UC
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
1
16
88
81
50
7/
6.
5.
4.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M056354F 2.81 3.50 M056424F 3.56 4.25 M056454F 3.81 4.50
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M056352A 2.81 3.50 M056422A 3.56 4.25 M056452A 3.81 4.50
MOTOR END DATA

AJ BF BD AK
* RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 4.10
1
16
88
81
50
7/
5.
6.
4.
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL XM MOUNT NO. CL XM
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M056504F 4.31 5.00 M056524F 4.56 5.25
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M056502A 4.31 5.00 M056522A 4.56 5.25
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M056502B* 3.93 5.00 M056522B* 4.1 8 5.25
80 S4 4 Bolt 80.01 mm 1 00mm 5/1 6-1 8 M05650100M* 3.93 5.00 M05652100M* 4.1 8 5.25
TABLE 8A - NEMA Frames 182TC - 256TC, 213UC - 256UC
MOTOR END DATA
182-A Casting
2
00
5
/3
50
2
9.
7.
17
8.
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M182474F 4.00 4.75 M182504F 4.31 5.00 M182524F 4.31 5.25
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M182472A 4.00 4.75 M182502A 4.31 5.00 M182522A 4.31 5.25
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
2
00
5
/3
50
2
1 7
9.
7.
8.
USA4F17 4 Bolt 1 .782 2.84 5/1 6-1 8 M182584F 5.06 5.81 M182684F 6.06 6.81
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-1 6 M182582A 5.06 5.81 M182682A 6.06 6.81
TABLE 8B - NEMA Frames 182TC - 256TC, 213UC - 256UC
Horizontal Mounting
MOTOR END DATA
182-B Casting
00
5
/3
50
2
7.
9.
17
8.
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M182522B 4.50 5.25 M182582B 5.06 5.81 M182602B 5.25 6.00
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M182522C 4.50 5.25 M182582C 5.06 5.81 M182602C 5.25 6.00
100 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 00.01 mm 1 40mm 1 /2-1 3 1 25mm 3/8-1 6 M18252100M 4.50 5.25 M18258100M 5.06 5.81 M18260100M 5.25 6.00
125 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 25.01 mm 1 80mm 5/8-1 1 1 60mm 1 /2-1 3 M18252125M 4.50 5.25 M18258125M 5.06 5.81 M18260125M 5.25 6.00
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
1
00
25
/3
50
9.
7.
17
8.
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M1 82682B 6.06 6.81 M1 82702B 6.25 7.00
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M1 82682C 6.06 6.81 M182702C 6.25 7.00
TABLE 9 - NEMA Frames 284TC/TSC - 286TC/TSC, 284UC/286UC
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
0
1
2
0
00
/3
.0
.5
1 7
9.
11
10
SAE A 2(4) Bolt 3.251 4.1 9 3/8-1 6 4.1 2 3/8-63 M284682A 6.00 6.88 M284752A 6.62 7.50 M284862A 7.81 8.69
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M284682B 6.00 6.88 M284752B 6.62 7.50 M284862B 7.81 8.69
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M284682C 6.00 6.88 M284752C 6.62 7.50 M284862C 7.81 8.69
80 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 80.01 mm 1 09mm 3/8-1 6 1 03mm 5/1 6-1 8 M2846880M 6.00 6.88 M2847580M 6.62 7.50 M2848680M 7.81 8.69
1 00 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 00.01 mm 1 40mm 1 /2-1 3 1 25mm 3/8-1 6 M28468100M 6.00 6.88 M284751 00M 6.62 7.50 M284861 00M 7.81 8.69
1 25 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 25.01 mm 1 80mm 5/8-1 1 1 60mm 1 /2-1 3 M28468125M 6.00 6.88 M284751 25M 6.62 7.50 M284861 25M 7.81 8.69
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
1
2
0
0
.0
0
/3
.0
.5
14
11
21
12
SAE B 2(4) Bolt 4.001 5.75 1 /2-1 3 5.00 1 /2-1 3 M324762B 6.75 7.62 M324872B 7.88 8.75
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M324762C 6.75 7.62 M324872C 7.88 8.75
SAE D 2(4) Bolt 6.001 9.00 3/4-1 0 9.00 3/4-1 0 M324762D 6.75 7.62 M324872D 7.88 8.75
1 60 A2/B4 2(4) Bolt 1 60.01 mm 224mm 3/4-1 0 200mm 5/8-1 1 M32476160M 6.75 7.62 M324871 60M 7.88 8.75
1 80 B4 4 Bolt 1 80.01 mm 224mm 5/8-1 1 M32476180M 6.75 7.62 M324871 80M 7.88 8.75
MOTOR END DATA
AJ BF BD AK
RADIAL CLEARANCE “Z” = 1 0.75
1
2
0
0
/3
.0
.0
.0
18
14
21
16
XAK XAJ2 XBF2 XAJ4 XBF4 MOUNT NO. CL M
SAE C 2(4) Bolt 5.001 7.1 2 5/8-1 1 6.38 1 /2-1 3 M444882C 7.1 2 8.88
SAE D 2(4) Bolt 6.001 9.00 3/4-1 0 9.00 3/4-1 0 M444882D 7.1 2 8.88
SAE E 2 Bolt 6.501 1 2.50 1 -8 M444882E 7.1 2 8.88
PUMP FLANGE PUMP END DATA 8.88 LENGTH
TAB 31
TAB 32
Flow Control Valves
RV & RVP Series
Check Valves
Specifications
•
5000 psi operating pressure
•
9 Sizes, 1/8” - 2”
•
NPT or SAE O-Ring connections and manifold mounting
•
Flows to 150 gpm
•
Carbon Steel Housing
•
FPM
(Fluoroelastomer) O-Rings (forRVP series)
•
Metal to metal seal design for poppet
•
Hardened and ground steel poppet
• 3 Cracking Pressures: 7 psi
(standard), 25 psi and 65 psi (optional)
RV Series
RVP Series
• Temperature Range: -4° to 212°F at full pressure
Inline Mounting
Manifold Mounting
Hydraulic Symbol
B A
Model Code
RV - 06 - 01 .X / 5 - 25
Check Valve
RV
=
Inline Mounting
RVP
=
Manifold Mounting
Nominal Sizes
Nom Size
SAE (RV Only)
NPTF (RV Only)
BSPP (RV Only)
(RV + RVP)
Tube Size
Thread Size
Pipe Size
Pipe OD
Thread Size
06 =
-2
5/16-24 UNF
1/8”
0.405”
G1/8
08 = -4
7/16-20 UNF
1/4”
0.540”
G1/4
10 = -6 9/16-18 UNF
3/8”
0.675”
G3/8
12 = -8 3/4-16 UNF 1/2”

0.840”
G1/2
16 = -12 1-1/16-12 UN 3/4” 1.050’

G3/4
20
= -16 1-5/16-12 UN 1” 1.315”
G1
25
=
-20
1-5/8-12 UN
1-1/4”
1.660”
G1 1/4
30
=
-24
1-7/8-12 UN
1-1/2”
1.900”
G1 1/2
40 =
-32
2-1/2-12 UN 2” 2.375”
G2
Housing Material
01 = Carbon Steel
Port Configuration
(omit)
=
RVP only
0
=
BSPP to DIN 3852, Part 2-X
5 =
NPTF - ANSI/ASME 1.20.3 Taper Pipe Thread
12 =
SAE - SAEJ1926 Ports with ISO 725 Threads and O-Ring Sealing
Cracking Pressure
(omit)
=
7 psi (standard)
25
=
25 psi
65 =
65 psi
Note: Not recommended for high-cycle applications!
Flow Control Valves
Flow Direction: B to A / Free Flow Through Check Valve (A to B is CompletelyBlocked)
RV-06... to RV-16... RV-20... to RV-40... RVP-06... to RVP-16... RVP-20... to RVP-40...
RV-06 RV-08 RV-1 0

10 10 20 1 0
RVP-1 2
RV-1 2
1 8
RV-20
8 8
1 6
RVP-08 8
RVP-20
∆p (bar)
RV-25
RVP-25
p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1 4
p (bar)
RVP-1 0
6 6 RV-30
1 2
6
RV-1 6 RVP-06 RVP-1 6

1 0
RVP-30
4 4 8
4
RV-40
6
RVP-40
2 2
4
2
2
0 0 0 0
0 40 80 1 20 1 60 200 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600
0 40 80 1 20 1 60 200 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600
Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
Dimensions
RV Inline Check Valves
Model
Port Size
Hex L Weight
Code
NPT SAE
11/16
1.77
0.22
RV-06 1/8” 5/16-24 UNF

(17)
(45)
(0.1)
2.17
0.44
RV-08 1/4” 7/16-20 UNF 3/4 (19)

(55)
(0.2)
2.60
0.44
RV-10 3/8” 9/16-18 UNF 1 (24)
(65)
(0.2)
B A
RV-12 1/2” 3/4-16 UNF
1 1/4
2.87
0.66
(30)
(73)
(0.3)
1 7/16
3.46
1.1
RV-16 3/4” 1 1/16-12 UN

(36)
(88)
(0.5)
1 13/16
5.00
2.4
Hex RV-20 1” 1 5/16-12 UN

L (46)
(127)
(1.1)
2 3/8
5.63
4.0
RV-25 1-1/4” 1 5/8-12 UN

(60)
(143)
(1.8)
2 9/16
5.63
5.7
RV-30 1-1/2” 1 7/8-12 UN

(65)
(143)
(2.6 )
3 3/16
6.50
9.7
RV-40 2” 2 1/2-12 UN
(80)
(165)
(4.4)
RVP Manifold Mounted Check Valves
Model
Port Size
D E F(1 G H J K L M N O R Wgt
Code
A B C
ØM 1.63
1.12
1.31
1.63
0.75
0.25
0.06
0.63
0.38
0.2
0.43
0.35
0.63
0.26
0.4
RVP-06 –
(41.5)
(28.5)
(46)
(41.5)
(19) (6.4)
(1.6)
(16)
(9.7)
(5)
(11)
(9)
(16)
(6.6)
(0.2)
N
O 1.81
1.32
2.64
2.5
1.38
0.56
0.19
1.00
0.50
0.28
0.43
0.51
0.79
0.26
0.9
RVP-08 –
(46)
(33.5)
(67)
(63.5)
(35) (14.2)
(4.8)
(25.5)
(12.7)
(7)
(11)
(13)
(20)
(6.6)
(0.4)
ØL Ø R
2.01
1.50
2.81
2.76
1.32
0.71
0.16
1.00
0.61
0.39
0.43
0.71
0.98
0.26
1.1
RVP-10 –
ØK (51)
(38)
(74)
(70)
(33.5) (18)
(4)
(25.5)
(15.6)
(10)
(11)
(18)
(25)
(6.6)
(0.5)
H J 2.26
1.75
3.33
3.15
1.50
0.83
0.16
1.18
0.73
0.51
0.43
0.98
1.26
0.26
2.2
RVP-12 –
(57.5)
(44.5)
(84.5)
(80)
(38) (21)
(4)
(30)
(18.6)
(13)
(11)
(25)
(32)
(6.6)
(1.0)
2.76
2.13
4.31
4.09
2.99
1.50
0.55
0.43
2.13
0.96
0.67
0.55
1.42
1.77
0.35
4.6
B A
RVP-16
B A
(70)
(54)
(109.5)
(104)
(76)
(38)
(14)
(11)
(54)
(24.5)
(17)
(14)
(36)
(45)
(9)
(2.1)
3.01
2.36
5.24
5.00
3.74
1.87
0.63
0.75
2.24
1.20
0.87
0.55
1.61
1.97
0.35
7.3
RVP-20
(76.5)
(60)
(133)
(127)
(95)
(47.5)
(16)
(19)
(57)
(30.5)
(22)
(14)
(41)
(50)
(9)
(3.3)
G F
3.94
2.99
6.77
6.50
4.74
2.36
0.59
0.81
3.13
1.47
1.12
0.71
1.73
2.17
0.45
12.8
RVP-25
E
(100)
(76)
(172)
(165)
(120.5)
(60)
(15)
(20.6)
(79.5)
(37.4)
(28.5)
(18)
(44)
(55)
(11.5)
(5.8)
C
4.53
3.62
7.72
7.32
5.63
2.81
0.59
0.94
3.74
1.71
1.38
0.79
2.44
2.95
0.55
22.7
RVP-30
(115)
(92)
(196)
(186)
(143)
(71.5)
(15)
(23.8)
(95)
(43.4)
(35)
(20)
(62)
(75)
(14)
(10.3)
5.51
4.37
7.91
7.56
5.26
2.64
0.63
1.00
3.50
2.25
1.85
0.79
3.43
3.94
0.55
39.5
RVP-40
(140)
(111)
(201)
(192)
(133.5)
(67)
(16)
(25.5)
(89)
(57.2)
(47)
(20)
(87)
(100)
(14)
(17.9)
1) Only 4 mounting holes are used on sizes 06, 08, 10, & 12
TAB 33
TAB 34
VC HEATERS
Immersion Heaters
Features
• Keeps oil at 60° to 70° F.
• Automatic built-in fixed setting thermostat normally closed
• Will not burn oil
• UL recognized and CSA certified
• Weatherproof wiring enclosure (NEMA 4)
Notes
1. Heaters must be mounted horizontally and
immersed at all times.
2. Heaters over 10 amps, 480 volt, or three phase,
must be used with a contactor. See instruction sheet.
3. Three phase available on ET 8 models.
Add -3 to the model number. Example: ET 8-2502-3.
4. For tanks larger then 500 gallon use multiple heaters
or consult factory for information on higher wattage
heaters.
5. Amps = Watts ÷ Volts for single phase.
6. Amps = Watts ÷ (Volts x 1.73) for three phase.
Vescor
NPT Size Dimensions
Part Reservoir Wattage Volts

Number
Size - Gals
F G A B C D E W
1 1
ET 2-121 up to 10 125 120 ⁄2” ⁄2” 7”
4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
1 1
ET 2-251 up to 25 250 120 ⁄2” ⁄2” 8”
4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
1 1
ET 2-252 up to 25 250 240 ⁄2” ⁄2” 8”
4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
3 3
ET 3-501 25-50 500 120 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-502 25-50 500 240 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-504 25-50 500 480 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1001 50-100 1000 120 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1002 50-100 1000 240 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1004 50-100 1000 480 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
1
ET 8-2502 100-250 2500 240 2” 1 ⁄4” 23” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
ET 8-2504 100-250 2500 480 2” 11⁄4” 23” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
1
ET 8-5002 250-500 5000 240 2” 1 ⁄4” 44” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
ET 8-5004 250-500 5000 480 2” 11⁄4” 44” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
NOTE: WITH VESCORS' POLICY OF CONSTANTLY IMPROVING ITS PRODUCTS, SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. 62
1 JULY 03
1 20 or 240 VOLT
INSTALLATION AND WIRING

SINGLE PHASE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ET HYDRAULIC OIL HEATERS
1 . MUST BE IMMERSED AT ALL TIMES
2. MOUNT HORIZONTALLY ONLY
3. OPERATE ON RATED VOLTAGE -

HEATERS ARE NOT DUAL VOLTAGE 1 20 or 240 VOLT (Above 1 0 Amps) 1 PHASE
or 480 VOLT 1 PHASE
4. USE ON A.C. ONLY
5. LEAD WIRES ARE COLOR CODED -

HEATER LEADS ARE RED
THERMOSTAT LEADS ARE BLACK
6. T-60 AMBIENT AIR THERMOSTAT
(OPTIONAL) SET TO CLOSE AT
40°F TO BE WIRED INTO CIRCUIT
AT POINTS T1 AND T2
SEE DIAGRAM D
7. ABOVE 1 0 AMP DRAW OR 480V OR 3 PHASE

B
USE A RELAY - SEE DIAGRAM B OR C
240 r 480 VOLT 3 PHASE
8. TO CALCULATE AMPERAGE DRAW:
SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE
WATTAGE WATTAGE
AMPS = AMPS =
VOLTS VOLTS x 1 .73
T60 THERMOSTAT
VESCOR
(OPTIONAL)
50 N. River Street
South Elgin, IL 601 77
847-742-7270
Fax 847-742-51 87
TAB 35
C26
SE & LE SERIES
SPIN-ON FILTER ELEMENTS
For Use With SF,DF,MF,MFT & ZDF Series Filter Heads
SE-03 SE-1 0 SE-25

SE-1 00
1 00 Mesh
6.9"
Stn. Stl. Wire
FILTERS
Cloth
SPIN-ON
Part Number SE-03 SE-1 0 SE-25 SE-1 00
Diameter 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 "
Mounting Thread 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6
Micron Rating 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron 1 41 Micron
Beta 2/20/75 (See Below) 3/1 0/22 9/22/24 29/46/54 ------------
Filter Media Area 850 Sq. In. 950 Sq. In. 950 Sq. In. 200 Sq. In.
Can Color / Imprint White/Green White/Red White/Black White/Blue
Aqua-Zorb Aqua-Zorb
LE-03 LE-03AZ LE-1 0 LE-1 0AZ LE-25

LE-1 00
1 0.9"
1 00 Mesh
Water
Water
Stn. Stl. Wire
Absorbing
Absorbing
Cloth
Part Number LE-03 LE-03AZ LE-1 0 LE-1 0AZ LE-25 LE-1 00
Diameter 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 " 5.1 "
Mounting Thread 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6 1 1 /2" - 1 6
Micron Rating (Nominal) 3 Micron 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron 1 41 Micron
Beta 2/20/75 (See Below) 3/1 0/22 5/21 /23 1 0/22/33 8/25/30 29/46/54 ------------
Filter Media Area 1 1 70 Sq. In. 648 Sq. In. 1 71 0 Sq. In. 648 Sq. In. 1 71 0 Sq. In. 380 Sq. In.
Water Holding Capacity ------------- 1 5 oz. ------------- 1 5 oz. ------------- -------------
Can Color / Imprint White/Green White/Orange White/Red White/Orange White/Black White/Blue
Application Data:
• Reference:
• Application: Suitable for petroleum based fluids only.
BetaX Rating of 2 = 50% Efficiency (Nominal Rating)

Consult factory for synthetic fluids.
BetaX Rating of 20 = 95% Efficiency

• Buna "N" Gasket standard. Fluorocarbon Gasket
BetaX Rating of 75 = 98.7% Efficiency (Absolute Rating)

optional, consult factory.
• Maximum Operating Pressure: 2 00 PSI All Models.

• Consult local distributor or factory for SE & LE
Warning: 80 PSI DP max. without by-pass

Element interchange with those of other manufacturers.
valve in filter head.

• Caution: Do not use SE & LE Series filter
• Operating Temperature: -65 to +250 O F.

elements on internal combustion engines.
Phone (608) 524-4200 Fax (608) 524-4220 www.zinga.com
TAB 36
C4
4
ZAF-07 SERIES
SPIN-ON FILTER HEADS
Flows Up To:
25 GPM (Return) 9 GPM (Suction)
Port Sizes:
• 3/4" NPTF
• 1 1 /1 6" - 1 2 UN (SAE - 1 2)
• 3/4" BSP
Pressure:
250 PSI Max. Operating
Warning: 80 PSI
DP max. without
by-pass valve.
Temperature:
Up to +250° F. Operating
Applications:
Petroleum based fluids only.
FILTERS
Consult factory for synthetic fluids.
Average Pressure Drop Through Clean Filter Assembly
O
With 150 SUS Oil At 105 F.
SPIN-ON
Cellulose
AE Elements
25
ZAE Elements
20
(PSI)
ZAE-25
Drop
15 ZAE-10
Pressure
ZAE-10L
10
AE-L Elements
Synthetic
0 10 20 30 40
Flow Rate (GPM)
HOW TO ORDER: ZAF - XX- XX- X
Code Inlet & Outlet Ports

Code
By-Pass Valve Setting
Code
Gauge Port Location
07
3/4" NPTF 00
No By-Pass
0 No Port Required
07C 3/4" BSP (G 3/4"-1 4) 03 3 PSI
05 5 PSI Location
As Shown Above
11 1 1 /1 6"-1 2 UN-2B(SAE-1 2) Number

15 1 5 PSI
25 25 PSI
50 50 PSI
AE & ZAE Element Data: See Pages C24-C25
C24
AE SERIES
For Use With ZAF Series Filter Heads
FILTERS
Aqua-Zorb
AE-03 AE-1 0 AE-1 0AZ AE-25 AE-1 00 Aqua -Zorb
SPIN-ON
5.8"
Water
1 00 Mesh
AE-1 0L AE-25L
Absorbing Stn. Stl.

AE-03AZL
8.5"
Wire Cloth
Water
Absorbing
Part Number AE-03 AE-1 0 AE-1 0AZ AE-25 AE-1 00 AE-03AZL AE-1 0L AE-25L
Diameter 3.8” 3.8” 3.8” 3.8” 3.8” 3.8” 3.8” 3.8”
Mounting Thread 1” - 12 1” - 12 1” - 12 1” - 12 1” - 12 1” - 12 1” - 12 1 ” - 1 2
Micron Rating (Nominal) 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron 1 41 Micron 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron
Beta 2/20/75(See Below)

2/5/-- 9/22/24
8/25/30
29/46/54
5/21 /23
9/22/24
29/46/54
Micron
Micron
Micron
Micron
Micron
Micron
Micron
Filter Media Area

420 Sq In
547 Sq. In.
1 75 Sq. In.
547 Sq. In. 91 Sq. In.
309 Sq. In.
947 Sq. In.
947 Sq. In.
Water Holding Capacity ---------- ---------- 4.1 oz. ---------- ---------- 7.2 oz. ---------- ----------
Can Color / Imprint White/Black White/Red White/Orange White/Black White/Blue White/Orange White/Red White/Black
Application Data:
• Reference:
Warning: 80 PSI DP max. without by-pass valve in filter head.
• Operating Temperature: -65 to +2 50 O F.
• Application: Petroleum based fluids only. Consult factory for synthetic fluids.
• Buna "N" Gasket standard. Fluorocarbon Gasket optional, consult factory.
• Caution: Do not use AE Series filter elements on internal combustion engines.
C25
ZAE SERIES
SYNTHETIC MEDIA
SPIN-ON
ZAE-03 ZAE-1 0 ZAE-25
5.8"
ZAE-1 0L ZAE-25L
FILTERS
8.2"
Part Number ZAE-03 ZAE-1 0 ZAE-25 ZAE-1 0L ZAE-25L
Diameter 3.8" 3.8" 3.8" 3.8" 3.8"
Mounting Thread 1" - 12 1" - 12 1" - 12 1" - 12 1 " - 1 2
Micron Rating (Nominal) 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron
Beta 2 /2 0/75 (See Below) 2/3/4 4/1 0/1 2 8/25/30 4/1 0/1 2 8/25/30
Filter Media Area 366 Sq. In. 366 Sq. In. 366 Sq. In. 562 Sq. In. 562 Sq. In.
Can Color / Imprint White/Green White/Red White/Black White/Red White/Black
Application Data:
• Reference:
• "Z-Glass" Media
• Caution: Do not use ZAE Series filter elements on internal combustion engines.
G1 1
Filter Condition Indicators
Suction & Return Line Filter Gauges Indicate

GVL & CIL SERIES
When To Replace Filter Element

STAINLESS STEEL
Vacuum & Pressure
GLYCERIN-FILLED
FILTER GAUGES
STAINLESS STEEL GLYCERIN-FILLED GAUGES OFFER:
• Resistance against vibration
• Resistance against condensation
• Resistance against damage from pressure fluctuations
• Resistance against corrosion
Glycerin-Filled
Glycerin-Filled
Pressure Gauges
Vacuum Gauges
(Return Line Filter Installations)

(Suction Line Filter Installations)
Part No. CI-20L

Part No. GV-05L
For Use With 25 PSI

For Use With 3 PSI
Filter By-Pass Valve

Gauge
Construction:
ACCCESSORIES
- Stainless Steel Case
- Brass Stem
- Acrylic Lens
Part No. GV-1 0L
For Use With 5 PSI
C25
ZAE SERIES
SYNTHETIC MEDIA
SPIN-ON
ZAE-03 ZAE-1 0 ZAE-25
5.8"
ZAE-1 0L ZAE-25L
FILTERS
8.2"
Part Number ZAE-03 ZAE-1 0 ZAE-25 ZAE-1 0L ZAE-25L
Diameter 3.8" 3.8" 3.8" 3.8" 3.8"
Mounting Thread 1" - 12 1" - 12 1" - 12 1" - 12 1 " - 1 2
Micron Rating (Nominal) 3 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron 1 0 Micron 25 Micron
Beta 2/20/75 (See Below) 2/3/4 4/1 0/1 2 8/25/30 4/1 0/1 2 8/25/30
Filter Media Area 366 Sq. In. 366 Sq. In. 366 Sq. In. 562 Sq. In. 562 Sq. In.
Can Color / Imprint White/Green White/Red White/Black White/Red White/Black
Application Data:
• Reference:
• Maximum Operating Pressure: 250 PSI All Models.
• "Z-Glass" Media
• Caution: Do not use ZAE Series filter elements on internal combustion engines.
TAB 37
TAB 38
D03 Standard Flow Parallel Circuit Manifold
Parallel Circuit
Flow Curve
All mounting hardware is supplied.
See page 62 for itemized list.
No. of stations * 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
“A” length (code 2 spa.)

2.13
4.25
6.38
8.50
10.63
12.75
14.88
17.00
19.13
21.25
23.38
25.50
27.63
29.75
31.88
34.00
inch [mm]
[54.0]
[108.0]
[162.1]
[215.9]
[270.0]
[323.9]
[378.0]
[431.8]
[485.9]
[539.8]
[593.9]
[647.7]
[701.8]
[755.7]
[809.8]
[853.6]
apx. weight alum

3
4
6
8
9
11
12
14
16
18
20
21
22
24
26
27
lb [kg]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[12]
apx. weight iron

5
9
13
17
21
26
30
34
38
42
47
51
55
59
63
68
lb [kg]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[15]
[17]
[19]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[29]
[31]
“A” length (code 4 spa.)

6.13
10.13
14.13
18.13
22.13
26.13
30.13
inch [mm] -- [155.7]

[257.3]
[358.9]
[460.5]
[562.1]
[663.7]
[765.3] Port code Valve mtg.
Manifold mtg.
apx. weight alum

6
9
12
15
19
22
25
#10-24 UNC x
0.31-18 UNC x
-- [3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[11]
P, S
0.63 [16] DP
0.44 [11.1] DP
lb [kg]
apx. weight iron
12
20
28
36
45
53
57
M5 ISO 6H x
M8 ISO 6H x
lb [kg] -- [5]
[9]
[13]
[16]
[20]
[24]
[26] B, M, T
0.63 [16] DP
0.44 [11.1] DP
* Length of 01 station with relief cavity is 3.00 [76.2]. Gauge port not available on 01 station.
Specifications, descriptions, and dimensional data are subject to
correction or change without notice or incurring obligation.
Download latest catalog page revisions at www.damanifolds.com.
Ordering Information
Material
Valve
Pattern
Circuit
No. of
Stations
Valve
Spacing
Port
Threads
/ Options
Material
Circuit
Valve Spacing
Options
Aluminum - 6061-T6
Parallel Circuit
2.13 inch
See next page for available
A 3000† psi ! 20.7 MPa P

Standard Flow
2
54.0 mm
options and ordering codes.
Ductile Iron - D4512

4.00 inch
D 5000† psi ! 34.5 MPa 4

101.6 mm
† Working pressure should
be considered in accordance
No. of Stations
with ISO 4413 to determine

A l u m i n u m
appropriate material type.

Port Threads P&T A&B GA
Available with
01...16 spacing code 2

P NPTF • ANSI B1.20.3 0.50 0.38 0.25
Available with
S SAE • ISO 11926
02...08 spacing code 4 -10 -8 -6
Valve Pattern
ISO 4401-03-02
D u c t i l e I ro n B BSPP • ISO 1179 0.50 0.38 none
D03 NFPA T3.5.1-D03

Available with
See Tech Information

01...16 spacing code 2 M ISO • ISO 6149 M22 M18 none
Available with
T BSPT • ISO 7 0.50 0.38 none
02...08 spacing code 4
10 Daman Products Company, Inc.
1811 North Home Stre e t ! Mishawaka, IN 46545-7267 USA ! North America: 800.959.7841 ! Fax: 800.241.7664
International: 574.259.7841 ! Fax: 574.259.7665 ! Email: sales@damanifolds.com ! Web: www.damanifolds.com
Products
Custom
Options - D03 Standard Flow Parallel Manifold
Manifolds
Standard
Contact Daman or consult web
ISOLATIONS
Daman isolation options allow a manifold
CADalog for cavity locations if critical.

to have two independent pressure and/or
tank ports. Isolations are drilled rather
than plugged to ensure a leakproof and
failproof isolation.
Ordering
* Isolation is
Available #
Plates
code letter:
between stations:
of stations:
Cover
2.125 [54.0] spacing
A
01 & 02
02-10
B
02 & 03
03-11
C
03 & 04
04-12
D
04 & 05
05-13
E
05 & 06
06-14
F
06 & 07
07-15
G
07 & 08
08-16
Adaptors
H
08 & 09
09-16
J
09 & 10
10-16
Valve
4.00 [101.6] spacing
A
01 & 02
02-08
B
02 & 03
03-08
C
03 & 04
04-08
D
04 & 05
05-08
E
05 & 06
06-08
F
06 & 07
07-08
G
07 & 08
08
Subplates
* Stations are numbered left to right.
Parallel Circuit with one or

Parallel Circuit with Isolations Cavity & Isolation Combinations
NOTES:
two Cavities
1) The GAport is not available
on a (1) station manifold.
2) The GAport is not available
when a pressure isolation is
located between stations 1 & 2.
3) Some cavity and isolation
Subplates
Servo Valve
combinations are not possible
Valves with P in the nose and T out the

Manifold shown with P isolation between 1 &
Option code L
Option code R
with spacing code 2. Consult
side must be used.

2 (PA), and T isolation between 2 & 3 (TB).
Cavity left of isolation
Cavity right of isolation
factory to determine availablity.
Option code D includes both cavities
Ordering Information
... / Cavity &
Plates
Pressure
Tapping
Cavity Tank Isolation Isolation
Isolation Combinations
Junction Blocks
Valve Bodies
Cavity Tank Isolation

Cavity & Isolation
DIN Cartridge
Omit if cavities not required Omit if T isolation not required
Combinations
One Common cavity:

Available with
CNo solenoid clearance.
TA...TJ spacing code 2
Specify when using a combi-

nation of cavity and isolation
C-10-2 (P in nose)
Available with
options. Cavities do not
Two Common cavities:

TA...TG spacing code 4
have solenoid clearance.
With solenoid clearance
C-10-2 (P in nose)
L
Cavity is located left of
the isolation.
Available 03-16 stations
CC
with spacing code 2;
Cavity is located right
Pressure Isolation
of the isolation.
Header and
Available 02-08 stations
with spacing code 4.

Two cavities, one each
Omit if P isolation not required
Not available in combina-

tion with isolation options.
Available with
D
side of isolation.
(Use with cavity option
PA...PJ spacing code 2

codes C or S only.)
One Sun Cavity:
S T-10A (P in nose)
PA...PG Available with
See Tech Info for valves.

spacing code 4
Information
Technical
Daman Products Company, Inc.

11
1 811 North Home Street Mishawaka, IN 46545-7267 USA North America: 800.959.7841 Fax: 800.241 .7664
International: 574.259.7841 Fax: 574.259.7665 Email: sales@daman.com Web: www.daman.com
TAB 39
Twin throttle check valve RE 27506/05.1 1
Replaces: 02.03
1 /8
Type Z2FS
Size 6
Component series 4X
Maximum operating pressure 31 5 bar
Maximum flow 80 l/min
H5556
Contents Page
– Sandwich plate valve
Features 1
– Porting pattern according to DIN 24340 form A
Ordering code 2
– Porting pattern according to ISO 4401 -03-02-0-05
Symbols 2
(with locating hole)
Function, section 3
– For the main or pilot flow limitation of 2 actuator ports
Technical data 4
– 4 adjustment types:
• Set screw with lock nut and protective cap
• Lockable rotary knob with scale
Unit dimensions 6, 7
• Spindle with internal hexagon and scale
• Rotary knob with scale
– For supply or discharge throttling
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Z2FS RE 27506/05.1 1
Ordering code
Z2FS 6 4X *
Twin throttle check valve;

Further details in the plain text
sandwich plate design

No code = Without locating hole
Size 6 = 6
/60 3) =
With locating hole
Throttle check valve side A and B

= –1 )
Seal material
Throttle check valve side A

= A
No code = NBR seals
Throttle check valve side B

=B V= FKM seals
Adjustment type
Setscrew with lock nut and protective cap

= 2

Attention!
Lockable rotary knob with scale = 3 2) Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid
Spindle with internal hexagon and scale =5 used!
Rotary knob with scale =7 1 Q =

With fine adjustment
2Q =
Standard design
1) Identical adjustment types on the A and B side.

4X =
2) H key with material no. R9000081 58 is included in the de- (40 to 49: unchanged installation and connection
livery.
dimensions)
3) Locating pin ISO 8752-3x8-St, material no. R900005694
(separate order)
Standard types and standard units are contained in the
EPS (standard price list).
Symbols (① = component side, ② = plate side)
Type Z2FS 6 –… Type Z2FS 6 B…
Supply throttling
1 1
P A 2 B
T P A 2 B
T
Type Z2FS 6 –… Type Z2FS 6 A…
Discharge throttling
1 1
P A 2 B
T P A 2 B
T
RE 27506/05.1 1 Z2FS Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8
Function, section
The valve type Z2FS is a twin throttle check valve in sand- The hydraulic fluid flowing back from the actuator A② moves
wich plate design. It is used for the main or pilot flow limitation
the valve seat (2) against the spring (5) in the direction of the
of one or two actuator ports.

throttle spool (3) and thus allows for the unhindered flow as
Two throttle check valves aligned symmetrically to each other

check valve. Depending on the installation position, the throt-
limit flows in one direction and allow free return flow in the op- tling effect may be directly in the supply or in the discharge.
posite direction.
Main flow limitation (version "2Q")
In the supply throttling, the hydraulic fluid reaches actua- For changing the velocity of an actuator (main flow limitation),
tor A ② through channel ① via the throttling point (1 ) created

the twin throttle check valve is installed between the direction-
by the valve seat (2) and the throttle spool (3). The throttle
al valve and the subplate.
spool (3) can be axially adjusted by means of a setscrew (4)

Pilot flow limitation (version "1 Q")
and thus allows for the setting of the throttling point (1 ).
With pilot operated directional valves, the twin throttle check
valve can be used as switching time adjustment (pilot flow
limitation). Then, it is installed between pilot control and
main valve.
4 5 2 A B
3 1 A B
Type Z2FS 6 –2… (supply throttling)
① = component side
② = plate side
Technical Data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
general
Weight kg Approx. 0.8
Installation position Any
Ambient temperature range °C –20 to +80
hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure bar 31 5
Maximum flow l/min 80
Hydraulic fluid See table below
Hydraulic fluid temperature range °C –20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 1 0 to 800
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid -

Class 20/1 8/1 5 1 )
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c)
Hydraulic fluid Classification Suitable sealing materials Standards
Mineral oils and related hydrocarbons HL, HLP, HLPD NBR, FKM DIN 51 524
HETG NBR, FKM
Environmentally
– Insoluble in water ISO 1 5380
HEES FKM
compatible
– Soluble in water HEPG FKM ISO 1 5380
– Water-free HFDU, HFDR FKM ISO 1 2922
Flame-resistant HFC (Fuchs Hydrotherm 46M,
– Water-containing NBR ISO 1 2922
Petrofer Ultra Safe 620)

Important information on hydraulic fluids!
– Flame-resistant – water-containing:
– For more information and data on the use of other hydrau- • Maximum operating pressure 21 0 bar
lic fluids refer to data sheet 90220 or contact us!

• Maximum hydraulic fluid temperature 60 °C
• Expected service life as compared to HLP hydraulic oil
– There may be limitations regarding the technical valve
30 % to 1 00 %
data (temperature, pressure range, service life, mainte-

nance intervals, etc.)!
1) The cleanliness classes specified for the components must
be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration pre-

vents faults and at the same time increases the service life
of the components.
For the selection of the filters see
www.boschrexroth.com/filter.
Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 ± 5 °C)
∆p-qV characteristic curves (version "2Q") ∆p-qV characteristic curves (version "1 Q")
Throttle position in rotations Throttle position in rotations
2 34 5 6 7 8 23
4 5 67 8 9 10
11 11,5
250 250
9
200
200
150 150
10
→
Pressure differential in bar
Pressure differential in bar
100
11
100
90 11,5
90
80 80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
3
0
3
0
20 20
10 10
5 5
0 10
20 30 40 50 6
0 7
0 80
0 10
20 3
0 40 50 6
0 7
0 80
Flow in l/min →
∆p-qV characteristic curves
(via check valve; throttle closed)
15
Pressure differential in bar →
10
0 10
20 3
0 40 50 6
0 7
0 80
Flow in l/min →
Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)
7
5 81 7

15
1
0
"X" 2 "X"
9
8
2
10
13 5; 12
11
6

1,4
1 6
1 x 40
7 81 7
5 24 20
15 1
9
8
8,6
3
2
"X" "X"
1
0
3
2 10 3
; 12 13

11
1,4
6
1 x 40
9; 12 4 9; 12 2 1 2 13 4 9; 12
8,6

22,6
3
"X" "X"
8 8
46 46

2 10
14 13 8 11 14
1,4
6
1 x 40
18 4 x 5,4
7

F1 F2
T
45
35
A B
F4 P

G F3

6
4
45 81 45
0,01/100
Item explanations and valve mounting screws see page 7.

Rzmax 4
Required surface quality of the
valve mounting face
Unit dimensions
① Component side – porting pattern according to

ISO 4401 -03-02-0-05 (with locating hole Ø3 x 5 mm

4 hexagon socket head cap screws ISO 4762 - M5 - 1 0.9
deep)
Note!
②
Plate side – porting pattern according to
DIN 24340 form A (without locating hole), or

Length and tightening torque of the valve mounting screws
ISO 4401 -03-02-0-05 (with locating hole for locating

must be calculated according to the components mounted un-
pin ISO 8752-3x8-St; version "/60")
der and over the sandwich plate valve.
1 Name plate
2 Adjustment type "2"
6 Space required to remove the key
7 Valve mounting bores
8 Lock nut SW1 0
9 Set screw/spindle for changing the flow cross-section
(internal hexagon SW5)
1 0 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, and T
1 1 Seal ring plate
1 2 With all adjustment types:
Counterclockwise rotation = larger flow
Clockwise rotation = smaller flow
1 3 The unit is converted from supply to discharge throt-

tling by rotating it around the "X"–"X" axis
1 4 Stroke
1 5 Plug screw SW22
Notes
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengießer 1

Phone +49 (0) 93 52 /1 8-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 /1 8-23 58
tion can be derived from our information. The information given does not
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
www.boschrexroth.de
must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and aging.
TAB 40
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2 directional valve

RE 231 78/08.08
Replaces: 1 2.05
1 /1 6
with wet-pin DC or AC voltage
solenoids
Type WE
Size 6
Component series 6X
Maximum operating pressure 350 bar [5076 psi]
Maximum flow: 80 l/min [21 US gpm] – DC
60 l/min [15.8 US gpm] – AC
H5909
Contents Page
– Direct operated directional spool valve with solenoid actua-
Features 1
tion in high-performance version
Ordering code 2, 3
– Porting pattern to DIN 24340 Form A (without locating bore)
Spool symbols 4
– Porting pattern to ISO 4401 -03-02-0-05 and
NFPA T3.5.1 R2 D03 (with locating bore)
Function, section 5
– Subplates, see data sheet RE 45052 (separate order)
Technical data 6, 7
– Wet-pin DC or AC voltage solenoids with detachable coil
– Solenoid coil can be rotated 90°
Performance limits 8 to 1 0
– The coil can be changed without having to open the pres-

Unit dimensions 1 1 to 1 5
sure-tight chamber
Mating connectors 1 6
– Electrical connection as individual or central connection
– Manual override, optional
– For smoothly switching variant, see RE 231 83
– Inductive position switches and proximity sensors (contact-

less), see RE 24830
– For further electrical connections, see RE 0801 0
2/1 6 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE RE 231 78/08.08
Ordering code
WE 6 6X E
3 main ports =3
4 main ports = 4
Size 6 = 6
Spool symbols, e.g. C, E, EA, EB, etc.; for possible variants, see page 4
= 6X
(60 to 69: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
With spring return

= No code
Without spring return = O
Without spring return with detent = OF
Heavy-duty wet-pin solenoid with detachable coil = E
DC voltage 24 V = G24
AC voltage 230 V 50/60 Hz = W230
AC voltage 1 20 V or 1 1 0 V 50/60 Hz = W1 1 0
= W + voltage
DC voltage 205 V = G205 1 )
DC voltage solenoid with rectifier for AC voltage

= W1 1 0R
(not frequency-related; only available with plug-in connection with D-cover, page 1 4)
For further ordering codes for other voltages and frequencies, see page 7
With concealed manual override (standard)

= N9
With manual override = N
Without manual override = No code
Electrical connection
Individual connection
Without mating connector with component plug DIN EN 1 75301 -803 = K4 3)
Without mating connector with component plug AMP Junior-Timer = C4 3)
Without mating connector with component plug DT 04-2PA (Deutsch plug-in connector) = K40 3)
Without mating connector with M1 2x1 plug-in connection with status LED = K33L 4)
Central connection
Cable entry on cover, with indicator lamp = DL
Central plug-in connection on cover, with indicator lamp (without mating connector) = DKL 5)
For further electrical connections, see RE 0801 0
1) For the connection to AC voltage mains, a DC voltage so- 3) Mating connectors, separate order, see page 16 and
lenoid must be used, which is controlled via a rectifier (see

RE 08006.
table below).
4) Only version “G24“, see RE 0801 0
In the case of individual connection, a large mating connec- 5) Mating connector, separate order,
tor with integrated rectifier can be used (separate order).

Material no. R900005538
2) Locating pin ISO 8752-3x8-St,
Material no. R900005694 (separate order)
AC voltage mains (per- Nominal voltage of DC sole-

ing code
Standard types and components can be found in
Order-
missible voltage toler- noids when operated

the EPS (standard price list).
ance ± 10%)
with AC voltage
1 1 0 V - 50/60 Hz 96 V G96
230 V - 50/60 Hz 205 V G205
RE 231 78/08.08 WE Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/1 6
Further details in clear text
No code = Without locating bore
/60 2) = With locating bore
/62 = With locating bore and locating pin
ISO 8752-3x8-St
Seal material
No code = NBR seals
V= FKM seals
(Other seals on request)

Attention!
Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used!
Clamping length
No code = 42 mm [1.65 inch] (standard)
Z= 22 mm [0.87inch]
No code = Without throttle insert
With throttle insert, see table:
Throttle Ø in mm [inch]
Port
0.8 [0.031] 1 .0 [0.039] 1 .2 [0.047]
P = B08 = B1 0 = B1 2
A = H08 = H1 0 = H1 2
B = R08 = R1 0 = R1 2
A and B = N08 = N1 0 = N1 2
T = X08 = X1 0 = X1 2
Operation at flows, which exceed the performance limit of the valve (see page 5).
Spool position monitoring
No code =
Without position switch
– Inductive position switch type QM
QMAG24 = Monitored spool position “a“
QMBG24 = Monitored spool position “b“
QM0G24 = Monitored rest position
– Inductive position switch type QR
QR0G24S = Monitored rest position
QRABG24E = Monitored spool positions “a“ and “b“
– Inductive proximity sensor type QS
QSAG24W = Monitored spool position “a“
QSBG24W = Monitored spool position “b“
QS0G24W = Monitored spool position “0“
QS0AG24W = Monitored spool positions “0“ and “a“
QS0BG24W = Monitored spool positions “0“ and “b“
QSABG24W = Monitored spool positions “a“ and “b
For further details, see RE 24830
Spool symbols
A B A B A B A B
a b a b a 0 ba a 0 b

b

a b

PT PT PT P T
A B A B A B A B
= .A 1)
a b a a b
=
b …/O.. a 0 a a 0
PT PT PT P T
A B A B A B A B
= .B

= …/OF..
a b a b 0 b 0 b b

a b
PT PT PT P T
= E 1)
=A = E1- 2)
=C = F
=D = G
= H
A B A B
a b a b
a b

= J
PT PT
=B = L
=Y = M
=P

= Q
= R
=T

= U
1) Example:
Spool symbol E with spool position "a", ordering code ..EA..

= V
2) Symbol E1 -: P – A/B pre-opening,
Caution in conjunction with single rod cylinders due to
pressure intensification!
= W
Function, section
Directional valves of type WE are solenoid operated direc- Type .WE 6 .6X/O… (only possible with symbols A, C and D)
tional spool valves. They control the start, stop and direction
This variant is a directional spool valve with two spool posi-
of a flow.
tions and two solenoids without detent. In the de-energized
These directional valves basically consist of housing (1 ), one

condition, there is no defined spool position.
or two solenoids (2), control spool (3), and one or two return
Type .WE 6 .6X/OF… (impulse spool, only possible with sym-
springs (4).
bols A, C and D)
In the de-energized condition, control spool (3) is held by re- This variant is a directional valve with two spool positions, two
turn springs (4) in the central position or in the initial position

solenoids and one detent. It alternately locks the two spools
(except for impulse spool). Control spool (3) is actuated by

in position and the solenoid therefore needs not to be perma-
wet-pin solenoids (2).
nently energized.
To ensure proper functioning, care must be taken that

Note!
the pressure chamber of the solenoid is filled with oil.
Pressure peaks in the tank line to two or several valves
The force of solenoid (2) acts via plunger (5) on control spool
can result in unwanted spool movements in the case of
(3) and pushes the latter from its rest position to the required
valves with detent! We therefore recommend that sepa-
end position. This enables the necessary direction of flow
rate return lines be provided or a check valve installed in
from P to A and B to T or P to B and A to T.

the tank line.
After solenoid (2) was de-energized, return springs (4) push

Internal leakage of a directional spool valve changes in
control spool (3) again back to its rest position.

the course of time for component-inherent reasons.
An optional manual override (6) allows control spool (3) to be
moved without energization of the solenoid.
2 5 1 3 5 2
A B
6 6
"a
" "b
"
4 A T
B
4

(P
)
Type 4WE 6 E6X/...E...
Throttle insert
The use of a throttle insert is required, when, due to prevail-

ing operating conditions, flows can occur during the switching
processes, which exceed the performance limit of the valve.
Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
General
Weight – Valve with one solenoid kg [lbs] 1 .45 [3.2]
– Valve with two solenoids kg [lbs] 1 .95 [4.3]
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature range °C [°F] –30 to +50 [–22 to +122] (NBR seals)
–20 to +50 [–4 to +122] (FKM seals)
Hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure – Ports A, B, P bar [psi] 350 [5076]
– Port T bar [psi] 21 0 [3050] (DC); 1 60 [2320] (AC)
With symbol A and B, port T must be used as leakage
port, if the operating pressure is higher than the tank
pressure.
Maximum flow l/min [US gpm] 80 [21] (DC); 60 [15.8] (AC)
Flow cross-section
– Spool symbol Q mm2 ca. 6 % of nominal cross-section
(spool position 0)
– Spool symbol W mm2 ca. 3 % of nominal cross-section
Hydraulic fluid 1) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524

2) ;
fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids to VDMA 24568
(see also RE 90221 ); HETG (rape seed oil) 2) ; HEPG
(polyglycols)
3) ; HEES (synthetic esters) 3) ; other hy-
draulic fluids on request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range °C [°F] –30 to +80 [–22 to +176] (NBR seals)
–1 5 to +80 [–4 to +176] (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm2/s [SUS] 2.8 to 500 [35 to 2320]
Permissible max. degree of contamination of the

Class 20/1 8/1 5 4)
hydraulic fluid - cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c)
1) The ignition temperature of the process and operating
medium used must be higher than the maximum solenoid
surface temperature.
2) Suitable for NBR- and FKM seals
3) Suitable only for FKM seals
4) The cleanliness classes specified for components must be
adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life
of components.
For maintenance requirements of the hydraulic fluid and
contamination limit values, see data sheet RE 07300.
For the selection of filters, see data sheets RE 50070,
RE 50076, RE 50081 , RE 50086, RE 50087 and RE 50088.
Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Electrical
Type of voltage DC voltage AC voltage 50/60 Hz
Available 5)
voltages
V 1 2, 24, 96, 205 1 1 0, 230
(For ordering code for AC voltage solenoids, see below)
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % ±1 0
Power consumption W 30 –
Holding power VA – 50
Making capacity VA – 220
Duty cycle % 1 00
Switching time
– ON ms 25 to 45 1 0 to 20
ISO 6403 6)
– OFF ms 1 0 to 25 1 5 to 40
Maximum switching frequency 1 /h 1 5000 7200
Maximum coil temperature 7)

°C [°F] 1 50 [302] 1 80 [356]
Type of protection to
– With component plug “K4“ IP 65 (with mating connector mounted and locked)
DIN EN 60529
– With component plug “C4“ IP 66A (with mating connector mounted and locked)
– With component plug “K40“ IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked)
– With component plug “K33L“ IP 65 (with mating connector mounted and locked)
5) Special voltages on request

Note!
6) The switching times were established at a hydraulic fluid

AC voltage soienoids can be used for 2 or 3 mains;
temperature of 40 °C [140 °F]. Deviating hydraulic fluid

e.g. solenoid type W1 1 0 for:
temperatures can result in different switching times! Switch- 1 1 0 V, 50 Hz; 1 1 0 V, 60 Hz; 1 20 V, 60 Hz
ing times change in dependence on the operating time and
operating conditions.
7) Due to the surface temperatures of solenoid coils, observe

Ordering code Mains
standards ISO 1 3732-1 and EN 982!

W1 1 0
1 1 0 V, 50 Hz
1 1 0 V, 60 Hz
Notes!
1 20 V, 60 Hz
– Operation of the manual override is only possible up to

W230 230 V, 50 Hz
a tank pressure of ca. 50 bar [725 psi]. Avoid damage to

230 V, 60 Hz
the bore for the manual override! (Special tool for actua-
tion, separate order, Material no. R900024943). When the
manual override is blocked, the operation of the solenoid
When establishing the electrical connection, properly
must be ruled out!
connect the protective earth conductor (PE ).
– The simultaneous operation of solenoids must be ruled out!
Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46, oil = 40 °C ±5 °C [104 °F±9 °F])
∆p-qV characteristic curves
7 8 106 539 1 2
[160] 11
Spool
Direction of flow
Pressure differential in bar [psi] →
[140] 10

4symbol
P –A P –B A –T B – T
[120]
8 A; B 3 3 – –
[100] C 1 1 3 1
[80]
6 D; Y 5 5 3 3
E 3 3 1 1
[60] 4 F 1 3 1 1
[40]
T 10 10 9 9
2
[20] H 2 4 2 2
J; Q 1 1 2 1
[0]
0 10 20 3
0
4
0 5
0 60 70 80 L 3 3 4 9
M 2 4 3 3
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [21]
P 3 1 1 1
Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

R 5 5 4 –
V 1 2 1 1
7 Spool symbol “R” in spool position B – A

W 1 1 2 2
8 Spool symbol “G” and “T” in central position P – T

U 3 3 9 4
9 Spool symbol “H” in central position P – T

G 6 6 9 9
Performance limits (measured with HLP46, oil = 40 °C ±5 °C [104 °F±9 °F])
Attention!
with only one direction of flow (e.g. from P to A while port B is
The specified switching performance limits are valid for oper- blocked!
ation with two directions of flow (e.g. from P to A and simulta- In such cases, please consult us!
neous return flow from B to T).

The switching performance limit was established while
Due to the flow forces acting within the valves, the permis- the solenoids were at operating temperature, at 1 0%
sible switching performance limit may be considerably lower

undervoltage and without tank pre-loading.
Operating pressure in bar [psi] →
\6111^ 350
7 9 10 DC solenoid
300 8
\5111^ Curve Spool symbol
1 5 1 A; B1 )
\4111^ 200
2
6

3 2 V
3
\3111^
4

3 A; B
100
\2111^
1 4 F; P
2
5 J
\1^
0 10 20 30
4
0 50 6
0 7
0 8
0
6 G; H; T
7 A/O; A/OF; L; U
\1^ \3^ \5^ \7^ \9^ \21^ \23^ \25^ \27^ \29^ \32^
8 C; D; Y
Flow in l/min [US gpm] → 9 M
1 0
E; E1 –2) ; R3); C/O; C/OF
D/O; D/OF; Q; W
DC solenoid
Solenoid voltage
1) With manual override
1 2; 24; 48; 96; 1 25; 205 V
2) P – A/B pre-opening
(For other voltages, see page 1 0)

3) Return flow from actuator to tank
See note on page 8.

[5000] 3
50

17
AC voltage solenoid – 50 Hz
3
00

[4000]
15

18 Curve Spool symbol
14
[3000] 20
0 11 A; B1 )
[2000] 16 12 V
13
10
0
13 A; B
[1000] 14
11 14 F; P
12
[0] 15 G; T
0 10 20 3
0
4
0 50 60
16 H
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.8] 1 7

A/O; A/OF; C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF;
Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

E; E1 –2) ; J; L; M; Q; R3); U; W
18 C; D; Y
AC voltage solenoid
Solenoid voltage
W1 1 0
1 1 0 V; 50 Hz
1 20 V; 60 Hz
W230 230 V; 50 Hz
(Other voltages on request)
[5000] 3
50

26
AC voltage solenoid – 60 Hz
3
00 28
[4000]
21 23
22 Curve Spool symbol
24
[3000] 20
0 19 A; B1 )
25

20 V
[2000]
10
0 21 A; B
[1000]
27 22 F; P
19 20
[0] 23 G; T
0 10 20 3
0
4
0 50 60
24 J; L; U
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.8] 25 A/O; A/OF; Q; W
Flow in l/min [US gpm] → 26 C; D; Y
27 H
AC voltage solenoid
28 C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; E
Solenoid voltage
E1 –2) ; M; R3)
W1 1 0
1 1 0 V; 60 Hz
W230 230 V; 60 Hz
(Other voltages on request)

1 0/1 6 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE RE 231 78/08.08
See note on page 8.
[5000] 3
50

5 11
9 10 DC voltage solenoid
3
00 8
[4000]
Curve Spool symbol
1 6
[3000] 3 1 A; B
20
0
2
46 7 2 V
[2000] 11
3 F; P
10
0
[1000] 5

4 J; L; U
1
2 5 G
[0]
0 10 20 3
0
4
0 50 60
70 80

6 T
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [21] 7 H
Flow in l/min [US gpm] → 8 D; C
9 M
10 C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF;
DC voltage solenoid
E; E1 –; R, Q; W
Solenoid voltage
11 A/O; A/OF
1 1 0; 1 80 V
[5000] 3
50

5 10

DC voltage solenoid
3
00
[4000] 6
11
Curve Spool symbol
6
2 1 A; B
[3000] 20
0 4
12
2 V
[2000] 3

4 3 F; P
10
0
[1000] 9 5

7 8 4 J; L; U
2 1
[0] 5 A/O; A/OF
0 10 20 3
0
4
0 50 60
70 80

6 E
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [21] 7 T
Flow in l/min [US gpm] → 8 G
9 H
10 D; C
11 M
DC voltage solenoid
Solenoid voltage
12 C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF;
E1 –; R, Q; W
42; 80; 220 V
RE 231 78/08.08 WE Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 1 1 /1 6
Unit dimensions: Valve with DC voltage solenoid – individual connection
(dimensions in mm [inch])

[0.59]
12
15
5
.3

5
.4 5
.2
[3.54]
90 [0.79]
20
15[0.59]
14 5
.1 11
9 11 5
.1 1412 12 6
[2.48]
[4.02]
[0.59]
[2.52]
63
10
2
15
64
9,4 5
,3
[ 0.37] [ 0.21]
A B
B
[3.84]
[3.62]
97,5

92
23[0.91]
[1.65 (0.87)]
2 (22)
4
[0.33]
8,4 [0.33]
8,4
4 4

3[0.14]
,5 [0.87] 22 [2.52]
64 3[0.14]
,5
[0.55]
14 [4.88] [0.55]
3

82 [3.23] 124 14
[1.99] 5
0,5 6 [8.11]
20 5
0,5[1.99]
3 13 1.1 16 2 1510 1.2 13

69,2 [2.72]
,6 [0.54]
13
F1
T
[1.77]
F2
B
[0.28]
A
5
4
F3
F4
P
G
0
,0
1/10
0
[0.0004/4.0]
Rzma
x 4

For explanations of items, valve mounting screws and

Required surface quality
subplates, see page 1 5.

of valve mounting face
Unit dimensions: Valve with DC voltage solenoid – central connection
15 [0.59]
12
14
7 11
9 17 11 14

9,4

5
,3

[5.16]
[ 0.37] [ 0.21]
13
71 [2.80]
[3.54]
71 [2.80]
90
23 [0.91]
[1.65(0.87)]
2 (22)
4
4 [0.33]
8,4 [0.33]
8,4

4

33 [0.14]
,5 [0.87] 22 [2.52]
64 3,5[0.14]
[0.55] [4.88] [0.55]

3

14 82 [3.23] 124 14
[1.99] 5
0,5 6 [8.11]
20 5
0,5 [1.99]
13 1.1 16 2 1015 1.2 13

69,2 [2.72]
,6 [0.54]
13
F2
F1
[1.77]
T
[1.83]
6,5
A B
[0.28]
F3
F4 P
G
Terminal assignment for central connection:
0
,0
1/10
0
[0.0004/4.0]
– 1 solenoid:
Solenoid always to terminals 1 and 2,
Rzma
x 4

Protective earth conductor to terminal PE
– 2 solenoids:

Solenoid "a" to terminals 1 and 2,

Solenoid "b" to terminals 3 and 4,
RE 231 78/08.08 WE Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 1 3/1 6
Unit dimensions: Valve with AC voltage solenoid – individual connection
14 5 11 9 11 5 14
12 12
6

[0.59]
15[0.59]
15
9,4 5
,3
[ 0.37] [ 0.21]
A
B
B
[3.86]
[3.62]
98
92

[0.91]
[1.65 (0.87)]
2 (22)
23
4
3
[0.67] 17 8,4

[0.33] 8,4
[0.33] 17 [0.67]
[0.87]
22
[2.52]
64
81 [3.19]
[4.84]
123 3

[1.75] 4
4,5 20
5[4.08] 4
4,5

[1.75]
13 1.1 16 2; 4 10 151.2 13

69,2 [2.72]
13,6 [0.54]
F1
T [1.77]
F2
B
[0.28]
A
5
4
F3
F4
P
G
0
,0
1/10
0
[0.0004/4.0]
Rzma
x 4

Unit dimensions: Valve with AC voltage solenoid – central connection
15 [0.59]
12
8 7 11 9 17 11 14

9,4 5
,3

[ 0.37] [ 0.21]
[5.16]
14
13
[2.80]
[3.54]
71
[2.80]
90

[0.91]
71
[1.65 (0.87)]
2 (22)
23
4
[0.67] 17 [0.33]
8,4 [0.33]
8,4 17 [0.67]
[0.87] 22 [2.52]
64
3 81 [3.19] [4.84]
123 3

[1.75] 4
4
,5 20
5[4.08] ,5[1.75]
4
4
13 1.1 15 16 2; 410 1.2 13

69,2 [2.72]
,6 [0.54]
13
F1
7
[1.77]
[1.83]
F2
A B
6,5
[0.28]
5
4
F3
F4 P
G
Terminal assignment for central connection:
0
,0
1/10
0
[0.0004/4.0]
– 1 solenoid:
Solenoid always to terminals 1 and 2,
Rzma
x 4

– 2 solenoids:

Solenoid "a" to terminals 1 and 2,

Solenoid "b" to terminals 3 and 4,
RE 231 78/08.08 WE Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 1 5/1 6
Unit dimensions
1 .1 Solenoid "a"
Subplates to data sheet RE 45052
(separate order)
1 .2 Solenoid "b"
(Without locating bore) G 341 /01 (G1 /4)

2 Dimension for solenoid with concealed manual over-

G 342/01 (G3/8)

ride "N9" (standard)

G 502/01 (G1 /2)
3
Dimension for solenoid with manual override "N"
(With locating bore)

G 341 /60 (G1 /4)

4 Dimension for solenoid without manual override

G 342/60 (G3/8)

5.1
Mating connector without circuitry for component plug
G 502/60 (G1 /2)
“K4“ (separate order, see page 1 6 and RE 08006)

1)
G 341/12 (SAE-6)

5.2
Mating connector (AMP Junior-Timer) with component

1)
G 342/12 (SAE-8)

plug “C4“ (separate order, see RE 08006)

G 502/12 (SAE-10) 1 )
5.3
Mating connector DT 04-2PA (Deutsch plug-in con- 1) on request
nector) with component plug “K40“ (separate order,
see RE 08006)
5.4
Mating connector, angled, with M1 2x1 plug-in con-
nection with status LED “K33L“ (separate order, see
– Clamping length 42 mm:
RE 08006)
4 hexagon socket head cap screws metric
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L
6 Mating connector with circuitry for component plug
(Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.09 to 0,1 4);
“K4“ (separate order, see page 1 6 and RE 08006)
tightening torque MT = 7 Nm [5.2 ft-lbs] ±1 0%,
7 Cable gland Pg 1 6 [1/2“NPT] "DL"

Material no. R91 3000064
8 Angled mating connector (color: red, separate order)

or
Material no. R900005538)

9 Nameplate
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 1 0.9 (own procurement)
1 0 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, T

(Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.1 2 to 0.1 7);
tightening torque MT = 8.1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ±1 0%
1 1 Plug screw for valves with one solenoid
1 2
Space required to remove mating connector/angled
mating connector
4 hexagon socket head cap screws UNC
1 0-24 UNC x 2” ASTM-A574
1 3 Space required to remove coil
(Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.1 9 to 0.24);
1 4 Locknut, tightening torque MT = 4 Nm [2.95 ft-lbs]

tightening torque MT = 1 1 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ±1 5%,
1 5 Porting pattern to DIN 24340 Form A (with- (Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.1 2 to 0.1 7);
out locating bore), or ISO 4401 -03-02-0-05 and

NFPA T3.5.1 R2 D03 (with locating bore for locating

pin ISO 8752-3x8-St, Material no. R900005694, sepa-

rate order)
– Clamping length 22 mm:
1 6
Alternative clamping length (): 22 mm [0.87inch]
4 hexagon socket head cap screws metric
1 7 Cover
ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L
Attention!
(Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.09 to 0,1 4);
The valve may only be operated with properly mount-

Material no. R91 300031 6
ed cover!
or
ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 1 0.9 (own procurement)
tightening torque MT = 8.1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ±1 0%
4 hexagon socket head cap screws UNC
1 0-24 UNC x 1 1 /4”
(Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.1 9 to 0.24);
tightening torque MT = 1 1 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ±1 5%,
Mating connectors to DIN EN 1 75301 -803
For details
and further
mating connectors,
see RE 08006
Material number
With
With
Valve side
indicator lamp
indicator lamp
With
and
and Zener-diode
Connec- Without
indicator lamp
rectifier
With rectifier
suppressor circuit
tion Color
circuitry
1 2 … 240 V
1 2 … 240 V
1 2 … 240 V
24 V
a Gray R901 01 701 0 – – – –
M1 6 x 1 .5 b Black R901 01 701 1 – – – –
a/b Black – R901 01 7022 R901 01 7029 R901 01 7025 R901 01 7026
a Red/brown R900004823 – – – –
1 /2“ NPT
b Black R90001 1 039 – – – –
(Pg 1 6)
a/b Black – R900057453 R900057455 R900842566 –
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengießer 1

Phone +49 (0) 93 52 /18-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 /18-23 58
tion can be derived from our information. The information given does
not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verifica-
www.boschrexroth.de
tion. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural
process of wear and aging.
TAB 41
Capacity:
3:1 pilot ratio, restrictive counterbalance valve

5 gpm (20 L/min.)
Functional Group:
Model:
Products : Cartridges : Counterbalance : 3-Port Non-vented : Restrictive, 3:1 Pilot Ratio

CBBA-CAN
Product Description
Counterbalance valves with pilot assist are meant to control an overrunning load. The check valve allows free flow from
the directional valve (port 2) to the load (port 1) while a direct-acting, pilot-assisted relief valve controls flow from port
1 to port 2. Pilot assist at port 3 lowers the effective setting of the relief valve at a rate determined by the pilot ratio.
Other names for this valve include motion control valve and over center valve.
Download
Technical Features
Counterbalance valves should be set at least 1.3 times the maximum

Two check valve cracking pressures are available. Use the 25 psi (1,7
load induced pressure.

bar) check unless actuator cavitation is a concern.
Restrictive valves have no relief capacity other than as a thermal relief. This valve has positive seals between all ports.
Turn adjustment clockwise to decrease setting and release load. Backpressure at port 2 adds to the effective relief setting at a ratio of 1
plus the pilot ratio times the backpressure.
Full clockwise setting is less than 200 psi (14 bar). Reseat exceeds 85% of set pressure when the valve is standard set.
Settings lower than the standard set pressure may result in lower
reseat percentages.
All 3-port counterbalance, load control, and pilot-to-open check

Corrosion resistant cartridge valves are intended for use in corrosive
cartridges are physically interchangeable (i.e. same flow path, same

environments and are identified by the model code suffix /AP (see
cavity for a given frame size).

Option Selection below). External parts are made from stainless steel
with titanium or brass components, where applicable. Internal parts are
made from carbon steel leaded alloy, the same as standard valves. For
further details, please see the Materials of Construction page.
Sun counterbalance cartridges can be installed directly into a cavity

Incorporates the Sun floating style construction to minimize the
machined in an actuator housing for added protection and improved

possibility of internal parts binding due to excessive installation torque
stiffness in the circuit.

and/or cavity/cartridge machining variations.
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Cavity T-11A
Capacity 5 gpm 20 L/min.
Pilot Ratio 3: 1
Maximum Recommended Load Pressure at Maximum Setting 3075 psi 215 bar
Maximum Setting 4000 psi 280 bar
Adjustment - Number of Counterclockwise Turns to Increase Setting 3.75
Factory Pressure Settings Established at 2 in³/min. 30 cc/min.
Maximum Valve Leakage at Reseat 5 drops/min. 0,3 cc/min.
Series (from Cavity) Series 1
Reseat >85% of nominal Set Pressure
Valve Hex Size 7/8 in. 22,2 mm
Valve Installation Torque 30 - 35 lbf ft 40 - 50 Nm
Adjustment Screw Internal Hex Size 5/32 in. 4 mm
Adjustment Locknut/Cap Hex Size 9/16 in. 15 mm
Adjustment Nut Torque 80 - 90 lbf in. 9 - 10 Nm
Seal Kits - Cartridge Buna: 990-011-007
Seal Kits - Cartridge Viton: 990-011-006
Model Weight 0.39 lb. 0.18 kg.
CBBA-CAN
Material/Coating
Control Functional Setting Range Seal Material

Modifier
C* Tamper Resistant - Factory Set A 1000 - 4000 psi w/4 psi Check
N Buna-N /AP Stainless Steel,
(70 - 280 bar w/0,3 bar Check),

Passivated
3000 psi (210 bar) Standard
Setting
Control: C
Our corrosion resistant
product line is growing! If
you are interested in a
corrosion resistant option
for this model, please
contact Sun.
If the modifier is /AP, the control must be C, L or R
* Special Setting required, specify at time of order
Related Models
CBBAX
Related Documents (opens in new window):
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - US units.
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - metric units.
Copyright © 2002-2012 Sun Hydraulics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Terms and Conditions - ISO Certification - Statement of Privacy
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
FINAL MECHANICAL CHECK LIST FOR
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
1
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
SERIAL NUMBER: CSP0000750-01 A (Print one for each tank)
Sign off by initialing and dating each check made. When the final mechanical check is
completed, both the FLSmidth serviceman and the installer/erector must sign and date this
CHECK LIST, and return one copy of this CHECK LIST for each traction thickener
mechanism furnished to the FLSmidth Project Management Department to ensure warranty
coverage.
CHECK REFERENCE INSTALLER FLSMIDTH
SIGN OFF SERVICEMAN SIGN OFF
Check the center column for plumb Refer to the Steel
Erection drawings and
instructions furnished
separately
Check the center column guide ring for Refer to the Steel
concentricity Erection drawings and
separately
specified welding Erection drawings and
separately
specified grout Erection drawings and
separately
Check cage to cage-bearing yoke connection Center Bearing
for specified fasteners Assembly-Shop
Assembly drawing,
and the Cage
Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
Installation section of
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
2
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check cage for plumb Center Bearing
Assembly-Shop
Assembly drawing,
and the Cage
Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check cage to cage-bearing yoke connection Center Bearing
fasteners are secure Assembly-Shop
Assembly drawing,
and the Cage
Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check cage-bearing yoke to bearing cover Center Bearing
girder connections for specified fasteners Assembly-Shop
Assembly drawing,
and the Center
Bearing Assembly
Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check cage-bearing yoke to bearing cover Center Bearing
girder connection fasteners are secure Assembly-Shop
Assembly drawing,
and the Center
Bearing Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
3
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check trough scraper to cage connections for Refer to the Steel
specified fasteners Erection drawings and
separately
Check trough scraper to cage connection Refer to the Steel
fasteners are secure Erection drawings and
separately
Check trough scraper clearance with the Installation
discharge trough all around instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check guide blocks for specified clearance Refer to the Steel
with the guide ring Erection drawings and
separately
Check guide block fasteners are secure Refer to the Steel
separately
Check the feedwell for concentricity Refer to the Steel
separately
Check the feedwell for specified elevation Refer to the Steel
separately
Check the feedwell for level all around Refer to the Steel
separately
Check the feedwell to superstructure Refer to the Steel
connections for specified fasteners Erection drawings and
separately
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
4
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check the feedwell to superstructure fasteners Refer to the Steel
are secure Erection drawings and
separately
Check center bearing assembly to center Refer to the Steel
column connection for specified fasteners Erection drawings and
separately
Check the center bearing assembly seals for
paint contamination
Check center bearing assembly has been filled Center bearing
with oil to specified level (marked on sight assembly drawing and
glass) Lubrication
instructions in the
FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check center bearing assembly has been filled Lubrication
with specified oil type/viscosity instructions in the
manual
Check center bearing assembly oil for WARNING page in
penetration of grit due to sandblasting the GENERAL
instruction section of
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check center bearing assembly for maximum Center bearing
out-of-level tolerance of .005 inch [0.1 Dorr- assembly installation
Oliver Eimco 7 mm] in 12 inches [304.8 mm] instructions in the
distance Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check Lubrication Plate and Lubricant Plate Slip Ring Assembly
are properly installed and clearly visible and drawing and
readable Lubrication
instructions in the
manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
5
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check electrical wiring to the slip rings Electrical Wiring in
the Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check conductor bars for contact with the slip Slip Ring Assembly
rings all around drawing and Slip Ring
Installation
Instructions in the
Erection and
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check rake arms for final level Rake Arm Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check the blade tip to rake blade connections Refer to the Steel
for specified fasteners Erection drawings and
separately
check the blade tips for specified clearance Refer to the Steel
with the tank bottom Erection drawings and
separately
Check the blade tip to rake blade fasteners are Refer to the Steel
secure Erection drawings and
separately
Check rake arms for proper erection camber Refer to the Steel
separately
Check rake arm to cage connection for Refer to the Steel
separately
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
6
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check rake arm to cage connection for Refer to the Steel
specified field welding Erection drawings and
separately
Check rake arm to cage connection fasteners Refer to the Steel
have been secured Erection drawings and
separately
Check rake arm splice connections for Refer to the Steel
separately
Check rake arm splice connection fasteners Refer to the Steel
have been secured Erection drawings and
separately
Check rake arm splices and connections have Refer to the Steel
been welded, as specified Erection drawings and
separately
Check the rail sole plates for specified grout Refer to the Steel
separately
Check the rail for specified anchor fasteners Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
Installation section
and General Erection
drawing in the
manual
Check the rail for concentricity Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
7
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check the rail for specified level Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check the rail splices for specified welds Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check the rail anchors are secure Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check the rail top surface for foreign material, Installation
gaps, weld build-up, etc. instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check traction drive reducers have been filled Manufacturer's
with specified quantity of oil or filled with oil instructions in the
to specified level Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual
Check traction drive reducer oil type/viscosity Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual
Check motor bearing grease lubrication Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
8
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check traction drive carriage wheel bearing Lubrication
grease lubrication instructions in the
manual
Check sander chain lubrication Lubrication
instructions in the
manual
Check traction drive reducer oil for penetration WARNING page in
of grit due to sandblasting the GENERAL
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check sander drive and driven sprockets for Installation and
specified alignment Maintenance
instructions in the
manual
Check sander drive chain for proper tension Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual
Check motor wiring Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual, and
FLSmidth Wiring
Diagrams and/or
Control Panel
Schematics, if
furnished, in the
manual. All
interconnecting wiring
must meet local
electrical codes.
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
9
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check drive motor is wired so an automatic Wiring Installation
restarting of the motor cannot occur after a instructions in the
torque control shutdown, following a torque Erection And
load Installation instruction
section of the
manual
Check torque control wiring FLSmidth Wiring
Diagrams and/or
Control Panel
Schematics, if
furnished, in the
manual
Check traction drive carriage motors for Maintenance
specified direction of rotation instructions in the
manual and Traction
Drive Carriage
Assembly drawing
Check traction drive carriage for specified Maintenance
direction of operation instructions and
General Arrangement
WARNING: Tank must be cleared of drawings in the
debris, and center FLSmidth instruction
bearing assembly, cage, manual
drive carriage, rake
arms and other moving
parts free of
obstructions before
rotating the mechanism!
Observe from outside
the tank!
Check traction drive carriage assembly wheel Traction Drive
alignment Carriage Assembly
Traction Wheel
Alignment
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
10
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check the traction drive carriage to access Traction Drive
platform connections for specified fasteners Platform Erection
drawing and Traction
drive carriage
installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check the traction drive carriage to access Traction Drive
platform connection fasteners are secure Platform Erection
drawing and Traction
drive carriage
installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check sander for proper operation Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the
manual
Check WARNING and CAUTION signs are Assembly and
properly installed and clearly visible and Erection drawings in
readable the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check for specified final painting. Inspect Storage Precautions in
painted surfaces for deterioration of paint the GENERAL
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check all protective coverings applied for
sandblasting and/or painting have been
removed from the center bearing assembly and
traction drive carriage assembly motor/reducer
assemblies
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
11
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check superstructure splice connections for Refer to the Steel
separately
Check superstructure splice connection Refer to the Steel
fasteners have been secured Erection drawings and
separately
Check superstructure splice connections have Refer to the Steel
been welded, as specified Erection drawings and
separately
Check slide pads and sliding pads for proper
installation between the superstructure and slip
ring column
Check superstructure to slip ring column Superstructure
connections for specified fasteners Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
Installation section
and General Erection
drawing in the
manual
Check superstructure to slip ring column Superstructure
connections have been properly secured Installation
instructions in the
Erection And
the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check superstructure to support (tank end) Refer to the Steel
connections for specified fasteners Erection drawings and
separately
Check superstructure to support (tank end) Refer to the Steel
connections have been properly secured Erection drawings and
separately
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
12
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
Check E-Duc system nozzles for specified Refer to the Steel
clearance with the mix trough Erection drawings and
separately
Check E-Duc system polymer feed pipes for Refer to the Steel
proper installation Erection drawings and
separately
Check E-Duc launder for specified slope Refer to the Steel
separately
Error!

02-AA4g
Bookmark not
CSP0000750-01 X
defined.Rev. 1
TRACTION THICKENERS
13
7-2013
MCN2013-0210
NOTES AND COMMENTS:
_________________
(Installer/Erector) (Date)
_________________
(FLSmidth Service Representative) (Date)

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual: Flsmidth® 125M TXXT Thickener Traction Drive

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual: Flsmidth® 125M TXXT Thickener Traction Drive

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND

FLSMIDTH® 125M TXXT THICKENER TRACTION

Serial No.: CSP0000750-01A thru C

Organic Growth Project 1

Atacama Desert, 170 km Southeast of Antofagasta, Chile

Minera Escondida Ltda.

Purchase Order No.: ICPO #127352 / 127496 / 127724

SELLER DOCUMENT REVIEW

FLSmidth Salt Lake City, Inc. Order No.: CSP0000750-01

Work may proceed 4 Review not required. Work may

Revise & Resubmit. Work may proceed

3 Revise & Resubmit. Work may NOT proceed

Reviewer Name: Zenteno_Lucero_Sergio Date: 05/20/2014

Discipline: EM - Mechanical Document Number: 25713-220-V1A-MLGT-00116

Facility Code: 1350 1350-NTT-001

Confidential and Proprietary Property of

FLSmidth Salt Lake City Inc.

For Confidential Use Only

Not For Circulation, Distribution Or Reproduction

Without Prior Permission In Writing

All Rights Reserved

GENERAL PAGE NO.

2. Pre-erection assistance ............................................................................. 2

3. Special instructions to equipment erectors............................................... 3

4. Receiving and inspection ......................................................................... 6

5. Storage and precautions ........................................................................... 7

7. Lifting precautions ................................................................................... 16

ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

1. Inspect the tank and install circular rail ................................................... 19

2. Install column, trough scraper and cage placement ................................. 21

3. Install and level the center bearing assembly........................................... 24

4. Install the slip ring assembly .................................................................... 27

5. Install the cage .......................................................................................... 28

6. Install the superstructure .......................................................................... 29

7. Install the feedwell ................................................................................... 30

8. Install mix trough, feed pipe and E-Duc nozzle ...................................... 33

10. Electrical wiring ....................................................................................... 36

11. Traction drive carriage assembly traction wheel alignment .................... 37

13. Check the arms for final level .................................................................. 42

14. Mechanical check ..................................................................................... 43

15. Grout the center column ........................................................................... 44

16. Install the launder ..................................................................................... 45

17. Final mechanical check by FLSmidth service personnel ........................ 46

permission in writing by FLSmidth. All Rights Reserved.

LUBRICATION PAGE NO.

1. Center bearing assembly lubrication ........................................................ 47

2. Lubrication equivalents list ...................................................................... 51

1. Maintenance and operation WARNING................................................. 54

2. Mechanical pre-start check....................................................................... 56

4. Center bearing assembly, disassembly and reassembly .......................... 60

5. Drive carriage disassembly and reassembly ............................................ 64

6. Maintenance and start-up services ........................................................... 75

1. Operating instructions .............................................................................. 76

2. Process performance conditions ............................................................... 88

1. CSP0000750-01 FLSmidth Current Bill of Material

2. CSP0000750-01 FLS Recommended Spare Parts List

CSP0000750-01 (rev 4) Top Level

643050 (rev 5) Foundation Layout

665215 (rev 3) General Erection Assembly

643049 (rev 9) General Arrangement

664671 (rev 3) Submerged Steel Assembly

665205 (rev 3) Superstructure Assembly

654092 (rev 1) Rail System Assembly